JP2021177467A - Combined heating cooker, kitchen furniture, control program for combined heating cooker, and operation management system for home appliance - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a heating cooker which includes an induction heating source and other types of heating sources and enhances user convenience, kitchen furniture, an operation management system for home appliances, and the like.SOLUTION: A combined heating cooker includes a microwave heating source, an oven heating source, an induction heating source, a notification part notifying information on a cooking process, and an integrated control unit. The integrated control unit has a cooperated cooking menu driving the three heating sources in cooperation. The cooperated cooking menu includes a cooking process 1 by the induction heating source, and a cooking process 2 using at least one of the other two heating sources. The integrated control unit automatically advances the cooking process 1, starts the cooking process 2 in response to receiving a user's start command, and automatically advances the cooking process 2. Further, the integrated control unit has a function to detect the degree of progress of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2, and automatically notifies reference information for the cooking process by the notification part in the middle of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2. Further, the integrated control unit notifies also information on ingredients in a refrigerator.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 61

Description

The present disclosure discloses a composite cooking cooker for heating an object to be heated such as a pot placed on a top plate, kitchen furniture such as a kitchen counter equipped with the cooker, a control program for the cooker, and home appliances. It is related to the operation management system of equipment.

There are roughly three types of cooking cookers in view of the environment in which they are used.
One of them is the so-called "built-in type", which is installed in kitchen furniture such as a kitchen counter. The second is a "stationary type" that is used by placing it in a predetermined position on kitchen furniture, such as a gas table (also referred to as a "gas combustion type table"). The third is a small and portable "tabletop type" that is used by being placed at an arbitrary position on a dining table or the like.

There are many types of "built-in type" cookers equipped with multiple types of heating sources, and they are popular as those that can handle various types of cooking. However, since it is installed inside the kitchen furniture, the external dimensions must be designed according to the standard of general kitchen furniture, and the design is more flexible than the "stationary type" or "desktop type". The degree is extremely low, and the difficulty of making it a practical product is high.

As a typical built-in type heating cooker, a grill storage (also called "oven room" or "heating room") that is heated by an induction heating source inside the main body so that the range of cooking can be expanded is unified below. (Refer to Patent Documents 1 and 2). Those equipped with a plurality of heating sources having different heating principles are called "composite type" cookers.

Further, in order to complete one object to be cooked, it has been proposed to move a cooking utensil such as a pot containing the object to be cooked between a plurality of places to cook. By changing the heating location, the heating space (environment) changes, so there is an advantage that it can be used for various types of foods to be cooked (see, for example, Patent Documents 3 and 4).

Further, it has been proposed to link the refrigerator / freezer as the first network home appliance and the cooker as the second network home appliance (see, for example, Patent Document 5). Further, a combination of a refrigerator and a cooker including a refrigerator having a function of notifying temperature information and a cooker having a function of inputting temperature information based on the temperature information of the refrigerator has been proposed (for example). , Patent Document 6).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-031202 (page 1, FIG. 5) Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-207400 (page 5, FIG. 9) Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-129529 (page 1, FIG. 6) Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-96484 (page 1, FIG. 14) Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-228097 (page 4, FIG. 1) Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2000-304433 (page 4, FIG. 1)

As described above, the conventional built-in type cooking cooker has been proposed to be provided with an induction heating source, a radiant electric heater and a microwave heating source as the heating source. However, in any case, when one cooking is performed, it is necessary to link a plurality of heating sources to be used.

As proposed in Patent Documents 3 and 4 above, when a plurality of heat sources located at distant positions are used, an unintended heat source operates or stops even if the user's operation command is incorrect. It is necessary to take measures to prevent it from happening. If this measure is not sufficient, it may cause confusion for users and may lead to cooking failure. That is, it is necessary to overcome difficult technical problems such as cooperation of a plurality of heating sources and timely notification and display of the cooperation status of the heating sources to the user.

Further, as a plurality of heating sources, heating with different heating principles such as an induction heating source, a heat source such as a radiant electric heater (also referred to as an "electric heater that radiates radiant heat"), a microwave heating source, and a gas combustion burner. When using a source, the heating characteristics of each heating source are different. For example, in microwave heating, the object to be cooked such as food can be heated at a high speed from the inside, so a gas burner, a radiant electric heater, or an induction heating type. It can be used for cooking that cannot be achieved with a heating source such as a heater, and is expected to be used.
However, when the input operation unit and the display unit are provided for each of the heating sources having significantly different heating characteristics, the heating of each heating source alone and the operation in a predetermined order as described above are performed. In cooking in the cooperative cooking mode in which the sequence is defined, if the user is not provided with appropriate information in a timely manner, the operability and convenience of the user may be impaired and rapid cooking may be hindered. In addition, there is a concern that it may lead to the cause of cooking failure and damage the expectations of users.

Further, conventionally, since other home appliances such as a freezer and a refrigerator are not effectively linked with a cooking cooker, convenience cannot be improved.

The first object of the present disclosure is to propose a cooking cooker that can effectively use a plurality of heating sources such as an induction heating source, a radiant electric heating source, and a microwave heating source, and further improve the operability of the user. By doing so, it is possible to obtain a highly convenient composite cooking device that can be widely used for various types of cooking.

A second object of the present disclosure is to provide kitchen furniture provided with a composite cooking cooker that solves the above-mentioned problems.

A third object of the present disclosure is to provide a control program for a computer suitable for a combined cooking cooker that solves the above-mentioned problems.

A fourth object of the present disclosure is to provide an operation management system for home appliances that can be effectively linked with other home appliances such as a refrigerator / freezer to enhance convenience.

The composite cooker of the first disclosure relating to the first issue is:
With a heating room
A microwave heating source that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber,
An oven heating source that heats the heating chamber and
An induction heating source that heats the object to be heated placed on the top plate,
A notification unit that notifies information about the cooking process,
It has an integrated control device that controls the microwave heating source, the oven heating source, the induction heating source, and the notification unit.
The integrated control device has a cooperative cooking mode in which the microwave heating source, the oven heating source, and the induction heating source are linked.
The cooperative cooking mode includes a cooking step 1 using the induction heating source and a cooking step 2 using at least one of the microwave heating source and the oven heating source.
The integrated control device automatically advances the cooking process 1, ends the cooking process 1 by a command from the user, and after the end, starts the cooking process 2 in response to the user's start command. The cooking process 2 is automatically advanced,
The integrated control device detects the degree of progress of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2, and in the middle of the cooking process 1, the first reference information regarding the cooking process 1 or the second reference information regarding the cooking process 2 At least one of the reference information is notified by the notification unit.
It is characterized by that.

The second disclosed composite cooker relating to the first issue is:
With a heating room
A microwave heating source that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber,
An oven heating source that heats the heating chamber and
An induction heating source that heats the object to be heated placed on the top plate,
A notification unit that notifies information about the cooking process,
It has an integrated control device that controls the microwave heating source, the oven heating source, the induction heating source, and the notification unit, respectively.
The integrated control device has a cooperative cooking mode in which the microwave heating source, the oven heating source, and the induction heating source are linked.
The cooperative cooking mode includes a cooking step 1 using at least one of the microwave heating source and the oven heating source, and a cooking step 2 using the induction heating source.
The integrated control device automatically advances the cooking process 1, ends the cooking process 1 by a command from the user, and after the end, starts the cooking process 2 in response to the user's start command. The cooking process 2 is automatically advanced,
The integrated control device detects the degree of progress of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2, and in the middle of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2, the first reference information regarding the cooking step 1 or the cooking step. At least one of the second reference information regarding No. 2 is notified by the notification unit.
It is a configuration characterized by that.

The composite cooker of the third disclosure relating to the first issue is:
With a heating room
Induction heating sources that require a preheating process and
A microwave heating source that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber,
It has a notification unit that notifies information about the cooking process.
It has a cooperative cooking mode in which the induction heating source and the microwave heating source are switched and operated by the user's operation.
When the cooperative cooking mode is set, the cooking step 1 for heating the cooked object housed in the heating chamber and the cooked object placed on the top plate after the cooking step 1 is completed are described above. It is possible to reserve the cooking step 2 in which the object to be cooked is induced and heated by the induction heating source.
When a reservation for cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is made,
(1) The induction heating source can be driven from before the cooking step 1 to start the preheating step.
(2) During the preheating step, the cooking step 1 using the microwave heating source can be started in the heating chamber.
(3) After stopping the driving of the microwave heating source and ending the cooking step 1, the cooking step 2 can be started on the object to be heated preheated by the induction heating source.
(4) In the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, the information indicating the progress of the cooking process is notified by the notification unit.
It is a configuration characterized by that.

The fourth disclosed composite cooker for the first purpose is:
With a heating room
A microwave heating source that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber,
An oven heating source that heats the heating chamber and
An induction heating source that heats the object to be heated,
A notification unit that notifies information about the cooking process,
It has an integrated control device that controls the microwave heating source, the oven heating source, and the induction heating source, respectively.
The integrated control device is
(1) IH independent cooking mode in which the induction heating source is operated independently (2) Range independent cooking mode in which the microwave heating source is operated independently (3) Oven independent cooking mode in which the oven heating source is operated independently (3) 4) A cooperative cooking mode in which the microwave heating source and / or one of the oven heating source and the induction heating source are sequentially operated after a transition period in which the length is determined by a command from the user.
Has an operating program of
The cooperative cooking mode includes a first cooking step performed using the heating chamber before the transition period, and a second cooking step performed after the transition period in a place other than the heating chamber. Including
The integrated control device causes the notification unit to notify reference information regarding the second cooking process or information indicating that cooking different from cooking in the cooperative cooking mode can be performed in the heating chamber during the transition period. ,
It is a configuration characterized by that.

The fifth disclosed composite cooker relating to the first issue is:
With a heating room
An induction heating source that heats the object to be heated,
A microwave heating source that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber,
An oven heating source that heats the heating chamber by a principle different from that of the microwave heating source,
Notification unit and
An integrated control device for controlling the induction heating source, the microwave heating source, the oven heating source, and the notification unit is provided.
The integrated control device includes cooking in a cooperative cooking mode in which a group composed of the microwave heating source and the oven heating source and the induction heating source are started to be driven with a time lag, and the microwave heating. It has a function to perform cooking in a combined cooking mode in which the source and the oven heating source are driven at the same time or at a time lag, or are automatically switched and driven.
The integrated control device includes a cooking step 1 that occupies the heating chamber and a cooking step 2 that is performed after the cooking step 1 in the cooperative cooking mode, and the heating is performed before the cooking step 1 is completed. The notification unit notifies that cooking different from the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode can be performed by using either one or both of the microwave heating source and the oven heating source in the room.
It is a configuration characterized by that.

The sixth-disclosure composite cooker relating to the first issue is:
With a heating room
A microwave heating source that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber,
An oven heating source that heats the heating chamber and
An induction heating source that heats the object to be heated,
A transmitter / receiver that sends / receives information to / from an information processing device by wire or wirelessly,
Notification unit and
It has an integrated control device that controls the microwave heating source, the oven heating source, the induction heating source, the transmission / reception unit, and the notification unit, respectively.
The integrated control device has a cooperative cooking mode in which cooking is executed in cooperation with the microwave heating source, the oven heating source, and the induction heating source.
In the cooperative cooking mode, the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2 started in response to a command from the user after the completion of the cooking step 1 are executed.
The integrated control device acquires reference information related to cooking to which the cooperative cooking mode is applied from the information processing device via the transmission / reception unit.
It is a configuration characterized by that.

The 7th disclosed composite cooker relating to the 1st issue is:
With a heating room
A microwave heating source that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber,
An oven heating source that heats the heating chamber and
An induction heating source that heats the object to be heated,
A transmitter / receiver that sends / receives information to / from an information processing device by wire or wirelessly,
Notification unit and
It has an integrated control device that controls the microwave heating source, the oven heating source, the induction heating source, the transmission / reception unit, and the notification unit, respectively.
The integrated control device has a cooperative cooking mode in which the microwave heating source, the oven heating source, and the induction heating source are linked by a cooperative cooking program to execute cooking.
The cooperative cooking program defines a cooking step 1 and a cooking step 2 that is started in response to a user's command after a transition period in which cooking is not performed.
The integrated control device transmits cooking execution data related to cooking executed by applying the cooperative cooking mode to the information processing device via the transmission / reception unit.
It is a configuration characterized by that.

The eighth disclosed composite cooker relating to the first issue is:
Induction heating sources that require a preheating process and
A microwave heating source that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber,
Input operation unit and
Notification unit and
It has an integrated control device that controls the induction heating source, the microwave heating source, and the notification unit.
The operation program of the integrated control device has a cooperative cooking mode in which the induction heating source and the microwave heating source are operated in response to a command from a user in the input operation unit.
The input operation unit has a first operation unit and a second operation unit.
The first operation unit sets the cooperative cooking mode.
The second operation unit determines the start and end of the preheating step by the induction heating source and the cooking step.
When the cooperative cooking mode is set, the cooking step 1 in which the cooked object is heated by the microwave heating source and the cooked object placed on the top plate after the cooking step 1 is completed are placed on the cooked object. The cooking step 2 in which the object to be cooked is heated by the induction heating source can be reserved.
When a reservation for cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is made,
(1) The induction heating source can be driven from before the cooking step 1 to start the preheating step.
(2) During the preheating step, the cooking step 1 can be started and ended in the heating chamber by the first operating unit.
(3) After the cooking step 1 is completed, the cooking step 2 can be started on the object to be heated preheated in the preheating step.
(4) In the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, information indicating the progress of the cooking process is notified from the notification unit.
It is a configuration characterized by that.

The kitchen furniture of the ninth disclosure regarding the second issue is
It has an installation port on the upper surface, and the complex type cooking cooker disclosed in any one of the first disclosure to the eighth disclosure is installed in the installation port.
It is a configuration characterized by that.

The program for controlling the combined cooking cooker of the tenth disclosure regarding the third problem is
It is executed by a control computer that controls a first heating source and a second heating source of the cooking cooker.
Step 1 to activate the display means when the power is turned on,
Step 2 of displaying the standby common information on the display means,
Step 3 of determining one cooking mode selected by the user among the single cooking mode, the combined cooking mode, and the cooperative cooking mode, and
In step 3, when it is determined that the cooperative cooking mode is selected, the first specific screen is displayed, and when it is determined that the combined cooking mode is selected, the second specific screen is displayed and the single unit is displayed. If it is determined that the cooking mode has been selected, step 4 to display the third specific screen and
(1) When the first specific screen is displayed and a cooking start command signal is received, the heating operation of the cooperative cooking mode is started.
(2) When the second specific screen is displayed and a cooking start command signal is received, the heating operation in the combined cooking mode is started.
(3) When the cooking start command signal is received while the third specific screen is displayed, the heating operation of the independent control menu is started.
In the cooperative cooking mode, reference information regarding the cooking process is notified according to the progress of the cooking process.
It is a configuration characterized by that.

The operation management system for home appliances according to the eleventh disclosure regarding the fourth issue is
A first cooker equipped with three heating sources and communication functions with different heating principles,
A refrigerator that has a storage room that can refrigerate or freeze ingredients and has a communication function.
An information processing device capable of communicating with each other between the first cooking device and the refrigerator is provided.
The information processing device sequentially performs the following processes 1 and 2.
An operation management system for home appliances.
(Processing 1) Among the foodstuffs stored in the refrigerator, at least information on the foodstuffs stored frozen is collected from the refrigerator and stored in the storage device.
(Process 2) When a request for providing the food material information is received from the first cooking device, the food material information stored in the storage device is transmitted to the first cooking device.

According to the present disclosure, a highly convenient composite cooking cooker, kitchen furniture, a control program for the composite cooking cooker, and operation of home appliances that can support a wide range of cooking by linking a plurality of heating means. A management system can be provided.

It is a conceptual diagram which showed the communication system between one house which showed Embodiment 1 and the outside. FIG. 1 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing the configuration of the kitchen of one house shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view 2 showing the configuration of the kitchen of one house shown in FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the home electric appliance and the home gateway of one house shown in FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the whole of the kitchen furniture in which the built-in type composite cooker which concerns on Embodiment 1 is installed. It is a perspective view which shows the state of the kitchen furniture before incorporating the cooking apparatus shown in FIG. It is a schematic diagram which shows the intermediate stage of the work of incorporating the cooking cooker shown in FIG. 5 into kitchen furniture. FIG. 5 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing the dimensional relationship between the kitchen furniture and the cooking cooker of FIG. FIG. 5 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing an enlarged part of the front part of the kitchen furniture shown in FIG. It is a perspective view of the kitchen furniture shown in FIG. 8 when viewed from diagonally forward. It is a top view of the cooking apparatus shown in FIG. It is a vertical cross-sectional view when the cooker of FIG. 5 is cut along the line ZZ of FIG. FIG. 5 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the flow of cooling air obtained by cutting the heating cooker of FIG. 5 along the line ZZ of FIG. It is a vertical cross-sectional view when the cooker of FIG. 5 is cut along the WW line of FIG. It is a vertical cross-sectional view when the cooker of FIG. 5 is cut along the YY line of FIG. It is a vertical cross-sectional view when the cooker of FIG. 5 is cut along the line VV of FIG. It is a vertical cross-sectional view when the cooker of FIG. 5 is cut by the X-ray line of FIG. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of a main part on the right side when the cooking cooker of FIG. 5 is installed in kitchen furniture. It is a simplified plan view for demonstrating the input operation part of the cooking apparatus of FIG. FIG. 5 is a plan view of a front portion for explaining the arrangement of an input operation unit and various display units in the cooking cooker of FIG. It is an enlarged plan view which shows the central operation part and the integrated display part of the cooking apparatus of FIG. It is an enlarged plan view of the right operation part and the right side display part of the cooking apparatus of FIG. It is an enlarged plan view of the left operation part and the left side display part of the cooking apparatus of FIG. FIG. 5 is a simplified cross-sectional view showing the flow of cooling air inside the upper unit of the cooking device of FIG. It is a schematic diagram which simplified the main structure shown in FIG. 24. It is a vertical cross-sectional view at the time of cutting along the SS line of FIG. The schematic diagram shown in FIG. 25 is enlarged and is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of cooling air and the cooling principle. It is a simplified perspective view explaining the positional relationship between the cooling air from the outlet of the 1st cooling fan and the inverter circuit board. FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing a main control-related part of the cooking device of FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a main control-related part of the cooking device of FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a main control-related part of the cooking device of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the main cooling air passage of the heating cooker of FIG. It is a circuit diagram which shows the detail of the inverter circuit of the heating cooker of FIG. It is a list which shows the correspondence relationship between the main (range grill) control menu and the display area in the integrated display part of the cooker of FIG. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the storage device of the integrated control device of the cooking device of FIG. 5 and the central operation unit. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the storage device of the integrated control device of the cooking device of FIG. 5 and the central operation unit. It is the flowchart 1 for demonstrating the control operation of the cooking apparatus of FIG. It is the flowchart 2 for demonstrating the control operation of the cooking apparatus of FIG. It is the flowchart 3 for demonstrating the control operation of the cooking apparatus of FIG. It is the flowchart 4 for demonstrating the control operation of the cooking apparatus of FIG. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram 1 for explaining the control operation of the cooking device of FIG. 5 in chronological order. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram 2 for explaining the control operation of the cooking device of FIG. 5 in chronological order. It is a list which shows the correspondence relationship between the cooling fan of the cooking apparatus of FIG. 5 and the type of cooking. It is explanatory drawing which shows the control operation at the time of performing the fried food cooking (automatic) which is a kind of induction cooking in the cooking apparatus of FIG. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the display operation of the integrated display unit immediately after the start of the cooking cooker of FIG. FIG. 1 is an operation explanatory view of the left operation portion of the cooking cooker of FIG. FIG. 1 is an operation explanatory view of the left operation unit and the integrated display unit of the cooking cooker of FIG. It is explanatory drawing 1 which shows the display operation of the integrated display part at the time of compound cooking of the heating cooker of FIG. It is explanatory drawing 2 which shows the display operation of the integrated display part at the time of compound cooking of the heating cooker of FIG. It is explanatory drawing 3 which shows the display operation of the integrated display part at the time of compound cooking of the heating cooker of FIG. It is explanatory drawing 4 which shows the display operation of the integrated display part at the time of compound cooking of the heating cooker of FIG. FIG. 5 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the integrated display unit and the central operation unit during combined cooking of the cooking cooker of FIG. FIG. 5 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the integrated display unit and the central operation unit during cooperative cooking of the cooking cooker of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows each input operation and process at the time of the cooperative cooking mode execution and the single cooking mode implementation. It is explanatory drawing 1 which shows the relationship between the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode, and the single cooking mode. It is explanatory drawing 2 which shows the relationship between the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode, and the single cooking mode. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing in chronological order the relationship between the input operation and the display up to the transition between the combined cooking mode by the combined cooking mode and the linked cooking mode by the linked cooking mode in the cooking cooker of FIG. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between various cooking processes and operations in the cooperative cooking mode in the cooking cooker of FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between various cooking processes and operations in the cooperative cooking mode in the cooking cooker of FIG. FIG. 3 is an explanatory view 3 showing the relationship between various cooking processes and operations in the cooperative cooking mode in the cooking cooker of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the notification operation of the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode in the cooking apparatus of FIG. FIG. 1 is a flowchart 1 showing a control operation of the integrated control device until the transition to the cooperative cooking mode in the cooking cooker of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode of FIG. 60, and the notification operation. FIG. 2 is a flowchart 2 showing a control operation of the integrated control device until the transition to the cooperative cooking mode in the cooking cooker of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the permission condition before shifting to the cooperative cooking mode, and the determination result in the cooking apparatus of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the permission condition before shifting to the cooperative cooking mode, and the determination result in the cooking apparatus of FIG. FIG. 1 is a flowchart 1 showing a control operation of the integrated control device when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the cooking cooker of FIG. FIG. 2 is a flowchart 2 showing a control operation of the integrated control device when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the cooking cooker of FIG. FIG. 3 is a flowchart 3 showing a control operation of the integrated control device when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the cooking cooker of FIG. FIG. 1 is a plan view showing a control operation of an input operation unit and a display unit (integrated display unit / left side display unit) when a cooperative cooking mode is selected in the cooking cooker of FIG. FIG. 5 is a plan view and an explanatory view showing the operation of the central operation unit and the display operation of the integrated display unit when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the cooking cooker of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the kind of the cooperative cooking mode when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the heating cooker of FIG. It is a list which shows the display content of the 1st specific screen in the integrated display part when the cooperative cooking mode is selected. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the display unit and the input operation unit when the cooperative cooking mode is selected. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display contents of the display unit and the input operation unit when the cooperative cooking mode is selected. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display contents of the display unit and the input operation unit when the cooperative cooking mode is selected. It is explanatory drawing 1 which shows the display content of the integrated display part at the time of cooking "hamburger steak" in a cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the display unit and the input operation unit when the “hamburger” is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display contents of the display unit and the input operation unit when the “hamburger” is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when the “hamburger” is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when the “hamburger” is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when the “hamburger” is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when the “hamburger” is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram 5 showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when the “hamburger” is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 6 showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when the “hamburger” is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when the “hamburger” is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when the “hamburger” is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram 9 showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when the “hamburger” is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when the “hamburger” is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram 11 showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when the “hamburger” is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when the “hamburger” is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram 13 showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when the “hamburger” is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking “karaage” in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when "karaage" is selected in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when "karaage" is selected in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when "karaage" is selected in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram 5 showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when "karaage" is selected in the cooperative cooking mode. It is a flowchart which shows the control operation of the integrated control device when the cooperative cooking mode is selected. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing in chronological order the exchange of information between the refrigerator and the cooker during cooking in the cooperative cooking mode. In the case shown in FIG. 99, FIG. 2 is a system explanatory diagram 2 showing the exchange of information between the refrigerator, the home gateway, and the cooking device. In the example shown in FIG. 99, it is explanatory drawing which shows the display content of the integrated display part, and the input operation part at the time of cooking "karaage" in the cooperative cooking mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display operation of the integrated display part in the example shown in FIG. In the case shown in FIG. 99, it is explanatory drawing 1 which shows the display operation of the integrated display part immediately after the start-up of a cooking apparatus. In the case shown in FIG. 99, it is explanatory drawing 2 which shows the display operation of the integrated display part immediately after the start-up of a cooking apparatus. In the case shown in FIG. 99, it is explanatory drawing 3 which shows the display operation of the integrated display part immediately after the start-up of a cooking apparatus. 9 is a flowchart showing the operation of the home gateway in the example shown in FIG. 99. It is a flowchart which showed the operation of the integrated control device which shows the example of the use of the inventory information of a refrigerator. FIG. 1 is an enlarged plan view 1 showing the periphery of the central operation unit and the integrated display unit of the cooking cooker in the example of FIG. 107. FIG. 2 is an enlarged plan view 2 showing the periphery of the central operation unit and the integrated display unit of the cooking cooker in the example of FIG. 107. FIG. 3 is an enlarged plan view 3 showing the periphery of the central operation unit and the integrated display unit of the cooking cooker in the example of FIG. 107. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the door is closed in the (built-in type composite type) cooking apparatus which concerns on Embodiment 2. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the door is opened in the cooking cooker of FIG. 111. It is a perspective view of the upper unit in a state where the top plate is removed in the cooking apparatus of FIG. 111. It is a perspective view of the upper unit with the top plate and the IH coil removed in the cooking apparatus of FIG. 111. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of an upper unit in a state in which the top plate, the IH coil, and the cover are removed in the cooking cooker of FIG. 111. It is a reference perspective view which showed the flow of the cooling air in the cooking apparatus of FIG. 111. It is a bottom surface (bottom surface) view of the upper unit of the cooking utensil of FIG. 111. It is a block diagram explaining the whole control function of the cooking apparatus of FIG. 111. It is an enlarged plan view which showed the input operation part and the integrated display part of the cooking apparatus of FIG. 111. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode, and the independent control menu in the cooking apparatus of FIG. 111. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the display content of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit in the case of the cooperative cooking mode in the cooking cooker of FIG. 111. It is a list which shows the correspondence relationship between the cooling fan of a cooking device and the type of cooking, for disclosing the third embodiment. FIG. 1 is a time chart 1 showing the timing of starting and ending the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the cooking device of FIG. 122. FIG. 2 is a time chart 2 showing the timing of starting and ending the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the cooking device of FIG. 122. FIG. 3 is a time chart 3 showing the timing of starting and ending the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the cooking device of FIG. 122. FIG. 4 is a time chart 4 showing the timing of starting and ending the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the cooking device of FIG. 122. FIG. 5 is a time chart 5 showing the timing of starting and ending the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the cooking device of FIG. 122. It is a front plan view of the upper surface of the main body in the (built-in type) composite type cooking apparatus which concerns on Embodiment 4 of this disclosure. It is explanatory drawing which shows the information exchange between the cooking apparatus shown in FIG. 128 and an external information management device, etc. in chronological order. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the input operation of the cooperative operation unit in the cooking cooker shown in FIG. 128 and the display information of the integrated display unit and the left side display unit. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the input operation of the cooperative operation unit and the display information of the integrated display unit and the left side display unit in the cooking cooker shown in FIG. 128. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the whole control operation before the start of cooking of the cooking apparatus which concerns on embodiment 5. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the whole control operation after the start of cooking in the cooking apparatus of FIG. 132. It is a block diagram which shows the main internal function of the mobile information terminal which concerns on Embodiment 5. FIG. 1 is an explanatory view of display operation of the portable information terminal of FIG. 134. FIG. 2 is an explanatory view of display operation of the portable information terminal of FIG. 134. FIG. 3 is an explanatory view of display operation of the portable information terminal of FIG. 134. FIG. 4 is an explanatory view of display operation of the portable information terminal of FIG. 134. FIG. 5 is an explanatory view of display operation of the portable information terminal of FIG. 134. FIG. 6 is an explanatory view of display operation of the portable information terminal of FIG. 134. FIG. 7 is an explanatory view of display operation of the portable information terminal of FIG. 134. FIG. 8 is an explanatory view of display operation of the portable information terminal of FIG. 134. FIG. 9 is an explanatory view of display operation of the portable information terminal of FIG. 134. FIG. 10 is an explanatory view of display operation of the portable information terminal of FIG. 134. It shows the modification of Embodiment 5, and shows the operation management system of the cooking apparatus 1 and the home electric appliance 400. FIG. 1 is an explanatory view of display operation of the portable information terminal of FIG. 145. FIG. 2 is an explanatory view of display operation of the portable information terminal of FIG. 145.

(Definition)
The "home appliance" 400 refers to an electric device designed mainly for home use. Home appliances 400 include an induction cooker 1, a refrigerator 401, a television receiver 402, an air conditioner 403, an air purifier 404, a ventilation device 405, an electric rice cooker (electric jar rice cooker) 406, and a microwave oven, which will be described later. 408, lighting appliances 409, and air purifier 410 are included. In the following description, the term "refrigerator" includes both a freezer / refrigerator having a built-in freezer (freezer) and a freezer having only a freezing function, unless otherwise specified.

The "device identification information" of the home electric appliance 400 is unique information for identifying the home electric appliance 400. Specifically, it is important information required for information communication, such as a MAC address, a manufacturer name of a home electric appliance 400, a model name (model name), a model number, and a serial number.

The "home gateway" 411 is an information processing device for relaying information between two or more home appliances 400 in one home and operating them in a coordinated manner. Further, in addition to this, an operation of giving a command signal to one home electric appliance 400 or acquiring information (also referred to as "data") from one home electric appliance 400 is performed.

The home gateway 411 may have a power control function such as a peak cut function in order to manage the total power consumption of one household for all or a part of the home electric appliance 400. In this case, it may be called a "power control device", an "integrated management device", or the like.

The home gateway 411 has a function of acquiring information on the current status such as operation, stop, and standby state of the home electric appliance 400 from the home electric appliance 400 by a wired or wireless signal.
When using wireless communication, the home gateway 411 is connected to a target home electric appliance 400 by using the device identification information.

Even if the home gateway 411 may function as an "integrated management device" or a "power command device" for one home appliance (for example, an induction heating cooker 1) 400, another home appliance (for example, a power command device). For example, for a lighting appliance 409), if the power consumption is not limited, it does not correspond to an "integrated management device" or a "power command device". For example, even if the home gateway 411 acquires the operation information of the lighting fixture 409, the total power consumption combined with the power consumption of the other home appliance 400 does not exceed the specified upper limit of the total power consumption. This is a case where there is no function of regulating the power consumption of the luminaire 409 itself. Therefore, the home gateway 411 does not correspond to an integrated management device or a power command device when viewed from the lighting fixture 409.

Embodiment 1.
1 to 107 disclose the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, the built-in type composite (induction) cooking device 1 is disclosed. In the following description, unless there is a particular contradiction, it is simply referred to as a "cooking cooker".
In each figure, the reference numeral RT indicates the right direction of the cooking device 1, and LE indicates the left direction. FT indicates the front and BK indicates the rear.

In the first embodiment, the "induction heating cooker" means a device having a heating unit based on the principle of induction heating. When there are a plurality of heating units, there may be a heating source using a method different from the induction heating method, for example, another method such as a radiant electric heat source.

In the first embodiment, the "composite heating cooker" includes an "induction heating source" which is a different heating principle in addition to the microwave heating source, and one heating is performed by these two types of heating sources. A product that can be cooked in a room. Further, a heating source of a different type from the induction heating source may be added. For example, one heating chamber is heated by a radiant electric heat source such as a sheathed heater or a mica heater, and the inside of the heating chamber is heated by microwaves, which is a kind of "composite type cooking cooker". ..

In the first embodiment, the "heating means (referred to as" oven heating source "in the following description)" of the heating chamber 113 is a heating source that heats the wall surface of the heating chamber 113 from the outside, and the inside of the heating chamber 113. Any of the heating sources installed in the space may be used.
Further, in any form in which a heat generating member that becomes hot by an induction heating method is arranged and the wall surface of the heating chamber 113 is heated from the outside or the air inside the heating chamber 113 is heated by the heat generating member. good.

For example, in Japanese patent documents, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-74305 states that a cooking dish arranged in a heating chamber (grill storage) on which a food to be cooked is placed is heated from below. A cooking device including a heating body (induction heating coil) and a third heating body (induction heating coil) for heating an object to be cooked from the side has been proposed.

Further, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-85996, an electric insulator is provided below the heating chamber, and an induction heating coil (hereinafter referred to as "IH coil") is provided in the space below the electric insulator, and the IH heat is described. A configuration has been proposed in which a cooking plate placed on a coil is induced and heated. The cooking plate is made of a material capable of induction heating, and for example, iron, stainless steel, a carbon material having a carbon content of 90% or more, a ceramic material containing Si (silicon) or FeSi (ferrosilicon) as a conductive material, or the like is used. Has been done.

Further, as a typical example in which a heat generating member that becomes high in temperature by an induction heating method is arranged, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-071695 supplies a high-frequency current to the IH coil to generate a high-frequency magnetic flux in the IH coil. High-frequency magnetic flux can be linked with a heater arranged in the heater to allow an induced current to flow through the heater, and the Joule heat generated by the electric resistance of the heater itself can be used to heat and cook the food in the heater. It is disclosed.

Further, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-247048, a heater having a closed circuit is electrically arranged inside the heating chamber, and a high frequency magnetic flux generated from an IH coil arranged outside the heating chamber is chained to the heater. It has been proposed to mix and heat the heater to a high temperature to dissipate heat in the heating chamber. The heater referred to here electrically forms a closed circuit, and a round bar or round pipe made of stainless steel or high nickel alloy is bent into a predetermined shape, and both ends are joined to each other by welding or brazing. It was formed in an endless shape.

As a typical example of the "IH coil" referred to in the first embodiment, about 30 thin copper wires or aluminum wires of about 0.1 mm to 0.3 mm are bundled, and a plurality of these bundles are twisted into a spiral shape. (For example, Japanese Patent Document, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-79580). Alternatively, there is also a structure in which about 1000 to 1500 pieces of about 0.05 mm are wound.

Further, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-32551, which is another patent document, proposes an induction heating cooker in which an annular conductor formed in a ring shape from a flat conductive material is used as an IH coil.
Any of these forms corresponds to the "IH coil" which is the main part of the induction heating source.

In the first embodiment, "cooperative cooking" refers to two types of heating in which the heating location for one object to be cooked (including food, meat, vegetables, etc.) is different and the heating operation conditions can be set independently. Cooking that uses a source.

The above-mentioned "cooperative cooking" corresponds to the case where a plurality of heating sources are used with a time lag. For example, in the process of completing one cooking, after microwave heating is completed and preheating is performed, the object to be cooked is moved to another place, and the place after the movement is heated by the IH coil 17L described later to complete the cooking. The case is a kind of "cooperative cooking" here.

Cooperative cooking is proposed in the form of a built-in type cooking cooker in Japanese Patent No. 5833699 and Japanese Patent No. 5559414.

(Overall configuration and operation management system for home appliances)
First, the operation management system for home appliances will be described.
In FIG. 1, HA shows one house.
Although not actually shown, the inside of the house HA is divided into a plurality of living spaces by walls and doors, and the kitchen KT (see FIG. 2), which is one of the living spaces, has a refrigerator 401 and an induction heater. Home appliances 400 such as a cooking cooker 1, a microwave oven 408, and an electric rice cooker 406, and kitchen furniture 2 are arranged. Although not shown in FIG. 1, the living space also includes a "living room", a "bathroom", and a room with a toilet. There may be other rooms in the living space.

All living spaces are supplied with, for example, 200 V of electric power from the commercial power supply EP of the electric power company outside the house. The electric power is drawn into the house HA via the watt hour meter 414.

Reference numeral 415 is a power supply line (main trunk line) connected to a commercial power supply EP having a voltage of 200 V via a breaker BK. The power line 415 includes a television receiver (hereinafter referred to as "TV receiver") 402, an air conditioner 403, a lighting fixture 409, an induction heating cooker 1, a microwave oven 408, and an electric rice cooker 406 that can receive various broadcasts. , Home gateway 411 and environment detection unit 413 are connected to each other.

The home gateway 410, the environment detection unit 413, the TV receiver 402, the air conditioner 403, the cooker 1, the refrigerator 401, and the lighting fixture 409 are always connected to the power supply line 415 via a predetermined power cord. The number of lighting fixtures 409 is not limited to one, but the other lighting fixtures are not shown.

Subsequently, FIG. 1 will be described.
416 is a wide area communication network (sometimes referred to as a "communication network" or "Internet").
The wide area communication network 416 is connected to the home gateway 411 via a router (not shown).

The 417 is an external server that transmits useful information to the home gateway 411 and the information communication terminal device 418. For example, a server installed by an external organization such as an earthquake information providing organization or an electric power company in a specific area may be used, or a server prepared by a manufacturer of the cooking cooker 1 may be used. This external server may be a distributed processing type server called a so-called "cloud server". It is known that there are three types of "cloud computing" that use a cloud server: "IAaS", "PaaS", and "SAaS".

The home gateway 411 can receive various content distribution services from the external server 417. This content also includes recipe information (text, images) for various cooking.

Although not shown, the environment sensor of the environment detection unit 413 described above may be additionally provided with a temperature sensor or a humidity sensor that detects the temperature and humidity outside the house.

Further, the external server 417 functions as an information providing means for the home electric appliance 400. That is, the external server 417 may be installed by an organization such as a manufacturer (manufacturer), a distributor, a repair company, or an information service provider of the home electric appliance 400 alone or jointly by two or more organizations. , Various services related to the home electric appliance 400 are provided to the user via the wide area communication network 416.

Further, the external server 417 may be generally called a "Web server" (hereinafter referred to as "Web server"). The web server conforms to HTTP (a protocol used for exchanging data such as HTTP documents and images between a web server and a web browser), such as various information and communication terminal devices 418, home gateway 410, and the like. It refers to a service program that provides display information of HTTP and objects (images, etc.) to the web browser of the information processing device (client) side software of the "information receiving side", and the server computer on which the service operates.

The external server 417 stores and stores control application software that enables remote control of the home gateway 411 from the house HA or a remote location thereof. The remote control described above is realized by accessing the external server 417 and downloading (reading) the control application software from the information communication terminal device 418, which will be described in detail later, for example, a device called a smartphone. Can be done.

The information communication terminal device 418 can be easily carried by a user to make a call or communicate data (including e-mail information) indoors, outdoors, or on the go. It is a device that can download information from an outdoor information providing site, send / receive mail, and send a remote control signal via the wide area communication network 416, but it may be a device that cannot make a call, and such a portable device. Communication devices are collectively called information communication terminal devices 418. A small portable personal computer is also a type of information communication terminal device 418.

The information and communication terminal device 418 according to the first embodiment has a function of transmitting and receiving signals by short-range communication in a state of being close to (or may be in contact with) several centimeters from the input / output unit of each home electric appliance 400. I have. The short-range communication is an international standard technology for wireless communication known as Near Field Communication (abbreviation: NFC).

In this NFC communication, a so-called wireless tag (NFC tag) is embedded in the home appliance 400 side including the induction heating cooker 1 and the refrigerator 401.
On the other hand, control data (also referred to as a "control command") can be sent from the information communication terminal device 418 side to the NFC storage unit of the home appliance 400, and the home appliance 400 can be controlled according to the control command.

In the first embodiment, direct remote control from the information communication terminal device 418 to the home appliance 400 side is not possible. Since some home appliances 400 generate high heat such as a cooking device 1, remote control from outside the house 413 via the Internet, which is used by many people, is not adopted. Instead, as an integrated information processing device, all home appliances 400 can be operated via the home gateway 411.

As is clear from the above description, the home gateway 411 of the first embodiment is information processing for relaying information between two or more home appliances 400 in one home and causing them to operate in cooperation with each other. Refers to a device. Further, in addition to this, an operation of giving a command signal to one home electric appliance 400 or acquiring information (also referred to as data) from one home electric appliance 400 is performed.

Although not shown in FIG. 1, a range hood 422 and a ceiling-embedded air purifier 404, which will be described later, are installed in the kitchen KT in the house HA.

Reference numeral 413A is a sensor unit of the environment detection unit 413 of the home gateway 411. Although not shown in FIG. 1, the sensor unit 413A includes an environment sensor 453 (see FIG. 4) and a motion sensor 452 (see FIG. 4) that detects the presence of a person (infrared rays or ultrasonic waves). And have. The environment detection unit 413 will be described in detail later.

The "environmental information" refers to three types of information: temperature information of the atmosphere of the space (kitchen KT) in which the cooking cooker 1 and the refrigerator 401 are used, dust scattering amount information, and light amount information. The dust scattering amount information is the result of measuring the amount of dust (including pollen) existing in the air.

"Use of environmental information" includes the following examples.
(1) When the temperature is high, the heat retention function of the electric rice cooker 406 is continuously operated at the end of the rice cooking process. In addition, the refrigeration target temperature and the freezing target temperature of the refrigerator 401 are raised above the standard values.
(2) When the humidity is high, the air conditioner 403 is operated in the "dehumidification mode" or the "cooling mode". Alternatively, the operation of the ventilation device 405 is started. Alternatively, when the air conditioner 403 is in operation, its operating conditions (target room temperature, etc.) are changed.
(3) When fine dust floating in the air is scattered, the air purifier 404 is operated. Alternatively, the operation of the ventilation device 405 is started.
(4) When the amount of pollen scattered is large, the operation of the air purifier 404 is started.
(5) When the amount of light (the amount of visible light) is small, the luminaire 409 is turned on.

“Resident” means a person who resides in one house HA shown in FIG. Residents include related parents and children, siblings, sisters, etc. When the home electric appliance 400 is used, the resident is referred to as a "user".

“Home” means one house HA managed by a specific manager, and may include an apartment house having a plurality of rooms and a plurality of families occupying. That is, even in such an apartment house, the upper limit of commercial power is centrally managed by one power cutoff device (one breaker BK, a plurality of power breakers, etc.) as in the case of one house HA. If so, it is considered to be the home here.

"Power limit information on the home appliance side" refers to information on some signal related to power consumption received from the home gateway 411 by the home appliance 400. This "power limit information on the home appliance side" refers to information related to a transmission command such as a power reduction request signal AS1 and a power reduction command signal AS2, which will be described later. The information includes information indicating the reception time (year / month and time in seconds) of the signal and the meaning of the signal. For example, it is information such as "Reception time: April 1, 2020, 17:00, the instantaneous maximum power consumption is reduced by 2%" for the power reduction command signal AS2 at a certain point in time for the cooking cooker 1.

For example, in the cooking device 1, the power limit information on the home appliance side is stored in the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC described later in time series, and disappears even if the main power switch 98 is turned ON or OFF. No. The main power switch 98 is turned on and off, which is considered as one cooking, and is stored in memory for at least several times. The excess is automatically deleted in sequence.

Next, FIG. 2 will be described.
FIG. 2 shows a configuration example of the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment and the hardware to which the operation management system of the home electric appliance is applied. As one living space, the kitchen KT will be described below as an example.

The kitchen KT to which the first embodiment is applied includes an air purifier 404 installed on a ceiling surface (horizontal wall surface) 420, a plurality of freezing chambers 401A having different freezing temperatures, and a refrigerating chamber 401B. Refrigerator 401, microwave oven 408, built-in (induction) cooker 1 placed in kitchen furniture 2, range hood (a type of ventilation device 405) 422 placed directly above the cooker 1, home -Gateways 411 are installed respectively. The electric rice cooker 406, the air conditioner 403, and the lighting fixture 409 described with reference to FIG. 1 are not shown.

The plurality of freezing chambers 401A in the refrigerator 401 have, for example, -18 ° C ± 2 ° C, -10 ° C, -2 ° C, etc., which are suitable freezing temperatures for frozen foods (including processed foods) and fresh foods (meat, fish, etc.). The freezing room (temperature range) can be selected.

In addition, the freezing temperature and the freezing temperature range also affect the aging of fresh foodstuffs (for example, beef) when they are stored for a long period of time. It can be changed.

The range hood 422 has an exhaust port 423 penetrating the ceiling surface 420, and one end of a duct 424 communicating with the outside is connected to the exhaust port 423.
Reference numeral 425 is a hood in which the entire lower surface is opened as a suction port 425A, and an electric fan 426 for exhaust is installed inside the hood. The range hood 422 is fixed to the ceiling surface 420, but a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The operating status of the range hood 422 is transmitted to the central control unit 447 (described in detail later) of the home gateway 411 at any time. Therefore, inside the range hood 422, there is a transmission unit (not shown) that transmits various operation information such as the start and stop of exhaust operation and the intensity of operation (large or small exhaust capacity) between the home gateway 411. ) And a receiving unit (not shown). For example, the transmitting unit and the receiving unit are integrated by hardware and provided as a communication unit 427. The communication unit 427 exchanges information with the home gateway 411 by wireless communication or infrared communication.

When the electric fan 426 is rotationally driven, air is sucked from the suction port 425A of the range hood 422, odors and smoke during cooking are also sucked, and the air is exhausted to the outside of the house HA through the duct 424. The range hood 422 is a method of receiving an operation signal such as an infrared signal from the side of the cooking cooker 1 and starting the exhaust operation. This will be described later.

In FIG. 2, the arrow FF1 indicates the airflow rising from the cooker 1. FF2 indicates the exhaust flow from the duct 424. FF3 indicates an air flow moving laterally near the ceiling surface 420. FF4 shows the air flow blown out from the air purifier 404.

A heat sensing sensor (heat electromotive force element) may be arranged in the range hood 422 toward the cooking cooker 1. According to this configuration, the range hood 422 itself senses the start of operation of the cooking cooker 1 and controls the operation of the electric fan 426.

The ceiling-embedded air purifier 404 is installed so as to be embedded in the ceiling surface 420. Inside the box-shaped main body 428 of the air purifier 404, a blower fan 429 and a filter 430 are provided.

Reference numeral 431 is an air guide plate, which covers the entire lower part of the air purifier 404. Reference numeral 432 is a suction port formed at one end (the side closer to the range hood 422) by the air guide plate 431. Reference numeral 433 is an air outlet formed by the air guide plate 431 at an end opposite to the suction port 432.

The blower fan 429 sucks dirty air in the kitchen from the suction port 432, passes it through the filter 430, and discharges the purified air from the outlet 433 toward the lower part of the kitchen KT. In this way, dust and odor in the air are removed, and the air in the room is purified.

Reference numeral 434 is an odor sensor of the air purifier 404, which is arranged so as to face the inlet portion of the suction port 432. This detects the odor from the air taken into the air purifier 404 during operation and detects the degree of air pollution. If the position of the odor sensor 434 is in the air passage on the suction port 432 side and is in front of the filter 430, there is no big difference in the effect regardless of where it is placed.

The detection result of the odor sensor 434 is that the odor intensity is determined by the odor sensing unit (not shown) arranged inside the main body 428 of the air purifier 404, and the result is the home gateway 411. It is transmitted to the environment detection unit 413 at any time. Therefore, inside the air purifier 404, there is a transmission unit (not shown) that transmits various information such as the start and stop of the air cleaning operation and the determination result of the odor intensity with the home gateway 411. , A receiver (not shown). For example, the transmitting unit and the receiving unit are integrated by hardware and provided as a communication unit 435. The communication unit 435 exchanges information with the home gateway 411 by wireless communication or infrared communication.

The air purifier 421 can detect the odor when the air purifier 404 is in operation and the odor generated somewhere in the kitchen KT reaches the air purifier 404 from the place where the odor is generated. Is.

This air purifier 404 is generally configured to include one or a plurality (multiple layers) of filters 430 having fine air passages in order to capture dust, pollen, etc. in the air. Therefore, when the oil smoke generated by cooking with cooking oil is filtered by the cooking cooker 1, oil particles adhere to the surface of the filter 430, and the oil particles combine to form an oil film.
Due to this oil film, the filtration performance of the filter 430 deteriorates. That is, the amount of air passing through the filter 430 is reduced, which leads to a situation in which the air purification capacity of the air purifier 404 is reduced. Therefore, an idea of avoiding the operation of the air purifier 404 as much as possible when the exhaust gas generated by cooking contains oil smoke generated by oil cooking has already been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-). No. 95126).

In FIG. 2, the refrigerator 401 is drawn so as to be installed near the right side of the kitchen furniture 2, but in an actual situation, it may be installed in a place different from that in FIG. Further, the refrigerator 401 may be used not only one but also a plurality of refrigerators 401.

Reference numeral 412 is a main body case constituting the outer shell of the home gateway 411. The main body case 412 is fixed to the vertical wall surface 436 of the kitchen at a height so that the resident can confirm the input operation and the display.

Reference numeral 445 is an alarm device fixed to a vertical wall surface 436 near the main body case 412, which will be described in detail later. 2D is a water supply port 2D installed in the kitchen furniture 2.

Next, FIG. 3 will be described. FIG. 3 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the cooking cooker 1 and the range hood 422.
In FIG. 3, 440 is a temperature monitoring device for the cooking device 1. In the first embodiment, this temperature monitoring device is one component of the range hood 422 on the hardware. However, it may be configured as one component of the home gateway 411 on the hardware.

The temperature monitoring device 440 includes a temperature detecting unit 441 and a communication unit 442. The temperature detection unit 441 includes an infrared sensor (not shown), a thermal image camera (not shown), and a temperature determination circuit 443.

As shown in FIG. 2, the temperature monitoring device 440 is always energized regardless of the exhaust operation of the range hood 422 even if it is one component of the range hood 422 on the hardware. In other words, the temperature monitoring device 440 constantly executes the temperature monitoring operation even when the exhaust operation is not performed.

For example, the temperature detection unit 441 divides the entire region of the top plate 15 described later into at least 64 regions (8 vertical × 8 horizontal) (hereinafter, referred to as “detection region”), and determines the temperature of each region. To detect.

The detection region includes an induction heating unit 17H of the cooking cooker 1 described later.
The temperature monitoring device 440 repeatedly measures the temperature of the detection region monitored by the temperature detection unit 441 not only during the operation of the range hood 421 but also during the period when the operation is stopped at predetermined time intervals.

The temperature monitoring device 440 transmits the measured temperature monitoring information from the communication unit 442 to the home gateway 411. In addition to transmitting to the home gateway 411, a configuration may be adopted in which transmission is directly performed to the cooking device 1. Further, the temperature measurement interval for obtaining the temperature monitoring information is not a fixed time (for example, every 5 seconds), but the time interval is shortened in a region where the temperature is high.

The temperature monitoring device 440 detects that the light receiving unit 444 of the range hood 421 receives an infrared signal from the infrared transmitting unit 48 of the cooking cooker 1, and when the range hood 421 starts operation. , Start acquiring temperature information.

The temperature monitoring device 440 continues the temperature acquisition operation even after the range hood 421 receives an infrared signal (from the infrared transmission unit 48) indicating the end of operation of the cooking cooker 1. Then, the acquisition of temperature information is continued at predetermined time intervals until the estimated temperature of the entire region of the top plate 15 becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined temperature (for example, 40 ° C.) determined in advance. When the temperature becomes lower than the predetermined temperature, the interval between temperature measurement operations becomes slower. When the temperature becomes low, the monitoring operation as described above may be temporarily terminated, but at least at the time when the operation of the cooking cooker 1 is started, the temperature monitoring operation is restarted.

The cooking cooker 1 is installed in the kitchen furniture 2, which will be described in detail later. Reference numeral 113 denotes a heating chamber formed inside the cooking device 1, and 114 is a door that openably and closably covers the front opening 113A of the heating chamber 113.

In the cooking cooker 1, an object N to be heated is placed on a top plate 15 covering the upper surface thereof, and induction heating is performed by an IH coil 17. Reference numeral 16S is a bottom wall surface that divides the inside of the cooking cooker 1 into two upper and lower spaces.

The CK is an installation space above the bottom wall surface 16S, and houses the IH coil 17.

Next, FIG. 4 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the relationship between the home gateway 411, the home electric appliance 400, and the temperature monitoring device 440. Of the home appliances 400, the cooker 1 and the microwave oven 408 receive electric energy control from the home gateway 411.
For this reason, the home gateway 411 also serves as a power command device for the cooker 1 and the microwave oven 408, but since this point has been described earlier, it will not be described in detail here. Although not shown in FIG. 4, the air conditioner 403 is also a device that receives electric energy control.

The electric energy control unit 448 constantly acquires information on the amount of electric power used from the target home appliances (for example, the cooker 1 and the microwave oven 408) so as not to exceed the preset total electric energy amount. It has a function of limiting the power consumption of the home electric appliance 400, and is already known as HEMS (household electric power management system). When the power consumption control unit 448 acquires information indicating a power reduction request or a power reduction instruction from the outside via the communication unit 446, the power consumption control unit 448 becomes a target home electric appliance (for example, with the cooking cooker 1) according to a predetermined priority. , Microwave oven 408, air conditioner 403) to reduce the power consumption.

In FIG. 4, the home gateway 411 includes an environment detection unit 413 having a built-in human detection unit 413H that receives the detection output of the human detection sensor 452. The integrated environment detection unit 413 also receives detection results from a pollen sensor (not shown), a sensor that detects the temperature and humidity of the kitchen, and the like in a predetermined format. Reference numeral 453 is an environmental sensor that measures the temperature, humidity, etc. of the kitchen KT.

Since the human detection sensor 452 detects the presence of a person in the kitchen KT, particularly in the front area of the cooking cooker 1 and the front area of the door (not shown) of the refrigerator 401, one or the like. I'm using more than one.

For example, when the distance between the front of the cooker 1 and the door of the refrigerator 401 is short, the person detection sensor is placed on the ceiling surface 420 of the kitchen KT toward the space between the front of the cooker 1 and the refrigerator 401. Install 452.

Further, when the distance between the front of the cooker 1 and the door of the refrigerator 401 is a little, one person detection sensor 452 faces the space near the front of the cooker 1 toward the ceiling surface of the kitchen KT. Install at 420 etc. Then, another human detection sensor 453 may be installed on the ceiling surface 420 or the like of the kitchen KT toward the space in front of the door of the refrigerator 401.

One human detection sensor 452 may be attached to the lower end of the hood 425 of the range hood 422 to detect that the user is in front of the cooking cooker 1.
As described above, the place where the human detection sensors 452 and 453 are installed may be appropriately determined in consideration of the positional relationship between the refrigerator 401 and the cooking cooker 1 and the sensing ability of the human detection sensor.

The human detection sensor 452 functions as one sensor of the environment detection unit 413, but is a home detection device (not shown) for detecting the presence of a person inside the house HA, that is, in the kitchen KT or the like. It may function as one of the sensors. In that case, information such as an unlocking sensor that detects that the door of the entrance (entrance) of the house HA has been unlocked may also be used in the home detection device. As a result, it is possible to improve the accuracy in the determination process of being at home and away from home.

The input unit 449 can set various functions of the home gateway 411 by operating a touch input type key formed on the liquid crystal display screen. As one of its functions, it is possible to specify a home electric appliance 400 for which an upper limit value of power consumption is set, and then set an upper limit value of power consumption, a usable time zone, and the like. For example, the user can input the maximum power consumption of the cooker 1 as, for example, 4800 W, 5400 W.

The input unit 449 has a function of inputting by voice in addition to a function of operating and inputting a touch input type key formed on the liquid crystal display screen, and the voice emitted by the resident is input by a microphone unit (shown in the figure). You can enter various desired functions by issuing to (1).

The 445 is an alarm device that issues an alarm to the resident by means of sound or light. The central control unit 447 receives the measurement data from the environment detection unit 413 and the monitoring data from the temperature monitoring device 440, and transmits an alarm instruction signal to the alarm device 445. Since this alarm device 445 is not subject to control by the electric energy control unit 448, the electric power is not limited or cut off due to a change in the power consumption of the home electric appliance 400.

In FIG. 4, the home gateway 411 further includes a communication unit (reception unit / transmission unit) 446, a central control unit 447, and a storage device 450.
The communication unit 446 is a communication unit capable of wireless communication or infrared communication individually with the home electric appliance 400 such as the cooking cooker 1 and the refrigerator 401.

In FIG. 4, the storage device 450 relatively includes operation history information of the home gateway 411, daily power control history information of the home appliance 400, and daily "environmental information" acquired by the environment detection unit 413. It is a device that records a large amount of data. The storage device 450 is, for example, various semiconductor memories, HDDs, and the like.

The central control unit 447 contains a microcomputer, which is the core of information processing, and a computer program that incorporates a ROM and RAM and regulates various operations.

In FIG. 4, 416 is a wide area communication network (Internet) that performs wireless communication with a communication unit (reception unit / transmission unit). Although only one communication unit 446 is shown in FIG. 4, the communication unit (reception unit / transmission unit) for the home electric appliance 400 and the communication unit for the wide area communication network (Internet) 416 are shown respectively. It may be provided individually. Further, an NFC communication unit may be separately provided so that information can be directly exchanged with the NFC (Near Field Communication) provided in the information communication terminal 418 by wireless communication.

Reference numeral 451 is a schedule management unit. This schedule management unit has a calendar function and can store event schedule information for at least January (up to 31 days).

The schedule management function itself has already been proposed in many patent documents. In the first embodiment, the scheduled date and the scheduled start time (or time zone) of the event (for example, shopping, going out, etc.) for each resident can be registered by the input unit 449.

When the event information is stored in the schedule management unit 451 and the stored date and time arrives, the schedule management unit 451 issues a notification. The form of the notification is to display on the liquid crystal display screen of the input unit 449 or to notify by a voice synthesizer (not shown). Alternatively, a method of issuing a notification to the information / communication terminal device 418 possessed by the resident may be used.

When the home electric appliance 400 such as the cooking cooker 1 is activated, a notification may be given based on the event information registered from the schedule management unit 451.

(Overview of cooker)
Next, in FIGS. 5 to 110, the cooking cooker 1 of the first embodiment will be described.
In FIG. 5, the cooker 1 is a cooker incorporated in kitchen furniture (including furniture called a system kitchen) 2. Reference numeral 2A is an installation port formed in the kitchen furniture 2. As will be described later, the heating cooker 1 is supplied with AC power having a voltage of 200 V and a frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz from a commercial power source 99.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 19, the cooking cooker 1 has two induction heating portions on the left and right.
In FIG. 19, CL1 indicates a center line passing through the left and right center points of the upper unit 100 in the front-rear direction, and AL indicates a range in which the top plate 15 is exposed on the upper surface of the upper unit 100.

In FIG. 19, 17HR is a right heating portion (corresponding to the “first heating portion”) provided in the range on the right side from the center line CL1, and induction heating can be performed directly above the right heating portion.
17HL is a left heating portion (corresponding to the “second heating portion”) provided in the range on the left side from the center line CL1, and induction heating can be performed directly above the left heating portion. As described above, the cooking device 1 is a cooking device in which two "heating ports" (two ports) are provided on the upper surface of the top plate 15.

In addition, another induction heating unit may be provided between the right heating unit 17HR and the left heating unit 17HL so as to straddle the left and right center lines CL1, and a three-port heating cooker may be used. Alternatively, any one of the IH coils 17L and 17R (details will be described later) constituting the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL may be replaced with a radiant electric heat source such as a radiant heater or an infrared heater.
In the following description, 17H is used as a reference code when referring to the “induction heating unit”.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 19, circular position marks 17LS and 17RS are provided to indicate a desirable position on which the object to be heated (see FIG. 3) such as a metal pot or plate (baked plate) is placed. , Is provided on the upper surface of the top plate 15. The position marks 17LS and 17RS are formed by printing on the upper surface of the top plate 15.

By looking at the position marks 17LS and 17RS, the user of the cooking cooker 1 can recognize that there are two induction heating units 17H on the left and right. The voice guide of the voice synthesizer 95, which will be described later, also allows the user to recognize that there are two induction heating portions on the left and right.

Immediately below the position marks 17LS and 17RS, IH coils (induction heating coils) 17L and 17R, which will be described later, are installed. The position marks 17LS and 17RS do not have to be circular, and for example, only the center point of the desired position on which the object to be heated N is placed may be indicated by a figure, a symbol such as "+", or a character. ..

Since the position marks 17LS and 17RS are circular marks indicating reference positions that can be induced and heated by the IH coils 17L and 17R, they are drawn with a diameter slightly larger than the maximum outer diameter of the IH coils 17L and 17R. ..

In the first embodiment, when the IH coils 17L and 17R are collectively called the IH coil, the reference numeral 17 is used. Therefore, when it is called the "IH coil" 17, it may be either the IH coil 17L on the left side or the IH coil 17R on the right side.

In the first embodiment, the "induction heating source" 9 refers to a configuration including the IH coil 17 and inverter circuits 81R and 81L described later.

(Basics of heating source and control menu)
The cooking device 1 of the first embodiment includes three types of heating means having different heating principles. That is, the first heating means is the induction heating source 9, and the second heating means is the microwave heating source 189. Further, the third heating means is an oven heating source 188.

The three heating means can be used as follows.
(1) Since the induction heating source 9, the oven heating source 188, and the microwave heating source 189 can be energized independently of each other, each heating means can be used for cooking independently. Called "menu"). The operation pattern for carrying out this is the "single cooking mode".

(2) One cooking can be performed by using the induction heating source 9, the oven heating source 188, and the microwave heating source 189 in combination at two or more different places. This is the "cooperation control menu" described later, and the operation pattern for implementing this is the "cooperation cooking mode".

(3) One cooking can be performed by using both the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 in combination. This is the "composite heating control menu" described later. Hereinafter, the "composite heating control menu" will be referred to as a "composite cooking menu". The operation pattern for implementing this combined cooking menu is the "composite cooking mode". The "operation pattern" referred to here is when the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 are operated in a series, at the same time, or with a time lag. Including any of.

(4) The induction heating source 9 has a dedicated input operation unit. Specifically, it is a right operation unit 40R and a left operation unit 40L. By operating the right operation unit 40R and the left operation unit 40L, the induction heating operation can be started, the heating conditions (thermal power, etc.) can be set, and the induction heating operation can be stopped.
(5) Both the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 do not have a dedicated input operation unit. The central operation unit 40M is shared.

(6) There is no superiority or inferiority between the single cooking mode using any one of the induction heating source 9, the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189, and the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode. The rule is that cooking of the heating source that started to be used first is prioritized. Therefore, for example, even if an attempt is made to select a cooperative cooking mode using the induction heating source 9, if the induction heating source 9 has already performed an independent heating operation for another cooking, the cooperative cooking mode will be used. Since the induction heating source 9 cannot be used, the heating source is eventually restricted in the cooperative cooking mode.

(7) Regarding the input operation, there is a superiority or inferiority relationship between the single heating cooking using any one of the induction heating source 9, the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189, and the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode. There is no. Therefore, for example, if you try to set the cooperative cooking mode and leave the input halfway without shifting to the cooperative cooking mode (for example, do not input anything for 30 seconds), it will automatically be up to that point. The input is canceled. Further, in the middle, for example, when the input for the independent cooking mode is performed from the right operation unit 40R of the induction heating source 9, the cooking can proceed to the induction heating.

(Kitchen furniture 2)
As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the cooking cooker 1 is supported by being placed on the upper surface 2P of the rim portion of the installation port 2A. As shown in FIG. 6, the kitchen furniture 2 includes a water tank 2CP capable of temporarily storing water discharged from the water supply port 2D of the water supply in the first embodiment. Reference numeral 2B is a front opening formed at a predetermined position of the kitchen furniture 2. The front opening 2B is for exposing the front constituent portions (door 114 and front cover 112, which will be described later) to the front when the cooking cooker 1 is incorporated.

If the size of the front opening 2B and the installation port 2A of the kitchen furniture 2 is standard, it is mostly pre-formed with standard dimensions because standardization is being promoted by the industry. be. This will be explained in detail later.

The usual method of incorporating the cooker 1 into the kitchen furniture 2 is as shown in FIG. FIG. 7 is a schematic view showing an intermediate stage of the work of incorporating into the kitchen furniture 2.
As shown in FIG. 7, the cooker 1 is placed in the installation port 2A while being tilted so that the front side (front side) of the cooker 1 is downward, and then the rear side of the cooker 1 is placed. When lowered as shown by the solid arrow BD, the cooking cooker 1 is placed on the peripheral edge of the installation port 2A of the kitchen furniture 2.

After that, the screws are tightened to move (rotate) the fixing bracket (not shown) installed at the rear peripheral edge of the lower unit 100, which will be described later, and the fixing bracket is strongly pressed against the kitchen furniture 2. And the installation is completed. Since such an installation method has already been widely adopted, the detailed structure will not be described.

As shown in FIG. 7, the main body 110 of the cooking cooker 1 is combined and integrated in a state where the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 are stacked one above the other, and such an integrated form is used. In the assembling work of FIG. 7, only the upper unit 100 is (directly) fixed to the kitchen furniture 2 with the screw. If the fixing bracket (not shown) is removed, the entire cooking cooker 1 can be taken out from the kitchen furniture 2. As a result, inspections and repairs can be performed outside the kitchen furniture 2 thereafter. In addition, when it is called a "main body" in the range of only the upper unit 100, it is distinguished by adding a reference numeral 10.

In the first embodiment, the "main body case" HC is a general term for the upper case 16 that constitutes the outer shell of the upper unit 100 and the lower case 101 that constitutes the outer shell of the lower unit 200. The upper case 16 and the lower case 101 may be configured as an integrated case (housing).

As shown in FIG. 6, the installation port 2A formed in the kitchen furniture 2 has a rectangular planar shape. However, the four corners are arcuate.
The width dimension W1 of the installation port 2A is 560 mm to 564 mm. Further, the dimension D1 in the front-rear direction is formed to be 460 mm to 464 mm.

In FIGS. 5 and 6, 3 and 4 are surface materials constituting the surface of the kitchen furniture 2. 5 and 6 are surface materials adjacent to both the left and right sides of the kitchen furniture 2 when the cooking cooker 1 is incorporated.
When the cooker 1 is incorporated in the kitchen furniture 2, the front surfaces of the surface materials 3 to 6 are substantially flush with the front surface of the cooker 1. In other words, when the cooker 1 is incorporated, the surface materials 3 to 6 and the cooker 1 can give the user a sense of design as if they were on a unified flat surface.

In FIG. 7, FIG. 8 is a wall that divides the inside of the kitchen furniture 2 into a plurality of rooms at the top and bottom, and the lower part of the wall is often used as a storage for kitchen utensils, food, and the like. Note that the wall 8 is not shown in FIG. Further, the wall 8 may be installed inside the kitchen furniture 2 so as to be removable.

According to the configuration described above, when the cooking cooker 1 is incorporated in the kitchen furniture 2, the entire front surface of the kitchen furniture 2 exhibits substantially one flat surface. When the user looks at the kitchen furniture 2, the front surface (front surface) is designed so that it can be recognized as a clean and unified design.

The kitchen furniture 2 and the cooker 1 do not have to be designed by the same manufacturer. The kitchen furniture is manufactured and sold by the kitchen furniture and the housing equipment manufacturer, while the cooker 1 is manufactured by the home appliance manufacturer. Often sold.

In FIGS. 5 and 6, reference numeral 7 denotes a frame line printed on the front surface of the surface materials 3 to 5, and does not form physical unevenness on the front surface of the surface materials 3 to 5. It should be noted that a thin decorative plate or tape made of glossy metal may be attached to indicate the presence of the frame line 7 to give a high-class feeling. On the contrary, the frame line 7 may be omitted.

The four types of surface materials 3 to 6 may be the same. Further, these surface materials 3 to 6 do not have to move back and forth like doors and drawers. For example, the furniture may be fixed on the surface of the kitchen furniture 2 and may not move at all.

When the color and surface morphology (pattern, glossiness, unevenness, etc.) of the front surfaces of the four types of surface materials 3 to 6 are unified, the unified design feeling as the kitchen furniture 2 is enhanced. For example, when the entire front surface of the surface material 4 is unified with a single color or wood grain design, the front surface of the surface material 3 may also be unified with the same single color or wood grain design.

Next, FIGS. 8 and 9 will be described. FIG. 8 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing the dimensional relationship between the kitchen furniture 2 and the cooking utensil 1 of FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing an enlarged part of the front part of the kitchen furniture 2 shown in FIG.

In Japan, the standardization (common) of housing parts and materials is being promoted by the "Long-term Use Housing Material Standardization Promotion Council" (abbreviation: Nagazumikyo) in addition to the Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS) for kitchen furniture 2 and the like.

According to the "Standards for long-term use materials for IH cooking heaters (built-in)" established by the "Nagazumikyo", the conditions that the countertop (kitchen furniture 2) to which the IH cooking heater is attached should be as follows. It is stipulated.
(1) The width dimension W1 of the installation port 2A is 560 mm to 564 mm. The dimension D1 in the front-rear direction shall be 460 mm to 464 mm.
(2) The height dimension C1 of the front lowering portion 2F shall be 40 mm or less.
(3) The depth (front-back direction) dimension D3 of the front lowering portion 2F shall be 45 mm or less.
(4) The ceiling depth (front-back direction) dimension D2 of the front lowering portion 2F shall be 58 mm to 70 mm.

Further, according to the above-mentioned "Standards for Long-term Use Members", the external dimensions of the built-in type IH cooking heater (induction heating cooker) are also specified as follows.
(1) The height dimension H2 from the lower end of the top plate to the lower end of the front panel shall be 215 mm to 223 mm.

The cooker 1 of the present disclosure is designed so as to satisfy the above-mentioned various constraint conditions.
In FIG. 8, A1 is a dimension of the top plate 15 described later in the front-rear direction, and is 510 mm. A2 is the maximum dimension in the front-rear direction from the front surface of the front cover 112 that covers the front surface of the main body 110 to the rearmost end of the main body 110, and is 498 mm. A3 is a dimension in the front-rear direction from the inclined portion 111 formed at the rear portion of the main body 110 to the front surface of the front cover 112, and is 451 mm.

The front cover 112 is formed by integral molding of plastic or metal. Further, the front cover 112 is formed in a symmetrical shape, and several protrusion-shaped mounting legs 112P are formed on the back surface side to be mounted (see FIG. 18). The mounting legs 112P are inserted into a plurality of vertically long fitting holes (not shown) formed in the front plate 102 of the lower case 101, and slightly slid downward so that the mounting legs 112P engage with the fitting holes. I try to do it. In this state, the front cover 112 is fixed to the lower case 101 by a fixture (not shown). Since the front cover 112 does not move upward by this fixing, the front cover 112 is in a state of being attached to the lower case 101.

In FIG. 8, reference numeral 113 denotes a heating chamber described later, which is formed inside the lower unit 200. An opening 113A (see FIG. 15) is formed on the front surface of the heating chamber 113 so that a cooking utensil such as a frying pan or an object to be cooked can be taken in and out. The opening 113A is covered with a door 114 so as to be openable and closable.

The front surface of the door 114 and the front surface of the front cover 112 are designed to be flush with each other. The door 114 has two hinges 176 (see FIG. 12) and two arms 116 arranged on the left and right so that the front surface thereof is flush with the front surface of the front cover 112 except for the handle portion 115 (see FIG. 12). (Not shown) is rotatably supported with respect to the main body 110. Therefore, the door 114 functions as a "front opening" door that opens forward with the hinge 176 at the lower end thereof as a fulcrum (center of rotation).

The front cover 112 is attached to the front surface of the cooker 1 by a specialist such as a store or an installer after the cooker 1 is installed in the kitchen furniture 2. The door 114 is attached at the stage of shipping the cooker 1 at the factory so that a person other than a specialist, that is, a user of each household cannot remove the door 114 after the fact. This is to surely prevent microwave leakage from the inside of the heating chamber 113.

In FIG. 8, H1 is the maximum height dimension of the cooker 1. That is, the dimension from the upper surface of the top plate 15 to the bottom surface of the lower unit 200 is 227 mm.

In FIG. 8, H2 is a height dimension from the lower end of the top plate 15 to the lower end of the front cover 112, and is 215 mm to 223 mm. H3 is the dimension from the upper end to the lower end of the front cover 112 or the door 114, and is set to 171 mm. H4 is a dimension of the top plate 15 in the height direction, which is 11 mm. By making such a dimensional relationship, when the cooking cooker 1 is installed, a front gap 302 (see FIG. 12), which will be described later, is secured below each of the lower surface of the door 114 and the lower surface of the front cover 112. It is supposed to be done.

Next, FIG. 10 will be described. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the kitchen furniture shown in FIGS. 1 and 2. In FIG. 10, 2G is a step portion formed at the left and right side corner portions of the front opening 2B. This stepped portion is a portion where the front cover 112 of the lower unit 200, which will be described later, faces each other in close proximity. W2 is the maximum width dimension of the installation space formed directly below the installation port 2A. The maximum width dimension W2 is about 560 mm.

Next, the configuration of the cooking utensil 1 according to the first embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 11 to 24.
FIG. 11 is a plan view of the cooking utensil 1 shown in FIG. FIG. 12 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking utensil 1 when it is cut along the line ZZ of FIG. FIG. 13 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the flow of cooling air obtained by cutting the cooking device 1 along the line ZZ of FIG. FIG. 14 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking utensil 1 when it is cut along the WW line of FIG. FIG. 15 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking cooker 1 cut along the YY line of FIG. FIG. 16 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking cooker 1 cut along the line VV of FIG. FIG. 17 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking utensil 1 when it is cut along the X-ray line of FIG. FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view of a main part on the right side when the cooking cooker 1 is installed in the kitchen furniture 2. FIG. 19 is a simplified plan view for explaining the input operation unit 40 of the cooking device 1. FIG. 20 is a plan view of a front portion for explaining the arrangement of the input operation unit 40 and various display units in the cooking cooker 1. FIG. 21 is an enlarged plan view showing the central operation unit 40M and the integrated display unit 30 of the cooking device 1. FIG. 22 is an enlarged plan view of the right operation unit 40R and the right display unit 31R of the cooking cooker 1. FIG. 23 is an enlarged plan view of the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 31L of the cooking cooker 1. FIG. 24 is a simplified cross-sectional view showing the flow of cooling air inside the upper unit 100 of the cooking device 1.

(Upper unit 100)
In the first embodiment, the upper unit 100 alone functions as the cooking cooker 1. Therefore, the commercial (alternating current) power supply 99 is supplied only to the upper unit 100. However, the power cord 106 (not shown) for directly connecting to the commercial power supply 99 via the plug 106A (not shown) is pulled out from the lower unit 200 to the outside of the cooking cooker 1.

The upper unit 100 includes a box-shaped upper case (upper housing) 16 constituting the outer shell of the main body 10 and a metal frame-shaped reinforcing plate (support frame) 22 fixed to the upper part of the upper case (FIG. 12) and a top plate 15 made of heat-resistant tempered glass or crystallized glass, which is mounted on the upper surface of the reinforcing plate 22 so as to cover substantially the entire surface except the rear portion. .. In other words, the main body 10 of the upper unit 100 includes an upper case 16 and a top plate 15 which are outer shells, respectively.

The upper case 16 is formed by pressing a thin metal plate such as a zinc steel plate. Alternatively, a plurality of thin metal plates are joined by spot welding or screws to form a box shape.
In the first embodiment, in the upper case 16, the peripheral portion of one thin metal plate is vertically bent as described later, and the bottom wall (bottom wall surface) 16S, the rear wall 16B, the front vertical wall 16F, (left and right). The side vertical walls 16L and 16R are integrally formed. The bottom wall 16S also serves as a "partition wall" as will be described later.

The upper case 16 may be formed in another form. For example, one metal flat plate is pressed to form one "body" having three surfaces, a bottom wall (bottom wall surface) 16S, a rear wall 16B, and a front vertical wall 16F. On the other hand, separately from this, two lateral vertical walls 16L and 16R are individually formed. Then, these two side vertical walls 16L and 16R are attached to the end portion of the above-mentioned "body portion" by screws, spot welding or the like, and finally, the entire upper surface is formed into a box shape with an opening.

The top plate 15 is formed in a flat plate shape having a substantially uniform thickness, and the entire lower surface thereof is covered with a painted surface that does not allow visible light to pass through. Therefore, the functional parts below the top plate 15, for example, the IH coil 17, cannot be visually recognized from above the top plate 15.

The IH coil 17R on the right side has a donut-shaped planar shape. The maximum thermal power of this IH coil 17R is 3200W. The maximum external dimension (diameter) is 168 mm.

The left IH coil 17L also has a donut-shaped shape. The maximum thermal power of this IH coil 17L is 3200W. The maximum external dimension (diameter) is 168 mm. The diameter may be increased to about 180 mm so that it can be used for objects to be heated such as large pots and frying pans. FIG. 11 shows a case where the diameter of the IH coil 17L on the left side is made larger than that of the IH coil 17R on the right side.

In FIG. 12, 18 is a laterally elongated opening formed at the rear of the upper case 16, and 19 is an exhaust cover installed above the opening, which is a shutter or a large number of through holes for ventilation. Is formed. Reference numeral 20 denotes an exhaust port formed between the exhaust cover 19 and the opening 18.

In FIGS. 12 and 14, reference numeral 22 denotes a metal reinforcing plate fixed to the upper end of the rear portion of the upper case 16, as described above. The reinforcing plate 22 has a length equivalent to the width of the trailing edge of the upper case 16.

Reference numeral 21 denotes a metal decorative frame fixed to the upper surface of the reinforcing plate 22. This decorative frame projects behind the upper case 16 and is formed longer than the width of the upper case 16. That is, when viewed from above, it seems that the rear side of the exhaust cover 19 and both the left and right sides are surrounded in a series (see FIG. 11).

In FIGS. 11, 12 and 14, 25 is a metal decorative frame, which is installed so as to protect the left and right end faces and the front end faces of the top plate 15 from an external impact as shown in FIG. ing.

Reference numeral 26 denotes an annular cushion material formed of a highly elastic material such as silicon rubber, which is attached to the entire lower surface of the decorative frames 21 and 25. As a result, the upper unit 100 is placed on the kitchen furniture 2 via the cushion material 26. It should be noted that the design may be such that three portions (sides) of the left and right end faces and the front end face of the top plate 15 or four portions (peripheral four sides) including the rear end face are surrounded by one decorative frame 25.

(Integrated display unit 30 and left and right display units 30L, 30R)
In FIGS. 11 and 19, reference numeral 30 denotes an integrated display unit. The integrated display unit 30 is installed at the front portion of the top plate 15 and below the left and right center portions.
31L is a left side display unit, and 31R is a right side display unit. The left and right display units 31L and 31R are also installed one on the left side of the front portion of the top plate 15 and one on the lower side of the right side.

The integrated display unit 30 is a display means used in the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode, which will be described later. That is, it is used during microwave cooking and oven cooking.

A first specific screen 30SP (see FIG. 53) used in the cooperative cooking mode and a second specific screen 30SC (see FIG. 51) used in the combined cooking mode are selected for the integrated display unit 30. It is displayed uniformly.

The integrated display unit 30 and the left and right display units 31L and 31R are mainly composed of a liquid crystal display screen (not shown), and the integrated display unit 30 and the left and right display units 31L and 31R are arranged in the left-right direction. It is installed on the horizontal operation board 41 that is installed. It should be noted that the lower surface of the top plate 15 is not provided with a painted surface that blocks visible light as described above, corresponding to the positions directly above the integrated display unit 30, the left and right display units 31L, and 31R. Therefore, the display contents of the integrated display unit 30, the left and right display units 31L, and 31R can be visually recognized from above the top plate 15.

The integrated display unit 30 displays common information and alarms of the cooking device 1. For example, the selection result of the three types of heating sources of the cooking device 1 and the caution information and the warning information indicating the operating state of the heating sources are displayed. That is, since the integrated display unit 30 may display information related to the three heating sources of the induction heating source 17, the oven heating source 188, which will be described later, and the microwave heating source 189, the integrated display unit 30 may display information. It is called.

In addition, the integrated display unit 30 also has a function of displaying various cooking names corresponding to the "cooperative cooking mode" described later, control conditions thereof, and the like.

Further, the integrated display unit 30 also has a function of displaying "inventory information" of the refrigerator 401, which will be described later.

(Right side display 31R, left side display 31L)
The left side display unit 31L displays information regarding the operation of the left side IH coil 17L. For example, as will be described later, when timer cooking is set, it can be set in 1-minute units and the set time can be displayed. It also displays the elapsed time from the start of the heating operation and the "remaining time" until the timer set time ends. Furthermore, when preheating cooking is selected, the automatically set temperature (default temperature) and the current temperature are displayed. The "remaining time" is displayed as 9 minutes 59 seconds from the stage when it becomes less than 10 minutes, and the remaining time is displayed in units of 1 second.

Similarly, the right side display unit 31R displays information regarding the operation of the right side IH coil 17R. The right side display unit 31R basically displays information on various control conditions such as the timer setting time of the right side IH coil 17R, the preheating temperature, and the elapsed time, similarly to the left side display unit 31L.

(Input operation unit 40)
In FIG. 19, reference numeral 40 denotes an input operation unit. The input operation unit 40 is arranged horizontally long along the front end edge portion of the top plate 15.
The input operation unit 40 is arranged on the upper surface of the operation board 41 which is horizontally long and is installed in a strip shape.

Various electronic components are mounted on the operation board 41. The operation board 41 is made of a plastic material having excellent electrical insulation. On the rear side of the operation board 41 of the upper unit 100, there is a central operation board 32 supported by the holder 50. The integrated control device MC described later is mounted on the back surface side of the central operation board 32.

Below the operation board 41, flat plate-shaped auxiliary support plates (not shown) are installed so as to be vertically overlapped with each other so as to face the operation board 41 with a gap. That is, it has a structure of two upper and lower layers (two sheets) facing each other at intervals, so that as many electric components and circuits as possible can be mounted.

F2 is a second air passage through which the cooling air from the second cooling fan 61 described later flows, and is formed by a space between the cover 70 described later and the front vertical wall 16F in front of the upper case 16. (See FIGS. 12 and 24).

In FIG. 12, 16B is the rear vertical wall of the upper case 16. The lower case 101 and the upper case 16, which will be described later, are integrated with screws 51 at a plurality of places.

As is clear from FIG. 12, the rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16 and the upper end portion of the lower case 101 face each other closely within a range of about 20 mm to 30 mm, and the facing portion is tightened by the screw 51. Is fixed. In addition to the screw 51, a screw 51F (not shown) for fixing the facing portion of the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 is also provided, and the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are connected at a plurality of places. Has been done.

The 16BX is a horizontally bent portion formed by further bending the upper end portion of the rear vertical wall 16B to the rear BK. The positions of the horizontally bent portion 16BX and the flange 16A (see FIG. 14) described later are on the same horizontal line.

Due to the above configuration, when the kitchen furniture 2 supports both heavy objects of the upper case 16 and the lower case 101, the flange 16A and the horizontal bending portion 16BX cooperate to firmly support such a load. It may function as a part. That is, a structure is realized in which the flange 16A, which is made by bending a metal plate in a series to increase the mechanical strength, and the horizontally bent portion 16BX support the upper case 16 itself, and as a result, the lower case 101 is also reliably supported. Has been done. In the first embodiment, the horizontal bent portion 16BX does not come into direct contact with the upper surface of the kitchen furniture 2 as shown in FIG.

In FIG. 12, 104 is a cavity having a large depth and flat area. The cavity 104 is a space from the lower surface of the bottom wall (bottom surface) 16S of the upper case 16 to the upper surface of the bottom plate 101U at the rear of the lower unit 200, which will be described later. BH indicates the depth (vertical) dimension of the cavity 104.

As is clear from the structure shown in FIG. 12, the first embodiment has a flat upper case 16 (which constitutes the outer shell of the main body 10) in which the opening on the upper surface is closed by the top plate 15. ing. When the upper case 16 is placed on the lower case 101, which will be described later, the bottom wall 16S of the upper case 16 also serves as the ceiling surface of the lower case 101.

As described with reference to FIG. 12, the space where the bottom wall 16S of the upper case 16 and the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 have the largest facing distance is the cavity 104.
In the cavity 104, a waveguide 123 forming a part of the microwave heating device 120 described later is arranged long in the left-right direction behind the heating chamber 113.
Further behind the waveguide 123, a housing case C154 of the power supply circuit board 127 on which circuit components for supplying electric power to the microwave heating control unit 130 are mounted is arranged long in the left-right direction.

The microwave heating control unit 130 is mainly composed of a microcomputer, and is mounted on the power supply circuit board 127 inside the case C154. In other words, the power supply circuit board 127 housed inside the case C also serves as a control board on which the microwave heating control unit 130 is mounted. Although such a control board and a power supply circuit board 127 may be provided separately, in the first embodiment, they are integrated in order to minimize the installation space.

In FIG. 12, 101T is a front horizontal wall made of a metal plate provided on the front side of the lower case 101. The front horizontal wall 101T is formed by bending the upper end of the front plate 101F (see FIG. 15) of the lower case 101 rearward.

The 198 is a support metal fitting for connection formed of a metal plate, and includes a horizontal portion 198H and a vertical portion 198V. The horizontal portion 198H is fixed to the front horizontal wall 101T of the lower case 101.

One or both of the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 have a box shape formed of a thin metal plate, and by fastening the screws 51 and 51F, the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are made into one strong box. It is a shaped structure.

In the first embodiment, the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are tightly fitted as follows.
That is, the vertical and horizontal dimensions (inner maximum vertical and horizontal dimensions) of the upper surface opening of the lower case 101 are the front-rear maximum width dimension D5 (not shown) and the left-right maximum width dimension W4 (not shown) of the upper case 16. The dimensions are the same in design. Alternatively, it is only 0.2 mm larger (at the maximum) than the maximum dimension D5 in the front-rear direction and the maximum dimension W4 in the left-right direction of the upper surface opening of the lower case 101.

When a little force is applied outward to the upper ends of the left and right vertical walls 101L and 101R and the rear wall surface (rear vertical wall) 101B, the upper surface opening of the lower case 101 widens a little, so the upper case 16 is tightly placed inside. Can be fitted (just).

The "fitting" referred to in the first embodiment does not necessarily mean a state in which the fitting is closely fitted as in the first embodiment. The outer dimensions of the upper case 16 inserted inside may differ by up to 1 mm from the inner dimensions (front-back / left-right direction) of the lower case 101, which is the outer side, and they are in close contact with each other as a whole. It does not have to be in a state. Further, even if there is such a slight dimensional difference, it can be fixed with a screw 51 or the like to form a strong main body case HC.

Since the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are one strong box-shaped structure, the support structure of the door 114, which will be described later, can be firmly realized, which is useful for preventing microwave leakage in the door 114 portion.

In particular, since the top plate 15 of the upper unit 100 is supported by the upper surface of the kitchen furniture 2 and receives the full load of the lower unit 200, the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 as a whole should not be distorted or deformed. Is important. Since the cushion 26 is attached to the entire circumference of the lower surfaces of the decorative frames 21 and 25, it is the cushion material 26 that actually contacts the upper surface of the lower part 2 of the kitchen.

In FIG. 12, reference numeral 80 denotes an inverter circuit board, which is installed in the central portion of the upper case 16.
The inverter circuit board 80 is a rectangle whose planar shape is long in the left-right direction. The length W16 of the inverter circuit board 80 is 316 mm, and the length (width) W7 in the front-rear direction is 195 mm (see FIG. 25).

In this type of inverter circuit board, when making a circuit with various electronic parts, parts such as semiconductor integrated circuits, resistors, capacitors, and transistors are fixed to the insulator board, and the parts are wired with copper foil. To form. Since it is such a complicated and detailed work, it is currently mass-produced by mounting it on an automatic charging machine or the like. Therefore, there are various restrictions on the shape and size of the substrate, and even when used in this type of cooking cooker, the shape of the circuit board is basically square or rectangular. Therefore, in order to accommodate this type of inverter circuit board in the limited space in the upper unit 100, it is necessary to devise ways to avoid interference and overlap with surrounding parts. Moreover, if the number of inverter circuits is increased, the number of components to be mounted also increases, and the area of the inverter circuit board inevitably increases.

The inverter circuit 81 mounted on the inverter circuit board 80 includes an inverter circuit 81L that supplies high-frequency power to the left IH coil 17L and an inverter that supplies high-frequency power to the right IH coil 17R. It is composed of a circuit 81R and. These will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29, 30 and 33.

A total of four aluminum heat sinks (heat dissipation sinks) 82 are attached to the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80. The heat sink 82 is shown in FIGS. 12, 15, and 26. That is, the two heat radiation fins 82FN are installed so as to face each other in two rows and close to each other by several mm to 10 mm.

As shown in FIG. 27, GP2 is a gap formed by facing the heat radiation fins 82FN of the two heat sinks 82. The size of the gap (width in the front-rear direction) is the same over the entire left-right direction of the heat sinks 82 in the two front-rear rows. For example, it is 8 mm. In order to distinguish it from the (second) void GP12 described later, this void GP2 may be referred to as a "first void".

As can be seen from FIGS. 12 and 26, the heat sink (heat dissipation sink) 82 has a power control that constitutes a part of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R on inclined surfaces on opposite sides to each other. Switching elements 83 are attached to each. Therefore, the heat generated during the operation of the switching element 83 can be cooled by the cooling air RF1 and RF2 passing around the heat radiation fin 82FN.

The power control switching element 83 is, for example, an IGBT (insulated gate bipolar transistor). One of the power control switching elements 83 on the inverter circuit 81L side is the rear side of the heat sink 82 having two rows of front and rear, and the power control switching element 83 on the other inverter circuit 81R side is the front of the heat sink 82 having two rows of front and rear. It is attached to the side. It should be noted that it may be attached to the opposite side.

In FIGS. 12 and 26, reference numeral 70 denotes a cover integrally formed from a thin metal plate or a plastic material that covers the entire upper part of the inverter circuit board 80. The left and right end faces of the cover 70 are open, and as shown in FIG. 24, the left end face side of the cover 70 serves as the inlet FI of the cooling air RF1 and RF2 described later, and the right end face side of the cover 70 becomes the cooling air RF1 and RF2. Consists of the exit FO.

The cover 70 is in a position where a certain gap (a linear distance of about 1 mm to a maximum of several mm) GP11 is secured between the cover 70 and the lower surface of the coil base 17C that supports the IH coils 17L and 17R (FIG. 26).

In the first embodiment, the gap GP11 is 2 mm. As a result, a space of at least 5 mm or more is secured between the lower surfaces of the IH coils 17L and 17R and the upper surface of the cover 70. This space has the effect of mitigating the magnetic influence of the IH coils 17L and 17R on the cover 70 and facilitating the flow of cooling air between the cover 70 and the lower surfaces of the IH coils 17L and 17R.

The cover 70 has a size that secures a constant gap GP12 with the uppermost surface of the inverter circuit board 80. In the first embodiment, the GP12 is 20 mm.
In order to distinguish it from the (first) void GP2, this void GP12 may be referred to as a "second void".

In FIG. 26, H5 is the height dimension of the cover 70. H5 is 27 mm.
H6 is the height dimension of the upper case (upper housing) 16 from the bottom surface 16S, which is 28 mm. H7 is also the height dimension from the bottom surface 16S, which is 31 mm. Reference numeral 71 denotes a support plate, which will be described later. An insulating sheet or a magnetic shield sheet (thin plate made of aluminum or the like) may be installed between the upper surface of the support plate 71 and the cover 70 or the inverter circuit board 80.

In FIG. 26, H9 is the maximum height dimension of the IH coil installation space CK. In other words, it is a straight line distance from the lower surface of the top plate 15 to the bottom wall surface of the upper case 16. In the first embodiment, the height dimension is 44 mm or 44.5 mm. The maximum height dimension H10 of the side wall surface of the upper case 16 described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17 is 40 mm. The height dimension H10 and the maximum height dimension H9 of the IH coil installation space CK do not match because the top plate 15 is installed above the horizontal flange 16A or the like.

Since the cover 70 is directly below the IH coil 17L and is in a state of being close to it, if the cover 70 is expected to have a magnetic shielding effect, the cover 70 may be made of a non-magnetic metal such as aluminum. .. If the cover 71 is made of iron, magnetic stainless steel, or the like, the cover 71 may be heated by the leakage magnetic flux and the temperature may rise. In that case, it is preferable to cover the upper surface of the cover 71 with a non-magnetic metal. For example, it is advisable to adopt a means of stacking aluminum sheets or attaching an aluminum tape.

When the cover 70 is made of metal, it is more preferable to electrically connect the cover 70 to the upper case 16. For example, a metal screw (not shown) for attaching the cover 70 is set to reach the screw hole of the cover 70 directly.

Since the upper case 16 is connected to the lower case 101, which will be described later, with a metal screw or the like, it is electrically connected to a ground terminal (not shown) provided in the lower case 101, and noise is absorbed by the ground. In this way, the magnetic shield effect of the cover 70 can be expected to have a noise shielding effect on various electric components mounted on the inverter circuit board 80.

Further, if the cover 70 is injection-molded with a plastic material, the cross-sectional shape of the cover 70 can be determined relatively freely. Therefore, there is an advantage that the flow (direction) of the cooling air RF1 flowing through the first air passage F1 can be adjusted. For example, a rib-shaped wind direction plate or the like may be integrally formed on the lower surface of the cover 70 so that a large amount of cooling air RF1 flows particularly to a specific portion of the heat sink 82.

Next, the cover 70 will be described in more detail.
In FIG. 26, FH is the height dimension of all heat sinks 82 (82F, 82B), which is 20 mm.
The gap GP12 between the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80 and the ceiling surface of the cover 70 is secured to be about 21 mm, and the height of the gap GP12 is also the height of the first air passage F1.

The distance (gap) dimension GP13 between the upper surface of the ceiling portion of the cover 70 and the lower surface of the top plate 15 is about 13 mm. A series of hanging walls 70B are formed below both the front and rear edges of the cover 70.

The facing distance between the pair of front and rear hanging walls 70B, that is, the dimension W9 of the space in the front and rear direction (see FIG. 26) is 205 mm. The lower end surface of the hanging wall 70B is in contact with the upper surface of the support plate 71, but even if there is a minute gap between the two, there is no problem in guiding the cooling air.

In FIG. 26, the GP 16 is a gap formed between the upper surface of the heat radiation fin 82FN of the heat sink 82 and the ceiling surface of the cover 70. The gap GP16 is, for example, about 1 mm.

With the above configuration, the first air passage F1 is formed between the gaps GP12 and GP16 and the heat radiation fins 82FN formed inside the cover 70.
In FIG. 26, W7 is the width of the inverter circuit board 80 in the front-rear direction, which is 195 mm. Further, W9 is the facing distance (dimension of the space in the front-rear direction) of the hanging wall 70B, which is 205 mm.

In FIG. 25, W10 shows the distance from the right end surface of the cover 70, that is, the exit side end surface to the side vertical wall 16R of the upper case 16. This distance W10 is about 110 mm, and since there is a space of this distance, the power supply circuit board 55 is arranged using that space.

In FIG. 25, 70A is a front notch formed at the left edge of the cover 70, that is, the inlet side end. The front notch 70A is for guiding a part of the cooling air of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 to the outside just before the cover 70.
A plurality of front notch portions 70A may be formed.

In FIG. 25, GP 14 shows a gap between the first cooling fan 60 and the left end surface of the cover 70. The gap GP14 is about 40 mm. A gap GP15 (not shown) may also be provided between the second cooling fan 61 on the front side and the left end surface of the cover 70. In FIG. 25, the gap GP15 is so small that it is not shown.

In FIG. 25, the XB passes through the center point of the outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and intersects the “outlet line” FL1 orthogonal to the tip surface of the outlet 60A and the partition wall 11. Shown.
The outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 is tilted by a predetermined angle θ1 with respect to the center line CL5 that crosses the center points of the two IH coils 17L and 17R in the left-right direction. It should be noted that the center line CL5 that crosses the center points of the IH coils 17L and 17R in the left-right direction may not be simply inclined with respect to a straight line that simply crosses the partition wall 11 (corresponding to the reference line BL in FIG. 27).

XF indicates a point (intersection) where the "outlet line" FL2 passing through the center point of the outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 and orthogonal to the tip surface of the outlet 61A and the partition wall 11 intersects. ing. These intersections XB and XF will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 27. The blowout line FL1 and the blowout line FL2 are fictitious straight lines provided for convenience for the explanation of the first embodiment, and the cooling air does not actually travel along the blowout lines FL1 and FL2.

The outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 is tilted by a predetermined angle θ2 with respect to the center line CL5.
The installation interval W14 of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 measured at the center point is 150 mm.

As is clear from FIG. 27, the outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and the heat sink 82 (82B) are separated by a linear distance (shortest distance) LD1. This linear distance LD1 is about 110 mm.
Further, the outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 and the heat sink 82 (82F) are separated by a linear distance (shortest distance) LD2. This linear distance LD2 is about 100 mm.

With the above configuration, the outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 sandwiches a straight line (reference line) BL penetrating the central portion of the gap GP2, and from behind the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82F. It is aimed at the heat sink 82B. It is diagonal (angle is θ1) with respect to the straight line (reference line) BL.

On the contrary, the outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 is oblique (the angle is θ2) with respect to the straight line (reference line) BL from the front direction thereof with the straight line (reference line) BL interposed therebetween.
The magnitude relationship between the angles θ1 and θ2 is “θ1> θ2”, but they may be the same.

In the first embodiment, as can be seen in FIG. 27, the two intersections XB and XF are not at the same position. It changes depending on the positions of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61, the direction of the outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60, and the direction of the outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61.

As shown in FIG. 28, the heat sink 82 includes 82F1 and 82F2 as heat sinks 82F on the front FR side. There are 82B1 and 82B2 as the heat sink 82B on the rear BK side. Of the two rows of heat sinks 82 in the front and rear when viewed from the front side of the cooking cooker 1, the heat sink on the front left side is called the "front first heat sink" 82F1, and the heat sink is installed slightly on the front right side. May be referred to as "front second heat sink" 82F2.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 28, among the heat sinks 82 in the front and rear two rows, the heat sink on the rear left side is called the "rear first heat sink" 82B1, and the heat sink installed slightly on the rear right side is "rear". Second heat sink "82B2.

In FIG. 26, reference numeral 11 denotes a partition wall integrally formed so as to integrally project downward from the ceiling surface of the cover 70. When the cover 70 is injection-molded from a plastic material, it can be integrally formed as described above, but a plate-shaped member different from the cover 70 may be used, in which case it is referred to as a partition member 11. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, they are collectively referred to as "partition wall" 11.

The partition wall 11 has a front surface and a back surface (back surface) formed flat over the entire length from the right end portion to the left end portion. This is to reduce the air passage resistance of the cooling air RF1 and RF2 flowing through the first air passage F1 as much as possible. The thickness of the partition wall is about 2.0 mm.
The partition wall 11 is preferably made of a material having high electrical insulation (for example, a plastic material). Note that in FIGS. 12, 13 and 15, the partition wall 11 is not shown.

Returning to FIGS. 24 and 25, D6 is the maximum width dimension in the front-rear direction that determines the size of the internal space of the upper case 16. The dimension D6 is determined by the distance between the partition plate 52, which will be described later, and the front vertical wall 16F (see FIG. 12).
GP1 is a gap formed continuously in the lateral direction on the back side of the partition plate 52.

In FIGS. 24 and 25, D7 is a distance between the rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16 and the partition plate 52 described later, and is a dimension that determines the size of the gap GP1 (see FIG. 9). W8 is the maximum (horizontal width) dimension in the left-right direction that determines the size of the internal space of the upper case 16.

The two IH coils 17L and 17 are supported from below by a component called a coil base 17C (see FIG. 12) made of heat-resistant plastic. The coil base 17C is provided individually for the two IH coils 17L and 17R. It may be formed by one structure in common with two IH coils 17L and 17R.

The coil base 17C has a structure in which the coil base 17C is directly placed on the upper surface of the cover 70 and fixed to the cover 70 with a fixing tool such as a screw. Alternatively, an elastic body such as a compression spring is interposed between the cover 70 and the upper surface of the cover 70, and the cover 70 is supported in a form of being constantly pushed up toward the top plate 15. Detailed description of these support structures will be omitted. In any case, in the IH coils 17L and 17R, the facing distance (distance) from the back surface (lower surface) of the top plate 15 does not change for a long period of time.

Due to the above configuration, the distance between the cooking container, which is the object to be heated N placed on the top plate 15, and the IH coils 17L and 17R does not change during induction heating. As a result, changes in the high-frequency voltage and high-frequency current generated in the inverter circuits 81L and 81R that supply the high-frequency current to the IH coils 17L and 17R can be suppressed, and the induction heating performance can be stabilized.

The IH coils 17L and 17R are located above the first horizontal plane HP1 that coincides with the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80. In other words, it exists on the second horizontal plane HP2 (see FIG. 15).

The cover 70 is in a position where it is not in contact with both the coil base 17C arranged below the IH coils 17L and 17R and the heat sink 82.

The cover 70 is fixed so as to be in close contact with the upper surface of a flat plate-shaped support plate 71 that is larger than the planar shape of the cover 70. Then, as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, a first air passage F1 long in the left-right direction is formed between the inverter circuit board 80 and the cover 70. The support plate 71 is made of an insulating material, for example, heat-resistant plastic.

In FIGS. 12 and 15, 102 is a metal exhaust duct in which the exhaust flow from the lower unit 200 is guided. The exhaust port side end 102E of the exhaust duct 102 penetrates through the gap GP1 formed between the partition plate 52 described later and the rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16 (see FIG. 13). That is, the exhaust duct 102 vertically penetrates through the gap GP1 like a chimney.

In FIG. 14, 16A is a horizontal flange formed by bending outward at right angles in a series from the upper ends of the side vertical walls 16L and 16R of the upper case 16.
The 101A is a horizontal flange formed by bending the side vertical walls 101L and 101R of the lower case 101, which will be described later, in a series from the upper ends at right angles to the outside.

In the upper case 16 and the lower case 101, the flange 16A described above overlaps the flange 101A. In this polymerization state, the side wall surface of the upper case 16 and the side wall surface of the lower case 101 are fixed by the screw 51 (see FIG. 12) described above. Therefore, the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are formed into a strong integral structure by fixing with the screw 51 and closely fixing the flange 16A and the flange 101A. In other words, since the total weight of the upper case 16 is received by the upper surface of the flange 101A of the lower case 101, even if the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are formed of a thin metal plate, they are in an integrated state. Then, it can be made into a box-shaped structure having mechanical strength.

The means for fixing the flange 16A and the flange 101A in an overlapping state may be other fastening means such as bolts and nuts instead of the screw 51. The flange 16A and the flange 101A do not come into contact with the upper surface of the kitchen furniture 2. Since the flange 16A and the flange 101A are made of a hard material (metal), there is a concern that the kitchen furniture 2 may be damaged. Further, if the flange 16A and the flange 101A hit the kitchen furniture 2, the cushion material 26 cannot be installed while being compressed. If the cushion material 26 is not in close contact with the cushion material 26, there is a concern that the effect of preventing the intrusion of water or the like may be impaired.

Next, the gap between the main body case HC, which is the outer shell (housing) of the cooking cooker 1, and the kitchen furniture 2 will be described.
8 and 12 to 15, 311 is a lower gap formed between the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 constituting the outer shell of the main body case HC and the kitchen furniture 2, and has a size of about 10 mm. Is.

The 301R is a right gap formed between the side vertical wall 101R on the right side of the lower case 101 and the kitchen furniture 2, and has a size of about 5 mm.
The 301L is a left side gap formed between the left side vertical wall 101L of the lower case 101 and the kitchen furniture 2, and has a size of about 5 mm.

Reference numeral 302 denotes a front gap formed between the lower surface of the door 114 or the lower surface of the hinge portion 176 and the kitchen furniture 2 with the door 114 closed, and has a size of about 10 mm. Since the position of the lower surface of the front cover 112 also coincides with the position of the lower surface of the door 114 on the horizontal plane, a gap having the same size as the front gap 302 is secured below the front cover 112. It is a configuration that has.

The size of the front gap 302 changes depending on the opening and closing of the door 114, but as shown in FIG. 12, the size of the front gap 302 is large (for example, about 5 mm to 10 mm) so that the outside air can be sucked in the state where the door 114 is closed. It should be secured. In the following description, the "outside air" refers to the air existing outside the cooking cooker 1, and does not refer to the outdoor air.

The lower gap 311 and the right side gap 301R, the left side gap 301L, and the front gap 302 communicate with each other. Therefore, when the outside air is sucked from the front gap 302 by the start of the operation of the cooking cooker 1, the sucked outside air is appropriately distributed to the lower gap 311 and the right side gap 301R and the left side gap 301L. The gap 303 described with reference to FIG. 18 also communicates with each of the gaps 311 and the right side gap 301R, the left side gap 301L, and the front gap 302.

Next, FIG. 18 will be described.
W3 is the maximum width dimension in the front portion of the cooking device 1. The width dimension W3 is larger than the maximum width dimension W2 (560 mm) of the installation space of the kitchen furniture 2, for example, 595 mm. Reference numeral 303 denotes a gap formed between the inner surface of the right side wall material (hereinafter, referred to as “right side surface”) existing on the right side of the installation space of the kitchen furniture 2 and the right end surface of the front cover 112. This gap is ensured so as not to collide with the kitchen furniture 2 when the cooking cooker 1 is installed. The size may be about 1 to 2 mm.

Also in the front cover 112 on the left side, a gap similar to the gap 303 is formed between the front cover 112 and the inner surface (hereinafter referred to as “left side surface”) of the left side wall material existing on the left side of the installation space of the kitchen furniture 2. .. The size of the left and right voids 303 may be slightly different depending on the installation of the cooking cooker 1. Further, depending on the type of kitchen furniture 2, an elastic sealing material (cushion material) may be arranged in the step portion 2G (see FIG. 10), and the space 303 may be installed in a state where the gap 303 is almost closed. However, even in such a state, there is no problem in the internal cooling function of the cooking device 1.

As shown in FIG. 18, the front cover 112 extends to the outside of the right side gap 301R and the left side gap 301L. Therefore, in the state where the cooking cooker 1 is installed, the front side of the right side gap 301R and the left side gap 301L is covered by the two left and right front covers 112. Therefore, when the user looks at the kitchen furniture 2 from the front side, it does not give the feeling that a large gap exists between the cooking cooker 1 and the kitchen furniture 2. Then, in the installed state of the cooking cooker 1, the right side gap 301R and the left side gap 301L are secured, so that outside air is introduced for the upper air passage AH of the upper unit 100 and the lower air passage UH of the lower unit 200, which will be described later. Can be done reliably.

In FIG. 18, WS is a width dimension in which the door 114 faces the front plate 101F of the lower case 101. This width dimension is necessary for the door 114 and the lower case 101 to be in close contact with each other to prevent microwave leakage, and for forming the choke chamber 194, which will be described later, at the front, rear, left and right positions of the opening 113A ( (See FIG. 11).

(1st cooling fan 60, 2nd cooling fan 61)
As shown in FIG. 24, a first cooling fan 60 (upper cooling fan) and a second cooling fan 61 are installed near the side vertical wall 16L on the left side of the upper case 16, respectively. The rotary shaft 60T (not shown) at the center of the rotary blades (not shown) of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 extends in the vertical (vertical) direction. Rotate on one horizontal plane (first horizontal plane HP1).

A centrifugal fan (blower) is adopted as the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61. The reason for this is that the static pressure is high and the ventilation resistance is large in a space with a high mounting density. In general, there is also a type of centrifugal fan in which one suction port is provided and the blowing (spitting) direction is the total radial direction. However, the one of the first embodiment is a type having only one blowing direction.

In FIG. 24, 60A is an outlet formed integrally with the fan case 60C of the first cooling fan 60, and 61A is an outlet formed integrally with the fan case 61C of the second cooling fan 61.

The outlets 60A and 61A are directed to the inverter circuit board 80. That is, the two outlets 60A and 61A are both located above the common first horizontal plane (HP1) and are directed to the right. The "first horizontal plane" HP1 in the first embodiment means the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80.

The holder 50 shown in FIG. 12 is made of an insulating material, for example, a plastic material. The holder 50 has a size corresponding to the entire area of the input operation unit 40 and the range of the integrated display unit 30, the right side display unit 31R, and the left side display unit 31L, and is provided in a long strip shape in the left-right direction. The central operation board 32 is attached so as to overlap with each other with a slight gap on the lower surface of the holder 50.

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 have exactly the same structure, the same shape, and the same "rated specifications", and are assumed to be operated at the same rotation speed during normal induction heating operation. .. However, in the first embodiment, the IH control unit 90 changes the number of rotations to change the amount of air blown. For example, when the driving power applied to the IH coils 17L and 17R is increased to increase the heating capacity, or when it is detected that the temperature of the integrated display unit 30 or the input operation unit 40 is higher than in normal times. In order to improve the cooling effect, the number of revolutions may be increased to increase the amount of air blown. Further, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 may be operated at different rotation speeds due to measures against "beating noise" described later.

The rated specifications are, for example, a rated voltage, a working voltage range, a rated current, a rated rotation speed, a maximum air volume, a maximum static pressure, a sound pressure level, and the like. The rotation speed can be changed by changing the voltage applied or the voltage application time (on DUTY time) within the working voltage range.
On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the PWM control (Pulse Width Modulation) method is adopted, and the duty cycle (pulse width) of the pulse width is adopted according to the magnitude of the input signal (DC level). The motor of the first cooling fan 60 is controlled by changing the ratio of H and L). This PWM control is also adopted in the second cooling fan 61.

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 have a configuration in which a rotary blade (not shown) is surrounded by fan cases 60C and 61C, and a circular suction port (not shown) is formed on the lower surface of the fan case. Not shown) is provided.

Vent holes 64 (FIG.) composed of a large number of round holes or elliptical holes are located at positions of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 directly below the suction ports (not shown). 14 and FIG. 16). The ventilation holes 64 are formed on the bottom wall surface of the lower case 16. The ventilation holes 64 communicate with the ventilation holes 164 formed on the left side wall surface of the lower case 101, which will be described later. Therefore, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 can directly introduce outside air from the outside of the lower case 101 through the ventilation holes 164.

In FIG. 14, 165 is a recess (intake duct), and the ventilation hole 64 is provided to directly communicate with the ventilation hole 164 of the lower case 101. The recess 165 is formed by recessing the recess by a certain depth (dimension) DP1 from the left side. The dimension DP1 is 99 mm.

As shown in FIG. 14, an electric component mounted on the vertical center point of the outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60, the vertical center point of the heat sink 82, and the upper surface of the power supply circuit board 55 described later. The vertical center point of 85 is at the position of one horizontal line HL1. In other words, the cooling air RF1 blown out from the outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 is in a positional relationship so as to reach the heat sink 82 and the electric component 85 when traveling straight to the right. The horizontal plane determined by the horizontal line HL1 is above the first horizontal plane HP1.

In FIG. 14, AC power from the commercial AC power supply 99 is supplied to the power supply circuit board 55 via a filter circuit board 54, which will be described later. Then, the power supply circuit board 55 converts alternating current to direct current. Therefore, an electric component 85 such as a diode and a transformer 57 (not shown) for converting alternating current to direct current is mounted.

When the temperature of the heat sink 82 of the inverter circuit board 80 rises abnormally, the IH control unit 90 that controls induction cooking reduces the heating amount of the IH coils 17L and 17R. In addition to this operation, the amount of air blown per unit time of the first cooling fan 60 may be temporarily increased. The temperature of the heat sink 82 is detected by contact-type temperature sensors TS8 and TS9 (see FIG. 24) such as a thermistor fixed in close contact with the surface of the heat sink 82.

When the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 have exactly the same structure, the same shape, and the same rated specifications, the procurement cost at the time of manufacturing can be reduced.
If cooling fans with the same specifications are arranged and operated in parallel, there is a high possibility that a growl noise will be generated. Therefore, in the first embodiment, as a measure against the roaring noise, the rotation speeds of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are controlled to have different values within a range in which the roaring noise is likely to occur. There is. In other words, they are not always operating at different speeds.

In FIG. 24, reference numeral 52 denotes a metal partition plate long installed on the left and right at the rear portion of the upper case 16, which is fixed to the upper case 16. The partition plate 52 is a wall extending vertically so as to partition the internal space of the upper case 16 in the front-rear direction. The term "partitioning" here does not mean a strict shield that completely blocks the flow of air. The cooling air from the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 may be prevented from flowing backward to some extent beyond the upper end surface of the partition plate 52.

The upper air passage AH, which will be described later, refers to an air passage in the range from the ventilation hole 64 to the partition plate 52 inside the upper unit 100. The exhaust duct 102 from the lower unit 200 is present in the gap GP1 formed on the back side of the partition plate 52. Therefore, the lower air passage UH, which will be described later, does not pass through the upper passage AH and has a structure that substantially communicates with the outside of the cooking cooker 1.

In FIG. 24, 52A is an exhaust window formed in the left half of the partition plate 52, and 53 is an exhaust port plate installed so as to cover the front side of the exhaust window 52A, and a large number of through holes 53A are formed. , The cooling air toward the exhaust window 52A of the partition plate 52 passes through. The cooling air that has passed through the exhaust window 52A is discharged to the external space of the cooking cooker 1 through the exhaust cover 19.

In FIG. 24, LF is an exhaust port dimension indicating a range (width dimension) on the left side of the partition plate 12 described later with respect to the exhaust exhausted from the installation space CK of the IH coils 17L and 17R. The size of the exhaust port is determined by the formation range of the through hole 53A and the width dimension of the exhaust window 52A. When the width dimension of the exhaust window 52A is narrower than the formation range of the through hole 53A (the form shown in FIG. 24), the exhaust range LF is determined by the width dimension of the exhaust window 52A. The width dimension of the exhaust window 52B on the right side and the formation range of the through hole 53B are the same.

In FIG. 24, reference numeral 54 denotes a filter circuit board arranged at the rear right corner of the upper case 16. In this filter circuit board, the noise in the power supply from the commercial power supply 99 is removed and supplied to the output terminal side, and conversely, the noise is prevented from flowing out (backflow) to the commercial power supply side on the input terminal side. It mounts electrical components (not shown) such as resistors and inductors (choke coils), line-to-line capacitors, relays, and current fuses. The end of the power cable (not shown) connected to the commercial power supply 99 via a plug is connected to the filter circuit board 54 via the inside of the lower unit 200, which will be described later.

The power supply circuit board 55 is on the opposite side (right side) of the first cooling fan 60 with the inverter circuit board 80 interposed therebetween. In other words, since the power supply circuit board 55 is on the right side of the outlet FO of the first air passage F1 formed between the inverter circuit board 80 and the cover 70, cooling immediately after exiting from the first air passage F1. Cooled by the wind.

In FIG. 24, CL3 is a center line passing through the center point of the left IH coil 17L in the front-rear direction, and CL4 is a center line passing through the center point of the right IH coil 17R in the front-rear direction.
CL5 is a center line that crosses the center points of the two IH coils 17L and 17R in the left-right direction. CL2 is a center line that penetrates the rotation centers of the rotary blades (not shown) in the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 in the front-rear direction. As is clear from FIG. 24, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are aligned in a straight line in the front-rear direction.

In FIG. 24, RF1 shows the cooling air blown from the first cooling fan 60. RF2 indicates the cooling air blown from the second cooling fan 61.

RF3 indicates the cooling air after exiting from the outlet FO of the first air passage F1. Further, RF4 indicates the cooling air after passing through the second air passage F2. A part of the cooling air RF3 after exiting from the outlet FO and the cooling air RF4 after passing through the second air passage F2 merge in the middle. That is, the cooling air RF3 and the cooling air RF4 merge before reaching the through hole 53A of the exhaust port plate 53.

In FIG. 24, GP1 is a gap formed between the partition plate 52 and the rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16. The width of the gap GP1 in the front-rear direction is about 30 mm to 50 mm.

In FIGS. 24 and 25, reference numeral 12 denotes a partition plate, which is vertically installed in the gap GP1 formed on the back side of the partition plate 52. Reference numeral 13 denotes a partition plate, which is vertically installed in the gap GP1 formed on the back side of the partition plate 52.

The partition plate 12 partitions the inside of the gap GP1 formed on the back side of the partition plate 52 to the left and right. An exhaust duct 102 is vertically present on the left side of the partition plate 12 from below. Further, on the right side of the partition plate 13, a terminal portion (exhaust port) of an exhaust duct 307 (not shown) for discharging air after cooling the magnetron 122 of the lower unit 200 may be arranged. However, in the first embodiment, such an exhaust duct 307 (not shown) is not arranged.

In FIGS. 24 and 25, reference numeral 14 denotes a vertically installed plate-shaped or rib-shaped (raised object-shaped) partition wall. The partition wall 14 is integrally formed or fixed to the upper surface of a support plate 29 (not shown) installed so as to overlap the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16.

The support plate 29 (not shown) is made of an electrically insulating plastic material like the support plate 71.
The partition wall 14 is formed from the rear of the cover 70 to the front surface of the partition plate 52. However, the partition wall 14 does not extend vertically to a position where it comes into contact with the lower surface of the top plate 15. That is, although the partition wall 14 extends close to the lower surface of the top plate 15, the space behind the cover 70 is not completely divided into two left and right by the partition wall 14.

As shown in FIG. 25, a part of the cooling air RF4 guided to the right side of the cover 70 mainly via the first air passage F1 is divided into two cooling air RF4L and RF4L by the partition wall 14. It is divided and guided in the directions of the exhaust windows 52A and 52B.

As shown in FIG. 25, a part of the cooling air RF4 guided to the right side of the cover 70 mainly via the first air passage F1 is divided into two cooling air RF4L and RF4L by the partition wall 14. It can be divided and guided in the directions of the exhaust windows 52A and 52B.

With the above configuration, as shown in FIG. 24, the cooling air RF4L and RF4R are exhausted from the installation space CK of the IH coils 17L and 17R through the exhaust windows 52A and 52B.
In FIGS. 24 and 25, the cooling air exhausted from the right side of the partition wall 14 is indicated as RF4R, and the cooling air exhausted from the left side of the partition wall 14 is indicated as RF4L. When these two cooling airs are collectively referred to, RF4 is used as the reference numeral in the following description.

(Detailed configuration of input operation unit 40)
Next, returning to FIGS. 19 and 20, the main part of the input operation unit 40 will be described.
In FIGS. 19 and 20, 40 is an input operation unit formed on the front upper surface of the top plate 15, and as described below, utilizes a change in capacitance when the user lightly touches the top plate 15 with a finger or the like. Various input keys of the method that can be input are arranged in a straight line in the horizontal direction.

The input operation unit 40 includes three units, a right operation unit 40R, a central operation unit 40M, and a left operation unit 40L. Reference numeral 98 denotes an operation button or operation key (touch input type) of the main power switch 97 capable of supplying and shutting off the commercial power supply 99 described later. The operation button or operation key 98 is arranged at a position adjacent to the right end portion of the right operation unit 40R. The operation buttons or operation keys 98 will be described below on the assumption that they are within the range of the input operation unit 40 (see FIG. 19).

The right operation unit 40R may be referred to as an "individual operation unit" because it performs an input operation only for the induction heating source 9. Similarly, the left operation unit 40L may also be referred to as an "individual operation unit".
On the other hand, the central operation unit 40M may be referred to as a "shared operation unit" because it is commonly used for the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. The "shared operation unit" also includes a "cooperation operation unit" 40MC for executing the cooperative cooking mode described later. These will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

The main power switch 97 is attached to the filter substrate 54 of the upper unit 100 as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25. The commercial power supply 99 is supplied to the power supply circuit board 55, the inverter circuit 81, and the power supply circuit section (not shown in FIG. 25) of the lower unit 200.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 22, a total of five touch-type input keys 43R1 to 43R4 and 44R are arranged on the right operation unit 40R. These input keys 43R1 to 43R4, 44R are assigned one or a plurality of input functions as described below.

43R1 is an input key for selecting heating in the right heating unit 17HR. Further, the operation of the IH coil 17R on the right side, which has started the heating operation, can be stopped. Therefore, when it is pressed once for the first time, it exerts a function of selecting the right heating unit 17HR, and when it is pressed once after that, it has a function of instantly issuing a stop command for the heating operation. As described above, each time the input key 43R1 is touched, the content of the command to the IH control unit 90, which will be described later, is automatically switched.

The input key 43R1 may be referred to as a third selection means. That is, the input key 43L1 and the input key 43R1 start the heating operation in the "single (heating) cooking" mode using either one of the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL of the induction heating source 9. It is a means of commanding.

43R2 and 43R3 are a pair of input keys that specify the thermal power (power consumption) at the time of induction heating.
When the input key 43R2 on the left side of the two input keys 43R2 is touched, the heating power is reduced by one step each time the operation is performed. For example, in the case of 3200 W (rated maximum thermal power: thermal power level 9), if the input key 43R2 is touched once, the temperature is lowered to 2500 W (thermal power level: 8).

When you touch the input key 42R3 on the right side, the heating power is increased one step at a time each time the operation is performed. For example, in the case of a thermal power of 2500 W (thermal power level 8), 3200 W (rated maximum thermal power: thermal power level 9) can be selected by touching the input key 42R3 once.

43R4 is an input key for selecting a control menu for timer cooking. Timer cooking is a control method in which when a user sets a cooking time, an induction heating operation can be performed only during the set time. For example, when timer cooking is started by designating 10 minutes, a predetermined display is performed on the right side display unit 31R when 10 minutes have passed, and the voice synthesizer 95, which will be described later, automatically notifies the end of cooking by voice. It is done in. The induction heating is automatically stopped when the set time (for example, 10 minutes) elapses, but the induction heating time can be extended by performing an extension operation before the set time elapses.

In the first embodiment, both the display unit such as the integrated display unit 30 and the right display unit 31R and the voice synthesizer 95 may be collectively referred to as the "notification unit" AN.

The 44R is a touch-type input key for selecting a "control menu" for induction cooking, and one can be selected from a plurality of control menus each time a touch operation is performed. In this induction heating cooking, the "control menu" refers to the induction heating source 9 as shown in FIG. 38, for example, "boiled water", "boiled food", "fried food (automatic cooking)", and the like. The control mode, in other words the type of control. That is, "boiled water", "simmered", "fried food", etc. differ in the driving time of the IH coil 17R, the heating power, the driving pattern for changing the heating power, and the like.

The "control menu" for the right heating unit 17HR is different from the name of the final object to be cooked and the name of the food material obtained by induction heating. For example, "hamburger" and "tempura" are the names of the food to be cooked, not the "control menu" here. In other words, the "control menu" can be said to be a comprehensive expression of the type of heating, cooking method, conditions, etc. until the cooking is completed.
The control menu of the induction heating source 9 may be referred to as an "IH control menu" in order to distinguish it from the control menus of other heating sources.

Next, the left operation unit 40L will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 23. The left operation unit 40L is provided with a total of five touch-type input keys 43L1 to 43L4 and 44L.

43L1 is an input key for selecting cooking by the left heating unit 17HL. Further, after the heating operation of the left IH coil 17L is started, the operation can be stopped at any time. That is, when it is pressed once for the first time, it exerts a function of selecting the left heating unit 17HL, and when it is pressed once after the induction heating is started, the heating operation can be stopped instantly.
The input key 43L1 may be referred to as a third selection means.

43L2 and 43L3 are a pair of input keys for designating the thermal power (power consumption) in the left heating unit 17HL, similarly to the input keys 43R2 to 43R3 of the right operation unit 40R. Similar to the input keys 43R2 and 43R3 of the right operation unit 40R, each time the touch is made, the thermal power that has been increased by one step is selected or specified by one step in the specified thermal power value data table. You can choose the firepower of.

43L4 is an input key for selecting timer cooking. The input key 43L4 can specify the time for induction cooking in the same manner as the input key 43R4 of the right operation unit 40R. Further, at the end of the timer cooking, the end of the timer cooking is displayed on the left side display unit 31L as in the input key 43R4, and the voice synthesizer 95 also notifies the end of the timer cooking.

44L is a touch-type input key that can select a "control menu" for induction cooking. Similar to the input key 44R of the right operation unit 40R, one control menu can be selected from a plurality of "control menus". The control menu that can be selected with the input key 44L on the left side is exactly the same as the control menu that can be selected with the input key 44R on the right side.

As is clear from FIGS. 20 and 23, a total of five touch-type input keys 43L1 to 43L4 and 44L arranged on the left operation unit 40L are arranged in a straight line in the left-right direction.

In FIGS. 20 and 21, a total of 10 touch-type input keys are arranged on the central operation unit 40M. One or more input functions are assigned to these input keys.
Hereinafter, 10 touch-type input keys will be described.

The input key 43KP on the far left is for setting various operations, displays, and the like of the entire cooking cooker 1 as desired by the user.

When the input key 43KP is pressed, the integrated control device MC described later switches to the "function mode", and the following "function setting menu" is displayed on the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30.
(1) Child lock setting (setting to disable operation of various input keys)
(2) Ventilation fan interlocking mode setting (3) Cleaning guide setting (cleaning time automatic notification function setting for heating chamber 113 and exhaust cover 19)
(4) Peak cut setting (Select one of the maximum power consumption from 4 stages of 5700W, 5000W, 4800W and 4000W)
(5) Voice setting of voice guide (6) Volume setting of voice guide (7) Setting to prevent forgetting to take out the object to be cooked, cooking utensils, etc. from the heating chamber 113 (in the voice synthesizer 95 and the integrated display unit 30) Necessity of alarm)
(8) HEMS registration setting (setting related to the power usage restriction function by the household power control device)
(9) Timer cooking time unit (1 minute unit setting changed to 5 minutes or 30 minutes unit) setting (10) Switching between beginner mode and normal (expert) mode (11) Inventory information acquired from refrigerator 401 Type (range) setting

The beginner mode is an optional function for a person (user) who is unfamiliar with the use of the cooker 1, and when this beginner mode is set, the content of the voice guide in the voice synthesis device 95 becomes more detailed and polite. become. Further, regarding the input operation in the input operation unit 40, the number of voice guides increases and the display information on the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 increases.

When the beginner mode is set, especially in the case of cooking in the cooperative cooking mode, the reference information displayed on the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 in the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 (including the additional information 331 described later). The amount of the voice guide is increased, or the content of the voice guide in the voice synthesizer 95 is increased. Therefore, the function that can support the user's input operation is enhanced.

The type (range) of inventory information acquired from the refrigerator 401 is, for example, limited to frozen foods or limited to foods that can be heated by the microwave heating source 189.

By pressing the input key 43KP to switch the display screen of the integrated display unit 30 to the "function mode" and then operating the touch-type input keys 43M1 to 43M3 arranged in the central operation unit 40M, which will be described later, the cooking cooker The above 11 types of individual functions defined in the "function setting menu" of 1 can be individually changed.

When the control mode and control conditions (temperature, thermal power, time, etc.) of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are selected on the integrated display unit 30, the input key 43KP is used so as not to switch the function mode. The input function of is disabled. Therefore, the light emitting unit 27M1 corresponding to the input key 43KP does not emit light during the setting work of the control mode and the control condition (see FIG. 21).

For example, the setting of the peak cut value of the cooking device 1 will be described. Even if the default value at the time of shipment from the manufacturer is 5400 W, it can be set to either 5000 W, 4800 W or 4000 W when installed at the user's home. In this way, the function of the cooking cooker 1 can be changed according to the user's wishes, the usage environment (electric power situation of the installed home), and the like. When such a peak cut value is set, the setting result is stored in the integrated control device MC or the power control unit 72. Therefore, when the user selects the cooperative cooking mode as described later, the setting result is stored in the integrated control device MC or the power control unit 72. It is used to determine whether to allow the use of the linked cooking mode.

As shown in FIG. 21, the range of the central operation unit 40M is referred to as a shared operation unit or RG operation unit 40M2 commonly used for the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. Includes range. The range of the central operation unit 40M is the range surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG.
On the other hand, in the range of the central operation unit 40M, the range excluding the input key 43KP is the cooperation operation unit 40MC for executing the cooperation cooking mode described later.

In the following description, since the "individual operation unit" 40M2 also serves as an input operation unit of the microwave heating source 189 (second heating means), it may be referred to as a "second operation unit" 40M2. ..

The 43MC is an input key for selecting a cooperative cooking mode arranged at the left end of the cooperative operation unit 40MC. It consists of touch-type keys.
The input key 43MC is illuminated from below by a light emitting diode (LED) or the like, so that the user can easily confirm the characters "cooperative cooking" and the figures indicating the characters. However, the input key 43MC does not appear to shine only during the period of the cooperative cooking mode. That is, after all the cooking steps in the cooperative cooking mode are completed, the LED stops emitting light and indicates that the cooperative cooking mode is not effective.
The input key 43MC may be referred to as a "first input key".

43M1 is an input key that selects to cook in the heating chamber 113 by the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189. A combined cooking mode using both the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 can also be selected. That is, the input key 43M1 is an input means (input key) for selecting the "composite cooking mode". When the input key 43M1 is operated, as will be described later, by executing the "composite cooking mode", either microwave heating or oven heating can be performed independently.

When the input key 43M1 is operated, the integrated display unit 30 switches to a special display screen configuration. That is, the second specific screen 30SC used in the combined cooking mode is displayed. This point will be described later with reference to FIGS. 48 to 52.

Further, when the input key 43MC is operated, the integrated display unit 30 displays a special display screen so that the cooperative cooking mode can be executed. That is, the configuration is switched to display the first specific screen 30SP. This point will be described later with reference to FIGS. 53 and 70 to 97.

The display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 is a single liquid crystal display screen on the hardware, but as shown in FIG. 21, a maximum of three display areas 30L and 30M are provided by the display unit drive circuit 63. It is displayed separately in 30R.

Of the three display areas, the display area 30L located on the left side is hereinafter referred to as the "first area". The display area 30M located in the center is hereinafter referred to as a "second area". The display area 30R located on the right side is hereinafter referred to as a "third area". It should be noted that a method for displaying a single display screen by dividing it into a plurality of parts has been proposed, for example, in Japanese Patent No. 5425171 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-172940. Omit.

The 43M1 is a pair of left and right input keys for switching the screen displayed in the first area 30L of the display screen 30D after operating the input key 43MC. The information displayed in the first area 30L is selected by the display unit drive circuit 63 according to the display program of the integrated control device MC.

Next, a state in which individual names indicating "composite cooking mode" and "single cooking mode" are displayed on the integrated display unit 30 by operating the input key 43M1 will be described.
In the following description, the "composite cooking mode", the "single cooking mode" in which the heating means is driven independently, and the "cooperative cooking mode" described later are collectively referred to as a "control menu".

When the input key 43M1 on the left side of the two input keys 43M1 arranged side by side is operated, the display screen of the first area 30L moves forward, and the information displayed on the rear side is displayed in the center of the front and back. The display screen is switched according to the image to be displayed. That is, when the input key 43M1 on the left side is operated once, one of the desired display information (for example, the control menu) is selected from the display information group such as the "control menu" stored in the integrated control device MC. A name that identifies one) can be selected. It should be noted that the display screen itself does not actually move forward, but only visually appears to have moved forward.

On the contrary, when the input key 43M1 on the right side is operated once, the display screen of the first area 30L moves backward, and instead, another information is displayed in the center of the front and back of the first display area. Then, the display screen is switched. That is, even if the input key 43M1 on the right side is operated, one of the "display information group" defined by the display program of the integrated control device MC is selected, but the selection direction (selection order) of the displayed information is selected. ) Is reversed.

In this way, the user can display desired information from the display information group in the central portion of the first area 30L by operating either the input key 43M1 on the right side or the input key 43M1 on the left side. ..

43M2 is a pair of input keys for switching the screen displayed in the second area 30M of the display screen 30D. By operating any one of the input keys 43M2, the display information of the second area 30M can be sequentially switched one by one in the same manner as the input key 43M1.

The 43M3 is a pair of input keys for switching the screen displayed in the third area 30R of the display screen 30D. By operating any one of the input keys 43M3, the display information of the third area 30R can be sequentially switched one by one in the same manner as the input key 43M1.

The 43MS is a touch-type input key that can command the start of operations of microwave cooking and oven cooking using the heating chamber 113. It also serves as an input key that can command the transition to the cooperative cooking mode.
The 45MT is a touch-type input key that can stop the operation of microwave heating and oven heating on the contrary. It also serves as an input key that can issue a command to cancel the transition to the cooperative cooking mode.

When the operation key 98 of the main power switch is pressed to start cooking, for example, in the right operation unit 40R, the five touch-type input keys 43R1 to 43R4 and 44R do not always need an input function.

Similarly, in the left operation unit 40L, the five touch-type input keys 43L1 to 43L4 and 44L do not always require an input function. The same applies to the central operation unit 40M. In order to avoid unnecessary input such as when the user touches it without recognizing it, in the integrated control device MC, immediately after the heating cooker 1 is started, depending on the input process of cooking conditions, the progress of cooking, etc. Except for the input keys that require input, the input functions of other input keys are temporarily disabled to prevent input.

Therefore, in order to show that the input function of each input key as described above is effective, as shown in FIGS. , 27M is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 22, in the right operation unit 40R, individual light emitting units 27R1 to 27R4 are arranged immediately behind the five touch-type input keys 43R1 to 43R4 and 44R. Since the input keys 43R2 and 43R3 are a pair, the individual light emitting units 27R2 share one.

The individual light emitting units 27R1 to 27R4 have one or a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) arranged below the right operation unit 40R, and the individual light emitting units 27R1 to 27R4 emit light and turn off by the display unit drive circuit 63. Is controlled. Alternatively, it is controlled to change the emission color.

For example, before the input key 43R1 (see FIG. 22) of the right operation unit 40R (individual operation unit for the right heating unit 17HR) is operated, the individual light emitting unit 27R1 immediately behind the input key 43R1 is operated. Is emitting blue light. From this, it can be seen that the operation input can be accepted.

When the user operates the input key 43R1 and the integrated control device MC accepts the input, the individual light emitting unit 27R1 emits light in a unified color (red) to indicate that the user is accepting the operation. indicate. The control for this display is performed by the display unit drive circuit 63 based on the command of the integrated control device MC. It should be noted that instead of emitting light with one color, for example, the emission color may be changed from blue to red to indicate to the user that the operation is being accepted. This also applies to the individual light emitting units 27M1 to 27M6 and 27L1 to 27L4, which will be described later.

It should be noted that before the input key 43R1 is operated, the individual light emitting unit 27R1 immediately behind the input key 43R1 is not made to emit light, and when the operation is accepted, the light emission is started and the light emission is continued. good. In addition, a method may be adopted in which only the fact that the operation input is possible is indicated by light emission in advance (the stage before the operation), and the acceptance of the operation input is not displayed by light. Further, a form may be adopted in which operation input is possible and blinks when waiting for input, and changes to continuous light emission when the operation input is accepted.

Similarly, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 23, in the left operation unit 40L, the individual light emitting units 27L1 to 27L4 are arranged immediately behind the five touch-type input keys 43L1 to 43L4 and 44L. Since the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 are a pair, the individual light emitting units 27L4 share one.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, even in the central operation unit 40M, the individual light emitting units 27M1 to 27M6 are arranged immediately behind the ten touch-type input keys 43KP, 43MC, 43M1 to 43M3, 43MS, and 43MT. doing.

When the input key 43MS is pressed and the induction heating is started, each input key (43M1, 43M2, etc.) in the central operation unit 40M cannot be input. However, the input function of the input key 43MT is effectively maintained. Therefore, the heating operation of the cooperative cooking mode can be stopped at any time, and the cooperative cooking mode can be canceled.

The input key 43MT can cancel the input of the control menu or the cooperative cooking mode. For example, when the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode is started, when the input key 43MT is pressed, the setting of the cooperative cooking mode is canceled in the middle, and as will be described later, the left heating unit used in the cooperative cooking mode is used. The occupied state of 17HL is immediately released.
Therefore, after this release, the input of the single cooking mode using the left heating unit 17HL for other cooking can be started.
The input key 43MT may be referred to as a "second input key".

If the input key 43M1 or the input key 43MC is operated to display the cooperative cooking mode or the combined cooking mode on the integrated display unit 30, and the input key 43MT is operated before the start of the cooking process, all the input settings before that are all set. It will be released. Therefore, in order to display the cooperative cooking mode, it is necessary to operate the input key 43MC again.

The individual light emitting units 27M1 to 27M6 have one or a plurality of light emitting diodes arranged below the central operation unit 40M, and the individual light emitting units 27M1 to 27M6 are provided by the display unit drive circuit 63 (see FIG. 30). Light emission and extinguishing with a unified emission color are controlled. Further, a form may be adopted in which operation input is possible and blinks when waiting for input, and changes to continuous light emission when the operation input is accepted.

As shown in FIG. 21, the pair of input keys 43M1 share one individual light emitting unit 27M3. Since the two input keys 43M2 and 43M3 are also paired with each other, the individual light emitting units 27M4 and 27M5 are shared one by one. In the following description, when the individual light emitting units in the central operation unit 40M are collectively referred to, the reference numeral 27M is used.

As shown in FIG. 22, the individual light emitting unit 27R5 is also arranged directly behind the operation key (or operation button) 98 of the main power switch 97 located adjacent to the right end portion of the right operation unit 40R.

It is desirable that the light emission modes (continuous light emission, blinking, light emission color, etc.) of the light emission display units 27R, 27L, and 27M as described above are unified among the three operation units in order to avoid unnecessary confusion and misunderstanding by the user. Therefore, in the first embodiment, the light emitting modes of the light emitting display units 27R, 27L, and 27M are unified in the right operation unit 40R, the left operation unit 40L, and the central operation unit 40M.

In order to show that the input function of each input key is effective, there is also a method of making the operation unit of the input key emit light, but in that case, the light emitting unit is arranged directly under the operation unit of the input key and the operation unit is concerned. It is also necessary to manufacture the material with a light-transmitting material, and there is also a problem of ensuring the sensitivity of the operation part of the input key, so that there are many problems in terms of structure and cost. Therefore, in the first embodiment, as described above, the light emitting display units 27R, 27L, and 27M are provided at adjacent positions while avoiding the operation unit of the input key. The term "adjacent" as used herein means a positional relationship in which the input key 43R1 and the light emitting display unit 27R are close to each other from the user's point of view, and a one-to-one relationship can be instantly understood. .. Therefore, for example, the case where the input key 43R1 and the light emitting display unit 27R are partitioned by a structure such as a wall protruding upward with reference to the surface of the input key 43R1 is excluded. However, since the input key 43MC is particularly important for indicating the cooperative cooking mode, a structure of illuminating with light from below is adopted.

In FIG. 20, thermal power display units 67L and 67R are provided at rear positions of the right operation unit 40R and the left operation unit 40L so as to indicate the thermal power stage at the time of induction cooking.
These thermal power display units 67L and 67R indicate the thermal power stages in the right heating unit 17HR and the left heating unit 17HL by light emission (red). Nine stages from the rated minimum thermal power (thermal power level 1: 150 W) to the rated maximum thermal power (thermal power level 9: 3200 W) are indicated by light.

The thermal power display units 67L and 67R are composed of a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) installed in the space below the right operation unit 40R and the left operation unit 40L. The emission color may be changed depending on the magnitude of the thermal power. In the first embodiment, for example, the thermal power levels 1 and 2 are configured as follows.
(1) (Minimum) Thermal power level 1: 1 red lighting, 8 remaining blue lighting (2) Thermal power level 2: 2 red lighting, 7 remaining blue lighting Note that the left end of the thermal power display units 67L and 67R The heat-retaining display unit that emits light and displays the LED when operated in the "heat-retaining mode" (see "display screen 3A" in FIG. 47) in which the object to be heated is heated with a heating power smaller than the minimum heating power level 1. 67H is provided.

On the left display unit 31L, the thermal power level value of the left heating unit 17HL is displayed by numbers 1 to 9. When the minimum thermal power level is 1, "1" is displayed, and when the maximum thermal power level is 9, "9" is displayed. The thermal power display on the left display unit 31L matches the thermal power stage displayed by the thermal power display unit 67L, and is displayed at the same timing.

Further, also in the right display unit 31R, the thermal power level value of the right heating unit 17HR is displayed by numbers 1 to 9. The display conditions are exactly the same as in the case of the left display unit 31L.

As can be seen from FIG. 20, the three light emitting display units 27L, 27M, 27R and the two thermal power display units 67L, 67R are arranged in a straight line in the left-right direction. Moreover, the three light emitting display units 27L, 27M, 27R and the two thermal power display units 67L, 67R are arranged in the left-right direction.

In this way, the three light emitting display units 27L, 27M, 27R and the two thermal power display units 67L, 67R are on a straight line in the left-right direction behind the three input operation units 40L, 40M, 40R. Because it is lined up in, operability and visibility are good. Further, the integrated display unit 30, the left side display unit 31L, and the right side display unit 31R are also arranged in a straight line in the horizontal direction, and the entire operation is performed from the viewpoint of the user who operates while standing on the front side of the cooking cooker 1. It has a good design and visibility.

In FIG. 20, reference numeral 68 denotes a heating source display unit arranged behind the integrated display unit 30.
Since the heating source display unit 68 uses a plurality of heating sources using the central operation unit 40M, the heating source that is actually operating is displayed by LED light.

As shown in FIG. 21, the heat source display unit 68 is composed of three display units. The leftmost display unit 68L is a display unit indicating that the microwave heating source 189 is used, and the character "range" is displayed in the vicinity of the front side, so that microwave heating can be easily performed. I'm trying to understand.

The central display unit 68M is a display unit indicating a case where “grill cooking” is performed in the heating chamber 113 using both or one of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B. "Grill" is written on the front side so that you can easily understand that it is grilled.

The rightmost display unit 68R is a display unit indicating a case where "oven cooking" is performed in the heating chamber 113 using both or one of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B.

Unlike grill cooking, "oven cooking" is to grasp the temperature in the heating chamber 113 and reflect it (feedback) in the energization control of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B. These will be described in detail later.

In FIGS. 20 and 21, 69 is a high temperature display unit provided immediately behind the heat source display unit 68. The high temperature display unit 69 causes the LED light emitting unit to emit light based on a command from the integrated control device MC, and displays that the temperature monitoring target portion is at a high temperature.
As will be described later, the integrated control device MC commands the high temperature display based on the temperature information from the temperature detection circuit 93 that receives the temperature detection signals from various temperature sensors and the heating chamber control unit 159.

The high temperature display unit 69 is not shown in FIG.
The high temperature display unit 69 defines three temperature monitoring target portions, a left heating unit 17HL, a heating chamber 113, and a right heating unit 17HR, and individually displays the status of these temperature monitoring target portions. Therefore, for example, after induction cooking with the left heating unit 17HL, it is possible to notify the user that the temperature in the range from the center to the left side of the top plate 15 corresponding to the left heating unit 17HL is high, and alert the user.

In order to shorten the period of high temperature display on the high temperature display unit 69 as much as possible, for example, if the temperature of the top plate 15 is still high immediately after the end of one induction cooking, the IH control unit 90 Continues the operation of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61, and cools the internal space of the upper unit 100, that is, the upper space 300A by the outside air.

It will be described back to FIG.
Reference numeral 47 denotes a touch-type input key for an Internet connection command for requesting wireless communication from the integrated control device MC. Each time the input key 47 is pressed, the user is wirelessly connected to the home gateway 411 and can acquire information from the outside via the home gateway 411.

The 46L and 46R are windows for transmitting an infrared signal as a command signal for starting operation to the ventilation device 405 (range hood 422) installed outside. Below this window, an infrared transmitter 48 (see FIGS. 29 and 30) is installed. Actually, the windows 46L and 46R are covered with an inconspicuous surface sheet so that they cannot be seen from above the top plate 15. The sheet is, of course, made of a material that transmits infrared signals.

When the details of the inventory information of the refrigerator 401 are to be temporarily displayed on the integrated display unit 30 while the cooking step 1 of the cooperative cooking mode is being executed, the input key 47 may be pressed. Specific inventory information is automatically displayed in all or part of the first area 30L to the third area 30R of the integrated display unit 30 for a certain period of time. In that case, the inventory information may be, for example, the name of the frozen food (for example, "rice" or "dumplings") and the amount thereof (for one person, weight of 200 g, etc.).

While executing the cooking step 1 in the cooperative cooking mode, the cooking cooker 1 automatically acquires inventory information at a predetermined timing regardless of the operation of the input key 47. This will be described later with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99.

In FIG. 19, reference numeral 49 denotes a wireless communication unit (communication module), which includes an antenna (not shown) and a transmission / reception circuit (not shown) that receive radio waves from the outside and transmit radio waves or infrared signals to the outside. I have. The wireless communication unit 49 is installed below the right end of the display board 41 at a slight distance from the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16. The purpose of maintaining such an interval is that if the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16 is too close to the bottom wall surface 16S, there is a concern that the reception sensitivity of radio waves may be lowered.

In the state of being installed in the kitchen furniture 2, the upper surface of the cooking cooker 1 is exposed on the kitchen furniture 2. Therefore, the input operation unit 40 can also be operated from above, and the exhaust gas from the exhaust port side end portion 102E (see FIG. 15) of the exhaust duct 102 can also be discharged above the kitchen furniture 2.

(Control means of upper unit 100)
Next, the control means of the upper unit 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31.
In FIGS. 29 to 31, the description of a part of the configuration is omitted, and the filter circuit of the filter circuit board 54 is not described.

FIG. 29 shows the control means of the upper unit 100 and the control means of the lower unit 200. In FIG. 31, only the main control means in FIG. 29 is extracted, and the transmission / reception of control command signals, the power supply relationship, and the like are indicated by arrows.

In FIG. 30, reference numeral 97 denotes a main power switch that is opened and closed by the user, and is connected to a 200 V commercial power supply 99 via a power cord and a power plug (not shown). Reference numeral 91 denotes a power supply circuit to which electric energy is supplied via the main power switch 97, and reference numeral 92 denotes a DC power conversion unit that converts AC power from a commercial power source into DC. The power supply circuit 91 is mounted on the power supply circuit board 55 (see FIG. 25).

In FIGS. 29 and 30, the MC is an integrated control device and has the function of a main controller or a host computer. This integrated control device MC is a control device mainly composed of a microcomputer. A predetermined constant pressure current is supplied to the integrated control device MC from the power supply circuit 91.

As described above, the integrated control device MC is located on the lower surface of the central operation board 32 (shown by a broken line frame in FIGS. 24 and 25). However, this may be arranged on the back (lower) surface side of the operation board 41. In any case, the integrated control device MC is built in the upper unit 100 and is not provided in the lower unit 200.

The integrated control device MC is composed of four parts, an input unit, an output unit, a storage unit, and a CPU (arithmetic control unit), and the storage unit stores the energization control programs of the three heating sources in advance. It is (stored). In addition to the storage units (ROM, RAM) of the microcomputer, a large-capacity storage device (main memory) MM for recording abnormality monitoring information is built in. The storage device MM may store the energization control programs of the three heating sources.

Reference numeral 90 denotes an IH control unit that controls control during induction heating, and is mainly composed of a microcomputer. The IH control unit 90 stores (stores) in advance an energization control program corresponding to various control menus at the time of induction heating. It also has a built-in storage device (not shown) that records abnormality monitoring information.

A second IH control unit 90A (not shown) may be in charge of a part of the function of the IH control unit 90. For example, a microcomputer may be mounted on the inverter circuit board 80, and the microcomputer may be in charge of input and output control of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R.

During all cooking operations such as induction cooking and microwave cooking, the integrated control device MC centrally monitors the presence or absence of an electrical abnormality.

In FIG. 30, 96 is a clock circuit which is also called a real-time clock, and power is supplied from a dedicated power supply (built-in battery) BT1 different from the power supply circuit 91 connected to the main power supply switch 97 for a long period of time. It is designed to be driven over. This may be, for example, a radio-controlled clock, which always informs the current date and the exact time in seconds if requested by the integrated control device MC, and is set to the correct date and time at the manufacturing stage of the cooking cooker 1. There is.

Even if the main power of the cooking cooker 1 is turned off and then turned on again, the time information of the clock circuit 96 is not affected, and there is a function of always transmitting the latest correct time to the integrated control device MC. Therefore, the abnormality monitoring information recorded in the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC is always recorded and stored at the same time with an accurate time. The clock circuit 96 may be omitted, and the integrated control device MC may have a timekeeping function.

In FIG. 30, reference numeral 72 denotes a power control unit (also referred to as a “demand control unit”). The power control unit 72 analyzes a command signal for inductive heating and microwave heating by the integrated control device MC, and the total power consumption of the heating cooker 1 exceeds a specified value or an upper limit value individually set by the user. There is a function to monitor it so that it does not exist, and a function to automatically limit the thermal power (power consumption) during induction heating, microwave heating, and oven heating so that the total power consumption does not exceed the specified value or the arbitrarily set value. There is.

Generally, the "demand control device" or "demand control device" refers to a device that controls the value of demand (demand power). It automatically checks the power usage status, and if it is likely to exceed the set value, it will notify you with an alarm etc., and if you set the automatic stop of the device that can be stopped, the device itself will stop as decided. Automatically shut down possible electrical equipment. After that, it is known that the electric device is automatically restored after a certain period of time, and it is said that each household also exerts great power in contract power management with an electric power company.

The power control unit 72 of the first embodiment is provided so that the cooking cooker 1 itself has the above-mentioned power consumption suppressing function. The power control unit 72 may be provided as a control function in the integrated control device MC without providing special hardware, and a control program for demand may be incorporated in the integrated control device MC from the beginning, or may be provided. It can be realized even if it is added later.

The power control unit 72 of the first embodiment can set the maximum power consumption of the entire cooking cooker 1 by operating the function setting input key 43KP in only one of the four stages as described above. It should be noted that this setting can be set by the input operation unit 40 while observing the above-mentioned four-step numerical values displayed on the integrated display unit 30 when a plurality of specific keys in the input operation unit 40 are pressed at the same time. .. Such a simple setting method is introduced in, for example, Japanese Patent No. 6012780.

As described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21, when the input key 43KP of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the integrated control device MC switches to the “functional mode”, and the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 displays the “peak cut value”. Since the display that allows "setting" and "HEMS registration setting" is performed, the above-mentioned function for suppressing the total power consumption of the cooking cooker 1 can be easily additionally set, or the function can be changed / canceled. Can be done. In the determination of the "permission condition" described later, the data of the upper limit value of the maximum power consumption (total power consumption) set in the power control unit 72 is used.

Reference numeral 73 denotes a signal transmission unit provided for transmitting various control signals between the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200. For example, signal lines and connectors that can transmit signals by wire are applicable. Further, for example, an infrared communication unit may be used so that signals can be exchanged wirelessly. The signal transmission unit 73 is also provided between the integrated control device MC and the IH control unit 90.

The IH control unit 90 obtains temperature information from the temperature detection circuit 93 and monitors whether or not the main part of the upper unit 100 has an abnormally high temperature. For example, electronic parts and semiconductor parts corresponding to the various input keys 43M1 to 43M3, 43MS, 43MT and the like are arranged in the central operation unit 40M, but since these parts are relatively sensitive to heat, a predetermined temperature is provided. It is monitored through the temperature detection circuit 93 so as not to exceed (for example, 60 ° C.).

When the measured temperature exceeds the predetermined temperature, the IH control unit 90 determines that the temperature is in the "abnormal preliminary state". The abnormal preliminary state is limited to the case where the detection temperature is in the range of 60 ° C. to 65 ° C. If the temperature exceeds 65 ° C., the risk increases, and the IH control unit 90 recognizes it as a true abnormal state.

In this abnormal preliminary state, the induction heating operation is not stopped immediately, and the control is performed to reduce the thermal power of the induction heating. However, when the temperature exceeds 65 ° C., an abnormal state is determined by the IH control unit 90, and the induction heating operation is immediately stopped. Specifically, for example, when the driven IH coil is the right side IH coil 17R, the power supply of the inverter circuit 81R that supplies high frequency power to the IH coil 17R is cut off. Then, the operation of the induction heating circuit 94R including the IH coil 17R and the resonance capacitor is stopped. In addition, 94L is an induction heating circuit for IH coil 17L on the left side.

In the above-mentioned abnormal preliminary state, it may be improved by increasing the blowing capacity of the motor 61M of the second cooling fan 61 that cools the IH coil installation space CK of the upper unit 100 while maintaining the thermal power of the induction heating. Further, it may be used in combination with a measure for lowering the thermal power of induction heating.

Then, at least, the electrical and physical (as an example, the temperature of the integrated display unit 30 described above) change status of the main part during induction heating during the period from the abnormal preliminary state to the emergency stop is shown (abnormal monitoring). The information is stored in the storage device 90R of the IH control unit 90.

In the above-mentioned abnormal preliminary state, the induction heating operation does not stop immediately, and the ventilation capacity of the motor 61M of the second cooling fan 61 is not increased (the rotation speed of the rotary blade is not changed), and the IH coils 17L and 17R are used. The firepower may be improved by forcibly lowering it.

The abnormality monitoring information stored in the storage device of the IH control unit 90 is acquired during the period from the time when the start command is received from the integrated control device MC until the cooking is normally completed. Therefore, the above-mentioned "IH control menu" (for example, "boiling", "simmering", "fried food", etc. in the case of the left operation unit 40L) and information on the thermal power of induction heating are also recorded in chronological order. If an emergency stop is caused due to an abnormal state on the way, the abnormality monitoring information and the information for identifying the IH control menu are stored in the storage device 90R in chronological order up to that point.

Further, in the first embodiment, in order to monitor the operation of the cooking cooker 1 over a wider range and acquire data, after turning on the main power switch 97, all the heating on the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 side is performed. The integrated control device MC has acquired the monitoring information regarding the cooking state. The integrated control device MC acquires monitoring information for the presence or absence of an abnormality from the heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130 via the signal transmission unit 73.

In the inverter circuit board 80, an inverter circuit 81R dedicated to the IH coil 17R on the right side and an inverter circuit 81L dedicated to the IH coil 17L on the left side are mounted one by one.

The two inverter circuits 81L and 81R are driven independently of each other by the IH control unit 90. When these inverter circuits are generically referred to, the reference numeral is "81".

Details of the two inverter circuits 81L and 81R will be described later with reference to FIG. 33.

In FIGS. 29 and 30, 95 is a speech synthesizer that synthesizes electronically created speech. The voice synthesizer 95 notifies the user of an input operation and a notification when an abnormality occurs by voice from the speaker 95S each time. The voice synthesizer 95 is a part that constitutes the notification unit AN (see FIG. 29).

The temperature detection circuit 93 described above is connected to at least seven temperature sensors TS3 to TS9. Specifically, there are temperature sensors TS3 to TS9 for detecting the temperature of the top plate 15, the atmospheric temperature of the IH coil installation space CK, the temperature of the heat sink 82 of the inverter circuit board 80, the temperature of the integrated display unit 30, and the like. .. The temperature detection circuit 93 receives temperature detection information from the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9, and sends the temperature detection results to the IH control unit 90.

The temperature sensors TS3 to TS9 may be either a non-contact type such as an infrared sensor or a contact type such as a thermistor, and they are used alone or in combination.

Of the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9, two temperature sensors TS5 and TS6 are non-contact sensors such as an infrared sensor. As shown in FIG. 19, these two temperature sensors TS5 and TS6 are arranged in the gaps in the central portions of the IH coils 17L and 17R, respectively, and receive infrared signals from the top plate 15 direction. That is, this makes it possible to measure the bottom surface temperature of the object to be heated, such as a metal pot or frying pan containing the object to be cooked, in a non-contact manner.

Of the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9, two temperature sensors TS3 and TS4 use a thermistor as a contact type sensor. These temperature sensors TS3 and TS4 are in direct contact with the lower surface of the top plate 15, or are in contact with the lower surface of the top plate 15 via a heat conductive inclusion. Thereby, the temperature of the top plate 15 can be measured.

Of the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9, one temperature sensor TS7 (see FIG. 19) uses a thermistor as a contact type sensor and is installed on the upper surface of the holder 50. Then, the atmospheric temperature of the integrated display unit 30 and the input operation unit 40 is detected. Further, the two temperature sensors TS8 and TS9 use a thermistor and are attached to the upper surface of the heat sink 82 as described above.

The lower unit 200 is also provided with at least two temperature sensors TS1 and TS2 in order to detect the internal space temperature of the lower unit 200, but the details will be described later.

In FIGS. 29 and 30, reference numeral 62 denotes a cooling fan drive circuit, which controls the drive power of the drive motors 60M and 61M of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61. That is, the blowing capacities of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are independently changed from each other in multiple stages by the control by the cooling fan drive circuit 62.

In FIG. 30, reference numeral 63 denotes a display unit drive circuit, which can control the operations of the integrated display unit 30, the left side display unit 31L, and the right side display unit 31R, and has a function of displaying necessary information.
The display unit drive circuit 63 may be configured by a dedicated microcomputer. Further, the control program (software) that exerts the function of the display unit drive circuit 63 may be incorporated in the integrated control device MC. The display unit drive circuit 63 is mounted on the upper surface of the operation board 41 (see FIGS. 24 and 25).

In FIG. 30, reference numeral 84 denotes a vibration-sensitive device that detects shaking when an earthquake occurs. When a predetermined seismic intensity (acceleration) or higher is detected, a vibration detection signal is sent to the integrated control device MC, and the integrated control device MC Upon receiving the signal, it is determined that an earthquake has occurred, and the power supply of all the heating means in use is shut off instantly.

In FIGS. 29 and 30, reference numeral 49 denotes a wireless communication unit also shown in FIG. 19, which transmits information in response to a command from the integrated control device MC. In addition, information from the outside is acquired in response to a command from the integrated control device MC. For example, it receives a "peak cut signal" that reduces total power consumption.

(Lower unit 200)
Next, the lower unit 200 will be described.
In FIGS. 12 to 17, 101 is a lower case (lower housing) constituting the outer shell of the main body 110 of the lower unit 200. The lower case 101 is formed by pressing a thin metal plate such as a zinc steel plate, or by joining a plurality of thin metal plates by spot welding or screws. The first embodiment is composed of three thin metal plates as described below.

101H is a body portion forming three surfaces (vertical surfaces) at the rear and left and right portions of the lower case 101, and 101U is a flat plate-shaped bottom plate that completely closes the bottom opening of the body portion 101U. Reference numeral 101C is an inclined portion, and is a wall surface inclined forward as it goes downward so as not to hit the installation port 2A of the kitchen furniture 2 when the cooking cooker 1 is installed in the kitchen furniture 2.

The 101F is a front plate constituting the front surface of the lower case 101, and is a flat plate as a whole. When the door 114 is closed, the rear surface of the door 114 is in close contact with the front surface of the front plate 101F so that microwaves do not leak from the gap between the front plate 101F and the door 114. Reference numeral 101B is a rear wall surface (rear vertical wall) that continuously rises vertically to the upper end of the inclined portion 101C of the lower case 101.

The lower unit 200 includes two independent heating sources. One of them is the microwave heating source 189 of the microwave heating device 120. The other is the oven heating source 188 of the oven heating device 140. The oven heating source 188 heats the heating chamber (oven chamber) 113 from the outside of the wall surface thereof, but may be present inside the heating chamber 113 and directly heat the object to be cooked. In the following description, unless there is a particular contradiction, the "microwave heating source 189" will be described on the premise that the "inverter circuit board 121" described later is not included.

12, 13, and 15 show the main parts of the microwave heating device 120.
From the front side, they are installed in the following order.
The inverter circuit board 121 (see FIG. 14) on which the inverter circuit 121A (see FIG. 30) is mounted is arranged on the most front side.

Behind the inverter circuit board 121, a magnetron 122 that is a source of microwaves and a waveguide 123 that surrounds the oscillating portion 122A of the magnetron 122 are arranged.

Further, behind the waveguide 123, an antenna case 124 connected to the waveguide 123 and an antenna 125 in the antenna case are arranged respectively.
A motor 126 that rotates or rotates the antenna 125 during microwave heating is arranged behind the antenna case 124 (see FIG. 15).

In FIG. 13, 127 is a power supply circuit board that supplies electric power to the output of microwave heating and the magnetron 122, and is described later with a power supply circuit unit 120P (not shown) that receives commercial power from the filter circuit 54. The microwave heating control unit 130 is mounted.

In FIGS. 12 and 13, 128 is a third cooling fan (lower cooling fan), which is arranged directly below the box-shaped case A150 accommodating the inverter circuit board 121. The entire lower surface of the case A150 is open. That is, it has a box shape without a bottom surface.

Reference numeral 129 is a fourth cooling fan (lower cooling fan), which is arranged directly below the box-shaped case B151 on which the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 is placed. Several heat radiating fins are formed in parallel in the heat radiating unit 122H for the cooling air from the fourth cooling fan 129 to pass through. The case B151 has a box shape with the entire lower surface open and no bottom surface.

The case A150 constitutes one of the inlet ends of the lower air passage UH.
As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the case A150 has a vertical portion 308 extending in the vertical direction away from the side wall surface of the heating chamber 113 at a position directly above the intake port 152F.
The inverter circuit board 121 for the microwave heating source 188 is housed in the vertical portion 308 in the vertical direction.

The third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are, for example, axial fans. Then, it is supported by the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 so that the rotation axis in the center of the rotary blade is in the vertical (vertical) direction.

As described above, the case A150 and the case B151 have an opening on the entire bottom surface, and the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are arranged so as to lie inside the opening.

In FIG. 12, the wind direction plates 199 provided in two rows inside the case A150 are integrally or separately formed inside the case A150. The wind direction plate 199 is installed in order to efficiently flow the cooling air from the third cooling fan 128 to the inverter circuit board 121 and the two communication ports 138A and 138B described later.

In FIGS. 12 and 13, 152F is an intake port on the front side and is formed on the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. The air intake is composed of a number of small circular through holes, or rectangular or oval through holes. The intake port 152F is for the third cooling fan 128.

In FIGS. 12 and 13, 152B is an intake port on the rear side and is formed on the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. The air intake is composed of a number of small circular through holes, or rectangular or oval through holes. The intake port 152B is for the fourth cooling fan 129.

As shown in FIG. 14, a ventilation hole (first intake port) 164 for introducing the cooling outside air of the induction heating source 9 into the upper unit 100, and an outside air for cooling the microwave heating source 189. The second intake ports 152B and 152F for introducing the above into the lower unit 200 are arranged on opposite sides of the heating chamber 113.

In other words, when the cooker 1 is viewed from the front side, the second intake ports 152B and 152F are on the right side of the heating chamber 113, and the ventilation holes (first intake port) are on the left side. There are 164 and vents 64.

In FIG. 13, 153 is a duct installed above the heat radiating unit 122H, and guides the cooling air RF6 from the fourth cooling fan 129 that has passed through the heat radiating unit 122H to the downstream side as shown in FIG. It is a thing.

In FIGS. 12 and 13, 154 is a case C, which houses the power supply circuit board 127 and the microwave heating control unit 130 in a sealed state. The case C154 is made of a plastic material having excellent electrical insulation.

The case C154 is configured by superimposing two parts, a lid 154A on the rear side and a container-shaped or box-shaped main body 154B on the front side. The lid 154A closes the large opening formed on the front surface side of the main body 154B from the rear.

In the case C154, a power supply circuit board 127 and a board (not shown) to which the microwave heating control unit 130 is attached are attached to the main body 154B on the front side. At the time of maintenance and inspection, the lid 154A is opened so that various inspections and repairs of the power supply circuit board 127 and the microwave heating control unit 130 inside can be performed.

The case C154 is installed as far as possible from the back surface of the heating chamber 113 so as not to be affected by the heat from the heating chamber 113. Further, it is installed away from the bottom plate 101U so that even if a liquid such as water or a cooking liquid enters the inside of the lower case 101 from the upper unit 100 side, the electrical insulation property is not impaired. ing.

As described with reference to FIG. 12, the space in which the distance between the bottom wall 16S of the upper case 16 and the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 is the largest is the cavity 104.
In the cavity 104, a waveguide 123 forming a part of the microwave heating device 120 is arranged long in the left-right direction behind the heating chamber 113, and the case is behind the waveguide 123. C154 is arranged long in the left-right direction.

As described with reference to FIG. 12, the front horizontal wall 101T made of a metal plate provided on the front side of the lower case 101 is formed by bending the upper end of the front plate 101F of the lower case 101 rearward. The support metal fitting 198 on the lower case 101 side is fixed to the upper case 16.

In FIGS. 12 and 13, 131 is a door open / close detection mechanism provided as a countermeasure against radio wave leakage during microwave heating.
In order to ensure the safety of the microwave heating device, it is legally required to install the door open / close detection mechanism 131. A typical door open / close detection mechanism 131 of this type is known in patent documents such as Japanese Patent No. 4372099 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-214147.

According to the patent document, three types of switches, a latch switch, a door switch, and a monitor switch, are built in as the door open / close detection mechanism 131, and these switches are interlocked with the open / close of the door to detect the open / close with a time lag. Has been proposed.

Further, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-214147, the power supply of the inverter circuit is opened and closed by the first interlock switch and the second interlock switch, and the first interlock switch is inserted into the power supply circuit when a short-circuit failure occurs. It has been proposed to provide a monitor switch to turn off the fuse.

12 and 13 show the main parts of the door open / close detection mechanism 131 used in the first embodiment. In these figures, 132A is a latch switch and 132B is a door switch. If either one or both of the latch switch 132A and the door switch 132B is not opened due to an abnormality, the monitor switch 133 (FIG. 3) is used to shut off the power supply of the inverter circuit 121A mounted on the inverter circuit board 121. Not shown) is also provided.

The latch switch 132A is pushed by a pin 134 which is fixed to the door 114 side and protrudes to open and close the built-in contact. The door switch 132B is pushed by a pin 135 which is fixed to the door 114 side and protrudes, and the built-in contact is opened and closed.

In FIG. 12, 136A is an interlocking rod that transmits the movement of the door 114 to the latch switch 132A, and is urged toward the door by a compression spring so as to always return to the door side.
Reference numeral 136B is an interlocking rod that transmits the movement of the door 114 to the door switch 132B, and is urged toward the door by a compression spring so as to always return to the door side.

In FIG. 12, reference numeral 137 is a support plate to which the latch switch 132A, the door switch 132B, the monitor switch 133 (not shown), the interlocking rods 136A, 136B, and the like are collectively attached. The support plate 137 is fixed to the lower case 101 with a plurality of screws. The door open / close detection mechanism 131 is mainly composed of various switches mounted on the support plate 137 in this way.

If the mounting positions of the latch switch 132A and the door switch 132B vary in the manufacturing process, there is a concern that the timing of operating each switch may deviate from the specified value. Therefore, in the first embodiment, the closing detection unit 139 (see FIG. 30) of the door 114, which will be described later, is attached to the support plate 137 so that the entire support plate 137 can be removed. Specifically, as described above, the lower case 101 is firmly fixed to the support plate 137 with a plurality of screws. During manufacturing and after-sales service, the operation of the closure detection unit 139 can be checked, adjusted, and replaced.

In FIGS. 12 and 14, 138A is a communication port formed in the upper part of the case A150 accommodating the inverter circuit board 121, and 138B is a communication port formed in the upper and lower intermediate portions of the case A150.

As shown in FIG. 14, the communication port 138A guides a part of the cooling air RF5 from the third cooling fan 128 to the space 141 described later.

As shown in FIG. 14, the communication port 138B guides a part of the cooling air RF5 from the third cooling fan 128 to the space 142 described later, and uses it for cooling the infrared temperature sensor 160 described later. There is.

The temperature sensor 160 faces a hollow sensor case, a sensor substrate housed inside the sensor case, one or more infrared detection elements mounted on the surface of the sensor substrate, and the infrared detection element. The lens attached and fixed to the sensor case is configured as a main component.

The temperature sensors 160 may be provided at a plurality of locations in the heating chamber 113 so that the temperature can be detected in a wide range, and the direction of the temperature sensor 160 is not fixed and is automatically swung within a certain angle range. It may be in the form of detecting a temperature at a wide angle. For example, as a Japanese patent document, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-54250 proposes to use a plurality of temperature sensors.

In FIG. 14, 161 is a detection window facing the temperature sensor 160, and a gap may be formed between the temperature sensor 160 and the outer peripheral surface of the temperature sensor 160 so that cooling air can pass through. In the first embodiment, a gap of about several mm is formed.

In FIGS. 14 and 15, 162 is a cooking dish made of porcelain or heat-resistant plastic. The cooking plate 162 is formed to have external dimensions so that it can be taken out and put in from the front opening 113A of the heating chamber 113.

In FIG. 14, the HV is an effective height dimension from the upper surface of the cooking dish 162 to the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113. In FIG. 15, HX is the maximum height dimension from the upper surface of the cooking dish 162 to the ceiling surface of the recess 113T formed in the center of the heating chamber 113.

In the first embodiment, the effective height dimension HV is 94 mm, and the maximum height dimension HX is 100 mm. This is an example, and the present disclosure is not limited to the configuration of this dimension.

In FIG. 14, WH is the inner width dimension of the heating chamber 113. Since the heating chamber 113 is formed up to the front opening 113A in this inner width dimension, it can be said to be a frontage dimension that determines whether or not a cooking utensil such as an object to be cooked or a frying pan can be inserted. The inner width dimension WH is 310 mm.

In FIG. 15, WB is the depth dimension of the heating chamber 113. Similar to the width dimension WH (see FIG. 14), it can be said that it is a dimension that determines whether or not a cooking utensil such as an object to be cooked, a cooking plate 162, and a frying pan can be inserted. This depth dimension WB is about 310 mm.

The oven heating source 188 has a heater 163.
The heater 163 is an electric radiation type heater that heats the heating chamber 113 from the outside, for example, a sheathed heater. Alternatively, it is a mica heater in the form of a heater wire wound around the entire thin mica support plate.

The heater 163 is composed of two, an upper heater 163A and a lower heater 163B. The energization of these two heaters 163A and 163B is controlled independently of each other.
Reference numeral 163A is an upper heater fixed in close contact with or close to the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113, and 163B is a lower heater fixed in close contact with or close to the bottom surface of the heating chamber 113. ..

The upper heater 163A can select a multi-stage thermal power in the range of a maximum thermal power of 1000 W to a minimum thermal power of 50 W. As for the lower heater, a multi-stage thermal power can be selected in the range of a maximum thermal power of 1000 W to a minimum thermal power of 50 W.

In FIG. 14, 166R is a right partition plate vertically installed so as to form a gap GP5R between the heating chamber 113 and the right wall surface, and is formed of a thin metal plate.
166L is a left partition plate vertically installed so as to form a gap GP5L between the heating chamber 113 and the left wall surface, and is formed of a thin metal plate.
A heat insulating material (not shown) is inserted into the gaps GP5L and GP5R on the left and right sides of the heating chamber 113 to suppress heat conduction (heat dissipation) from the heating chamber 113.

Reference numeral 167 denotes an upper heat shield plate that covers the entire upper part of the upper heater 163A, and is made of a thin metal plate or heat-resistant plastic.
The GP6 is a gap formed between the upper heat shield plate 167 and the upper heater 163A, and has a size of about several mm to 10 mm. The gap GP6 is a closed space so that air does not flow to the outside. The peripheral edge of the upper heat shield plate 167 is fixed to the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113 in close contact with the upper end edge of the right side partition plate 166R and the left side partition plate 166L.

168 is a lower heat shield plate having a vertically symmetrical vertical cross-sectional shape with the upper heat shield plate 167. The lower heat shield plate covers the entire lower part of the lower heater 163B and is made of a thin metal plate or heat-resistant plastic.

The GP7 is a gap formed between the lower heat shield plate 168 and the lower heater 163B, and has a size of about several mm to 10 mm. This gap is a closed space so that air does not flow to the outside. The peripheral edge of the lower heat shield plate 168 is fixed to the bottom wall surface of the heating chamber 113 in close contact with the lower end edge of the right side partition plate 166R and the left side partition plate 166L.

169 is an upper case that is overlapped with the peripheral portion of the upper heat shield plate 167 so as to cover the entire upper portion of the upper heat shield plate 167. Reference numeral 170 denotes a lower case that is overlapped with the peripheral portion of the lower heat shield plate 168 so as to cover the entire lower portion of the lower heat shield plate 168.

As shown in FIG. 14, the upper case 169 and the lower case 170 have a vertically symmetrical shape and are made of a thin metal plate or heat-resistant plastic. The GP8 is a gap formed between the upper case 169 and the upper heat shield plate 167, and has a size of about several mm to 10 mm. The gap GP8 is a closed space so that air does not flow to and from the outside.

The GP9 is a gap formed between the lower case 170 and the lower heat shield plate 168, and has a size of about several mm to 10 mm. This gap GP9 is also a closed space so that air does not flow.

A sheet or plate-shaped heat insulating material 175A (not shown) is arranged in the gap GP6. Similarly, a sheet or plate-shaped heat insulating material 175B (not shown) is arranged in the gap GP8.

A sheet or plate-shaped heat insulating material 175C (not shown) is arranged in the gap GP7. Similarly, a sheet or plate-shaped heat insulating material 175D (not shown) is arranged in GP9. When each of these heat insulating materials 175A to 175D has a form in which a plurality of layers are stacked instead of a one-layer structure, the heat insulating performance is further improved. The planar size (vertical and horizontal dimensions) of each of the heat insulating materials 175A to 17D is at least larger than the respective installation ranges of the upper heater 163 and the lower heater 163B.

In FIG. 14, 171 is a partition plate in which a passage 172 through which the cooling air RF5 flows is partitioned above the upper case 169. A communication port 173 is opened in the upper part of the rear wall surface of the partition plate 171, and the inlet end of the exhaust duct 102 is connected to the communication port 173.

In FIG. 15, reference numeral 174 is a communication port formed at the rear portion of the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113, and the entrance portion of the exhaust duct 102 is connected to the communication port 174. Reference numeral 102E is a terminal portion that is the final outlet of the cooling air.

As shown in FIG. 15, the exhaust duct 102 includes two independent internal passages 102A and 102B at the top and bottom, and the inverter circuit board 121 is cooled in the internal passage 102A on the upper side. After that, the cooling air RF5 flows.
Further, in the other internal passage 102B, the cooling air RF6 introduced into the heating chamber 113 and whose temperature has risen flows.

As will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 32, the exhaust duct 102 includes an internal passage (internal path) 102A passing through the outside of the heating chamber 113 and an internal passage (internal path) 102B passing through the inside of the heating chamber 113. This is the part where they meet.

The wind speed of the cooling air RF5 is increased by the outlet of the cooling air RF5 in which the opening area of the air passage is narrowed. Therefore, the cooling air RF6 is attracted by the cooling air RF5 in the vicinity of the discharge port. By such an action, the gas inside the heating chamber 113 is sucked into the internal passage 102B.
As a result, both the two cooling air RF5 and RF6 are efficiently discharged from the exhaust port 20 to the outside of the cooking cooker 1. It should be noted that, instead of adopting such an attraction structure, a method of merging at the upstream stage before entering the exhaust duct 102 may be adopted.

In FIG. 15, 180 is a large power supply port formed on the back wall (rear wall surface) 113B of the heating chamber 113, and 181 is a cover that closes the power supply port 180 from the outside, and is a heat-resistant plastic that transmits microwaves. It is formed in a plate shape from heat-resistant glass. The cover 181 is fixed to the outside of the back wall (rear wall surface) 113B.

The cover 181 is in close contact with the back wall (rear wall surface) 113B. The antenna case 124 is fixed to the back wall 113B of the heating chamber 113 so as to cover the entire back side of the cover 181. The cover 181 is inserted inside the front opening of the antenna case 124 as shown in FIG.

In FIG. 15, reference numeral 123 denotes a waveguide connected to the back side of the cover 181. The motor 126 for driving the antenna is thus fixed to the back surface side of the waveguide 123 via a heat-resistant sealing material 184.

The 126A is a rotation shaft of the antenna driving motor 126, and is installed horizontally in the front-rear direction. The antenna 125 is fixed to the free end side (front end portion) of the rotating shaft 126A. Although the rotating shaft 126A is made of plastic or ceramic material, only a certain range from the antenna 125 side is made of metal, and from there to the antenna driving motor 126 is heat-resistant and insulated from plastic, ceramic, etc. It may be formed of a material rich in properties.

In FIG. 15, reference numeral 185 is a radio wave sealing chamber formed in a predetermined size around the rotation shaft 126A. This radio wave sealing chamber has a so-called choke chamber structure. Further, in order to prevent microwave leakage more effectively, a radio wave absorber (not shown) is arranged closer to the antenna driving motor 126 than the choke structure, and microwaves from the periphery of the rotating shaft 126A are arranged. You may try to prevent leakage. As for the choke structure in the microwave heating device, Japanese patent documents include, for example, JP-A-2011-174669, JP-A-2010-255978, and JP-A-63-172828 (a quarter wavelength choke). Since there is a combination of a room and a radio wave absorber), detailed explanation will be omitted.

In FIG. 15, LA shows the dimensions from the back wall (rear wall surface) 113B of the heating chamber 113 to the end of the antenna driving motor 126. Hereinafter, this dimension will be referred to as a "protruding dimension". It is desirable to reduce this protruding dimension LA, but in reality, as described above, the dimensions of the antenna case 124 and the radio wave sealing chamber 185 are also required, and even if the external dimensions of the antenna driving motor 126 are reduced, there is a limit. There is. This protruding dimension LA is 70 mm.

In FIG. 15, GP10 is a gap between the back surface of the antenna drive motor 126 and the inclined portion 101C of the lower case 101, and the gap between the upper end of the motor 126 is 69 mm and the gap between the lower end and the lower case 101C is 53 mm. Degree. It is dimensionally impossible to arrange the case C154 in the gap GP10. Therefore, in the first embodiment, the case C154 is arranged so as to be displaced to the right from directly behind (behind) the antenna drive motor 126.
This makes it possible to incorporate the microwave heating device 120 in a narrow space behind the heating chamber 113.

(Door 114)
Next, the internal structure of the door 114 will be described.
In FIG. 15, reference numeral 190 denotes a metal or plastic frame constituting the outer shell of the door 114, which is formed in a frame shape when viewed from the front side. Reference numeral 192 is an inner frame, which is made of a metal plate. An opening serving as a viewing window 192W is formed in the central portion of the inner frame 192.

Reference numeral 191 denotes a cover in which an outer peripheral edge portion is fixed between the inner frame 192 and the frame 190 so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 192, and is transparent and heat resistant so that the heating chamber 113 can be seen. It is made of plastic or glass.

Reference numeral 193 is an inner seal frame in which innumerable small holes having dimensions that do not allow microwaves to pass through are formed in a portion corresponding to the viewing window 192W. The inner seal frame is formed by press-molding a thin metal plate as a whole, and a choke chamber 194 having an inlet (slit) formed on the heating chamber 113 side is formed on the outer peripheral edge portion.

Reference numeral 195 is a sealing plate made of a thin metal plate. As shown in FIG. 15, the outer peripheral edge portion of the seal plate 195 is bent in a series toward the inner seal frame 193 side. The choke chamber 194 is a space surrounded by the outer peripheral edge portion of the seal plate 195 and the inner seal frame 193.

When the door 114 is completely closed, both the outer peripheral edge portion of the seal plate 195 and the inner seal frame 193 are in contact with the surface of the front plate 101F of the lower case 101. Therefore, the microwave supplied to the inside of the heating chamber 113 does not leak from the door 114 and the opening 113A on the front surface of the heating chamber 113.

Reference numeral 196 denotes a transparent sealing plate provided inside a portion of the inner frame 192 corresponding to the viewing window 192W, which is made of heat-resistant glass. Reference numeral 197 is a metal upper shielding plate having a width dimension equal to at least the width of the door 114 along the upper surface of the door 114. The upper shielding plate 197 is provided in an eaves shape close to the upper surface of the door 114, and is fixed to the lower case 101 with a fixing tool such as a metal screw so as to be electrically connected to the lower case 101.

Since the lower portion of the door 114 is supported by a hinge 176 (see FIGS. 12 and 13) in the lower case 101, the door 114 can be opened to a horizontal position by holding the handle portion 115 and pulling it toward the front.
At the initial stage of such opening, there is a concern that a gap is momentarily generated in the overlapping portion between the door 114 and the lower case 101 and a part of the microwave leaks. However, in the first embodiment, the upper shielding plate 197 is used. This allows such unwanted microwave leakage to be suppressed above the door 114.

As described with reference to FIG. 5, in view of the fact that the height dimension C1 of the front lowering portion 2F of the kitchen furniture 2 is recommended to be 40 mm or less, in FIGS. 16 and 17, H10 is the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16. It is a height dimension from to the lower surface of the flange 16A. In the first embodiment, it is set to 40 mm.

As described above, since the height dimension C1 of the front lowering portion 2F of the kitchen furniture 2 and the height dimension H10 below the flange 16A of the upper case 16 are the same (40 mm), when installed in the kitchen furniture 2, when installed in the kitchen furniture 2. The upper case 16 does not protrude below the front lowering portion 2F. Therefore, the space below the upper case 16 becomes larger than before, which is also advantageous when the lower case 101 is installed as described below.

In FIG. 17, 201 is an introduction port formed in the front portion of the right side wall surface of the heating chamber 113, and is formed of a large number of through holes having a diameter so as not to leak microwaves. The reason why the introduction port 201 is provided in the front portion of the right side wall surface of the heating chamber 113 is to supply a part of the cooling air RF6 to the vicinity of the inside of the door 114 and suppress fogging of the viewing window 192W of the door 114. be.
The cooling air RF6 after cooling the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 is guided to the introduction port 201 by the gap GP5R.

The temperature sensor 160 is located upstream of the introduction port 201 in the flow of the cooling air RF6, and a part of the cooling air RF6 is blown into the heating chamber 113 at the portion of the temperature sensor 160. The amount of cooling air RF6 reaching the introduction port 201 is small. However, the purpose of injecting air from the introduction port 201 is to "suppress fogging" of the seal plate 196 inside the door 114, and there is no problem with a small air volume. It is not necessary to adopt the supply of air from the narrow gap around the temperature sensor 160.

(Control means of lower unit 200)
Next, the details of the various control means in the lower unit 200 will be described with reference to the block diagram shown in FIG. 30 again.
In FIG. 30, the microwave heating control unit 130 controls the electric power supplied to the inverter circuit 121A of the inverter circuit board 121, the magnetron 122, the antenna driving motor 126, and the two cooling fans 128 and 129, and these are used. It controls the start, stop, operating conditions, etc. of the operation of.

The power supply circuit of the microwave heating control unit 130 is prepared separately from the power supply circuit 91 mounted on the power supply circuit board 55, and is a dedicated circuit of the microwave heating device 120. The power may be supplied from the power supply circuit 91.

The power supply circuit of the microwave heating control unit 130 is mounted on the power supply circuit board 127 (see FIG. 12). Various electric components (diodes, etc.) that convert AC power to DC are mounted on the power circuit board 127, and are housed in a case C154 in a sealed state.

When the microwave heating control unit 130 receives the command signal from the power control unit 72, the microwave heating control unit 130 operates so as to reduce the total power consumption of the microwave heating device 120 in response to the command signal, and outputs the magnetron 122. There is a function of transmitting a command signal that lowers the power consumption to the inverter circuit 121A.

The microwave heating control unit 130 includes a temperature sensor TS1 that detects the temperature of the heat radiating unit 122H of the magnetron 122. If the temperature of the heat radiating unit 122H of the magnetron 122 is higher than the specified value even after microwave cooking is completed, the command signal for continuing the operation of the fourth cooling fan 129 until the temperature drops is sent to the fourth cooling. Send to fan 129. In FIG. 30, the cooling fan drive circuit for the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 is not shown.

Reference numeral 139 is a closure detection unit for the door 114. The closure detection unit 139 electrically detects the opening / closing state of any one or more of the latch switch 132A, the second door switch 132B, and the monitor switch 133 by the current flowing through each circuit or the opening / closing signal. That is, it is a detection unit corresponding to the operation of the door open / close detection mechanism 131 described above.

Since the circuit board constituting the closure detection unit 139 is attached to the support plate 137, whether or not the circuit board can be operated normally by removing the support plate 137 for inspection or measuring with the support plate 137 installed. Can be inspected (see FIG. 12).

Reference numeral 158 is a non-contact temperature measuring unit (infrared temperature measuring unit) that detects the temperature of food, cooking utensils, etc. placed in the heating chamber 113, and receives the temperature sensor 160 and the measurement signal from the temperature sensor. It is composed of a circuit (not shown) that analyzes and converts it into temperature information.

The heating chamber control unit 159 controls the electric power supplied to the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, and controls the start and stop of their operations, operating conditions (thermal power, that is, calorific value) and the like. The control circuit of the heating chamber control unit 159 is mounted on the power supply circuit board 127 (see FIG. 13).

When the heating chamber control unit 159 receives the command signal from the power control unit 72, the heating chamber control unit 159 operates so as to reduce the total power consumption of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B in response to the command signal, and the upper heater 163A. And has a function of transmitting a command signal that lowers the output of the lower heater 163. In addition, in order to reduce the outputs of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163, the energization rate per unit time is changed to change the substantial thermal power.

(Drive circuit of induction heating source 9)
Next, a configuration example of the drive circuit of the IH coils 17L and 17R of the cooking cooker 1 will be described. For the sake of brevity, FIG. 33 illustrates an example of a circuit showing only one IH coil 17R.

In the cooking cooker 1, the induction heating operation is performed by supplying high-frequency power to the IH coils 17L and 17R by the drive circuit 74.
The drive circuit 74 is provided for each IH coil. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the drive circuit 74 of the IH coil 17R on the right side. The drive circuit of the left IH coil 17L may be the same or different.

As shown in FIG. 33, the drive circuit 74 includes a DC power supply circuit 75, an inverter circuit 81R, a resonance capacitor 76, an input current detection unit 77a, and an output current detection unit 77b.
The current detection data of the input current detection unit 77a and the output current detection unit 77b is sent to the IH control unit 90.

The input current detection unit 77a detects the current input from the AC power supply 99 to the DC power supply circuit 22, that is, the current input to the drive circuit 74, and outputs a voltage signal indicating the detected value, that is, the input current value to the IH control unit 90. Output to. 99 is a commercial AC power source.

The DC power supply circuit 75 includes a diode bridge 78a, a reactor 78b, and a smoothing capacitor 78c, converts an AC voltage input from the AC power supply 99 into a DC voltage, and outputs the AC voltage to the inverter circuit 81R.

The inverter circuit 81R is a so-called half-bridge type inverter in which the IGBTs 79a and 79b as the switching elements 83 are connected in series with the output of the DC power supply circuit 75. In the inverter circuit 81R, diodes 79c and 79d are connected in parallel with the IGBTs 79a and 79b as flywheel diodes, respectively.
The inverter 81R converts the DC power output from the DC power supply circuit 75 into high-frequency AC power of about 20 kHz to 80 kHz, so-called high-frequency power, and supplies the DC power to the resonance circuit including the IH coil 17R and the resonance capacitor 76.

The resonance circuit including the resonance capacitor 76 has a resonance frequency corresponding to the inductance of the IH coil 17R, the capacitance of the resonance capacitor 76, and the like.

With this configuration, a high-frequency current of about several tens of A flows through the IH coil 17R, and the high-frequency magnetic flux generated by the flowing high-frequency current induces the object N to be heated on the top plate 15 directly above the IH coil 17R. It is heated.

The IGBTs 79a and 79b are composed of, for example, a silicon-based semiconductor, but may be configured using a wide bandgap semiconductor such as silicon carbide or a gallium nitride-based material.

The power control switching element 83 described with reference to FIG. 12 is the IGBTs 79a and 79b referred to in FIG. 33.
By using a wide bandgap semiconductor for this IGBT, the energization loss as a switching element can be reduced. Further, even if the switching frequency, that is, the drive frequency is set to a high frequency, that is, even if the switching frequency is set to a high speed, heat dissipation is good. Therefore, the heat radiation fins of the heat sink 82 to which the switching elements (IGBTs) 79a and 79b are attached can be miniaturized, and the drive unit can be miniaturized and the cost can be reduced.

The output current detection unit 77b is connected to a resonance circuit including an IH coil 17R and a resonance capacitor 76. The output current detection unit 77b detects, for example, the current flowing through the IH coil 17R, that is, the current output from the drive circuit 74, and outputs a voltage signal corresponding to the detected value to the IH control unit 90. In this configuration, the half-bridge type inverter has been described, but the circuit for driving the IH coil 17R may be a full-bridge type inverter. Further, although the circuit described with reference to FIG. 33 is a current resonance type, a voltage resonance type may be adopted.

As described in FIG. 19, the wireless communication unit 49 is a wireless communication means for wirelessly communicating with the home gateway 411 that comprehensively manages the power consumption and operation information of the home electric appliance 400 in the home. Yes, it can send and receive wireless signals.

The wireless communication unit 49 is connected to the integrated control device MC by communication wiring, but the longer the wiring, the more easily it is affected by noise. Therefore, the wireless communication unit 49 and the integrated control device MC are arranged close to each other and wirelessly. It is desirable to shorten the wiring connecting the communication unit 49 and the integrated control device MC.

In consideration of the influence of the noise described above, in the first embodiment, the wireless communication unit 49 is installed at the right end of the input operation unit 40. Specifically, the wireless communication unit 49 is installed at the right end of the operation board 41. Further, the integrated control device MC is installed in the left and right center portions of the input operation unit 40 (see FIG. 19).

(Cooling air passage)
Next, the configuration of the cooling air passage will be described.
In FIG. 12, in the cooking cooker 1 of the first embodiment, the inside of the main body case HC installed in the kitchen furniture 2 is formed of the upper space 300A and the partition wall by the bottom surface 16S of the metal upper case 16. It is divided into two spaces, a lower space 300B formed below. That is, the bottom surface functions as a "partition wall" 16S, and the inside of the main body case HC is divided into two upper and lower spaces.

The IH coils 17L and 17R housed in the upper space 300A and the upper air passage AH for guiding cooling air to the inverter circuit board 80 for the IH coil pass through the ventilation hole 64 penetrating the partition wall 16S. The outside air is introduced from the outside of the lower case 101 through the lower case 101.

On the other hand, the lower air passage UH for guiding the cooling air for the microwave heating device 120 is formed in the lower space 300B. The heat radiating portion 122H of the microwave heating device 120 is arranged in the lower air passage UH. The heat radiating portion 122H is cooled by the air introduced from the second intake port 152B formed at the right end portion of the bottom surface of the lower case 101. Further, the inverter circuit board 121 of the microwave heating device 120 is cooled by the air introduced from the second intake port 152F formed at the right end of the bottom surface of the lower case 101.

Then, the cooling air flowing through the upper air passage AH and the cooling air flowing through the lower air passage UH do not merge in the middle. The cooling air inside the upper unit 100 is discharged into the gap GP1 behind the partition plate 52, and is discharged from the exhaust port 20 to the outside of the cooking cooker 1.

On the other hand, the cooling air from the lower unit 200 passes through the exhaust duct 102 extending vertically into the same void GP1, and is finally discharged from the exhaust port 20 to the outside of the cooking cooker 1.

Next, the entire path of the cooling air passage will be described with reference to FIG.
As is clear from FIG. 32, the air (outside air) in the external space of the cooking cooker 1 passes through the inside of the main body case HC of the cooking cooker 1 in two ways.

First path: From the ventilation hole 164 formed on the left side surface of the lower case 101, via the ventilation hole 64 on the bottom surface of the upper case 16, the inverter circuit board 80 and the IH coils 17L and 17R are connected from the first cooling fan 60. The path to cool and reach the exhaust port 20. In FIG. 32, this is referred to as the "upper air passage" AH.
Second path: Outside air is sucked from two intake ports 152F and 152B formed at the right end of the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. Then, one of the outside air cools the inverter circuit board 121 via the third cooling fan 128. The other outside air cools the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 via the fourth cooling fan 129. As described above, there are two second paths, but finally they enter the common exhaust duct 102 and reach the exhaust port 20. In FIG. 32, this is described as the "lower air passage" UH.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the inside of the main body case HC is divided into an upper space 300A formed by the bottom surface 16S of the metal upper case 16 and a lower space 300B formed below the partition wall. It is divided into two spaces, each of which has independent air passages (upper air passage AH and lower air passage UH), and each of these air passages is equipped with dedicated cooling fans 60, 128, 129. Is.
The upper unit 100 also has a second cooling fan 61, which cools the inside of the upper unit 100 in cooperation with the first cooling fan 60.

(Control menu and cooking menu of the central operation unit)
Next, a control menu displayed on the integrated display unit 30 by the central operation unit 40M and selectable will be described with reference to FIG. 34.

As described above, the "control menu" that can be selected by the left operation unit 40L and the right operation unit 40R that use the induction heating source 9 is, for example, boiling, boiling, and fried food (automatic cooking) as shown in FIG. 38. And so on.
However, there are 11 types of control menus that can be selected by the central operation unit 40M (except in the case of the cooperative cooking mode described later) as shown in FIG. 34. These 11 types of control menus may be collectively referred to as a "control menu group" of the central operation unit 40M. An instruction for executing these control menu groups is a "control menu program", which is stored in the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC.

The "control menu" that can be selected by the central operation unit 40M is not classified by the name of the final cooking obtained by heating with the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188, the name of the foodstuff, or the like. That is, the names of foods and cooking (for example, "hamburger" and "tempura") cannot be selected in the "control menu".
When referring to a specific number or aggregate of cooking that can be realized by one control menu, it is called a "cooking menu". For example, there are "hamburger steak" and "paella" in the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode.

The "control menu" selected by the central operation unit 40M can be said to be broadly classified in consideration of the type, method, conditions, etc. of heating until the cooking is completed, so the name of the control menu is, for example, "warm". It is conceptual and comprehensive, such as "oven (cooking)".

The control menu selected by the central operation unit 40M includes a control menu called a "range grill control menu" or an "RG control menu" that uses the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. Further, the control menu selected by the central operation unit 40M includes a "cooperative cooking mode" described later.

The RG control menu and the "cooperative cooking mode" described later are basically different. Further, the RG control menu and the combined cooking mode described later are also different. These will be described in detail later.

The control menu that can be selected by the central operation unit 40M with reference to FIG. 34 will be described in detail below. What is shown in FIG. 34 is not the control menu of the "cooperation control mode".

The “left display area” in FIG. 34 means the first area (display area) 30L of the integrated display unit 30. The "center display area" also means the second area 30M, and the "right display area" also means the third area 30R.

When the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M is operated, the control menu "warm" in the left display area of FIG. 34 is always displayed first in the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30. This is because the RG control menu called "warm" is set by default.

As is clear from the "left display area" in FIG. 34, in addition to "warming", a total of 11 RGs such as "microwave oven manual", "boiled leaf vegetables", "RG cooking", "grill", and "oven" There is a control menu. However, the "center heater" described at the bottom of the "left display area" in FIG. 34 is not actually displayed because it is not supported by the upper unit 100.

The "RG control menu" is a control pattern that uses microwave heating (range) and an oven (heating chamber 113). The control menus such as "range" and "range (manual)" are control patterns using microwaves, which will be described in detail later.

The "center heater" corresponds to the case where another induction heating unit (center induction heating unit) is added between the right heating unit 17HR and the left heating unit 17HL in the upper unit 100. Strictly speaking, it is neither a range nor a grill. Further, "RG" is an abbreviation for a range grill. Here, the "microwave oven" refers to cooking using a microwave heating source 189. "Grill" refers to cooking using an oven heating source 188.

In the first area of FIG. 34, a total of 11 types such as "warm" and "grill" are displayed, all of which are "RG control menus". However, the "composite cooking" in which two or more heating sources are used in combination is "RG cooking", "RG manual" and the like. "Warming" is not a combined cooking menu because it uses only the microwave heating source 9. Also, it does not correspond to the menu of cooperative cooking.

The content described in the "center display area" of FIG. 34 indicates the content displayed in the second area (display area) 30M of the integrated display unit 30. The contents of the default settings of the "center display area" are listed in the column to the right of the "center display area".

The content described in the "right display area" of FIG. 34 indicates the content displayed in the third area (display area) 30R of the integrated display unit 30. The contents of the default settings of the "right display area" are listed in the right column of the "right display area". The blank part means that nothing is displayed.

A database of RG control menus is created according to the above rules.
For this reason,
(1) When the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M is operated, the first specific screen 30SP, which will be described later, is displayed on the integrated display unit 30, and guidance information is used as a reference for shifting to the cooperative cooking mode. 30P is displayed.
(2) When the input key 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M is operated, the combined cooking mode (RG control menu group) is selected, and in the first area 30L, one of the control menus, "warm", is set as the default display. The temperature condition of "80 ° C." is displayed in the second area 30M, and no control condition is displayed in the third area 30R. Further, in this embodiment, the guidance information 30P, which is a reference for cooking, is displayed in the third area 30R. These will be described later with reference to FIG. 48 and the like.

When the user operates the input key 43M1 to display one RG control menu in the center of the first area, the RG control menu is one of the 11 types of menus shown in FIG. 34. The "control conditions" (temperature, thermal power, time, etc.) corresponding to the above are displayed at the same time in the second area 30M and the third area 30R.

If the selected RG control menu belongs to the "composite cooking mode" such as "RG cooking", then the input key 43MS for instructing the start of the heating operation is operated by the user. , The mode shifts to the "composite cooking mode" by both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, and the heating operation is started.
The cooperative cooking mode will be described later.

Detailed data such as specific contents, control conditions, and additional information of the RG control menu group shown in FIG. 34, a display program, and the like are stored in the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC.
The outline of the main RG control menu will be described below.

(1) Warming: This is a kind of "single (heating) control menu" for heating food using a microwave heating source 189. This "warming" is also suitable for reheating food. Since the default setting is "80 ° C.", the microwave irradiation is automatically stopped when the food is heated to 80 ° C. Note that "80 ° C." is a target temperature, and this temperature can be adjusted by the user before the start of heating.
As shown in FIG. 34, the temperature can be set in 5 ° C increments in the range of 0 ° C to 90 ° C. For heating frozen foods, it can be set in 2 ° C increments in the range of −10 to 0 ° C. The microwave heating output is fixed at 500 W.

(2) Range manual: Heating food using a microwave heating source 189, which is performed by setting a heating time. The microwave heating output can also be selected from three stages of 500W, 200W, and 100W. The default heating time is 1 minute, but at 500 W output, it can be set from 10 seconds to 15 minutes.
This "range manual" is also a kind of "independent (heating) control menu". That is, the RG control menu shown in FIG. 25 includes the independent control menu of the microwave heating source 189 as described above.

(3) Boiled leafy vegetables: It is suitable for boiling foods, especially leafy vegetables such as spinach and Chinese cabbage, using a microwave heating source 189. The microwave heating output value is not displayed, and "standard" is displayed as the default display in the second area. The non-contact temperature measuring unit (infrared temperature measuring unit) 158 measures the temperature rise and automatically stops heating. This "leaf vegetable boiled" is also one of the "single (heating) control menus".

(4) Boiled root vegetables: It is suitable for boiling foods, especially root vegetables such as potatoes that eat roots and rhizomes, using a microwave heating source 189. The microwave heating output value is not displayed, and "standard" is displayed as the default display in the second area. Since the heating power value is determined in advance on the cooking cooker 1 side, when adjusting the heating power, change the default display "standard" in the second area to "weak" or "strong" ( Must be selected).
This "leaf vegetable boiled" is also one of the "single (heating) control menus".

(5) Meat thawing: This is an RG control menu suitable for thawing various frozen meats.
Since the food is heated using the microwave heating source 189, it is one of the "single (heating) control menus".
(6) RG cooking: It is suitable for cooking using the heating chamber 113, and is cooked by combining microwave heating and oven heating. In other words, it is a kind of pure "complex cooking" menu.
A pattern in which microwave heating is performed first to heat food to some extent and then heated by the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, a pattern in which heating is performed in the reverse order, and a pattern in which microwave heating and heater heating are performed at the same time. There are three types. The heating power value (watt) at the time of microwave heating is not displayed, and the user can select one of "weak", "strong", etc. by looking at the display of the second area 30M and select the heating intensity. ..

(7) RG re-cooking: It is suitable for reheating cooked food using the heating chamber 113. This is also a type of pure "complex cooking" menu. A microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188 are used together.
(8) RG manual: It is suitable for cooking using the heating chamber 113, and is cooked by combining microwave heating and oven heating. It should be noted that microwave heating is performed first, the food is heated to some extent, and then the pattern of heating with the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, the pattern of heating in the reverse order, and the microwave heating and the heater heating are performed at the same time. There are three types of patterns. This is also a type of pure "complex cooking" menu.

(9) Grill: The heating chamber 113 is used to heat food, and one or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B are used as the heating source. As described above, the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is not controlled, and the control of detecting the temperature rise of the food and stopping the heating operation is not performed. The heating power of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is determined in advance by the heating chamber control unit 159 on the side of the cooking cooker 1. Grilled fish is a typical application cooking. Incidentally, the rated thermal power of the upper heater 163A is 1000 W, and the rated thermal power of the lower heater 163B is also 1000 W. This is a kind of "single (heating) control menu".

(10) Oven: Food is heated using the heating chamber 113, and one or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B are used as the heating source. The temperature of the heating chamber 113 is measured by the temperature measuring unit 158, and the energization control is performed by the heating chamber control unit 159 so as to reach the set target temperature. As shown in FIG. 25, the default temperature is 180 ° C., so the user can change this target temperature if desired. As described in the section "Grill", the rated thermal power of the upper heater 163A is 1000 W, and the rated thermal power of the lower heater 163B is also 1000 W. Then, the energization rate for the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is controlled by the heating chamber control unit 159, and the calorific value of these two heaters 163A and 163B is controlled. This is a kind of "single (heating) control menu".

FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC and the central operation unit 40M. FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC and the central operation unit 40M.

Data indicating individual menu names (for example, "warm", "range manual", etc.) in a total of 10 "combined cooking modes (RG control menus)" that can be displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30. Is stored in the first layer of the storage device MM.

Data indicating "control conditions" (for example, "microwave output value", "energization time", etc.) that can be displayed in the second area 30M of the integrated display unit 30 is stored in the second layer of the storage device MM. There is.

The data indicating "control conditions" (for example, "heating time for grill cooking") that can be displayed in the third area 30R of the integrated display unit 30 and the reference information 30P are stored in the third layer of the storage device MM. I'm letting you.

(Collaboration cooking mode)
Next, the "cooperative cooking mode" will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36.
As shown in the figure, inside the storage device MM, the data of the first specific screen 30SP displayed when the input key 43MC is operated and the "cooperative cooking mode" read when the input key 43M1 is operated after that. The control data and the operation program (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as "cooperative operation program") are stored in a storage area different from the RG control menu.

Here, the data of the "cooperative cooking mode" and the "cooperative operation program" are information for specifying a plurality of heating sources used to execute an individual object to be cooked (for example, a hamburger), and various control conditions (various control conditions). Includes thermal power, standard heating temperature, etc.), control parameters, cooking process information, etc. That is, it is necessary for the microcomputer to execute the control procedure of the internal processing circuit and the processor that realizes each function of the integrated control device MC.

When one of the co-cooking modes is specified, the available heating sources and the order in which they operate are automatically determined. For example, for "hamburger", which is one of the cooking in the cooperative control mode (cooperative cooking menu), it is not necessary to first select either one of the right heating unit 17HR and the left heating unit 17HL. First, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the display means 30, and when the user sees the display and then selects, for example, the right heating unit 17HR, the cooperative cooking mode can be entered.

The first specific screen 30SP is displayed with the content of using the left heating unit 17HL in advance. The user can pre-set to use the right heating unit 17HR instead of using the left heating unit 17HL. However, such a setting may not be possible in some cases.
Further, when the right heating unit 17HR is used in the cooking step 1 and the heating is performed in the heating chamber 113 by the oven heating source 188 in the next cooking step 2, the information of the series of cooking steps is stored in the storage device MM. There is.

Further, as additional information 331 that can be used as a reference for the transition to the cooperative cooking mode, for example, information on the cooking process described later, information on the heating source to be used, control conditions (preheating completion temperature, etc.), and the next cooking process are performed. Therefore, guidance information, instruction information, etc. that prompt the user's input operation are stored in correspondence with each individual cooperative cooking mode.

In the following explanation, when preheating is required, it is called a "preheating process" up to the set (target) temperature, and the process of actually heating the object to be cooked after reaching the set temperature and contributing to cooking is the "cooking process". It is called "1" or "cooking process 2".
For example, in induction heating, the time when the user puts the object to be cooked on the object to be heated N which has already been heated to a desired temperature after the preheating process is completed and actually starts heating is the start time of the "cooking process". become.

(Operation of cooking cooker)
Next, an outline of the operation of the cooking cooker 1 having the above configuration will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 44.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart for explaining the entire control operation of the cooking device 1 before the start of cooking. FIG. 38 is a flowchart for explaining a control operation during induction cooking in the cooking cooker 1. FIG. 39 is a flowchart for explaining a control operation when microwave heating is performed during induction cooking in the cooking cooker 1. FIG. 40 is a flowchart for explaining the control operation of the cooking cooker 1. FIG. 41 is a flowchart for explaining the control operation of the cooking cooker 1. FIG. 42 is a flowchart for explaining the control operation of the cooking cooker 1. FIG. 43 is a list showing the correspondence between the cooling fan of the cooking device 1 and the type of cooking.

FIG. 37 will be described.
The basic operation program from the power-on to the start of cooking preparation is stored in the storage device MM inside the integrated control device MC.
In the built-in type cooker 1, the power plug 106A (not shown) is always connected to the commercial (alternating current) power supply 99 from the time when the kitchen furniture 2 is installed, so that the user can use the operation button 98 of the main power switch 97. Press (see FIGS. 20 and 30) to turn on the power (step ST1 in FIG. 37).

A predetermined low power supply voltage is supplied to the integrated control device MC via the DC power supply conversion unit 92 in the power supply circuit board 55, and the integrated control device MC is activated. The integrated control device MC itself starts diagnosing the presence or absence of an abnormality by its own control program.

Then, the presence or absence of abnormalities in the IH control unit 90, the heating chamber control unit 159, and the microwave heating control unit 130 that centrally control the induction heating source 9 is checked.

In the temperature detection circuit 93 of the upper unit 100, a total of seven temperature sensors TS3 to TS9 are provided in order to detect the temperature of the top plate 15, the temperatures of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R, the temperature in the vicinity of the integrated display unit 30, and the like. Since they are connected, the detection temperatures of those temperature sensors are transmitted to the temperature detection circuit 93. As a result, the IH control unit 90 can determine the presence or absence of an abnormality (ST2).

Further, the heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130 can also acquire the detected temperatures from the temperature sensors TS1 and TS2 and determine the presence or absence of an abnormality.

In step ST2, there is "transmission of activation information to the outside", which means that the wireless communication unit 49 gives a notice to the home gateway 411 in the kitchen KT of the start of operation of the cooking cooker 1. This will be explained later.

Since the temperature information of the main constituent parts built in the upper unit 100 is collected in the IH control unit 90, the IH control unit 90 performs an abnormal heating determination process as an abnormality monitoring control before the start of cooking. For example, when the temperature detected by the temperature sensor TS7 is higher than the heat resistant temperature (for example, 70 ° C.) of the electronic element such as the liquid crystal display screen 30D in the integrated display unit 30, the IH control unit 90 determines that the temperature is abnormally high. Then, the integrated control device MC is notified of the abnormality, and processing such as displaying or notifying that the operation cannot be started is executed. Note that this process may be executed by the integrated control device MC.

If no abnormality is found, the IH control unit 90 transmits a signal to the integrated control device MC. Then, the integrated display unit 30 is activated and displays that "cooking can be started because there is no abnormality" (ST3). The display screen at the initial time will be described later with reference to FIG. 45.
At the same time, the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the content similar to the content displayed by the integrated display unit 30 by voice (ST3).

In step ST3, the wireless communication unit 49 accesses the home gateway 411 and acquires information such as control menus and recipe information useful for health management within a range set in advance by the user. For example, the information previously transmitted by the user of the cooking cooker 1 to the home gateway 411 via the Internet 416 using the information communication terminal device 418 or the like can also be acquired when the integrated display unit 30 is activated.

When the cooking cooker 1 acquires some information, it is preferable to turn on a dedicated caution information lamp (not shown) provided near the input operation unit 40 of the upper unit 100 to notify the user. The inventory information of the refrigerator 401 is not acquired at this point.

Inventory information for refrigerated 401 is not acquired at this point. However, as shown in FIGS. 98 and 99, the inventory inquiry signal RQ1 is transmitted to the home gateway 411 at this point.

Next, after the abnormality determination is completed as described above, the integrated control device MC performs notification and voice guidance for prompting the selection of the heating means by the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 (ST4).

Then, it is determined whether or not the individual cooking by the left operation unit 40L or the right operation unit 40R, which is the individual operation unit, is selected without operating the input key 43M1 (STC).

If neither the input key 43M1 nor the input key 43MC is selected within a certain grace time (for example, 30 seconds), it is determined that neither the cooperative cooking mode nor the combined cooking is selected. If the user operates at least one of the left operation unit 40L and the right operation unit 40R immediately after step ST4 or within the above grace time, the heating source of the upper unit 100, that is, the IH coils 17L and 17R Only is determined to have been selected (“Yes” in step ST6).

On the other hand, when the input key 43MC is operated in the step STC, the process proceeds to the processing step STR1 of the cooperative cooking mode. The processing step STR1 in the cooperative cooking mode will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 53 to 98 and the like.

If step ST6 is "Yes" as described above, the process proceeds to the next step ST10. Subsequent control steps for induction heating will be described later with reference to FIG. 38.

On the other hand, when the heating source of the lower unit 200 is selected in step ST5, the integrated control device MC proceeds to the menu selection step ST8 of the two heating sources included in the lower unit 200. Note that this step ST5 is a case where the central operation unit 40M (input key 43M1) is operated.

In step ST8, as shown in FIG. 37, three types of menus (ST9A to ST9D) are sequentially displayed on the integrated display unit 30 in a fixed order. These three types of menus are a total of 10 control menus (see FIG. 34) displayed in the first area 30L described above.

The menu displayed at the stage of step ST8 in FIG. 37 displays the following three types of control menus on the premise that the heating source of the lower unit 200 is used.
(1) A cooking menu (ST9A) using at least one of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B. The "grill" and "oven" of the control menu shown in FIG. 34 correspond to this.
(2) A control menu (ST9B) in which the microwave heating device 120 is used in combination with the above (1). This corresponds to "RG cooking" in the control menu shown in FIG. 25.
(3) A control menu (ST9C) that uses only the microwave heating device 120. This corresponds to "range manual", "boiled leaf vegetables" and the like in the control menu shown in FIG. 34.
Here, the "cooperative cooking mode" is not displayed.

If it is found that the cooperative cooking mode is better from the middle, the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M can be operated to proceed to the stage of step STR1 in FIG. That is, it is possible to proceed to the cooperative cooking mode.

FIG. 38 shows the operation steps of the integrated control device MC after the step (ST11) in which the induction heating menu is selected.

Next, the control operation during induction heating will be described with reference to FIG. 38.
The following will be described with an example of using the right heating unit 17HR.
When the input key 43R1 on the right side is touched, the IH control unit 90 determines that the user has commanded the heating preparation operation.

It is estimated whether or not the object to be heated (metal pot, frying pan, etc.) N is placed above the IH coil 17R, or whether or not the bottom area of the object to be heated is larger than a predetermined value, and this estimation result is obtained. Is transmitted to the IH control unit 90, and it is determined whether the heat treatment is suitable for a pan with a standard diameter or a heat treatment suitable for a pan with a large diameter (step MS1).
If the pot is compatible but has a large diameter, or if it is not compatible with heating, the treatment will be different from that of the standard pot.

In response to a command from the IH control unit 90, the integrated control device MC displays a display prompting the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 to select the "IH control menu" of the desired cooking (MS2).

When the user selects and inputs the "IH control menu" for cooking, the heating power, the cooking time, etc. with the right operation unit 40R (MS3), the induction heating operation is started in earnest at the right heating unit 17HR (MS4).
There are seven "IH control menus" displayed on the integrated display unit 30: "high-speed heating", "fried food", "boiler", "preheat", "rice cooking", "boil", and "boil + heat retention". be. However, in order to simplify the operability, it may be set so that a part or all of the above seven IH control menus cannot be selected in the above-mentioned "function setting".

When the user selects any one of these seven IH control menus, the control conditions corresponding to those IH control menus are automatically selected by the built-in program of the IH control unit 90, and the energization amount of the IH coil 17R. (Firepower), energizing time, etc. are set. Depending on the IH control menu, a display prompting the user to set an arbitrary thermal power, energization time, etc. is displayed on the display unit (MS5). The operation program of the control conditions corresponding to the IH control menu may be stored in the integrated control device MC instead of the IH control unit 90.

Unless the user operates the input key 43R1 again to stop using the input key 43R1 within a certain time (for example, 15 seconds or 30 seconds) after the above display is performed, the IH control unit 90 guides the user after that time has elapsed. The inverter circuit 81R of the heating circuit 94R is driven to start induction heating (MS6). The input function of the input key 43R1 changes each time it is touched, and it is possible to command the start of the heating operation and the stop of the heating operation.

The case of the "large-diameter pan" is basically the same as in steps MS1 to MS7, but as the IH control menu, some of the seven IH control menus shown in step MS3 in FIG. 38 cannot be selected. The "high-speed heating menu" can be heated only in the case of "normal pot" or "large-diameter pot" using the IH coil 17L on the left side. The small pot means that the diameter of the bottom surface of the pot is less than 10 cm in the first embodiment, and it is detected as unsuitable for induction heating, and induction heating cannot be performed.

Next, the integrated power control operation when two or more different types of heating sources are used at the same time, such as induction heating and microwave heating, will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 40. The examples described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 40 are not in the case of the above-mentioned "cooperative cooking mode".

The example shown in FIG. 39 is a case where the user tries to perform microwave heating using the heating chamber 113 of the lower unit 200 during the period in which the induction heating cooking is performed in the upper unit 100 first. Even when oven cooking, grill cooking, etc. are performed using both or one of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B during the period of induction cooking, as described in FIG. 39. Basic total power control (in the entire cooking cooker 1) is performed by the integrated control device MC and the power control unit 72.
Further, in this case, it is necessary to select the combined cooking mode with the central operation unit 40M.

When the user tries to perform microwave heating using the heating chamber 113 of the lower unit 200, the main power switch 97 is first turned on, and the central operation unit 40M of the input operation unit 40 selects the heating source of the lower unit 200. There is a need to.
However, an easy way to do this is to open the door 114 as is. That is, in the first embodiment, when the upper unit 100 is in operation (when the main power switch 97 is in the ON state), cooking by the lower unit 200 can be started as it is. Therefore. It is not necessary to turn on the main power switch 97 as in the upper unit 100.

When the door 114 is opened, as described in the main part of the door open / close detection mechanism 131, there are a latch switch 132A and a door switch 132B that are opened / closed according to the opening / closing of the door 114. Then, the integrated control device MC can detect the opening of both or one of the latch switch 132A and the door switch 132B (by the action of the door open / close detection mechanism 131).

In FIG. 39, when the signal indicating that the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 is opened is received as described above (step S1), the integrated control device MC provides voice guidance to the user (step S2). The content of the voice guide is, for example, "To start heating, select range heating and press the start button."

In the default setting of microwave heating, the target temperature is 80 ° C., so even if the door 114 is closed and heating is started as it is, it automatically stops when it is detected that the temperature of the object to be cooked reaches 80 ° C. When changing 80 ° C. (for example, 75 ° C.), the input key 43MS (see FIG. 21) may be pressed after changing the temperature condition.

When the user selects, for example, "range manual" from the combined cooking menu with the input key 43M1 and then gives an instruction to "start heating" with the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M, it is determined by the magnetron 122. Using the power consumption value known in advance by reflecting the power consumption of the third cooling fan 128, the fourth cooling fan 129, etc. to the rated power consumption value, the integrated control device MC regulates the total power in step S3. Determine if the value is exceeded.

For example, since the integrated control device MC holds the thermal power value of the induced heating cooking started earlier and the power consumption of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 as data, the power consumption of the upper unit 100 is consumed. And the total value of the power consumption of the microwave heating device 120 can be calculated. The integrated control device MC may predict the maximum power consumption amount by using the power consumption data of the inverter circuit 81 or the like when the input key 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M is operated.

When step S3 is "Yes", it is necessary to reduce either the output of the operating IH coil 17R or the heating power of microwave heating. In step S3, the priority of cooking for induction heating at that time is determined from the control menu for induction heating and the cooking process. For example, when rice is cooked in the upper unit 100 (particularly, the "boiling step"), the rice cooking (boiling step) is prioritized and the heating power of the heating source of the upper unit 100 is not reduced.

Further, when the upper unit 100 is performing "fried food", the fried food is automatically controlled to increase the heating power so that the temperature of the cooking oil does not drop excessively according to the addition of ingredients and the like. Therefore, even in such a case, the thermal power of the heating source of the upper unit 100 is not reduced.

When it is determined in step S5 that the induced heating is prioritized, the power consumption is temporarily reduced if the rated output of the microwave is 500 W (power consumption is 900 W) in order to reduce the power consumption of the microwave heating. For example, the output is set to 300 W. Then, the user is notified that such a restriction is applied. The notification is performed by the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 (S6).

Then, the integrated control device MC issues a command signal to the microwave heating control unit 130, and starts microwave heating with low thermal power (S7).
Since it has a non-contact temperature measuring unit (infrared temperature measuring unit) 158 that detects the temperature of food, cooking utensils, etc. placed in the heating chamber 113, whether or not the food has been heated and reached the target temperature. Is monitored by the microwave heating control unit 130 (S8).

If the target temperature is not reached, it is determined whether or not the induction heating operation of the upper unit 100 is completed (S9). Unless the induction heating operation is completed, the above steps S8 and S9 are repeated until the target temperature is reached.

When the target temperature is reached, a signal is output from the microwave heating control unit 130 to the integrated control device MC. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S12, and the notification that the microwave heating is completed is notified.

On the other hand, when the induction heating of the upper unit 100 is completed, the process proceeds to step S10, a command is issued to the microwave heating control unit 130, the heating power is initially restored to the set thermal power intended by the user, and the microwave heating is continued. Then, the monitoring of the temperature of the object to be cooked is continued (S11).

Then, when the target temperature is reached, the integrated control device MC receives a signal from the microwave heating control unit 130, proceeds to step S12, and notifies that the microwave heating is completed.

In the example shown in FIG. 39, the power priority between the two, microwave cooking and induction heating, is the control menu (eg, "fried food") and cooking process (eg, "fried food") being performed in induction heating. , It was a premise to judge the priority with induction heating at that time from the "boiling process" of rice cooking.

Therefore, when the power priority between the two parties, microwave heating and induction heating, is always set to the induction heating side, an instruction to start microwave heating is given by the input key of the central operation unit 40M. Before the 43MS, for example, a warning message is displayed on the integrated display unit 30, and a warning message is also output from the voice synthesizer 95. Further, even if microwave heating is started after that, there may be a case where the thermal power value is forcibly lowered as in the above example.

The power priority of the induction heating source 9, the oven heating source 188, and the microwave heating source 189 in the entire cooking cooker 1 can be set in the above-mentioned "function setting", and once. If it is set, even if the main power switch 97 is turned off, the setting conditions are stored in the integrated control device MC and are inherited after the next cooking.

In the example shown in FIG. 39, the temperature of the object to be heated was monitored, and when the target temperature was reached, the microwave heating was terminated. However, since there is also a control method for measuring the microwave irradiation time and ending the cooking when the set time elapses, FIG. 40 will be described next.

FIG. 40 shows an example in which a control method for terminating cooking with a microwave irradiation time is adopted.
Since the steps up to step S6 are the same as those in FIG. 39, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the microwave heating control unit 130 starts microwave heating in step 7, the microwave heating control unit 130 calculates the correction (extension) of the heating time when the output of the magnetron 122 is lowered to a certain value. Then, in step S8, the time after the extension is determined as "set time 1" (S8), and steps 9 and 8 are repeated.

When the induction heating of the upper unit 100 is completed in the process, the operation required time (set time 2) is recalculated in consideration of the elapsed time from the start of heating (step S7).

Then, when the set time 2 has elapsed, the microwave heating is terminated and this is notified (S12). Until the set time 2 elapses, the temperature monitoring by the non-contact temperature measuring unit (infrared temperature measuring unit) 158 may be used together.

(Integrated control device and total electric energy control)
Next, FIGS. 41 and 42 will be described.
41 and 42 are flowcharts for explaining the control operation of the cooking cooker 1. The example shown in these two figures is a case where the user attempts to perform microwave heating using the heating chamber 113 of the lower unit 200 during the period of first performing induction heating in the upper unit 100. .. Even in this case, the basic total electric energy control (in the entire cooking cooker 1) as described with reference to FIG. 39 is performed by the integrated control device MC and the electric power control unit 72.

In FIGS. 41 and 42, unlike FIGS. 39 and 40, there is an integrated control device MC and an induction heating device including a microwave heating device 120, IH coils 17L, 17R, an inverter circuit 81, and the like. It also shows the sending and receiving of signals.

In FIGS. 41 and 42, L1 to L10 indicate the generation timing of each operation signal, command signal, and the like. When the main power switch 97 is turned on in the upper unit 100, a start signal is transmitted to the integrated control device MC (L1).

After that, when the input operation unit 40 determines the thermal power of the IH coils 17L and 17R, the control menu, and the like (see steps MS2 and MS3 in FIG. 38), information indicating the contents is transmitted via the integrated control device MC (L2). .. That is, the IH control unit 90 receives information indicating conditions such as the maximum thermal power and the operating time at the time of induction heating from the integrated control device MC. Then, if there is an induction heating start command from the input operation unit 40, the IH control unit 90 starts the heating operation by the induction heating circuits 94L and 94R.

A case where the induction heating is started in this way and the microwave heating is also started will be described. It is assumed that the induction heating is started at the maximum thermal power of 3200 W of the left IH coil 17L.

When the user opens the door 114, both or one of the latch switch 132A and the door switch 132B opens as described with reference to FIG. 39. Therefore, the door open / close detection mechanism 131 (close detection unit 139) that monitors this opens. Therefore, a signal indicating the opening of the door 114 is transmitted to the integrated control device MC (L3).

When the user inputs the thermal power in the central operation unit 40M, the integrated control device MC issues a command signal for starting operation to the microwave heating control unit 130. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S3.
Alternatively, when the user simply gives an instruction to "start heating" at the central operation unit 40M, the integrated control device MC issues a command signal to start operation to the microwave heating control unit 130.

If there is no abnormality on the microwave heating control unit 130 side, a "notice signal" for starting cooking is transmitted from the microwave heating control unit 130 to the integrated control device MC (L4). For example, in the case of a microwave output of 500 W, when the rated power consumption of the entire microwave heating device is 1000 W, it becomes a "notice signal" including information on using 1000 W as shown in FIG. 41.

Next, in response to the information from the integrated control device MC, the power control unit 72 reflects the power consumption of the third cooling fan 128, the fourth cooling fan 129, etc. in advance in the rated power consumption value determined by the magnetron 122. Using the power consumption value known in, find the total power consumption when microwave heating and induction heating are performed at the same time, and determine whether this total value exceeds the total electric energy regulation value. (Same as step S3 in FIGS. 39 and 40). Then, the result is transmitted to the integrated control device MC.

As another method, the upper limit of the total electric energy of the lower unit 200 (microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188) is determined (for example, 2000 W), and the lower unit 200 and the upper unit 100 (induction heating source 9) are determined. ) May be used at the same time to determine whether or not the total electric energy regulation value is exceeded.

When step S3 is "Yes", it is necessary to reduce either the output of the operating IH coil 17R or the heating power of microwave heating. In the next step S4, the integrated control device MC determines the cooking priority of the induction heating at that time from the control menu of the induction heating and the heating step.

In the example of FIG. 41, since the microwave heating is set to be prioritized, the thermal power of the microwave heating is not reduced.

When it is determined in step S5 that microwave heating is prioritized, in order to reduce the power consumption of induction heating, the IH control unit 90 is instructed to control the target thermal power of the IH coil 17R to temporarily reduce the power consumption. Lower the target. Notify the user that such restrictions will be applied. The notification operation is performed by the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95.

Then, the IH control unit 90 instructs the inverter circuit 81R to change the induction heating to a low thermal power (L5).

When the power reduction process on the inverter circuit 81R side is completed, the IH control unit 90 determines that the power has been reduced from the current values of the input current detection unit 77a and the output current detection unit 77b. Then, the fact that the power reduction is completed is transmitted to the integrated control device MC (L6). In response to this transmission, the integrated control device MC transmits a permission signal for starting the heating operation to the microwave heating device 120 (L7).

The inverter circuit 121A includes a current detection unit (not shown) such as the input current detection unit 77a and the output current detection unit 77b used in the inverter circuit 81R of the upper unit 100.

Therefore, when the microwave heating is completed, the microwave heating control unit 130 determines from the current detection value of the inverter circuit 121A that the heating operation has been completed, and notifies the integrated control device MC of the heating operation with a specific signal ( L8). Further, the microwave heating may be performed for a certain period of time depending on the timer setting, and in that case, the microwave heating control unit 130 detects the lapse of the time and notifies that the heating operation is completed (L8).

After the microwave heating is completed, the integrated control device MC issues a command signal to the IH control unit 90 so as to return to the set thermal power initially desired by the user (L9). Then, the thermal power is raised to the initial target level and the induction heating is continued (S10).

Then, when the set cooking time or the target temperature is reached, the IH control unit 90 ends the induction heating. Then, the integrated control device MC is notified that the operation has been completed (L10).

(Basic operation and cooling operation of induction cooking)
Next, in the cooking cooker 1 according to the first embodiment, the basic operation of each part when induction heating is performed will be described.

When the input operation unit 40 commands the start of induction heating, the IH control unit 90 issues a drive command to the induction heating circuits 94L and 94R corresponding to the designated heating unit, and the IH coils 17L and 17R. Drives the inverter circuits 81L and 81R of.

An operation command signal is output from the IH control unit 90 to the cooling fan drive circuit 62.
The operation of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 is started at the same time as or slightly delayed from the start of driving the inverter circuits 81L and 81R.

The ventilation capacities of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 do not have to be fixed. For example, the ventilation capacity may be automatically changed between the weak operation and the strong operation according to the temperature of the temperature sensor TS8 of the heat sink 82 and the temperature sensor TS that detects the temperature in the vicinity of the integrated display unit 30.

Generally, if the cooling fan is changed from weak operation to strong operation, the wind noise of the fan becomes louder, which may cause noise. Therefore, the temperature detected by the two temperature sensors TS7 and TS8 and the operating strength of the cooling fans 60 and 61 are determined as a correspondence table (data table) from the data such as the ventilation test in advance, and this correspondence table is used. It is stored in the storage device 90R of the IH control unit 90. Then, the IH control unit 90 may change the operating conditions of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 at any time according to the data table.

The correspondence table (data table) that determines the operating strength of the cooling fans 60 and 61 may be stored in the integrated control device MC instead of the storage device 90R of the IH control unit 90.

When the first cooling fan 60 is operated, air is sucked from the ventilation hole 64 located directly below the first cooling fan 60. The cooling air RF1 is pushed into the first air passage F1 from the air outlet 60A as shown by a thick arrow in FIG. 24.

When the second cooling fan 61 is operated, air is sucked from the ventilation hole 64 located directly below the second cooling fan 61. The cooling air RF2 is pushed into the second air passage F2 from the air outlet 61A as shown by a thick arrow in FIG. 24.

Here, one of the features of the first embodiment will be described. In particular, the supply of cooling air to the inverter circuit board 80 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24, 25, 27 and 28.

In the first cooling fan 60, the flat rotary blade 60T rotates in the counterclockwise direction RD1. Then, the outside air sucked into the fan case 60C advances to the outlet 60A while turning as shown in FIG. 27, and is blown out from the outlet 60A toward the inverter board 80.

The wind speed distribution of the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 60A will be described.
The wind speed of the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 60A is not uniform over the entire front-rear direction of the air outlet 60A. The cooling air that swirls around the outermost side of the inside of the fan case 60C has the highest speed, and the speed decreases toward the inside. This situation is schematically shown in FIG. 27 by three solid arrows.

As shown in FIG. 27, the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the outlet 60A travels in the direction of the outlet line FL1, but the rotation direction RD1 of the rotary blade 60F of the first cooling fan 60 and the cooling air 60FL itself. Due to the speed difference between the two, as shown in FIG. 27, the cooling air gradually changes its direction toward the rear side toward the heat sink 82 side.

The main component of the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 60A is concentrated on the rear surface (rear surface) side of the partition wall 11 located at the center of the heat sink 82 in the front and rear two rows. Then, the vehicle advances to the right while being restricted from advancing forward on the rear surface of the partition wall 11. In FIG. 27, what is indicated by the broken line arrow is the flow of the cooling air RF1 flowing around the heat radiation fin 82FN.

Since the cover 70 is installed so as to surround the front and rear and the upper part of the heat sink 82 in a tunnel shape, the main component of the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 60A does not diffuse to the surroundings but is a partition wall. It is pushed into the narrow space of the heat radiating fin 82FN of the heat sink 82 located on the rear side of 11.

Since the first air passage F1 starts from the point where it passes through the left end portion of the cover 70, the main part of the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 60A to the inlet F1 of the first air passage F1. Is introduced and is transported linearly as cooling air RF1 to the outlet FO on the right side.

However, since the air outlet 60A and the left end surface of the cover 70 are not directly connected and there is a gap GP14 and a front notch 70A, a part of the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown from the air outlet 60A is Turn backward before reaching the entrance FI of the first air passage F1. And it flows to the part where the pressure is relatively low. Therefore, cooling air flowing in the direction of the rear exhaust port plate 53L is also generated.

The flow of the cooling air from the second cooling fan 61 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25, 27 and 28.

The flat rotor 61T rotates in the counterclockwise direction RD2. Then, the outside air sucked into the fan case 61C advances in the direction of the outlet 61A while turning as shown in FIG. 27. Then, it is blown out from the outlet 61A in the direction of the inverter board 80.

The wind speed of the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 61A is not uniform over the entire front-rear direction of the air outlet 61A. The cooling air that swirls around the outermost circumference inside the fan case 61C has the highest speed, and the speed decreases toward the inside. This situation is shown by three solid arrows in FIG. 27.

As shown in FIG. 27, the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out from the outlet 61A travels in the direction of the outlet line FL2, but the rotation direction RD2 of the rotary blade 61F of the first cooling fan 61 and the cooling air 61FL itself. Due to the speed difference between the two, as shown in FIG. 27, the cooling air gradually changes its direction toward the rear side toward the heat sink 82 side.

The main component of the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 61A is concentrated on the front surface side of the partition wall 11 located at the center of the heat sink 82 having two rows in the front and rear. Then, the vehicle advances to the right while being restricted from advancing forward in front of the partition wall 11. In FIG. 27, what is indicated by the broken line arrow is the flow of the cooling air RF2 flowing around the heat radiation fin 82FN.

A cover 70 is installed so as to surround the heat sink 82 in a tunnel shape with a slight gap between the front and rear and the upper side.
Therefore, the main component of the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out from the outlet 61A is not diffused to the surroundings, but is pushed into the narrow space of the heat radiation fin 82FN of the heat sink 82 on the front side of the partition wall 11. ..

Since the first air passage F1 starts from the point where it passes through the left end portion of the cover 70, the main part of the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 61A to the inlet FI of the first air passage F1. Is introduced and is transported linearly as cooling air RF2 to the outlet FO on the right side as it is.

However, since the air outlet 61A and the left end surface of the cover 70 are not directly connected and have a gap (not shown) and a front notch 70A, the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown from the air outlet 61A. A part of the air leaks forward before reaching the entrance FI of the first air passage F1. And it flows to the part where the pressure is relatively low. Therefore, it flows as cooling air branched in the spatial direction directly below the input operation unit 40 in front, and becomes cooling air RF2A (see FIG. 25).

The ventilation holes 64 located directly below the first cooling fan 60 and the ventilation holes 64 located directly below the second cooling fan 60 are individually provided adjacent to each other on the bottom surface of the upper case 16, but a large number of them are provided. The small hole group may be provided and the small hole group may be shared.

A diode 79c (see FIG. 33) and other electrical components are mounted on the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80, and they are cooled by the cooling air RF1 and RF2.

Two IGBTs 79a and 79b (power control switching element 83) are used for one IH coil 17L. Further, the power control switching element 83 is also used for the other IH coil 17L.

The two power control switching elements 83 generate heat during the induction heating operation, but are continuously cooled by the cooling air RF1 and RF2.

The cooling air RF2A proceeds in the right direction while cooling parts such as various switches, a liquid crystal display screen, and a display unit drive circuit 63 that receive input operations arranged in the input operation unit 40.

As shown by the arrows in FIG. 24, the cooling air RF1 may change its direction upward when it exits the outlet FO of the cover 70, but it is cooled because of the momentum of the cooling air RF2 merging from the front side. It is roughly divided into one that travels by reversing the top of the cover 70 to the left like the wind RF3 and one that travels in the direction of the filter circuit board 54 as shown by the cooling air RF4.

The cooling air RF3 flows below the IH coil 17R on the right side, and then flows directly below the IH coil 17L on the left side. In this process, the two IH coils 17R and 17L are cooled. Generally, the temperature of this type of IH coil rises to around 250 ° C. to 300 ° C. during the induction heating operation. Therefore, as described above, the two cooling air RF1 and RF2 are combined and cooled by the combined cooling air RF3 and RF4.

As described with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25, the cooling air RF4R traveling to the right side of the partition plate 14 travels backward while cooling the filter circuit board 54, and is discharged from the exhaust window 52B. The 53R is an exhaust plate and forms a large number of through holes 53R1.

The cooling air RF3 that has cooled the IH coils 17L and 17R also turns in the direction of the exhaust window 52A, which is the final exhaust port, passes through a large number of through holes 53L1 provided in the exhaust plate 53L, and is transmitted from the exhaust window 52A. It is discharged.
As a result, the cooling air RF3 and RF4 flowing inside the upper case 16 reach the exhaust port 20. Then, it is discharged from the exhaust cover 19 into the room.

As described above, the parts group such as the IH coils 17L and 17R and the inverter circuit board 80 are the parts group to be cooled inside the upper unit 100 (IH coil installation space CK). The space for cooling these parts is located in front of the exhaust windows 52A and 52B. In other words, downstream of the exhaust windows 52A and 52B, there is a gap GP1 that communicates with the exhaust port 20, but since there is no component group to be cooled as described above inside this gap GP1, the upper unit It is not a cooling space of 100.

(Basic operation during microwave cooking)
Next, in the cooking cooker 1 according to the first embodiment, the basic operation of each part when microwave heating is performed will be described.

When the main power switch 97 is turned on, microwave cooking can be started as it is even if the upper unit 100 is not actually performing induction cooking. However, once the main power switch 97 is turned off, it is necessary to first turn on the main power switch 97 in order to start microwave cooking.

For safety reasons, the main power switch 97 automatically resets after a certain period of time (for example, 30 minutes) from the last timing when any of microwave heating, oven (heating chamber 113) heating, and induction heating is finished. Be released. Alternatively, when the temperatures of the top plate 15 and the heating chamber 113 all drop below the specified value, the main power switch 97 is automatically opened. Such safety measures are adopted.

Next, the door 114 is opened, the food to be cooked such as food is put into the heating chamber 113, and after occupying the door 114, the input key 43MS (see FIG. 20) is used in the central operation unit 40M of the input operation unit 40. When the start of microwave cooking is commanded, the integrated control device MC issues a drive command to the microwave heating control unit 130 to start the operation of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129.

The microwave heating control unit 130 drives the inverter circuit 121A of the magnetron 122 to radiate microwaves from the oscillation unit 122A. The microwave referred to here is a radio wave of 2450 MH ± 50 MHz.

The generated microwave is guided from the waveguide 123 into the antenna case 124. Since the driving motor 126 of the antenna 125 starts operation at the timing when the microwave is oscillated, the microwave introduced in the antenna case 124 is caused by the action of the rotating antenna 125 and the rotating shaft 126A. It can be evenly propagated inside the heating chamber 113. Since the operation of this type of antenna and the rotating shaft 126A is explained in detail by, for example, Japanese Patent No. 4836965 and Japanese Patent No. 5674914, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the third cooling fan 128 is operated, air is sucked into the case A150 from the intake port F152F formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 to become the cooling air RF5. Then, the cooling air RF5 first cools the inverter circuit board 121, and cools various electric components mounted on the circuit board.

Next, the cooling air RF5 passes through the communication ports B138B and the communication port A138A provided at two locations above and below the case A150, and the cooling air RF5 that has passed through the communication port B138B hits the back surface of the temperature sensor 160.

The temperature sensor 160 is installed in the mounting hole of the right partition plate 166A. There is a minute gap of several mm or less between the outer shell case of the temperature sensor 160 and the rim of the mounting hole. The cooling air RF5 passes through this gap and is blown out from the detection window 161 of the temperature sensor 160 into the heating chamber 113.

On the other hand, most of the cooling air RF5 that has cooled the inverter circuit board 121 is guided from the communication port A138A to the passage 172. That is, the guide is guided to the passage 172 formed between the upper case 169 covering the upper part of the heating chamber 113 and the partition plate 171. This passage has an effect of preventing the high heat from being transmitted to the upper unit 100 side even if the upper heater 163A above the heating chamber 113 reaches a high temperature exceeding 300 ° C.

Looking at the position of the communication port 173 from the communication port A138A in a plane, the communication port 173 is located diagonally rearward across the passage 172. That is, the communication port 173 is located at the farthest position.
Therefore, the entire air in the passage 172 is guided to the communication port 173 and introduced into the exhaust duct 102 that passes through the communication port 173 and extends horizontally to the rear (see FIG. 15).

When the cooling air RF5 exits the exhaust duct 102, it merges with the cooling air RF6 rising from the lower side and is discharged into the room from the exhaust port 20.

Next, the flow of the cooling air RF6 by the fourth cooling fan 129 will be described.
When the fourth cooling fan 129 is operated, as shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, air is sucked into the case A151 from the intake port B152B formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 to become the cooling air RF6. .. Then, the cooling air RF6 first cools the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122, passes through the radiating portion 122H, and reaches the inside of the duct 153.

The cooling air RF6 then enters the gap GP5R adjacent to the right side of the heating chamber 113 from the duct 153 and proceeds to the front side. Then, as shown in FIG. 17, it is introduced into the heating chamber 113 from the introduction port 201.

Since the introduction port 201 is located near the opening 113A of the heating chamber 113, a part of the cooling air RF6 also reaches the inside of the door 114 and eliminates the fogging that occurs on the heating chamber 113 side of the seal plate 196. ..

The cooling air RF6 introduced into the heating chamber 113 has a purpose of discharging water vapor, smoke, or the like generated from an object to be heated such as food inside the heating chamber 113. Specifically, the cooling air RF6 moves from the front portion of the heating chamber 113 to the rear portion as shown in FIG. 15, and finally reaches the communication port 174 formed in the ceiling portion at the rear portion.

The cooling air RF6 is introduced into an exhaust duct 102 extending horizontally rearward from the communication port 174. Then, when the cooling air RF6 exits the exhaust duct 102, it joins the cooling air RF5 so as to be attracted to the updraft, and is discharged from the exhaust port 20 into the room.

Even when the initial air volumes of the cooling air RF5 and the cooling air RF6 are the same, the air speed is faster when the cooling air RF5 is discharged from the duct 102 due to the difference in the path as in the first embodiment. Therefore, it has an action of attracting the cooling air RF6 discharged from below.

Since the cooling air RF5 and RF6 are forcibly discharged from the exhaust duct 102, an exhaust fan may be provided in the middle of the exhaust duct 102. In the first embodiment, since such an exhaust fan is omitted, it can be realized at a low cost, and it is advantageous in considering the arrangement of parts inside the upper unit 100.

(Basic operation when cooking in the oven)
Next, in the cooking device 1 according to the first embodiment, the basic operation of the oven heating device 140 will be described.

When the main power switch 97 is turned on, the integrated control device MC presumes that some kind of cooking is started and pre-starts. Therefore, even if the upper unit 100 does not actually perform the induction cooking or the microwave cooking, the oven cooking can be started as it is. However, once the main power switch 97 is turned off, it is necessary to first turn on the main power switch 97 in order to start cooking in the oven.

Next, the door 114 is opened to put an object to be cooked such as food into the heating chamber 113, and then the central operation unit 40M of the input operation unit 40 selects a cooking control menu using the heating chamber 113. For example, in the case of cooking to bake fish or meat, the heating time and heating power are set. However, when the automatic baking control menu is selected, the heating power is automatically set by the heating chamber control unit 159. The selection of this control menu will be described later with reference to FIGS. 48 to 52.

The heating chamber control unit 159 receives a command signal from the integrated control device MC and controls whether or not the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B are energized, the energization time zone, the energization pattern (intermittent heating), the thermal power, and the like.

The temperature sensor TS2 detects the temperature inside the heating chamber 113 with an infrared signal, and transmits the detected temperature data to the heating chamber control unit 159. The heating chamber control unit 159 controls the energization of both the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, or one of them, by observing the difference between the target temperature and the detected temperature (feedback control). The temperature sensor TS2 may be referred to as a "second temperature sensor".

When the timer cooking control method is input by the central operation unit 40M, the upper heater 163A, the lower heater 163B, or one of them is energized for a set time. That is, the heating chamber control unit 159 does not limit the energizing time according to the detected temperature data of the temperature sensor TS2.

After closing the door 114, when the central operation unit 40M (input key 43MS) of the input operation unit 40 is instructed to start cooking in the oven (heating chamber 113), the integrated control device MC controls the microwave heating. A drive command is issued to the unit 130, and the operation of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 is started. The drive command signal may be output directly from the heating chamber control unit 159 to the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129.

When the third cooling fan 128 is operated, air is sucked into the case A150 from the intake port F152F formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. However, unlike the case of microwave cooking, the inverter circuit board 121 does not generate heat. Therefore, the cooling air RF5 enters the communication port B138B and the communication port A138A, respectively, without cooling the inverter circuit 121 substrate.

Then, the cooling air RF5 that has passed through the communication port A138A is blown out from the gap between the outer shell case of the temperature sensor 160 and the mouth edge of the mounting hole into the heating chamber 113 through the detection window 161.

The cooling air RF5 that has passed through the communication port A138A is guided to the passage 172. Then, while cooling the upper case 169, the communication port 173 is reached, and then the upper case 169 is introduced into the exhaust duct 102 (see FIG. 15).

On the other hand, the cooling air RF6 by the fourth cooling fan 129 passes through the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 and reaches the inside of the duct 153. However, since the magnetron 122 is not driven, it does not generate heat. Therefore, the cooling air RF6 enters the void GP5R with almost no temperature rise (see FIGS. 16 and 17).

Then, the cooling air RF6 is introduced into the heating chamber 113 from the introduction port 201 as shown in FIG. Therefore, the cooling air RF6 reaches the inner portion of the door 114.

The food or the like to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 may generate water vapor, oily smoke, or the like due to the radiant heat of the upper heater 163A or the lower heater 163B. As shown in FIG. 15, such water vapor, oil smoke, and the like are carried to the communication port 174 by the cooling air RF6 moving from the front portion to the rear portion of the heating chamber 113.

After that, the cooling air RF6 is introduced into the exhaust duct 102 extending horizontally rearward from the communication port 174. Then, when the cooling air RF6 exits the exhaust duct 102, it is attracted to the cooling air RF5 rising upward and is discharged into the room through the exhaust port 20 (see FIG. 15).

In the first embodiment described above, after the main power switch 97 is turned on, the integrated control device MC controls the overall condition of the cooking cooker 1 up to a certain stage, and then temporarily the left operation unit 40L or the right operation. When the unit 40R was operated, the subsequent induction heating control was entrusted to the IH control unit 90. However, the range controlled by the integrated control device MC may be changed between the IH control unit 90 and the IH control unit 90.

Similarly, the range controlled by the integrated control device MC may be changed between the heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130.

For example, after the control menu of any of induction heating, microwave heating, and oven (heating chamber) heating is selected, either the IH control unit 90, the heating chamber control unit 159, or the microwave heating control unit 130 Basically, a control operation related to heating may be performed.

In that case, when a new input is made by the input operation unit 40 (including heating stop), it is once controlled by the integrated control device MC, but when no input is made, IH control is performed as it is. Cooking may be executed by either the unit 90, the heating chamber control unit 159, or the microwave heating control unit 130.

(Control during fried food cooking by IH control unit 90)
A specific example will be described below with reference to FIG. 44.
FIG. 44 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of the IH control unit 90 when the fried food cooking (automatic), which is a kind of independent cooking using the induction heating source 9, is performed in the cooking cooker 1.

When "fried food (automatic cooking)" is selected in the control menu of induction heating by operating the left operation unit 40L or the right operation unit 40R, it is edible put in the object to be heated (metal pot) N. The temperature of the oil is monitored by the temperature detection circuit 93, and the thermal power of the IH coils 17L and 17R is automatically controlled.

When the user selects the fried food cooking (automatic) control menu, the IH control unit 90 sequentially executes the preheating step, the fried food cooking step, and the heating power increasing step as shown in FIG. 44. Further, on the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30, information indicating necessary information and reference information (for example, an estimated time required for preheating) appears in characters, figures, and the like. It is also displayed that the priority cooking is such that the electric power is not limited (suppressed) by the electric power control unit 72.

Therefore, during the cooking of the fried food, the user can recognize that the electric power is preferentially secured even if the microwave heating or the oven heating is used.

In the preheating process, when the target oil temperature set by the user is 180 ° C., the inverter circuit 81R (or 81L) is started to be driven at a predetermined thermal power value (maximum 1500 W) in the preheating process, and the oil temperature rapidly rises. The temperature rises from room temperature (for example, 20 ° C.) to 180 ° C., which is the target temperature T1.

Since this temperature rise is monitored in real time by the temperature detection circuit 93 described above, when the temperature detection circuit 93 detects that the target temperature T1 (first temperature) has reached 180 ° C., the IH control unit 90 tries to maintain the target temperature as it is by adjusting the induction heating amount, that is, the inverter output (control operation that automatically adjusts the high frequency thermal power to approach the target temperature based on such temperature detection information). Is hereinafter referred to as "temperature feedback control").

After that, a display command is issued to the integrated control device MC, and a voice guide such as "The temperature of the oil has reached an appropriate temperature. Please put in the ingredients" is given to the user via the voice synthesizer 95.

When the user puts an ingredient, for example, a frozen croquette, into the cooking oil, the cooking step 1 starts from this point.
Since the cooking oil is rapidly cooled by a cold ingredient (croquette) from the time of its addition, the temperature drops sharply as shown in FIG. 44. However, since the temperature detection circuit 93 monitors the movement of such a temperature drop, the temperature of the oil rises again because the inverter circuit 81R (81L) is immediately driven by raising the thermal power to a predetermined thermal power of 1500 W or 1800 W. (Temperature feedback control). In this way, as soon as the target temperature T1 is reached again (or after a predetermined time has passed), the process shifts from the fried food process to the heating power increasing process.

In the thermal power increasing step, the oil temperature is controlled to be maintained between 225 ° C. of the second temperature T2, which is higher than the target temperature T1, and 230 ° C. of the upper limit temperature (third temperature) T3 higher than this. The device 90 controls the inverter circuit 81R (81L).

As shown in FIG. 44, the thermal power value is intermittently driven at about 900 W.
The process after the temperature reaches the first temperature T1 is called the "fried food finishing process", and is an important process for finishing the fried food crisply. If you do not cook with sufficient heat in such a process of increasing the heat, you will not be able to make fried food well. Since the fried food process is not limited within a predetermined time, if the user presses the input key 44R (or the input key 45L), all the fried food cooking is completed.

As shown in FIG. 44, in the (automatic) fried food cooking control menu, the process from the fried food cooking process to the heating power up process is defined as the "priority control menu execution time zone", and other execution time zones are defined. Power is not reduced by starting the heating source or changing the operating conditions. That is, the IH control unit 90 of this induction heating always grasps whether or not the control menu being executed is in the "execution time zone of the priority control menu", and if it is in the execution time zone, the execution time zone is the same. It has a function to notify the outside to that effect.

As is clear from the above explanation, every time a specific heating process is entered, the integrated control device MC does not issue a control signal to the IH control unit 90, and the progress of the heating process is all the IH. It is left to the control of the control unit 90.

In the "coordinated cooking mode" described in detail later, when a control operation including such a "preheating process" is performed, the "fried food cooking process" that actually heats the object to be cooked becomes the "cooking process" and is preheated. The process is not included in the cooking process (cooking process 1, cooking process 2, etc.).

(Display of integrated display unit 30)
Next, the relationship between the integrated display unit 30 and various input keys of the central operation unit 40M, the right operation unit 40R, and the left operation unit 40L will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 51.

FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram showing a change in the display content of the integrated display unit 30. FIG. 46 is a plan view of the left operation unit 40L and the left side display unit 31L before and after the start of induction cooking. FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing changes in the display contents of the integrated display unit 30 and the left side display unit 31L in the combined cooking mode. FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing a change in the display content of the integrated display unit 30 in the combined cooking mode. FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing a change in the display content of the integrated display unit 30 in the combined cooking mode. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing a change in the display content of the integrated display unit 30 in the combined cooking mode. FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram 4 showing a change in the display content of the integrated display unit 30 in the combined cooking mode.

FIG. 45 will be described. Since the integrated display unit 30 is not activated in the state where the main power switch 97 is turned off, no information is displayed.
In the state where the main power switch 97 is turned on, the integrated control device MC displays the display screen 1 of FIG. 45 on the integrated display unit 30 after performing a self-diagnosis such as the presence or absence of an abnormality as described above.

In the display screen 1 of FIG. 45, 30A is a display statement notifying that the power is on. 30B is two-dimensional information (two-dimensional code) for guiding to a dedicated recipe posting site via the Internet. 30C is a sentence explaining the meaning of the two-dimensional code. The two-dimensional information 30C and the display sentence 30A are one type of "standby common information" 30N.

After the display screen 1 of FIG. 45 is displayed, the display screen 2A or 2B may be automatically displayed. On the display screen 2A, "Caution for sudden boiling" is one of the caution displays. This "sudden boiling" means that when a viscous object to be cooked (liquid) such as curry or stew is heated, the inside of the object to be cooked is overheated above the boiling point and suddenly. A phenomenon that causes intense boiling. Hot droplets can be scattered and dangerous as steam erupts from the heated liquid. It is said that the timing and cause of the sudden boiling is the mixing of foreign matter from the outside or the impact. Therefore, when a metal pot or the like containing the food to be cooked is placed on the top plate 15 for induction heating, caution is given when the food to be cooked is stirred. The information displayed in this alert is one type of "standby common information" 30N.

The three display screens of the display screen 1, the display screen 2A, and the display screen 2B shown in FIG. 45 may be referred to as a common screen 30Z. In addition, a form other than these three may be included in the common screen 30Z.

On the display screen 2B, 30E is a caution display warning that the inside of the heating chamber 113 is at a high temperature and does not come into contact carelessly. When the integrated control device MC detects that the heating chamber 113 is not sufficiently cooled after the oven cooking is performed in the heating chamber 113, the state of the display screen 2 is automatically switched to. Although the display screens 2A and 2B cannot be displayed at the same time, they may be displayed alternately at intervals of several seconds to call attention to both the sudden boiling and the high temperature display. Further, the voice synthesizer 95 may perform the content of the alerts on the display screens 2A and 2B in parallel by voice.

As is clear from the display screens 1 to 2A and 2B of FIG. 45, these displays are performed by using the entire display screen 30D. That is, instead of partially displaying in any of the above-mentioned first area 30L to third area 30R, in order to secure the widest possible display area, the three areas 30L to 3rd area 30R cannot be identified. In this way, the integrated display is performed so that the user can see that the integrated display unit 30 is displayed as a whole.

The display screens 1 to 2A and 2B are the stages of ST3 in the operation step of FIG. 37.
After a certain period of time, for example, 10 seconds has passed from the display time of the display screens 1 to 2A and 2B, the display content changes to prompt the selection of the heating source (heating means) (corresponding to the stage of operation step ST4 in FIG. 37). ..

Therefore, the case of induction cooking will be described next.
FIG. 46 is a plan view of the left display unit 31L and the left operation unit 40L for the left heating source 17HL. Before pressing the input key 43L1 for selecting cooking by the left heating unit 17HL, the state is shown in FIG. 46 (A).

When the input key 43L1 is pressed, the integrated control device MC detects that the user has selected the left heating source 17HL. Then, as shown in FIG. 46 (B), the integrated control device MC causes the individual light emitting unit 27L3 to emit light, and displays that the operation input has been accepted.

Since the input key 43L4 for selecting timer cooking is also waiting for input, the individual light emitting unit 27L1 is blinked. Further, since the selection of the control menu is also in the state of waiting for input, the individual light emitting unit 27L2 directly behind the input key 44L is blinked. In FIG. 46 (B), the star-shaped figure indicates that the light emitting display unit 27 is lit or blinking.

If the default heating power is set to "3", the heating power display unit 67L indicating the heating power stage during induction heating causes the light emitting unit of the heating power display unit 67L to continuously emit light from the left side (or until the heating power is 3). Change the blue color to red) and display the amount of firepower to the user.

When the user changes to a thermal power that is not the default setting, pressing the input key 43L2 or 43L3 reduces or increases the thermal power by one step each time the input key is pressed, and the light emitting unit of the thermal power display unit 67L (correspondingly Or the range of the red light emitting part) is expanded from the left side to the right or reduced to the left side, and the adjustment state of the thermal power is displayed to the user.

Next, FIG. 47 will be described.
FIG. 47 is an operation explanatory view of the left operation unit 40L and the left side display unit 31L of the cooking cooker 1.
In FIG. 47, the figures (A) to (C) drawn on the left side are schematic views of the left operation unit 40L and the left side display unit 31L. FIG. 47 (A) shows the state before the start of the operation.

As described with reference to FIG. 46, when the input key 43L1 is operated, the light emitting display unit 27L3 emits light as shown in FIG. 47 (B).
In the state of FIG. 47 (B), the light emitting display unit 27L4 is also lit, and it can be seen that the input function is effective for both the input keys 43L2 and 43L3. Therefore, if the input key 43L2 on the left side is pressed twice, the heating power is reduced. The increase or decrease in the thermal power can be seen from the light emitting state of the thermal power display unit 67L immediately behind.

A case where the “single (heating) cooking mode” using the induction heating source 9 is performed will be described.
When the input key 43L2 of the left operation unit 40L is pressed once, it means that the temperature is specified below the thermal power level 1, and the integrated control device MC determines that the control mode of "heat retention" is specified, and the integrated display unit 30 On the display screen 30D of the above, the "third specific screen" 30ST of the heat insulating display is displayed.

Further, when the input key 44L is pressed once while the third specific screen 30ST is displayed, "fried food" is selected as one control menu from the control menu group, and the "third specific" corresponding to the fried food is selected. "Screen" 30ST is displayed.
Since the default temperature of the "third specific screen 30ST" for fried food is set to 180 ° C., the characters "fried food 180 ° C." may be displayed.

When the input key 44L is pressed once more, the "third specific screen 30ST" corresponding to preheating is displayed.
Information such as how to use the preheating menu and the recommended control mode for tamagoyaki may be displayed.

As can be seen from the display screen 3A of FIG. 47, "schematic diagram of a container such as a pot" 280 is displayed in the first area 30L, and the second area 30M and the third area 30R are combined to form a horizontally long and wide display area. It has become. Further, in the space where the second area 30M and the third area 30R are combined, the characters "heat insulation (left IH)" are displayed, indicating that the heat insulation temperature is about 80 ° C. The explanation 30F indicates that the control menu is recommended for soups and the like. At the stage of this display screen 3A, nothing is displayed on the left side display unit 31L. However, as shown in FIG. 47, the heat insulating temperature may be displayed as "80 ° C.".

Next, when the input key 44L is pressed in the state of FIG. 47 (B), one control menu is selected from the "IH control menu group" each time the input key 44L is pressed, and the display is displayed as shown in the display screen 3B. .. In the example of the display screen 3B, it is shown that "fried food" is selected. In the state of FIG. 47 (B), when a certain period of time elapses, the control menu of the left heating unit 17HL is confirmed as "fried food", and the driving of the IH coil 17L is started. As described in FIG. 38, the IH control menu group includes "boiled food", "boiled food", and the like in addition to "fried food".

In the case of the display screen 3B, since the default temperature is set to 180 ° C., the characters “fried food 180 ° C.” are displayed on the left side display unit 31L as shown in FIG. 47.
This temperature of "180 ° C." means that the cooking oil is heated by the IH coil 17L and maintained in the vicinity of 180 ° C., and when the temperature reaches 180 ° C., the voice synthesizer 95 notifies by voice. In addition to that, the integrated display unit 30 displays "the preheating temperature has been reached", and is expected to have the effect of encouraging the user to add foodstuffs and the like.

If it is desired to change the preheating (target) temperature in the fried food (automatic) control menu, the temperature can be lowered by the input key 43L2 or raised by the input key 43L3.

As can be seen from the display screen 3B, the display screen 30D is formed by combining the second area 30M and the third area 30R to form a horizontally long and wide display area, and the second area 30M and the third area 30R are combined. In the space provided, a cautionary statement 30G indicating that the preheating is started and that the cooker 1 is not separated from the cooking device 1 during the preheating operation is displayed.

Next, in the state of FIG. 47 (B), when the input key 44L is pressed and "suitable temperature" is selected as another control menu, the display screen 3C is displayed. As shown on the display screen 3C, the control menu "suitable temperature" is a recommended control mode for heating a pot or the like to a set temperature (default temperature is 180 ° C.) and for fried eggs. The recommended sentence 30H is displayed so that such a meaning can be understood. At the stage of the display screen 3C, the character information "preheating 180 ° C." is displayed on the left side display unit 31L.

The "third specific screen" 30ST is displayed on the individual display units (left side display unit 31L, right side display unit 31R) adjacent to the dedicated operation unit (right operation unit 40R, left operation unit 40L). Is also good.

Next, FIG. 48 will be described.
FIG. 48 is a schematic view illustrating the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 when the central operation unit 40M of the cooking cooker 1 is operated. The scene where the above-mentioned "composite cooking mode" is executed is shown.
Since the display screen 4ST is the default display screen defined by the integrated control device MC, "warm" is displayed in the center of the first area 30L in the front-rear direction.

As described with reference to FIG. 21, when the input key 43M1 is operated, the display screen 4ST of FIG. 48 is displayed on the integrated display unit 30.
As is clear from the display screen 4ST, a specific sentence 30J indicating the name of the control menu "warm" is displayed in large size in the center of the first area 30L in the front-rear direction.

The word "oven" is displayed in the rear BK of the specific sentence 30J of "warm" displayed in the center of the first area 30L, and conversely, the word "range manual" is displayed in a slightly smaller size on the front FR side. NS.

And when the user selects the control menu, the next candidates are "oven" and "manual range". If the (left side) input key 43M1 at the position corresponding to the first area 31L is pressed once at this stage, the character "warm" (specific sentence 30J) changes to "range manual".
Further, when the input key 43M1 at the position corresponding to the first area 31L is pressed once, the word "warm" changes to "oven".

In FIG. 48, the target temperature information 30T of “80 ° C.” is displayed in the second area 30M on the display screen 4ST, which is the default display screen. In the case of microwave heating at this target temperature, if the temperature of the food is 80 ° C., the microwave heating is automatically stopped when the temperature sensor TS1 detects 80 ° C.

In order to raise the target temperature (80 ° C.) of the second area 30M to 85 ° C., the input key 43M2 on the right side, which is located immediately before the second area 30M, is operated once. On the contrary, when it is desired to lower the temperature to 75 ° C., the input key 43M2 on the left side may be operated once.

A mountain-shaped symbol 30UP is displayed above the target temperature (80 ° C.) number in the second area 30M. Also, below the number at 80 ° C., a downwardly pointed (V-shaped) symbol 30DN is displayed.

Since this symbol 30UP and the shape of the input key 43M2 (on the right side) of the central operation unit 40M are similar, the user can operate the input key 43M2 on the right side to raise the temperature, thermal power, etc. Is easy to understand.

On the contrary, since the shape of the input key 43M2 (on the left side) of the central operation unit 40M is similar to that of 30DN, the user can operate the input key 43M2 on the left side when lowering the temperature, thermal power, etc. Is easy to understand. This correspondence rule is also applied to the relationship between the display of the third area 30R and the pair of left and right input keys 43M3. In this way, we have adopted a device to avoid operation mistakes (wrong input keys) during user input operations.

In FIG. 48, 30K is a heating source display unit that indicates in characters that the heating source is a microwave heating source 189. As described above, 30P is reference information indicating that it is a recommended control menu for warming side dishes and the like. The content of this reference information may be another additional information 30Q, or two or more types of information may be alternately displayed on the display screen 30D for several seconds each.

Next, FIG. 49 will be described.
FIG. 49 is another schematic view illustrating the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 when the central operation unit 40M of the cooking cooker 1 is operated to execute the combined cooking mode.

The display screens 5ST, 50UPN, 50DN1 and the like shown in FIG. 49 are all one type of the second specific screen 30SC.
When the control menu is set to "range manual", the display screen 5ST is the default display screen defined by the integrated control device MC.
That is, in the second specific screen 30SC of the cooperative cooking mode, one control menu (in this case, "range manual" and the default value of the control condition (in this case, microwave output 500 W, heating for 1 minute) are set. Is displayed.

As described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 48, when the input key 43M1 is operated, the display screen 4ST of FIG. 48 is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 as a kind of the second specific screen 30SC. Next, when the input key 43M1 on the left side of the central operation unit 40M is operated several times, the specific sentence 30J changes to "range manual", and the display screen 5ST of FIG. 49 is displayed on the integrated display unit 30. ..

As is clear from the display screen 5ST, the specific sentence 30J of the control menu "range manual" is displayed in large size in the center of the first area 30L in the front-rear direction.

On the display screen 5ST, the microwave output value (watt value) information 30X of "500W" is displayed in the second area 30M. Further, in the adjacent third area 30R, the microwave heating time information 30MY of "1 minute 00 seconds" is displayed. As can be seen from this display screen 5ST, it is included in the combined cooking mode, but since it is known from the beginning that only the microwave heating source 189 is used in this "range manual", it is shown in FIG. Such a heating source display unit 30K (indicating that it is a microwave heating source 189 in characters) may not be displayed.

If you want to lower the microwave output value (watt value) of 500W in the second area 30M of the display screen 5ST by one step to 200W, you can operate the input key 43M2 on the left side once.

Similarly, in order to lengthen the heating time of the second area 30R to 1 minute and 10 seconds, the input key 43M3 on the right side, which is located immediately before the third area 30M, is operated once. On the contrary, when it is desired to shorten the heating time by one step to 50 seconds, the input key 43M3 on the left side may be operated once.

In the display screen 5ST of FIG. 49, the mountain-shaped symbol 30UP is not displayed above the number of the output (500W) of the second area 30M. Also, below the number of 500W, a downwardly pointed (V-shaped) symbol 30DN is displayed.

The display screen 5DNN in FIG. 49 shows the minimum thermal power (100 W) and the shortest time (10 seconds), and the display contents of the first area 30 L are omitted.
The symbol 30UP is displayed only on the upper side of the minimum thermal power (100 W) of the display screen 5DNN, indicating that only a thermal power larger than this thermal power can be selected. Similarly, the symbol 30UP is displayed only on the upper side of the number of the shortest time (10 seconds), and the symbol 30DN is not displayed. In other words, here as well, the symbol 30UP indicates that a shorter time cannot be selected.

Next, FIG. 50 will be described.
FIG. 50 is still another schematic view illustrating the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 when cooking in the combined cooking mode is performed. That is, the display content of the second specific screen 30SC shows a situation in which the display content changes at any time according to the input operation of the user.

When the input key 43M1 on the left side corresponding to the first area 30L is operated once in the state of the display screen shown in FIG. 49, it changes from "range manual" to "boiled leaf vegetables" as shown in FIG. can.

The display screen 6ST in FIG. 50 is the default display screen. In the first area 30L, the specific sentence (name) 30J of the control menu, "Boiled leaf vegetables" is displayed in large size.
In the second area 30M, the information 30V indicating the microwave output level is displayed as "standard", and if cooking is started as it is, it will be heated at 500W. The microwave output value in the case of "standard" may be 500 W, but may be other than this. That is, when the microwave heating source 9 is used, the "standard" of the heating power level is different in each compound cooking mode, and the output is not always the same (for example, 500 W).

In the first area 30L of FIG. 50, as described with reference to FIG. 48, a heating source display unit 30K indicating that the heating source is a microwave heating source 189 is displayed. As described above, 30P is a recommended sentence (reference information) indicating that the control mode is recommended for warming side dishes and the like. The content of this recommended sentence may be another additional information 30Q, or two or more types of information may be alternately displayed on the display screen 30D for several seconds each.

Next, FIG. 51 will be described.
FIG. 51 is still another schematic view illustrating the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 when cooking in the combined cooking mode is performed. The display content of the second specific screen 30SC shows a situation in which the display content changes at any time according to the input operation of the user.
FIG. 51 shows a scene in which a range grill (RG) control menu called “RG cooking” is selected.

As described above, the "RG cooking" is a "range grill cooking" in which the heating chamber 113 is used to cook by combining microwave heating and oven heating. A pattern in which microwave heating is performed first to heat food to some extent and then heated by the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, a pattern in which heating is performed in the reverse order, and a pattern in which microwave heating and heater heating are performed at the same time. There are three types. Note that "simultaneous" here does not mean that the timings of both the start and end of heating are exactly the same, and it is sufficient that the time zones of the heating operations overlap even at a part.

In the display screen 7ST1 shown in FIG. 51, first, both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are simultaneously driven to heat for 1 minute, and then the microwave heating is stopped and the oven heating source 188 alone is used for 5 minutes. It can be seen that it is a heating control (time control) pattern of heating.

The reason why the abbreviated form "RG" is used instead of the term "range grill" is to minimize the number of characters that can be displayed in the first display area 30L. This is because if an attempt is made to display a larger number of characters, the occupied area of the first area 30L will increase.

In the display example shown in FIG. 51, the heating time information 30S is displayed in minutes in the second area 30M, and the heating time information 30GY for the subsequent grill cooking is also displayed in minutes (however, it is short). When the time comes, it is displayed in units of 10 seconds).
The heating time information 30S shown in the first area 30L and the heating time information 30GY in the third area 30R can be appropriately changed by the input keys 43M2 and 43M3 of the central operation unit 40M.

In FIG. 51, the display screen 7ST2 is a heating control (time control) pattern in which the microwave heating source 189 is first heated for 1 minute (microwave output 500 W), and then the oven heating source 188 alone is heated for 5 minutes. This is the case. This display screen 7ST2 is a default display screen. The display screen 7ST1 that drives both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating edge 188 for only the first minute is also the default display screen. The user can specify the default display screen in advance (“function setting” using the input key 43KP described above).

Next, FIG. 52 will be described.
FIG. 52 is a schematic plan view illustrating the display contents of the display screen 6ST shown in FIG. 50 and the operation of the central operation unit 40M.

As shown in FIG. 52, when the main power switch 97 is turned on, the individual light emitting units 27M1 to 27M4 emit light in a unified light emitting color by the display unit drive circuit 63.

After that, when the input key 43M1 for selecting the combined cooking mode is further operated, the display screen 6ST shown in FIG. 50 is displayed by default in the first area 30L.
At this display stage, a total of four input keys 43M1 to 43M2 corresponding to the first area 30L and the second area 30M can all accept input. Therefore, the two individual light emitting units 27M3 and 27M4 corresponding to the four input keys 43M1 to 43M2 continue to emit light.

On the other hand, after the display screen 6ST, the display screens 6UP1, 6DN1, etc. are displayed as shown in FIG. It changes to blinking as indicated by a circle. Then, the existence of the input key 43MS is emphasized by light. When the user touches the input key 43MS, the mode shifts to the combined cooking mode. In the case of a heating means other than the induction heating source 9, the heating operation is started immediately. However, in the case of the induction heating source 9, it is necessary to press the input keys 43R1 and 43L1 once after shifting to the combined cooking mode. Even in the cooperative cooking mode, the same applies after the transition to the cooking process using the induction heating source 9.

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the input functions of the input key 43M1 and the input key 43MS are effective, the individual light emitting units 27M1 to 27M6 are made to emit light in the first light emitting form (continuous light emitting). It is provided with light emitting means (display unit drive circuit 63).
When the reference information 30P is displayed, the integrated control unit MC has a configuration in which only the light emitting unit 27M6 corresponding to the start selection unit (input key 43MS) emits light in the second light emitting mode (blinking). be.

With the above configuration, the user can easily identify the state of waiting for the command to start the heating operation (of the combined cooking) by the blinking of the light emitting unit 27M6. Since the light emitting unit 27M6 also supports the touch-type input key 43MT that can stop the operations of microwave heating and oven heating, the light emitting unit 27M6 emits light even after the heating operation starts. In this case, the input function of the input key 43MT is also effective, and a command to stop heating can be transmitted by touch operation.

When the main power switch 97 is turned on, the display unit drive circuit 63 may cause only the light emitting unit 27M6 corresponding to the input key 43MS, which is the start selection unit, to blink from the beginning. Further, the other light emitting units 27M1 to 27M4 may emit light continuously and emit light in a form different from the input key 43MS of the start selection unit.

(Basic operation during cooking in cooperative cooking mode)
Next, the basic operation of the cooperative cooking mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 60.
FIG. 53 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the integrated display unit and the central operation unit during cooperative cooking. FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram showing input operations and processes when the cooperative cooking mode is implemented and when the single cooking mode is implemented. FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode and the single cooking mode. FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode and the single cooking mode.

As shown in FIG. 53, when the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the first specific screen 30SP as shown in FIG. 53 is displayed.
Next, when the input key 43M1 is touched, the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30 (first specific screen 30SP) is further used to identify the object to be cooked that is the target of the plurality of cooperative cooking modes. Identification information (including graphic mark and name of cooked food) 330 is displayed. In FIG. 53, the number of “cooked objects” that can be executed in the cooperative cooking mode displayed on the integrated display unit 30 is three. That is, there are three types: hamburger steak, gratin, and roast beef, and the number of items to be cooked is called the "number of cooperative cooking menus".

In the first embodiment, the total number of cooperative cooking menus is eight. Details will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73.

In FIG. 53, 330 is the identification information, and in the first embodiment, it is the information indicating the name of the food to be cooked (for example, hamburger steak).
There are eight identification information 330. In other words, there are eight cooperative cooking menus. Reference numeral 331 is additional information presented to the user regarding cooking of the object to be cooked (for example, hamburger steak).

In FIG. 53, as additional information 331, "when the start button is pressed, heating of the left IH is started" is displayed. This means that if the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, induction heating can be started at the left heating unit 17HL. However, in the first embodiment, it is necessary to press the input key 43L1 with the left operation unit 40L after the input key 43MS.

As shown in FIG. 53, the identification information 330A indicating the name of another cooked dish (for example, gratin) is displayed on the identification information 330 shown on the first specific screen 30SP.
Further, under the identification information 330, identification information 330B indicating the name of another cooked food (for example, roast beef) is displayed. In the following description, when the identification information is generically referred to, the reference numeral 330 is used.

Similar to the switching of the display of the "composite cooking mode" described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 52, the name of the object to be cooked (for example, hamburger steak) that can be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode by operating the two input keys 43M1 described above. The display of the identification information 330 indicating the above changes in a form of sequentially moving upward or downward.

In the first embodiment, there are a total of eight types of objects to be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode as described above. Therefore, for example, if the input key 43M1 on the left side is operated eight times, the identification information 330 of all the objects to be cooked goes around. On the contrary, if the input key 43M1 on the right side is operated eight times, the identification information 330 of all the objects to be cooked goes through. This will be described in detail in FIGS. 71-73.

The default display for the linked cooking menu is "hamburger" as shown in FIG.
Identification information 330 indicating the name of the object to be cooked (hamburger steak) is displayed in the center in the front-rear direction (of the first area 30L). By operating the input key 43M1 in this state, the identification information of another object to be cooked can be displayed in the center (corresponding to step STR4 in FIG. 65).

The “first specific screen” 30SP referred to in the first embodiment means the display screen of the integrated display unit 30 shown in FIG. 53. The display content of the first specific screen SP is not always the same because it changes at any time depending on the input of the central operation unit 40M by the user and the operating state of the cooking cooker 1.

The main information displayed on the first specific screen 30SP is as shown in FIG. 53.
(1) The identification information 330 is displayed in the first area 30L. This identification information 330 is always displayed in principle even if the heating process in the cooperative cooking mode progresses. However, as shown in the display screen 10C of FIG. 82, there are some exceptions.
(2) In the first half of the horizontally long area where the second area 30M and the third area 30R are combined, a pair of heating part specifying parts 333R and 333L corresponding to the heating parts of the induction heating source 9 used are displayed. NS. Either one of the heating unit specifying units 333R and 333L can be selected by operating the input key 43M2. The selected heating unit specifying units 333R and 333L indicate the selected heating unit whose color and brightness change as shown in white letters, for example, as shown in FIG. 53.
(3) A horizontally long strip-shaped process display unit 332 is displayed in the latter half of the horizontally long area where the second area 30M and the third area 30R are combined. The process display unit 332 is continuously displayed during the period from before the transition to the cooperative cooking mode to the end of all the cooking processes in the cooperative cooking mode. In addition, the contents are updated at any time by a method such as black-and-white inversion display or changing the color so that the current cooking process can be understood according to the progress of the cooking process. This will be explained in detail later.
(4) Additional information 331 that can be used as a reference for cooking is displayed on the right side of the heating unit specifying unit 333R and 333L, except that it is displayed in a wide range that covers the entire integrated display unit 30. (See FIG. 89 (C)).

When the input key 43MS is pressed while the identification information 330 of the target object to be cooked (for example, hamburger steak) is displayed in the center of the first area 30L, a cooperative cooking mode for cooking the object to be cooked is performed. Is issued to the integrated control device MC (corresponding to step STR7 in FIG. 65).

In cooking (for example, hamburger steak) in which the induction heating source 9 is used in the cooking step 1, either the left heating unit 17HL or the right heating unit 17HR may be recommended according to the cooperative cooking mode. For example, in order to recommend the use of the left heating unit 17HL, the default display screen of the first specific screen 30SP in the case of the hamburger is as shown in FIG. 53, and the left heating unit 17HL is recommended.

The additional information 331 changes according to the progress of the cooking process, and also changes depending on the object to be cooked. The example shown in FIG. 53 illustrates that the input key 43MS needs to be operated in order to start induction cooking.

Next, FIG. 54 will be described.
In the flowchart for explaining the control operation of the cooking cooker shown in FIG. 37, the operations after step ST4 are shown in FIG. 54.
After the display / notification step (ST4) prompting the selection of the heating means, the right operation unit 40R can select the cooking by the right heating unit 17HR (SP1). In addition, cooking by the left heating unit 17HL can also be selected by the left operating unit 40L (SP2).

Further, after that step (ST4), cooking by the microwave heating source 189 can be selected by the central operation unit 40M (SS1). In addition, cooking using the heating chamber 113 by the oven heating source 188 can be selected by the central operation unit 40M (SS2).

In FIG. 54, combined cooking can also be selected by the central operation unit 40M, but the illustration is omitted for the sake of simplicity.

After the step (ST4), the cooperative cooking can be selected by operating the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M (SR1).
As described above, "cooperative cooking" means that one object to be cooked (including food, meat, vegetables, etc., hereinafter the same) has a different heating location and is independently heated under operating conditions (hereinafter, "control conditions"). ) Refers to cooking performed using two types of heat sources that can be set.

In the "cooperative cooking" in the first embodiment, the heating place for one object to be cooked is on the top plate 15 and inside the heating chamber 113. The two types of heating sources whose heating operation conditions can be set independently are an induction heating source 9 and a microwave heating source 189. The microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are heated in the same time zone or with a time difference.

The "cooperative cooking" in the first embodiment is composed of two parts, "first coordinating cooking" and "second cooperating cooking".
The "first cooperative cooking" means that the induction heating source 9 first cooks in the left heating unit 17HL, and then the inside of the heating chamber 113 is cooked by microwaves. The cooking process of this "first cooperative cooking", that is, the one that defines the cooking sequence is the "first cooperative cooking mode" (SR2A).

On the other hand, the "second cooperative cooking" means that first, microwave heating, oven heating source 188, or (cooperative) cooking by these two heating sources is performed inside the heating chamber 113, and then induction is performed. Cooking is performed in the left heating unit 17HL by the heating source 9.

The "second cooperative cooking mode" (SR2B) defines the cooking process of this "second cooperative cooking", that is, the cooking sequence.
In the case of the second cooperative cooking mode, usually (default setting condition) is the cooperation for a specific period with respect to either or both of the first used heating source, the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. The integrated control device MC performs a process of limiting operations corresponding to menus other than the cooking mode.

The selection (SR2A, SR2B) of the "first cooperative cooking mode" and the "second cooperative cooking mode" does not mean that the user determines and performs the selection operation each time, but the identification information 330 (in the cooperative cooking mode). For example, when the cooking name "hamburger") is selected, the integrated control device MC automatically selects (determines) it.

In the first embodiment, the heating units of the induction heating source 9 used when executing the "cooperative cooking" menu are both the right heating unit 17HR and the left heating unit 17HL. Therefore, in the process of implementing the cooperative cooking mode, for example, when only the left heating unit 17HL is used, the right heating unit 17HR can be freely used regardless of the cooperative cooking during the execution of the cooperative cooking mode. .. However, if the power control unit 72 finds that the total value of the power consumption during cooperative cooking and the power consumption of the right heating unit 17HR used individually exceeds the limit value, the right heating unit 17HR is used. The integrated control device MC issues a command to prohibit or forcibly reduce the thermal power.

As shown in FIG. 54, at the stage (SR5) when the induction cooking is started, the user operates the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L to specify the thermal power (power consumption) in the left heating unit 17HL. Can be done (SR6). Further, by operating the input key 43L1, the heating operation can be stopped at an arbitrary timing (SR7).

In the cooperative cooking mode, the cooking time of the left heating unit 17HL is basically not set in advance, so that the user can cook for any time desired.

Further, at the stage (SR5) when the induction heating cooking is started using the right heating unit 17HR, the user operates the input keys 43R2 and 43R3 of the right operating unit 40R to generate heat (power consumption) in the right heating unit 17HR. Can be specified (SR6).

Further, when the right heating unit 17HR is being driven, the heating operation can be stopped at an arbitrary timing by operating the input key 43R1 (SR7).
Further, when the left heating unit 17HL is being driven, the heating operation can be stopped at an arbitrary timing by operating the input key 43L1 (SR7).

When the cooking process by the left heating unit 17HL is completed by the input key 43L1, the cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode proceeds to the next process (described in detail in FIG. 55).
When the induction heating step is completed in the cooking step of the first cooperative cooking, it is necessary to operate the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M again (SR8). When this cooperative cooking restart command is issued (SR9), the microwave output value during microwave heating may be increased or decreased by operating the input keys 43M2 or 43M3 of the central operation unit 40M (SR10). However, there is also a control menu in which the cooking process proceeds while the microwave output is fixed at 500 W, for example.

When the microwave cooking is terminated by the input key 43MT, the entire cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode is terminated (SR11). Although it is not the cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode, after that, the user may operate the central operation unit 40M to further perform microwave cooking (depending on the cooperative cooking mode or the menu of independent cooking).

FIG. 54 will continue to be described.
SS1 to SS11 of FIG. 54 show the operation steps when microwave cooking and oven cooking are performed by the central operation unit 40M.
As described above, when the input key 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M is operated, the independent control mode and the combined cooking mode for microwave heating and oven heating are displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (see FIG. 34). Therefore, if the input key 43M1 is pressed, one combined cooking mode can be selected (SS3).

34
Next, when the input key 43MS is pressed, execution of one combined cooking mode is instructed (SS4), and cooking in the "single cooking mode" can be started (SS5). In the description of FIG. 34, the whole is described as the combined cooking mode, but the menu such as "microwave oven manual" is only microwave heating. In other words, the actual situation also includes a single heating control menu.

In other words, the "single cooking mode" referred to in FIG. 54 is a term for distinguishing from the above-mentioned "cooperative cooking mode", and does not mean that the heating source used is always a single unit or a single unit (single unit). In some cases).
For example, when the input key 43M1 is operated, the RG control menu called "RG cooking" can be displayed on the integrated display unit, and this "RG cooking" is a combination of microwave cooking and grill cooking (covered). Cooking can be heated by microwave and radiant heat at the same time). This "RG cooking" is classified into the combined cooking mode in the first embodiment.

The heating conditions (eg, heating time) may be changed after the start of microwave heating or oven heating (SS6).
When the input key 43MT is pressed, the execution of one control menu is instructed to stop (SS7), and the microwave heating or oven heating operation is stopped (SS8).

FIG. 54 will continue to be described.
SP1 to SP8 of FIG. 54 show operation steps when induction cooking is performed by the right operation unit 40R and the left operation unit 40R.
For example, by pressing the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L, it is possible to select cooking by the right heating unit 17HL (SP2). Then, the induction heating control menu is automatically confirmed after a certain period of time without operating the input keys 43L2 or 43L3 (SP3). The "induction heating control menu" referred to here is an IH control menu.
In other words, the induction heating control menu is completely different from the "cooperative cooking mode" displayed on the integrated display unit 30 by the first specific screen 30SP by operating the input key 43MC.

Execution of one control menu is commanded (SP4), and cooking in the "single cooking mode" can be started (SP5).
The “single cooking” referred to in step SP5 means that the heating source used is the induction heating source 9 alone.
If the user operates the input keys 43R2 or 43R3 to command the change of the thermal power of the induction heating after the induction heating is started, the integrated control device MC changes the thermal power which is one of the control conditions. (SP6).

In both the combined cooking mode and the cooperative cooking mode, the start command of the cooking process for performing microwave heating is the input key 43MS. The input key 43MS is also used to start the cooking process in which the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are driven independently.
As mentioned above, it does not have a dedicated switch button or input key for the user to command the start of induction heating, but a dedicated switch or input key for giving a command to start heating is provided (in addition to the input key 43MS). You may.

When the input key 43R1 is pressed, the execution of one induction heating control menu is instructed to be stopped (SP7), and the operation of induction heating is stopped (SS8). As described above, the input key 43R1 is used both in the scene where the heating source is selected and the operation is started and in the case where the cooking is finished.

Next, FIG. 55 will be described. FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing a priority relationship between the cooperative cooking mode and the independent control menu by the induction heating source. It is also a schematic diagram showing that the heating source used during cooperative cooking is restricted in operation.
The cooperative cooking mode shown in FIG. 55 is the “first cooperative cooking mode” described in FIG. 54.

In the "first cooperative cooking mode" of this example, the induction heating source 9 is operated in the cooking step 1, and after the heating operation is completed, the microwave heating source 189 is operated as the heating means in the cooking step 2. Further, in the cooking step 2, the oven heating source 188 is operated as the third heating means.

As shown in FIG. 55, one cooperative cooking mode is composed of four stages.
P1 is the first stage (preparation period), which is a period from operating the input key 43MC to executing the cooperative cooking mode and then pressing the input key 43MS.

P2 is a cooking period (cooking step 1). The cooking step 1 does not include a "preheating step" (see FIGS. 59, 60, 63) in which the object to be cooked is not actually heated.
Since P3 switches from cooking by the first heating means to cooking by the second heating means, the operation of the first heating means is temporarily stopped, and the rest period until the cooking of the second heating means is started. Is. The length of this pause depends on the user's operation timing. That is, if the user issues a command to start the second cooking step 2 earlier, this pause time becomes shorter.
P4 is a cooking period (cooking step 2) by a second heating means (or a third heating means in addition to this).

As is clear from FIG. 55, the stage of selecting the cooperative cooking mode, that is, the identification information 330 indicating the name of the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (on the displayed first specific screen 30SP). ) At the time of displaying, the left operation unit 40L of the left heating source 17HL becomes unusable.

Specifically, among the various input keys of the left operation unit 40L, at least the input key 43L1 is invalidated by the integrated control device MC. The meaning of "invalidation" is that a valid command signal is not transmitted from the input key 43L1 to the integrated control device MC, and even if a valid command signal is transmitted, the integrated control device MC transmits the command signal. It has both meanings of not processing as a valid command signal. In any case, the left heating unit 17HL cannot be selected.

At the same time, when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed, that is, when the identification information 330 is displayed, the right operation unit 40R of the right heating unit 17HR becomes unusable. However, if the right heating unit 17HR is already used for another control menu (heating operation is continuing), it is determined that the right heating unit 17HR cannot be used in the cooperative cooking mode (integrated control). Since it depends on the device MC), the above-mentioned "prohibition of use" processing is not performed.

Therefore, the left heating unit 17HL is in a state of being "occupied" by selecting the cooperative cooking mode. Further, when viewed from the whole of the induction heating source 9, the use of only a part (left side) of the two heating portions is "restricted". When the right heating unit 17HL is not in use for other cooking, the right heating unit 17HR is also occupied in the same manner. The control program may be changed so that the time when the input key 43MS is pressed after selecting the cooperative cooking mode is in the "occupied" state.

Here, the occupancy of the induction heating source 9 will be described focusing on the function of the input operation unit 40.
As described above, the input operation unit has an input key 43L1 for selecting cooking by the left heating unit 17HL.
The input key 43L1 can stop the operation at any time after the heating operation of the left IH coil 17L is started. That is, when it is pressed once for the first time, it exerts a function of selecting the left heating unit 17HL, and when it is pressed once after the induction heating is started, the heating operation can be stopped instantly.

On the other hand, the input operation unit has an input key 44L. The input key 44L is a touch-type input key capable of selecting a "control menu" for induction cooking by the left heating unit 17HL.
In this case, the "control menu" includes "boiled water", "boiled", "rice cooked", "fried food (automatic)", and the like, and only one of them can be selected.

To select cooking in the cooperative cooking mode, it is necessary to first press the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M. When the input key 43MC is pressed, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed when the above-mentioned "permission condition" is satisfied.
When the first specific screen 30SP is displayed (see FIG. 55) or when the "start input command" for shifting to the cooperative cooking mode is performed by the input key 43MS (see FIG. 56), the cooperation is performed. The cooking mode is entered, and at the same time, the heating source to be used becomes "occupied state".

The left operation unit 40L when the induction heating source 9 is in the “occupied state” will be described.
There are two ways for the integrated control device MC to occupy the left heating unit 17HL.
(1) First method:
When the mode shifts to the cooperative cooking mode, the input function of the input key 43L1 is enabled. All other input keys 43L2, 43L3, 43L4, 44L disable the input function.
In this case, after a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) after the input key 43MS is pressed, the supply of high frequency power to the left IH coil 17L is started.
Therefore, when stopping the started induction heating (in the cooperative cooking mode), the input key 43L1 may be pressed once.
Further, in order to start heating again for additional heating in this state, the input key 43L1 may be pressed once (the cooperative cooking mode is not canceled even at this stage).
(2) Second method:
The input function of the input keys 43L1, 43L2, 43L3, 43L4 in the left heating unit 17HL is invalidated. However, even if the mode shifts to the cooperative cooking mode, only the input key 44L is enabled.
Therefore, the operation of the induction heating source 189 (in the cooperative cooking mode) is determined for the first time only when the input key 44L is pressed once after shifting to the cooperative cooking mode.
After that, when the supply of high frequency power to the left IH coil 17L is started and the induction heating is started, the input function of the input key 43L1 is immediately restored. Therefore, if the input key 43L1 is pressed once, the induction heating operation can be stopped immediately. Further, by pressing the input key 43L1 again, the induction heating operation can be restarted (the cooperative cooking mode is not canceled even at this stage).

In the following description, the above-mentioned first method will be selected and described, but even if the first method is adopted, there is no effect on the basic effect obtained in the present disclosure.

As shown in FIG. 55, in the cooking step 1 (P2), after the induction heating is started, the user operates the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L to increase or decrease the heating power. can do.

In the cooking step 1, it is necessary to first press the input key 43L1 (see FIG. 23) of the left operation unit 40L only once, and at this point, the start command of induction heating is sent from the left operation unit 40L to the integrated control device MC. ..

The operation of the heating start command by the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L is omitted, and the induction heating cooking has a constant heating power (weak or standard heating power) within a certain time (for example, 10 seconds later) from the time of input by the input key 43MS. You may start with.

Further, in the cooking step 1 (P2), the user can immediately stop the induction heating operation by touching the input key 43L1 on the left operation unit 40L.
When this operation of stopping the heating operation is performed, the cooking step 1 is immediately completed. However, the cooperative cooking mode itself is not canceled.

Therefore, the heating operation (coordinated cooking mode) by the left heating unit 17HL can be started. However, the operation of resuming the heating operation is the same as in the case of the single heating mode as described with reference to FIGS. 46 (A) and 46 (B), and the input key 43L1 for resuming cooking by the left heating unit 17HL is pressed again. You only need to press it once. Further, when the user specifies the thermal power, if the input key 43L2 or 43L3 is pressed, the thermal power is reduced or increased by one step each time the input key is pressed, and the desired thermal power can be set.

As shown in FIG. 55, after the cooking step 1 (P2), the induction-heated object to be cooked is moved to the heating chamber 113. It is also possible to store the metal dish used for induction heating in the heating chamber 113 as it is and heat it with microwaves, but if the area to be cooked (food) is entirely covered with metal, it is possible. Since it is not possible to heat the food inside with microwaves, it is necessary to transfer it to a metal container without a lid, heat-resistant glass, or a porcelain container.

In the heating pause period (P3), when the door 114 is closed and the input key 43MS is pressed, the microwave generated by the magnetron 122 of the microwave heating source 189 is guided to the inside of the heating chamber 113, and the cooking period (P3). Cooking process 2) (P4) begins.

After being started by the input key 43MS, the control conditions for microwave heating can be arbitrarily set by the user by operating various input keys 43M2 and 43M3 of the central operation unit 40M (default values can be changed). ). However, depending on the individual object to be cooked targeted by the cooperative cooking mode, the change of control conditions may be partially restricted. For example, since the output of microwave heating is basically 500 W, the control program is such that this cannot be increased or decreased during the cooking process.

As shown in FIG. 55, after the cooking step 2 (P4), a predetermined time (default time) specified by the control program is set without setting the control condition (for example, heating time) for microwave heating. There are two types, one is to automatically end the cooking process at the elapsed stage, and the other is to end at an arbitrary stage by the user operating the input key 43MT of the central operation unit 40M.

Further, once the cooking process 2 is stopped, it is treated as if all the cooking processes in the cooperative cooking mode have been completed. Therefore, since the cooperative cooking mode is canceled, the input key 43M1 is operated again to set a control menu such as "range manual" and additional cooking is performed as in the case of executing the combined cooking mode. You can also do it. If the operation program of the cooperative cooking mode stipulates that the cooking step 3 is provided after the cooking step 2, the process proceeds to the cooking step 3 after the transition period TR after the cooking step 2.

As shown in FIG. 55, in this cooperative cooking mode, only the left heating unit 17HL of the first heating means 9 is used, so that the right heating unit 17HR is used during the preparation period (P1) to the cooking step 2 (P4). There are no restrictions on the use of. Therefore, during the period of these cooking steps 1 and 2, another cooking can be performed in parallel with the right heating unit 17HR. For example, the right operation unit (first operation unit on the right side) 40R may be used to perform, for example, "boiler" in the IH control menu on the right heating unit 17HR.

Next, FIG. 56 will be described.
FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing the priority relationship between the cooperative cooking mode and the independent control menu (IH control menu) by the induction heating source, and is an example in which the configuration of FIG. 55 is slightly changed.
As shown in FIG. 56, the start time at which the heating source used (in this case, the induction heating source 9) is restricted in operation during cooperative cooking may be changed.

The example shown in FIG. 56 is at the stage of selecting the cooperative cooking mode, that is, at the time when the identification information 330 indicating the name of the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (first specific screen 30SP). , The left heating source 17HL is not yet occupied. Therefore, the left operation unit 40L of the left heating source 17HL can be input-operated and can be used in the independent control menu (IH control menu).

That is, in this preparation period P1, a new (single cooking mode) input operation by the left operation unit 40L is possible.

When the start of cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is commanded by the input key 43MS, at least the input key 43L1 among the various input keys of the left operation unit 40L is invalidated by the integrated control device MC. This point is different from that of FIG. 55. All input keys of the left operation unit 40L may be invalidated. The meaning of "invalidation" in FIG. 56 is the same as that described in FIG. 55.

Next, the basic operations of the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 63.

FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing in chronological order the relationship between the input operation and the display up to each transition between the combined cooking mode by the combined cooking mode and the cooperative cooking mode by the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between various processes and operations of cooking in the cooperative cooking mode (cooperative cooking mode). FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between various processes and operations of cooking in the cooperative cooking mode (cooperative cooking mode). FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the relationship between various processes and operations of cooking in the cooperative cooking mode (cooperative cooking mode). FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a notification operation of the cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode in the cooking cooker 1.

FIG. 57 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 57, the operation procedure until the transition to the combined cooking mode requires four inputs. That is, the first input to the fourth input are performed by the input keys 43M1, 43M2, 43M3 and 43MS. Then, when the mode shifts to the combined cooking mode, it is necessary to operate the input keys 43R1 or 43L1 in order to actually operate the induction heating source 9.

On the other hand, the operation procedure until the transition to the cooperative cooking mode requires four inputs as shown in FIG. 57. That is, the first input to the fourth input are performed by the input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43M2 and 43MS.

In the case of shifting to the cooperative cooking mode as described above, in order to first operate the right heating unit 17HR after operating the input key 43M2 in the central operation unit 40M, the user operates the input key 43R1 in the right operation unit 40R. do.

Further, when the left heating unit 17HL is selected to be used in the cooperative cooking mode, the user operates the input key 43L1 on the left operation unit 40L.

In this way, after the transition to the cooperative cooking mode, the operation unit corresponding to the heating source can command the start of the heating operation. In addition, the heating stop operation can be performed with the same operation unit, so that the user does not get lost in the position of the operation unit or the input key when the heating starts and ends.

Next, FIG. 58 will be described.
FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram showing various processes of cooking in the cooperative cooking mode (cooperative cooking mode) on the horizontal axis, and the vertical axis showing the operation contents of the user's operation and the main constituent parts such as the display unit.

FIG. 58 shows a process until the cooperative cooking is started.
In item A on the left side of FIG. 58, "user operation" indicates various input operations in the central operation unit 40M and the right operation unit 40R. In this "user operation" process, operations A1 to A5 are performed five times.

“Pressing the relay button” in A1 means operating the input key 43MC for selecting the cooperative cooking mode. The "menu selection" of A2 is to select one desired menu in the cooperative cooking mode. This selection is made with the input key 43M1.

The “heating source selection” of A3 is an operation of selecting either one of the right heating unit 17HR and the left heating unit 17HL of the induction heating source 9, and is performed by the input key 43M2. In this example, the case where the right heating unit 17HR is selected is shown.
“Pressing the start button” of A4 means operating the input key 43MS.
“Pressing the input button of the right IH” of A5 means operating the input key 43R1 of the right operation unit 40R.

In item B on the left side of FIG. 58, the “cooking process” indicates the type of process until the cooperative cooking mode is executed. The process referred to here is different from the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2.
B1 "Selecting a cooperative cooking mode" indicates a process of selecting an object to be cooked and selecting an operation program of the cooperative cooking mode corresponding to the object to be cooked.
“Waiting for grill heating source” in B2 indicates a period during which the oven heating source 188 is waiting. “During heating” in B3 indicates an induction heating period by the right heating unit 17HR.

In item C on the left side of FIG. 58, the “left IH display unit” refers to the left side display unit 31L.
“Turning off (does not accept operation)” in C1 means that no information is displayed on the left side display unit 31L. As described above, until the time of the input for instructing the start of the transition of the cooperative cooking mode (operation A4 in FIG. 58), the user is performing the input operation while watching the first specific screen 30SP of the cooperative cooking mode. be. Therefore, since the user may use the left heating unit 17HL in the cooperative cooking mode, the display screen of the left side display unit 31 is not activated as part of setting the left heating unit 17HL to the “occupied state”. At the same time, the input function of the left operation unit 40L is not accepted.

“Turning off (accepting normal operation)” in C2 means that no information is displayed on the left side display unit 31L. However, at the stage after the time of the input for instructing the start of the transition of the cooperative cooking mode (operation A4 in FIG. 58), the input operation of the first specific screen 30SP is completed. For this reason, it has been confirmed that the user will use the right heating unit 17HR in the cooperative cooking mode, and the possibility of using the left heating unit 17HL has disappeared. Therefore, it is not necessary to put the left heating unit 17HL in the "occupied state". For this reason, at this stage, the input function in the left operation unit 40L can be accepted. If the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L is actually pressed, it becomes possible to select independent cooking using the left heating unit 17HL.

In item D on the left side of FIG. 58, the “right IH display unit” refers to the display content of the right side display unit 31R.
“Turning off (does not accept operation)” in D1 means that no information is displayed on the right side display unit 31R.
As described above, until the time of the input for instructing the start of the transition of the cooperative cooking mode (operation A4 in FIG. 58), the user is performing the input operation while watching the first specific screen 30SP of the cooperative cooking mode. be. Therefore, since the user may use the right heating unit 17HR in the cooperative cooking mode, the display screen of the right side display unit 31 is not activated when the right heating unit 17HR is set to the “occupied state”. At the same time, the input function of the right operation unit 40R is not accepted.

After that, when the time of the input for instructing the start of the transition of the cooperative cooking mode (operation A4 in FIG. 58) has passed, the input operation of the first specific screen 30SP of the cooperative cooking mode is completed.
The “heating standby state) of D2 refers to a state of waiting for the user's operation A5 after it is confirmed that the user uses the right heating unit 17HR in the cooperative cooking mode. That is, it is a stage of waiting for the start command of the cooking process 1 by the right heating unit 17HR.

The "preheating display" of D3 means that the information on the preheating state is displayed on the right side display unit 31R. For example, displaying information on the actual temperature rise until the preheating (target) temperature (eg, 180 ° C.) is reached.

In item E on the left side of FIG. 58, the "center display unit" refers to the display content of the integrated display unit 30.
The "initial screen of cooperative cooking" of E1 indicates that the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (see FIG. 82).
The "menu change" of E2 means that the input key 43M1 is operated to select one target object to be cooked from the cooperative cooking modes and select the corresponding cooperative cooking mode (FIG. 83). reference).

“Changing the selective heating source (selecting the right IH)” of E3 means selecting the right heating unit 17HR while looking at the first specific screen 30SP. This selection is made by the input key 43M2 (see FIG. 83). ).
The "right IH input button pressing guidance display" of E4 means that the operation of the input key 43R1 arranged on the right operation unit 40R is performed in order to start the cooperative cooking on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30. It means to indicate that it is necessary. That is, the user is recommended to press the input key 43R1 in order to start the cooking step 1 of the cooperative cooking (see FIG. 84).

The "IH preheating display" of E5 indicates that the preheating operation is started in the right heating unit 17HR. As described above, the right display unit 31R displays, for example, information on the actual temperature rise until the preheating (target) temperature reaches 180 ° C. On the other hand, in the integrated display unit (center display unit) 30, information (additional information 331) such as "IH preheating" or "preheating completed" is displayed in the first specific screen 30SP (additional information 331). See FIG. 84).

In the item F on the left side of FIG. 58, the “notification means” refers to the notification content notified by the voice synthesizer 95.
As shown in F1 to F5, when "hamburger" is selected as the cooperative cooking mode and cooked, a total of five voice notifications are performed.
The content of the F1 notification is, for example, "It's a hamburger steak. Cook it with an IH and then finish it with a microwave oven." That is, even on the first specific screen 30SP, the object to be cooked is displayed and the cooking process is displayed, but the same information is also notified to the user by voice.

The content of the F2 notification is, for example, "Karaage. Cook on a microwave oven and then finish with IH." That is, the result of the cooperative cooking mode selection and the explanation of the cooking process are given in real time according to the user's menu selection operation A2.

The content of the F3 notification is, for example, "Right IH". That is, since the user performed the right IH (right heating unit) 17HR in operation A3, the result of selecting the heating source is immediately notified.

The content of the F4 notification is, for example, "press the IH input button on the right to start heating." That is, the user is requested to operate the start button (input key 43MS) A4 following the menu selection operation A3. When this operation A4 is performed, the operation of the "input key" in the right operation unit 40L is requested. The input key referred to here is the input key 43R1.

The content of the notification of F5 is, for example, "Start preheating the pot at 180 ° C.".
After the cooperative cooking is started in the right heating unit 17HR, the heating operation of the right heating unit 17HR is started so that the temperature of the object to be heated such as a pot placed on the top plate 15 becomes the target temperature of 180 ° C. The preheating operation is started and this fact is notified.

In item G on the left side of FIG. 58, the “left IH drive unit” refers to the operation of the inverter circuit 81L.
In item H on the left side of FIG. 58, the “right IH drive unit” refers to the operation of the inverter circuit 81R.
The "preheating process" of H1 indicates that the inverter circuit 81R is driven to perform the operation of the preheating process.

In item J on the left side of FIG. 58, the “range grill drive unit” refers to the operation of the heating chamber control unit 159 that controls the energization of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B constituting the oven heating source 188, and the microwave heating source. Refers to the operation of the microwave heating control unit 130 of 189. That is, the operation of the drive unit that performs the above-mentioned "range grill control menu" (RG control menu) is shown comprehensively.

Next, FIG. 59 will be described.
FIG. 59 shows a case where the “hamburger” is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode. Similar to FIG. 58, various processes of the cooperative cooking mode are shown on the horizontal axis, and the vertical axis is an explanatory diagram showing the operation contents of the main constituent parts such as the user's operation and the display unit.

The meanings of items A to J on the left side of FIG. 59 are the same as those described with reference to FIG. 58.
In FIG. 59, the operation content of A11 is that, in order to cook the hamburger steak, the right heating unit 17HR is first selected as the cooking process 1 (corresponding part of the cooking process B11 in FIG. 59), and the input key 44R called a menu button is used. Is to press.

The "IH off / on button press" of A12 means that the user first selects the right heating unit 17HR as an input switch and presses the input key 43R1 in order to end the hamburger cooking process 1.

“Opening the grill door” of A13 is an operation in which the user opens the door 114.
“Pressing the start button” of A14 means pressing the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M.
“Pressing the time button” of A15 means pressing the input key 43M2 of the central operation unit 40M.

“Pressing the start button” of A16 means pressing the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M.
“Pressing the cancel button (cancelling in the middle of grill heating)” in A17 means pressing the oven heating source 188.
“Pressing the cancel button” of A18 means pressing the input key 43MT of the central operation unit 40M. By operating the input key 43MT, all the series of heating operations in the cooperative cooking mode are completed (cancellation of the cooperative cooking mode).

In item B (cooking step) of FIG. 59, the “IH heating step” of B11 indicates an induction heating step in the right heating section 17HR selected by the user.
The “grill heating standby step” of B12 indicates a period in which the oven heating source 188 is on standby until the user operation A14 is performed.
The “grill heating step” of B13 indicates a heating step by the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189.

The “grill heating extension standby step” of B14 indicates a waiting period in which the user is waiting for a decision as to whether or not to instruct the extension process after the grill heating step of B13 is once completed.
The "extended heating process" of B15 means that the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 are driven again (energized) because the user performs operation A16 (press the start button) during the grill heating extension standby process of B14. It is a process to be performed after (starting). The extended heating step is started by pressing the input key 43MS.

As shown in FIG. 59, the "extended heating step" B15 can be performed not only once but many times if the user performs operation A16 (pressing the start button). However, once the "cancel button is pressed" of A18, the cooperative cooking mode is canceled at the time of operating the input key 43MT. Therefore, in order to cook again in the heating chamber 113, the oven heating source 188 And the microwave heating source 189 needs to be operated in the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu).

In item C (left IH display unit) of FIG. 59, the “preheating display” of C11 means that the target preheating temperature in the preheating process is displayed on the right side display unit 31R and the left side display unit 31L (FIG. 76, FIG. 79). For example, the preheating target temperature (for example, 180 ° C.) is displayed.

C11a to C11d indicate progress display 1 to progress display 4. For example, the progress display 1 is a display of "preheating", and the "progress display 4" is a display of "appropriate temperature". The "suitable temperature" means that the object to be heated (pot, etc.) N is heated to the preheating target temperature (for example, 180 ° C.). During the period of the preheating display (C11), the progress display 1 to the progress display 4 (C11a to C11d) are performed according to the progress (temperature rise) of the preheating. In FIG. 59, the preheating state display C11 by the left heating unit 17HL is performed on the left side display unit 31L.

The “cooking step” of C12 indicates that the left heating unit 17HR is cooking the object to be heated N after reaching the preheating target temperature (for example, 180 ° C.). That is, it indicates that the cooking process 1 has been started.

Item E (center display unit) in FIG. 59 shows the display content of the integrated display unit 30.
The "IH preheating display" of E11 indicates that preheating has been started by the left heating unit 17HL on the first specific screen 30SP displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (see FIG. 85).

In FIG. 59, the “IH heating display” of E12 indicates that the left heating unit 17HL is ready to heat because the preheating is completed (see FIG. 85). That is, it indicates that it is a stage to proceed to the step of induction heating (IH heating).

The "grill door opening / closing operation guidance display" of E13 is to urge the object to be cooked to be moved to the heating chamber (heating chamber) 113 (which performs the cooking step 2) because the induction heating (cooking step 1) has been completed. Yes (see Figure 88). One example of the additional information 331 in this scene is the indication "Please put the food in the heating chamber".

As shown in FIG. 87, when the user wants to stop the heating operation at an arbitrary timing during induction heating cooking by the left IH coil 17HL, additional information "Please press the left IH cut-in button". 331 may be displayed.

In FIG. 59, the “alternate display of thermal power change display and start guidance display” of E14 indicates that the thermal power in the range grill cooking (composite heating) in the heating chamber 113 can be changed, and further, in such a heating chamber. It indicates that the grill cooking can be started by pressing the start button (input key 43MS) (see FIG. 89).

In FIG. 59, the “grill heating indication” of E15 means that the object to be cooked is heated in the heating chamber 113 by the microwave heating source 189 and / or the oven heating source 188 (cooking step). 2) is shown (see FIG. 90). In the first embodiment, both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are driven at the same time, and the object to be cooked is simultaneously heated from the inside and the outside by the synergistic effect of the microwave and the radiant heat.

In FIG. 59, “alternate display of extension operation guidance display and end operation display” of E16 means that since the grill heating step B13 has been completed, the time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M2) and the grill can be heated again. It is to be displayed (see FIG. 91).

Further, when the user does not want the extended heating, he / she can press the cancel button (input key 43MT) to display that the cooperative cooking mode can be ended without the extended heating (see FIG. 91). These two types of information are alternately displayed on the first specific screen 30SP, for example, at intervals of several seconds.

The "time setting display" of E17 is to display the result of setting the extension time when the cooking time is extended by the input key 43M2 and the grill is heated again (see FIG. 91). After this time setting display, the "grill heating display" E15 and the "alternate display of extension operation guidance display and end operation display" E16 are performed.

In item F (notification means) of FIG. 59, the notification content of F11 is "start preheating of the pot at 180 ° C.". This is to notify by voice that the preheating process has been started by the right heating unit 17HR in the IH heating step B11.

In FIG. 59, the notification content of F12 is "The right IH has reached the set temperature. Start cooking." It notifies that the preheating by the right heating unit 17HR has reached the target temperature (for example, 180 ° C.), and prompts the heating start operation in the right operating unit 40R.

FA1 of FIG. 59 is a notification of the first reference information. This "first reference information" FA1 is referred to as "reference information 1" in the following description. The purpose of this reference information may be displayed on the integrated display unit 30 or the left and right display units 31L and 31R by characters or figures. The display in that case is called "reference display 1".

The notification of the reference information 1 (FA1) is performed when a predetermined time (first time TN1) has elapsed from the time when the cooking step 1 (G12 in FIG. 59) by the left IH coil 17L is started. This will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

In FIG. 59, the content of the notification of F13 is "The pan is hot. Please be careful not to get burned and put the food in the refrigerator." This is to call attention because the cooking step 1 (G12) by the right heating unit 17HR is completed, so that the food is moved to the heating chamber 113 for the cooking step 2 and the top plate 15 and the like are hot. be.

The content of the notification of F14 is "Start heating the range grill with the start button". This informs that the range grill cooking can be started by operating the input key 43MS.
The content of the F15 notification is "Starting the standard range grill finish". This informs that the cooking step 2 of the microwave oven is started to complete the cooking (for example, hamburger steak). In addition, "start standard" means that the heating power at the time of cooking the microwave oven is "standard".

FA2 in FIG. 59 is a notification of the second reference information. This "second reference information" FA2 is referred to as "reference information 2" in the following description. The purpose of this reference information may be displayed on the integrated display unit 30 or the left and right display units 31L and 31R by characters or figures. The display in that case is called "reference display 2".

The notification of the reference information 2 (FA2) is a predetermined elapsed time (second elapsed time TN2) from the time when the cooking step 2 (grill heating step B13 in FIG. 59) by the range grill driving unit in the heating chamber 113 is started. It will be done when it has passed. Alternatively, it is performed when the cooking step 2 (grill heating step B13 in FIG. 59) exceeds a predetermined temperature (second rising temperature TN2) from the start. These will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

The notification content of F16 is to notify that the cooking of the range grill is completed and that the cooking time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M2). It also notifies that if the cancel button (input key 43MT) is operated, a series of cooperative cooking modes will be terminated without extended heating. Further, since the heating chamber 113 has a high temperature, caution is advised to clean the inside of the chamber after it has cooled down.

The notification content of F17 is to notify that after the cooking process (B13) of the microwave oven is completed, the user performs an extended heating operation and starts heating for another 2 minutes and 20 seconds. After the notification of F17, the notification of F16 is performed again. If the user further commands the extended heating, such notifications F16 and F17 are repeated.

In item G (right IH drive unit) of FIG. 59, G11 shows an induction heating operation for the preheating step (B11).
G12 shows an induction heating operation for the cooking step 1 performed following the preheating step.

In item J (range grill driving unit) of FIG. 59, J11 indicates a period during which the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 are driven, and the cooking step 2 is executed during this period.
J12 indicates the period for driving the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 for the extended heating step.

Next, FIG. 60 will be described. FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between various processes and operations when "karaage", which is one of the cooperative cooking modes, is performed in the cooperative cooking mode.
Similar to FIGS. 58 and 59, various processes of the cooperative cooking mode are shown on the horizontal axis, and the vertical axis shows the operation contents of the main components such as the user's operation and the display unit.

In FIG. 60, the operation content of item A (user's operation) A21 is that the left heating unit 17HL is first selected as the cooking step 1 (corresponding part of the cooking step B11 in FIG. 59) in order to cook the fried chicken. , Press the input key 43L1.

The operation of A22 indicates an operation of opening the door 114 of the heating chamber 113. At this stage, induction heating (preheating) in the left heating unit 17HL has already started.
The operation of A23 is called "pressing the start button", and pressing the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M.
By the operation of A23, the "range grill drive unit" is driven, and the grill heating step B23 is performed. The "range grill drive unit" refers to the heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130.

The grill heating step B23 of the "range grill drive unit" in the heating chamber 113 is started before the IH preheating step G21 by the left heating unit 17HL is completed.
In this way, even if the oven heating source 188 is energized, the temperature of the heating chamber 113 cannot be raised immediately. Therefore, in consideration of the time required for raising the temperature, the time to start energizing the oven heating source 188 is taken into consideration. Has been decided.

The operation of A24 indicates an operation of opening the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 after the grill heating step B23 by the “range grill driving unit” is completed. As a result, the food to be cooked (food) can be taken out from the heating chamber 113.

On the other hand, from the time before the door 114 is opened and the object to be cooked (food) is taken out from the heating chamber 113, the fried chicken cooking utensil (dedicated pot or the like) is heated in the left heating portion 17HL (cooking step G22) to add cooking oil. It is heating.

The operation of A25 is to operate the input key 43M2 called the time button in order to perform the grill heating step B23 by the "range grill driving unit" again.
The operation of A26 is to press the input key 43MS in order to restart the grill heating step B23.
The operation of A27 is to press the input key 43MT in order to end the grill heating step B23 at an arbitrary point in the middle. As a result, the cooperative cooking mode is canceled.
The operation of A28 is to press the input key 43L1 in order to end the heating operation by the left heating unit 17HL.

Next, in FIG. 60, item B (cooking process) will be described.
B21 is an IH preheating step, which is a step of preheating with the left heating unit 17HL selected by the user.
B22 is a grill heating standby step, in which the user opens the door 114 and then waits for the heating start operation A23.
B23 is a grill heating step.
B24 is a step of heating with the left heating unit 17HL selected by the user in the IH heating step.

Next, in FIG. 60, item C (left IH display unit) will be described.
The display of C21 indicates that the left heating unit 17HL is preheating.
The displays of C21a to C21d are sequentially displayed during the period of the display C21, C21a is a progress display 1, C21b is a progress display 2, C21c is a progress display 3, and C21d is a progress display 4.
The display of C22 is the completion (cooking process) display of the preheating operation by the left heating unit 17HL.

In FIG. 60, item E (center display unit) will be described.
The display of E21 is an IH preheating display, and it can be seen that the left heating unit 17HL is performing the preheating operation (see FIG. 93).
E22 is a grill door opening / closing operation guidance display, and prompts the user to put the food to be cooked (food) into the heating chamber 113 in order to open the door 114 and perform the grill heating step B23 (see FIG. 93). ..

E23 is an alternating display of the heat power change display and the start guidance display, and when cooking fried chicken by driving the "range grill drive unit", the heat power can be adjusted and cooking can be started by pressing the input key 43MS. It shows what you can do (see FIG. 94).

E24 is a microwave oven heating display, which indicates that the heating power of cooking can be changed when driving the "microwave oven drive unit", and that after cooking starts, the remaining time until the end of cooking is displayed (FIG. 95). reference).
As shown in FIGS. 96A and 96B, E25 is an alternating display of the extension operation guide display and the IH preheating completion display.
After the cooking step B24 that drives the "range grill driving unit" is completed, the time button (input key 43M2) is used to extend the time to indicate that the cooking time can be extended.
On the other hand, it is displayed that the preheating by the left heating unit 17HL is completed. That is, these two types of information are alternately displayed on the first specific screen 30SP, for example, at intervals of several seconds.

E26 is a time setting display. This indicates that the cooking step B24, which is performed by driving the "range grill driving unit", is performed for, for example, 2 minutes and 30 seconds (see FIG. 97).
..

In FIG. 60, item F (notifying means) will be described.
The notification of F21 is to notify by voice that the preheating process has been started by the preheating target temperature and the left heating unit 17HL, for example, "start preheating the pot at 180 ° C.".
The F22 notification says, "Soon the temperature will be set by the IH on the left. Please put the food in the refrigerator." It notifies that the preheating by the left heating unit 17HL has reached the target temperature (for example, 180 ° C.), while urging food or the like to be put into the heating chamber 113 so that the range grill cooking in the heating chamber 113 can be started. be.

The notification of F23 is that "the start button starts heating the microwave oven". That is, the input key 43MS is pressed to notify that the range grill cooking is started.
The notification of F24 is, for example, "starting range and finish standard". The "finished standard" in this case means that the thermal power is at the standard level.

FA3 in FIG. 60 is a notification of the third reference information. This "third reference information" is referred to as "reference information 3" in the following description. The purpose of the reference information 3 (FA3) may be displayed on the integrated display unit 30 by characters or figures. The display in that case is called "reference display 3".

The notification of the reference information 3 is a predetermined time (third) from the time when the cooking process 1 (B23 in FIG. 60) by the range grill drive unit in the heating chamber 113 is started by the user's operation input (A23 in FIG. 60). It is performed when the elapsed time TN3) has elapsed. This will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

The notification of F25 is related to the operation of the user when the cooking of the range grill is completed. For example, "The cooking of the microwave oven is finished. You can extend the cooking with the time button. Take out the food from the refrigerator and start cooking with IH."

The notification of F26 is to notify that the cooking of the microwave oven is to be performed again after the cooking of the microwave oven is completed. For example, the notification "range grill, start 2 minutes" is given. This means that since the extension time was set to 2 minutes, cooking of the microwave oven will be started for 2 minutes from now on.

FA5 in FIG. 60 is a notification of the fifth reference information. This "fifth reference information" FA5 is referred to as "reference information 5" in the following description. The purpose of the reference information 5 (FA5) may be displayed on the integrated display unit 30 by characters or figures. The display in that case is called "reference display 5".

The notification of the reference information 5 is a predetermined time (fifth) from the time when the cooking process 3 (B23 in FIG. 60) by the range grill driving unit in the heating chamber 113 is started by the user's operation input (A26 in FIG. 60). It is performed when the time TN5) has elapsed. This will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

In FIG. 60, in item G (left IH drive unit), the preheating step of G21 is a preheating process by the left heating unit 17HL, and shows the driving period of the inverter circuit 81L.

In FIG. 60, G22 also shows a heating operation (driving of the inverter circuit 81L) period for the cooking process by the left heating unit 17HL.

In item J (range grill drive unit), the heating step of J21 indicates the drive period by the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189. Since the cooperative cooking mode described with reference to FIG. 60 is for cooking fried chicken, it is actually sufficient to drive only the microwave heating source 189.

Next, FIGS. 61 to 63 will be described.
FIGS. 61 to 63 show a process in which the "reference information 1" to "reference information 4" are notified when the cooperative cooking mode is executed.

FIG. 61 shows a case where the hamburger is cooked as the cooperative cooking mode.
FIG. 61 is a flowchart corresponding to various processes of the cooperative cooking mode shown in FIG. 59.
In the first embodiment, the hamburger performs the cooking step 1, for example, the left heating unit 17HL, and the cooking step 2 is performed by the “range grill control menu” (RG control menu). That is, in the cooking step 2, the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are used in combination.

In the first step SA1, induction heating (cooking step 1) is started in the object to be heated N which has already been heated to the preheating temperature (for example, 180 ° C.) in the left heating unit 17HL, and as described in FIG. 59, “ The left IH has reached the set temperature. Please start cooking. " The "set temperature" is a preheating temperature set by the user. The default value is 180 ° C. Further, this cooking step 1 is not started from the time when the IH coil 17L starts the induction heating. The cooking step 1 starts when the object to be cooked (in this case, the hamburger steak) is placed on the object to be heated N which has reached the preheating temperature and heating is started.

In the next step SA2, the measurement of the elapsed time of the elapsed time TN1 is started.
The measurement of the elapsed time TN1 is performed by the clock circuit 96.

In step SA3, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time TN1 is exceeded.
When baking a hamburger, the amount (weight) of the hamburger, the time to bake, and the amount of heat to bake are important. When a predetermined amount (for example, 300 g) of hamburger is cooked with standard heat (for example, 1000 W). Assuming that the standard time is "7 minutes", the elapsed time TN1 is, for example, 5 minutes.

When the purpose of using the elapsed time TN1 is to know a guideline for the timing of turning the hamburger upside down (turning over) in the middle, in the above example, the user can set the timing of the upside down by the notification FA1 at the time when 5 minutes have passed. You can know. The actual content of the notification is, for example, "5 minutes have passed since the start of heating. The heating is scheduled to be completed in 2 minutes."

In the case of other cooperative cooking modes, for example, it is possible to know the timing of adding water, seasonings, and cooking liquid on the way.

When the elapsed time TN1 is exceeded, step SA3 becomes “Yes”, the process proceeds to step SA4, and the first reference information (reference information 1) FA1 is notified by the voice synthesizer 95.
Further, in synchronization with this, the reference information 1 (FA1) may be displayed by the left side display unit 31L.

After this step SA4, it is determined whether or not the user stops the heating operation of the left heating unit 17HL (step SA5), and if there is a stop command, the process proceeds to step SA6.

In step SA6, the heating operation by the left heating unit 17HL is stopped. As explained with reference to FIG. 59, the voice notification F13 is performed to the effect that "the pot is hot. Please be careful not to get burned and put the food in the refrigerator".

The user moves the food to be cooked (in this case, the hamburger steak) into the heating chamber 113. In this case, the metal pot used for induction heating is not used. Instead, tableware made of highly heat-resistant plastic, porcelain, glass, etc., or a special saucer 145 (not shown) is used. Put the hamburger in such tableware or saucer and place it in the heating chamber 113.

When the integrated control device MC detects that the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 is in the closed state, in the next step SA7, as described in FIG. 59, "the start button starts heating the range grill. The voice notification F14 to the effect is performed.

When the user operates the input key 43MS, step SA8 becomes “Yes”, and the range grill cooking is started as the cooking step 2.
As described with reference to FIG. 59, the voice notification F15 with the content of "starting the range grill finish standard" is performed (step SA9).

In the next step SA10, the microwave heating source 189, which is the heating source of the range grill, is driven by standard heating power. For example, as described above, the operation is started with an output of 500 W.
Further, the upper heater 163A of the oven heating source 188, which is the heating source of the range grill, is energized at 1000 W.

Next, the measurement of the elapsed time TN2 from the time point of the step SA10 is started (SA11). Then, when it is determined that the elapsed time TN2 has been exceeded (step: SA12), the process proceeds to step SA13, and the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the second reference information (reference information 2). Further, in synchronization with this, the reference information 2 (FA2) is displayed by the integrated display unit 30.

The content of the notification of the reference information 2 (FA2) is, for example, that a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the cooking process 2 is started. If the standard time of the cooking process 2 is, for example, 5 minutes, if the elapsed time TN2 is set to 4 minutes and 30 seconds, the end of the cooking process 2 will be completed 30 seconds before the end of the cooking process 2. You can know.

Generally, it is said that when the food is heated to some extent, the degree of heating of the food rapidly progresses. In particular, if you are not accustomed to cooking using the ingredients, there is a concern that overheating will occur. Therefore, in the cooking step 1, the reference information 1 (FA1) is notified at a time before the end of the cooking step 1.

Similarly, in the cooking step 2, the reference information 2 (FA2) is notified at a time before the end of the cooking step 2. Therefore, it is possible to urge the user to finish cooking and pay attention to and prepare for the next process.

After this, proceed to the next step.
After that, the notification of F16 shown in FIG. 59 is performed. That is, as described above, it is notified that the cooking time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M2). Further, by operating the cancel button (input key 43MT), all the cooking processes of the "hamburger" in the cooperative cooking mode are completed.

In FIG. 62, “karaage” is selected as the cooperative cooking mode, and the cooking step 1 is performed in the “range grill control menu” (RG control menu). The cooking step 2 is a case where, for example, the left heating unit 17HL is used.

Further, in the example of FIG. 62, there is also a cooking step 3, and the step is performed by the “range grill control menu” (RG control menu).
FIG. 62 is a flowchart corresponding to various processes of the cooperative cooking mode shown in FIG. 60.

As described with reference to FIG. 60, when the cooking step 1 is started (A23), for example, the voice notification F24 "start the range and finish standard" is performed. The "finished standard" in this case means that the thermal power is at the standard level. For example, the heating operation is started by the microwave output of 500 W (step: SB1).

In the next step SB2, the measurement of the temperature of the heating chamber 113 and the object to be cooked is started. That is, the measurement of the rising temperature TN3 of the chicken, which is the source of fried chicken, is started.
The temperature TN3 is measured by the temperature detection circuit 93.

In the next step SB3, it is determined whether or not the rising temperature TN3 has been exceeded.
When chicken meat, which is a food material for "karaage", is heated by microwaves, the temperature rises. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the measurement result of this temperature reaches a predetermined rise temperature TN3.

The rate of increase in temperature TN3 changes depending on the amount (weight) of fried chicken, baking time, and heating. The temperature rise pattern when a predetermined amount (for example, 300 g) of "karaage" material is cooked with standard thermal power (for example, microwave with an output of 500 W) is determined by the integrated control device MC as control data based on the results of prior experiments. I have it.

That is, the integrated control device MC holds data that when finishing with a standard microwave output (500 W), it is better to raise the temperature to a certain temperature and continue heating at that temperature. Therefore, the user is notified when the temperature rises to the rising temperature (TN3) (step: SB4).

The user can know in advance by the voice notification of the reference information 3 (FA3) that the timing to end the fried chicken (microwave) heating is approaching. In synchronization with this, it can also be known from the reference display 3 of the integrated display unit 30.

After this step SB4, microwave heating is automatically stopped (due to overcooking time). The user may stop the operation in the middle. For example, in the case of a control program in which the integrated control device MC stops the heating operation by the microwave heating source 189 via the microwave heating control unit 130 one minute after the temperature rises to the rising temperature TN3, the rising temperature The heating operation may be arbitrarily stopped 1 minute before the notification of the reference information 3 that the temperature has risen to TN3.

After that, the process proceeds to the cooking step 2 using the induction heating unit 17H. For this purpose, the user needs to move the object to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 onto the top plate 15. This point will be described with reference to FIG. 63.

In FIG. 62, step SB7 is a notification of reference information 4 (FA4) in the cooking step 2. This is determined by the elapsed time TN4 or the rising temperature TN4 from the time when the user puts the food to be cooked on the food to be heated N which has become hot due to the preheating after the preheating is completed in the induction heating unit 17H.

In this step SB8, the user does not perform any input operation of the input operation unit 40. It simply moves the food to be cooked. Therefore, as the starting point of the elapsed time TN4, the information that detects the timing at which the temperature of the object to be heated N has decreased is adopted. Since the temperature of the object to be heated N drops sharply once the object to be cooked is placed and charged, the time point may be detected by the temperature detection circuit 93 and the elapsed time from this detection time may be counted.

Subsequent step SB8 is a scene for determining a command for performing the cooking step 3 in the heating chamber 113 after finishing the cooking step 2. The user performs the operation of A26 shown in FIG. For that purpose, it is necessary to press the input key 43MS.
Before this step SB7, it is necessary for the user to return the object to be cooked, which has been subjected to induction heating (cooking step 2) on the top plate 15, to the heating chamber 113 again. This point will be described with reference to FIG. 63.

In the next step SB9, the cooking step 3 of the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu) is started.
As described above, the notification of F26 notifies that the cooking of the microwave oven is to be performed again after the cooking of the microwave oven is completed. For example, the notification "range grill, start 2 minutes" is given.

In the next step SB10, the measurement of the elapsed time TN5 is started. That is, the measurement of the elapsed time TN5 from the start time of the cooking process 3 is started.
The measurement of the elapsed time TN5 is performed by the clock circuit 96.

In the next step SB11, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time TN5 has been exceeded.
If, for example, the cooking of the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu) is set to be performed for 2 minutes in the stage before the start of the cooking step 3 (the stage before the step SB8), the elapsed time is For example, it is set to 1 minute and 30 seconds. In other words, it is set 30 seconds before the end of the cooking process 3.

If the elapsed time TN5 is exceeded, the process proceeds to step SB12.
In step SB12, the reference information 5 (FA5) is notified by voice. Reference information 5 is provided with guidance such as, for example, "The heating will be completed in 30 seconds. If you want to extend it further, please set the time." Further, since it is known that the final cooking process is completed, the user can start the preparation for taking out the "karaage" from the heating chamber 113 from the time of the notification of the reference information 5. Further, in synchronization with this, the reference information 5 (FA5) is displayed by the integrated display unit 30.

In the next step SB13, the cooking step 3 is automatically stopped.
In addition, the notification of F25 shown in FIG. 60 is also performed. This notification is related to the user's operation when the cooking of the range grill is completed. For example, "The cooking of the microwave oven is finished. You can extend the cooking with the time button. Please take out the food from the refrigerator." To stop the cooking process 3, the door 114 may be opened without the user having to operate the input operation unit 40.

Next, FIG. 63 will be described.
FIG. 63 is a time chart corresponding to FIGS. 60 and 62 showing operation steps when “karaage” is performed in the cooperative cooking mode.
In the figure, # 1 to # 9 show the user's operation and the state change of the cooking cooker 1. Other reference numerals correspond to FIGS. 60 and 62.

In FIG. 63, in order for the user to cook “karaage”, the left heating unit 17HL is first selected and the input key 43L1 is pressed before starting the cooking step 1 (operation A21 in FIG. 60). Then, the preheating of the object to be heated N placed on the top plate 15 is started. The object N to be heated in this case is a metal pan for tempura, and contains a certain amount or more of cooking oil.

On the other hand, the user opens the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 and puts the “karaage” ingredients (seasoned chicken, etc.) into the heating chamber 113 (# 1).
Then, after closing the door 114, the operation A23 called "pressing the start button" is performed. This is to press the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M.

At this point, the microwave heating source 189 operates and the cooking step 1 of the microwave heating cooking is started. Then, the reference information 3 is notified via steps SB1 to SB3 in FIG. 62 (SB4 in FIG. 62).

Further, during the cooking step 1, the preheating of the left induction heating unit 17HL is completed (for example, the heated unit N is in a state of being heated to 180 ° C., which is the standard temperature for preheating). The completion of this preheating is notified to the user by voice, characters, etc. by the notification unit AN (# 2).

The user can stop the microwave cooking at an arbitrary timing in the middle of the cooking step 1. The door 114 may be opened to stop. If the input key 40MT of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the selection of "karaage" in the cooperative cooking mode is canceled.

When the door 114 is opened, the microwave heating operation is immediately stopped, and the cooking step 1 is completed (# 3).
Next, the user moves the food material heated in the heating chamber 113 into the object to be heated N, which is preheated on the top plate 15 (# 4).

Then, the cooking step 2 is started in the left heating unit 17HL (# 5).
In the cooking step 2, since the input key 43L1 (see FIG. 23) of the left operation unit 40L is pressed first before starting the preheating, the start command of the induction heating is sent from the left operation unit 40L to the integrated control device MC at that time. Sent.
At the start of the cooking step 2 (# 5), the user does not need to particularly operate the input operation unit 40.
The end of the cooking step 2 can be ended at an arbitrary timing if the user operates the left operation unit 40L.

Next, the user opens the door 114, puts the food to be cooked into the heating chamber 113, and closes the door 114 (# 6).
Then, the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M is pressed to start the cooking step 3 of the range grill control menu (RG control menu).

5
Reference information 5 (fifth time TN5) elapses from the time when the cooking process 3 by the range grill drive unit in the heating chamber 113 is started by the user's operation input (A26 in FIG. 60). FA5) is notified.

The reference information 5 (FA5) is information including guidance such as "The heating will be completed in 30 seconds. If you want to extend it further, please set the time". Further, since it is known that the final cooking process is completed, the user can start the preparation for taking out the fried chicken from the heating chamber 113 from the time of the notification of the reference information 5. Further, in synchronization with this, the reference information 5 (FA5) is displayed by the integrated display unit 30.

After that, the microwave heating operation is stopped, and the cooking step 3 is completed (# 7). The cooking step 3 can be stopped immediately when the user opens the door 114.
Then, after this, the user moves the food material heated in the heating chamber 113 into the object to be heated N which is preheated on the top plate 15 (# 8). In this case, since the object N to be heated is maintained in a state of being heated by the induction heating, the induction heating (cooking step 4) may be further performed (# 9). In this case, if the object to be heated N has already been preheated, it is sufficient to move the object to be cooked to the object to be heated N on the top plate 15 as it is.

The induction cooking can be completed by operating the left operation unit 40L. That is, the user's operation A28 is to press the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L corresponding to the left heating unit 17HL.

Next, FIGS. 64 to 66 will be described.
FIG. 64 is a flowchart 1 showing a control operation of the integrated control device before shifting to the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 65 is a flowchart 1 showing a control operation of the integrated control device until the transition to the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing the permission conditions before shifting to the cooperative cooking mode and the determination result.

FIG. 64 will be described. Since steps ST2 to ST4 have been described with reference to FIG. 37, they will be briefly described.
Step ST2 is a step in which the IH control unit 90 determines the presence or absence of an abnormality. The integrated control device MC also diagnoses the presence or absence of abnormalities in the heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130.

At the stage of step ST3, the integrated display unit 30 is activated and displays that "cooking can be started because there is no abnormality". At this stage, the integrated control device MC also confirms whether or not a setting command has been received from the input operation unit 40 for the upper limit value of the total power consumption.

In step ST4, the integrated control device MC performs notification and voice guidance for prompting the selection of the heating means by the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95.
In this step ST4, the initial screens (display screens 1 to 3) are displayed on the integrated display unit 30, and caution information is also displayed (see FIG. 45).

Then, it is determined whether or not an input key other than the input key 43MC (for example, 43M1) has been operated (STC). If the input key 43MC has been operated, the step STC becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step STR1. In step STR1, it is checked whether or not the "permission condition" is satisfied. For example, check the usage status of the heating source used in the cooperative cooking mode.
The permission condition and the determination result will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 66.

In step STC, the first input operation is checked. For example, before the input key 43MC is pressed, the left operation unit 40L or the right operation unit 40R, which is an individual operation unit, determines whether individual cooking is selected, and the central operation unit 40M selects the combined cooking mode. Determine if it has been done.

When the input key 43MC is first operated within a certain grace time (for example, 30 seconds), the display of the "cooperative cooking mode" is started as described above.
On the other hand, when the input key 43MC is not operated and the input key 43M1 is touch-operated, the step STC is determined to be "Yes", and the process proceeds to step ST5 (see FIG. 37).

In FIG. 64, steps STR1 and STR2 are determination steps of "permission conditions" for determining whether or not cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is permitted.
Step STR1 is a step of determining "permission condition 1".
Here, "permission condition 1" means
(1) The peak cut value setting is 5000 W or more.
(2) If there is a power reduction command signal received from an external home gateway 411, the peak cut value of the reduction command must be 5000 W or more.
If these two are satisfied, step STR1 becomes a "Yes" determination.

The "permission condition 2" in the next step STR2 is the following three.
(1) When the central heating portion is provided in the induction heating source 9, the central heating portion is not in the heating operation.
(2) One or both of the oven heating means 188 and the microwave heating means 189 are not in the heating operation.
(3) Neither the right heating portion nor the left heating portion of the induction heating source 9 is in the heating operation (or only one is in the heating operation).

If the above three conditions are satisfied, step STR2 is determined as "Yes". Then, the process proceeds to STR3 (see FIG. 65).
If "No" is determined in steps STR1 and STR2, the process proceeds to step STR12, and the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 notify the user that the cooperative cooking mode cannot be selected.

Here, the meaning defined in the above-mentioned "permission condition 1" as "5000 W or more" will be described. For the sake of simplicity, the following description does not particularly refer to the power consumption of electrical components other than the heating source, for example, the upper cooling fan 60 and the like.

The reason why the required demand (pre-securing the amount of electric power demand) required when implementing the cooperative cooking mode is 5000 W or more is as follows. Because.
(1) Range operation (microwave heating source 189): 1000 W
(2) Oven operation: 2000W (upper heater: 1000W, lower heater: 100)
0W)
(3) Range grill operation: 1500W (microwave heating source 189: 500W, upper heater: 1000W)

On the other hand, the maximum power of the automatic control menu (fried food, suitable temperature) of the cooperative cooking mode is 1500 W.
Therefore, in the cooperative cooking mode, the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 189, and the induction heating source 9 may operate at the same time.
That is, the maximum power is the sum of the "1000W" of the microwave heating source 189, the "1000W (2000W is 1000W each, alternating energization)" of the oven heating source 188, and the "1500W" of the induction heating source 9. Will be 3500W.

When the demand (pre-securing power demand) is 5000W:
When the right heating unit 17HR is heating 3000 W (normal heating), the rest of the demand is 2000 W.
When the cooperative cooking mode is executed from this state, the remaining demand is less than 1500 W for the electric power of 3500 W required for the cooperative cooking, so that the thermal power of the right heating unit 17HR can be reduced to 1500 W and the cooperative cooking can be started.

When the demand (pre-securing power demand) is 4000W:
When fried food (maximum 1500W is required) in the right heating unit 17HR, the rest of the demand is 2500W.
When cooperative cooking is performed from this state, the remaining demand is less than 1000 W for the electric power of 3500 W required for cooperative cooking, so it is necessary to reduce the heating power of the right heating unit 17HR. However, if the heating power is reduced while the automatic control menu is being executed, cooking will not be successful, so the heating power of the automatic control menu cannot be reduced.
After all, at 4000W, it is not possible to secure the required thermal power for the automatic control menu (fried food, suitable temperature).

As is clear from the above explanation, before starting the cooperative cooking mode, the electric power (3500 W) required for the cooperative cooking and the electric power (1500 W) required for the automatic control menu of the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL. It is necessary to determine (confirm) whether or not there is a demand of 5000 W, which is the total value (preliminary securing of power demand).

Next, FIG. 65 will be described.
In the cooperative cooking mode of the first embodiment, a pattern (first cooperative cooking mode) in which the induction heating source 9 is first driven and then the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are driven (see FIG. 54). ).
There is also a second cooperative cooking mode in the reverse order.

The step of FIG. 65 is common to both the first cooperative cooking mode and the second cooperative cooking mode.
In step STR3, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30, and the information of the cooperative cooking mode is displayed. As shown in FIG. 53, the “name of the object to be cooked” (for example, “hamburger”) 330 is displayed as one kind of identification information of the individual cooperative cooking modes.

In the next step STR4, it is determined whether or not the input key 43M1 has been operated. As described with reference to FIG. 53, by operating the two input keys 43M1 described above, the identification information 330 indicating the name of the object to be cooked (for example, hamburger steak) that can be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode is sequentially moved upward or downward. The display changes as it moves. In the first embodiment, since there are eight types of food to be cooked in total, if the input key 43M1 on the left side is operated once in the state of FIG. 53, the identification information 330 is changed from "hamburger" to "gratin". Switch to.

If the input key 43M1 is not operated (within a certain period of time), step STR5 is determined to be "Yes", and the process proceeds to the next step STR5.
Step STR5 is a step of selecting any one of the two heating unit specifying units 333R and 333L displayed in the first specific screen. If the user operates a pair of input keys 43M1 on the left and right, any one of the heating unit specifying units 333R and 333L can be selected.

The right heating unit 17HR may be set as a default so that the heating unit specifying unit 333R is first displayed on the first specific screen 30SP and the process proceeds to step STR7 as it is. In the example described with reference to FIG. 53, when hamburger steak is performed by cooperative cooking, the left heating unit 17HL is set by default, and the heating unit specifying unit 333L preferentially selects the left heating unit 17HL. It was displayed.

In the next step STR6, it is determined whether or not an input operation for canceling the selection of the cooperative cooking mode has been performed. When the input key 43MT is operated, it is determined as "No", and the process returns to step ST4 (see FIG. 64).

On the other hand, if the input key 43MT is not operated, it is determined as "Yes", and the process proceeds to the next step STR7.
When the input key 43MS is operated, the process proceeds to step STR8 according to the operation program.
In step STR8, control conditions such as the finally selected heating unit (for example, the right heating unit 17HR) and the output value at the time of microwave heating are displayed in the first specific screen 30SP are displayed. The next step is STR9, and from this stage, the mode shifts to the cooperative cooking mode. That is, after that, if the input key 43R1 is pressed, the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is automatically proceeded.

As the display contents of the first specific screen 30SP of step STR8, process information such as that the right heating unit 17HR is used in the first cooking process 1 and the microwave heating source 189 is used in the next cooking process 2. Is displayed on the process display unit 332. The contents and transition of these display screens will be described in detail later.

When the mode shifts to the cooperative cooking mode, the induction cooking starts from the time when the input key 43R1 of the right operation unit 40R is pressed. It should be noted that the induction heating is not started immediately as described in FIG. 38. From step STR9 onward is step MS4 shown in FIG. 38.

If the input key 43MS is not operated in step STR7, it is determined as "No" and the process returns to step STR3. If, for example, 30 minutes have passed since the operation of the input key 43MC, the main power is automatically turned off or the step is performed in the state of patrolling between steps STR3 and STR7. You may return to ST4 (see FIG. 64).

Next, FIG. 66 will be described.
FIG. 66 shows the determination process of steps STR1 and STR2 in FIG.
Step STX1 is a stage in which the input key 43MC is operated.
The next step STX2 is a stage in which the integrated control device MC investigates the latest state of the cooking device with respect to the above-mentioned permission condition 1 and permission condition 2.

The next step STX3 is a stage of determination processing corresponding to steps STR1 and STR2 in FIG. In this step STX3, the integrated control device MC compares the above-mentioned permission condition 1 and permission condition 2 with the latest state of the cooking cooker, and determines whether or not the permission condition 1 and the permission condition 2 are satisfied. ..

In step STX3 of FIG. 66, notifications 1 to 4 indicate the contents notified to the user by the voice synthesizer 95.
In addition, Display 1 to Display 4 indicate the contents displayed on the integrated display unit 30. The displays 1 to 4 are not displayed on the first specific screen 30SP displayed from the time of step STR3 in FIG. 65, but are displayed on the integrated display unit 30 in which the first specific screen 30SP is not displayed. It is a thing. That is, the first specific screen 30SP is not displayed unless the premise (permission condition 1 and permission condition 2) for shifting to the cooperative cooking mode is satisfied.

Next, FIG. 67 will be described.
The control mode of FIG. 67 is a case of a (second) cooperative cooking mode different from the (first) cooperative cooking mode of FIG. 65. There are two heating sources used in the coordinated cooking mode of FIG. 67, the first used is the microwave heating source 189, and the second heating source used is the left heating of the induction heating source 9. Part 17HL. The part where the control mode of FIG. 67 is significantly different from that of FIG. 65 is step STR11.

In the above-mentioned range grill cooking (composite cooking) menu "warm" (range automatic), the non-contact (infrared) temperature measuring unit 158 detects the temperature of the object to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 and the wall temperature of the heating chamber 113. Then, when the "target temperature" is reached, the microwave oscillation is automatically stopped. Therefore, when the heat during the previous cooking remains inside the heating chamber 113 and the temperature is high from the beginning, the integrated control device MC prohibits the automatic microwave heating. The default value of the "target temperature" referred to here is 80 ° C., but this can be set to a higher temperature side or a lower temperature side by the central operation unit 40M.

In step STR11, when the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is higher than the reference temperature (for example, 70 ° C.), the temperature measuring unit 158 detects the high temperature at an early stage, and microwaves are incompletely cooked. There is a concern that heating will stop.

Therefore, in the control shown in FIG. 67, when the temperature of the heating chamber 113 exceeds the reference temperature, the right side display unit 31R and the left side display unit 31L indicate that the cooperative cooking cannot be executed at that time. (STR12). Further, it may be displayed by the integrated display unit 30. Further, it is more reliable to notify by voice by the voice synthesizer 95. The reason why the left and right display units 31L and 31R are displayed is that the user has not yet selected any of the left and right heating units 17HL and 17HR at this stage.

Further, since the first specific screen 30SP displayed when the permission condition 1 and the permission condition 2 are satisfied is not displayed at this stage, in addition to being displayed on the right side display unit 31R and the left side display unit 31L, it is also displayed. Alternatively, instead, it may be displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (STR12).
In other words, in FIGS. 64 and 66, the first condition (permission condition 1) and the second condition (permission condition 2) determine whether or not the transition to the cooperative cooking mode is possible. Can be said to correspond to the third condition (permission condition 3).

In this way, at the selection stage of the cooperative cooking mode, it is possible to notify the user that the heating source to be used first (in this case, the microwave heating source 189) cannot be used.

At the stage of step STR12, when displaying or notifying that the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is too high to start cooking, opening the door 114 is beneficial to the user side, for example, the temperature of the heating chamber 113 drops quickly. You may also convey the information together.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a control operation of the integrated control device MC when the left heating unit 17HL is used regardless of the cooperative cooking during the execution of the cooperative cooking mode.
In the first embodiment of FIG. 68, the heating source used in the cooperative cooking mode is, as described with reference to FIG. 57, first the right heating portion 17HR of the induction heating source 9, and then used. The heating sources are a microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188.

When the cooking process in the above-mentioned cooperative cooking mode has already advanced to the heating stage of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, the user wants to use the left heating unit 17HL in order to perform another cooking. When the left operation unit 40L is operated, the integrated control device MC receives the operation signal (step SH1).

In the next step SH2, as in the above-mentioned "permission condition 1", it is determined that the use does not exceed, for example, the total power regulation value of 5000 W.

When the determination of "No" is received in step SH2, the process proceeds to step SH8, and the maximum amount of electric power when the left heating unit 17HL is used and the heating sources (microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188) during cooperative cooking For example, the maximum thermal power value of the left heating unit 17H is limited so that the total value with the electric power amount does not exceed the regulation value of the power control unit 72, and the limit value is notified to the user by the notification unit AN.

On the other hand, if the electric power used by the left heating unit 17HL (heat power of induction heating) is reduced from the state of the heating source during cooking in the cooperative cooking mode, the total allowable electric power is exceeded. In step SH8, the left heating unit 17HL is disallowed. Specifically, the left side display unit 31L displays that the device cannot be used, and the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the user by voice. The reason why it cannot be used is also notified by the voice synthesizer 95.

In the next step SH3, the input operation result of the user is analyzed, and it is determined whether or not the control menu is a "permission control menu" that does not correspond to the prohibited control menu (hereinafter referred to as "prohibition control menu").

The "prohibited control menu" is determined in advance in consideration of the amount of electric power used (necessary for cooking). For example, the "(automatic) fried food" described in FIG. Is specified.
Both (automatic) fried food and rice cooking adopt a control method that is expected to use a large amount of electric power in the cooking process. There is a concern that the power supply of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188) may be hindered.

For the above reasons, in step SH3, it is determined whether or not the "permission control menu" is applicable. For example, one of the permitted control menus, "boiler", is checked.

In step SH3, when it is determined that the "permission control menu" does not apply, the above-mentioned disapproval process is performed, and notification that the device cannot be used is performed.

When the determination of "Yes" is received in step SH3, the process proceeds to step SH4, the drive mode of the IH coil 17L of the left heating unit 17HL is automatically determined, and the thermal power value set by the user or the thermal power selected by the IH control unit 90 is selected. The value etc. are determined. After that, when the input key 43L1 is pressed, the process proceeds to the next step SH5.

Next, the driving of the inverter circuit 81L is started, and the induction cooking is started (SH5). After that, it is monitored whether or not the stop command from the user is the input key 43L1 (SH6), and when the stop command is received, the induction heating operation is immediately stopped. Then, the end of cooking is displayed on the left side display unit 31L. In addition, the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the end of cooking by voice (SH7).

If a change can be made to permitted conditions (for example, lowering the thermal power), step SH8 makes the change and notifies the change.
In addition, if there is a reason why the left heating unit 17HL to be used cannot be permitted to use, a notification of disapproval is given. Then, if the change processing can be performed, the process returns to step SH2.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a control operation of the integrated control device MC when additional heating is performed at the stage where the heating of the heating source used for the first time is completed in the cooking process of one cooperative cooking mode.

The control shown in FIG. 69 is a case of cooking in which the second used microwave heating source 189 is driven for a time (for example, 5 minutes) set by the user in the cooperative cooking mode. For convenience of explanation, the operation of the oven heating source 188 will be omitted.

In the first embodiment shown in FIG. 69, the heating source used in the cooking step 1 of the cooperative cooking mode is the right heating unit 17HR which is set by default as described with reference to FIG. 65. The heating sources used in the next cooking step 2 are a microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188.

A scene in which the user uses the microwave heating source 189 to perform the cooking step 2 in one cooperative cooking mode described with reference to FIG. 65 will be described.
When the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M is operated next after the cooking step 1 in the right heating unit 17HR is completed, the integrated control device MC receives the operation signal (step SJ1).

In the next step SH2, the driving of the inverter circuit 121A is started (SJ2), and the measurement of the set time of the timer cooking (in this case, 5 minutes) is started (SJ3).
The output value of microwave heating remains the default value (500W), but the user can also change the heating power by operating the central operation unit 40M (SJ4, SJ5).

On the other hand, the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B constituting the oven heating source 188 are energized by the heating chamber control unit 159.
In the first embodiment, the start of energization of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B coincides with the start of the oscillation operation of the magnetron 122 of the microwave heating source 189.

Then, the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B are energized during the oscillation of the magnetron 122. In other words, the object to be cooked is heated simultaneously by microwaves and electric radiant heat (cooking step 2).

As described above, the energization period of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is the same as the microwave heating period. Therefore, in the following description, only the microwave heating time will be described, and the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B will be heated. The explanation of time is omitted.

In step SJ6, when the input key 43MT instructing the stop of microwave heating is operated (SJ6), the drive of the inverter circuit 121A is stopped and the time measurement is also reset (SJ7).
When the input key 43MT for instructing the heating stop is not operated, steps SJ4 to SJ6 and SJ10 are repeatedly performed within the set time of timer cooking. When the set time for timer cooking has elapsed, the process proceeds to step SJ7.

In step SJ8, a display is performed so that the user can determine whether or not to execute the once stopped microwave cooking for a predetermined time or a time specified by the user. Specifically, it is displayed in characters on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30, for example, "Do you want to extend the time to heat? If you want to extend the time, press the time key."

The reason for allowing such an extension is that if the user determines that the heating is still insufficient as a result of looking at the heating state of the object to be cooked, it will be heated quickly (in this case, microwave heating and electric radiation type). This is to restart (heating) and finish the food to be cooked in a better condition.

When the user presses the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M, it is determined in step SJ9 that the operation signal is present, and if there is an operation signal, the determination of "Yes" is performed.
Then, the process returns to step SJ3. If the input key 43M3 is operated once before the input key 43MS is pressed, the cooking time is extended by a fixed time (for example, 3 minutes), or if the input key 43M3 is pressed once, the cooking time is extended for 3 minutes. You may set the program so that if you press it twice in a row, it will take 5 minutes. Further, even if the cooking is started again, the heating operation can be stopped immediately by pressing the input key 43MT.

On the other hand, when the user does not press the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M (for example, when the user does not press the input key 43MS within the "holding time: 15 seconds"), the process proceeds to step SJ11 and the operation of the final cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode is terminated. .. Then, the integrated display unit 30 displays to that effect, and the voice synthesizer 95 also performs a notification operation (SJ11). If the door 114 is not opened even once from step SJ8 and the holding time has elapsed, the voice synthesizer 95 may issue an alarm to alert the user.

When the cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode is completed, the integrated control device MC automatically sets the control conditions in which the microwave heating source 9, the micro heating source, and the oven heating source 188 operate in the storage device MM in chronological order. (At the time of this storage, the end date and time of the cooking process is recorded at the same time). After that, when a predetermined command signal is received from the central operation unit 40M, the stored cooperative cooking mode and control conditions immediately before being stored are called from the storage device MM and displayed on the integrated display unit 30, and the next cooperative cooking is performed. It has a reproduction function used to execute the mode. It should be noted that not only the one-time cooperative cooking mode immediately before, but also all the cooking histories in the past several times or a certain period (for example, one month) are called (including the information on the cooking execution date and time), and the desired one is selected. The user may select the item. By pressing the input key 43KP to switch to the "function mode", the user can set various settings for the reproducibility of the cooking history.

As described above, since the oven heating source 189 is also energized by the start of the RG cooking process, whether or not the integrated display unit 30 is to extend the heating time of the oven heating source 189 alone. Do not display information about. However, if the sequence is such that the microwave heating source 189 is operated first and then the oven heating source 188 is operated, or vice versa, the microwave heating time is extended and the oven heating source is operated. The time extension of 188 may be set separately.

(Display and input operation unit during linked cooking)
Next, FIGS. 70 to 97 will be described.
These drawings show the control operation of the input operation unit 40 and the display unit (integrated display unit 30 / left side display unit 31L) when the cooperative cooking mode is selected.

FIG. 70 is a plan view showing a control operation of the input operation unit 40 and the display unit (integrated display unit 30 / left side display unit 31L) when the cooperative cooking mode is selected.
In the figure, the reference numeral FG is the fingertip of the user.

When the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 as shown in FIG. 70, and the three identification information 330, 330A included in the cooperative cooking menu, The 330B corresponds to each of the three items to be cooked, "hamburger", "gratin", and "roast beef". These identification information 330, 330A, 330B are displayed at the same time.

In FIG. 70 and the following FIG. 71, the process display unit 332 is not shown on the first specific screen 30SP.
Additional information 331 is displayed on the right side of the identification information 330. In the examples of FIGS. 70 and 71, the additional information 331 indicates that "induction heating can be started in the left heating unit 17HL".

The individual light emitting unit 27M6, which is in close proximity to the input key 43MS, is blinking as shown by a broken line circle in FIG. 70, and guides the user to operate the input key 43MS.
On the other hand, when the heating source first used in the cooperative cooking mode is the induction heating source 9 and the left heating unit 17HL thereof, the light emitting display units 27L2 and 27L3 emit light as shown in FIG. 70. ..

Then, when the input key 43MS is operated, the mode shifts to the cooperative cooking mode. At that time, since the input function of the input key 43L1 is enabled, pressing the input key 43L1 executes cooking in the left heating unit 17HL.

At the same time, the thermal power display unit 67L indicating the thermal power stage at the time of induction cooking in the left heating unit 17HL lights up (the number of the lighting thermal power display units is determined by the default value).
Even if the operation of individually using the left heating unit 17HL is performed while the cooperative cooking mode is being executed, if the operation of the left heating unit 17HL is prohibited by the integrated control device MC as described above, the operation of the left heating unit 17HL is prohibited. There is no light emission of the light emission display unit 27L3 as shown in FIG. 70. Also, the thermal power display unit 67L is not lit.

Furthermore, as described above, even if there is an operation of temporarily using the left heating unit 17HL for cooking unrelated to the cooperative cooking mode in the middle of the cooperative cooking mode, the left heating unit 17HL cannot be used. , It is displayed as reference information in the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30. For example, the message "The left IH cannot be used because the cooking is in cooperation" or "The left IH and the heating chamber cannot be used now because the cooking is being done in cooperation" is displayed.

As is clear from the above explanation, since the operation unit (input key 43MS) for starting the execution of the cooperative cooking mode is located in the center of the left and right on the upper surface of the top plate 15, the user's line of sight naturally gathers in the center. .. Then, the selection of the cooperative cooking mode and the guidance display until the start of cooking are also concentrated on the integrated display unit 30 in the central portion.

Further, when the cooking step 1 of the left heating unit 17HL, which is the first heating source, is completed, the input key 43MS for advancing to the next heating source is also located in the central operation unit 40M.
That is, the main input operations of selecting the cooperative cooking mode, starting the first cooking process 1, and starting the next cooking process 2 are all concentrated in the left and right central parts (center operation part 40M) in front of the cooking cooker 1. Can be done.

Next, FIG. 71 will be described.
FIG. 71 is a plan view showing the operations of the central operation unit 40M and the left operation unit 40L and the display contents of the first specific screen 30SP when the cooperative cooking mode of the cooking cooker 1 is selected.

When the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the integrated display unit 30 simultaneously displays the three identification information 330, 330A, and 330B included in the cooperative cooking menu as shown in FIG. 71 (B). (Display screen 8A).

Further, additional information 331 is displayed on the right side of the identification information 330, 330A, and 330B. In the example of FIG. 71, the additional information 331 indicates that "induction heating can be started in the left heating unit 17HL".

When the input key 43M1 on the left side is pressed once more, the name (hamburger) of the food to be cooked displayed in the center of the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30 moves to the rear and is displayed in the front instead. The identification information of the "roast beef" is displayed in the center (display screen 8B).

Each time the input key 43M1 on the left side is pressed once as described above, the identification information 330 (indicating the name of the food to be cooked) displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30 is displayed in a fixed order one by one. It will be updated with.

When the input key 43M1 on the right side is pressed, each time the input key 43M1 is pressed, the display screen 8D in FIG. 71B is selected in the reverse direction, such as from the display screen 8D to the display screen 8C.
Although only four cooperative cooking menus are shown in FIG. 71, there are a total of eight cooperative cooking menus as described above. These display screens 8A to 8D are all the first specific screens 30SP.

Next, FIG. 72 will be described.
FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram showing the types of the cooperative cooking menu when the cooperative cooking mode of the cooking cooker is selected.
As is clear from FIG. 72, the eight cooperative cooking menus are sequentially displayed in the first specific screen 30SP by the operation of the input key 43M1.

Next, FIG. 73 will be described.
FIG. 73 is a list showing the display contents of the first specific screen 30SP in the integrated display unit when the cooperative cooking mode is selected.
As shown in FIG. 73, there are several types of process display units 332 at the stage immediately before the start of the cooking process, depending on the eight types from hamburger to gratin.

Further, the additional information 331 is unified throughout the cooperative cooking mode as shown in the additional information A and the additional information B. The additional information A and the additional information B are displayed alternately at a fixed time (for example, every 5 seconds).
Further, in the additional information B, the heating portion of the induction heating source 9 to be used is indicated as "changeable" because there are two heating portions, the left heating portion 17HL and the right heating portion 17HR.

FIG. 74 is a plan view showing the control operation and display contents of the input operation unit 40, the integrated display unit 30, and the left side display unit 31L when the cooperative cooking mode of the cooking cooker 1 is selected.

When the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 as shown in FIGS. 70 and 71.
The identification information 330 of the three cooperative cooking modes is displayed on the first specific screen 30SP. That is, as shown in FIG. 74, the identification information 330 of the "hamburger" is displayed in the center of the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30 in the front-rear direction. At the same time, the additional information 331 and the cooking process display unit (cooking process information unit) 332 are displayed in a list state on the first specific screen 30SP.

At the time when the identification information 330 of the cooperative cooking mode is displayed on the integrated display unit 30, that is, at the initial stage when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed, either the right heating unit selection mark 334R or the left heating unit selection mark 334L is displayed. The user can select one of them.

The example of FIG. 74 is a case where the left heating unit 17HL is set by default as recommended. As shown in FIG. 74, the left heating unit selection mark 334L displayed in white letters as “left” is always displayed on the first first specific screen 30SP.

One of the right heating unit selection mark 334R and the left heating unit selection mark 334L can be selected by the pair of left and right input keys 43M2. For example, if the input key 43M2 on the left side is pressed, the left heating unit selection mark 334L can be selected and changes to white characters as shown in FIG. 74 to indicate that the selection has been made.
On the contrary, if the input key 43M2 on the right side is pressed in the state of FIG. 74, the right heating unit selection mark 334L can be selected.

When the integrated display unit 30 displays the identification information 330 of the cooperative cooking mode (see FIG. 55) or when the input key 43MS is pressed (see FIG. 56), the right heating unit 17HR executes the cooperative cooking mode. Therefore, it becomes an occupied state. Therefore, the right heating unit 17HR is in a state of not accepting the setting of other control menus (the integrated control unit MC).

Therefore, the user places the object to be heated N such as a frying pan above the left heating unit 17HL and presses the input key 43L1. Then, induction heating is automatically started. The operation of pressing the input key 44L is omitted, and the induction heating is automatically started in the left heating unit 17HL after a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the input key 43MS is pressed. You may.
When the heating operation in the left heating unit 17HL is started as described above, the occupied state of the right heating unit 17HR is released. Therefore, the input of the independent cooking mode on the right operation unit 40R can be started immediately.

There is also a method of canceling the occupied state of the right heating unit 17HR when the left heating unit selection mark 334L is selected by the pair of left and right input keys 43M2, but the selection of the heating unit by the input key 43M2 is easy. Since it can be changed, at the time of selecting the left heating unit selection mark 334L, as described above, the occupied state of the right heating unit 17HR is not released.

The "optimal temperature 180 ° C." means that the temperature for preheating the object to be heated N, such as a metal pan or a frying pan, which is a container for the "hamburger" to be cooked in this case, is 180 ° C. That is, the IH control unit 90 automatically controls the thermal power level so that the temperature of the bottom surface portion of the object to be heated N becomes 180 ° C. by the action of the inverter circuit 81L, the temperature detection circuit 93, and the like.

Along with the rise in the preheating temperature, the heating power display unit 67L for indicating the heating power stage at the time of induction cooking does not display the heating power level, but the degree of increase in the preheating temperature and the degree of reaching the target preheating temperature (approaching). Demonstrates the function of displaying the degree).
In FIG. 74, what is indicated by a broken line circle at the thermal power display unit 67L indicates the current temperature range, and the broken line circle gradually moves to the right as the temperature rises. .. That is, the state of temperature rise can be seen from the light emitting state of the thermal power display unit 67L. Details will be described with reference to FIG. 75.

In the additional information 331, as shown in FIG. 74, "Notify me when the set temperature is reached" is displayed.
On the other hand, the cooking process display unit (cooking process information unit) 332 is displayed in strip-shaped characters so as to horizontally cross the second area and the third area of the integrated display unit 30.

As can be seen from the display unit 332 of the cooking process in FIG. 74, when the hamburger is cooked in cooperation, the preheating step is performed by the induction heating source 9, then the cooking step 1, and finally the range grill heating (RG heating). This is the cooking step 2 to be performed.

As shown in FIG. 74, until the moment when the cooperative cooking mode is started, the user's fingertip FG and the line of sight are on the right front of the integrated display unit 30 in order to operate the input key 43MS, in other words, the central operation unit 40M. It is in.
After that, the user's line of sight shifts toward the left heating unit 17HL as shown by the arrow. That is, when the object to be heated N containing the object to be heated is placed above the left heating portion 17HL, the user's line of sight moves to the left.

After starting the cooperative cooking mode, the user's line of sight and body move from the central part to the left side as shown by a long horizontal arrow in FIG. 74. However, this movement to the left is not a big one, and it does not put a burden on the user himself.

Next, FIG. 75 will be described.
FIG. 75 is a plan view showing the control operation of the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 31L when the cooperative cooking mode is selected, and displays the changes in the preheating temperature in chronological order.

FIG. 75A shows a portion of the thermal power display unit 67L on the left side. What is shown by the broken line circle in FIG. 75 shows the current temperature range. For example, when the target preheating temperature is 180 ° C., the four thermal power display units 67L emit light from the beginning of the cooking process of induction heating, as shown in FIG. 75. The leftmost light emitting part is blinking as shown by the broken line circle. This blinking state indicates the current temperature level.

As the preheating temperature rises, the current temperature rises, so the position of the above-mentioned "blinking part" moves to the right side in sequence. When the preheating temperature is reached, the blinking part disappears.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 75 (B), at the initial stage when the cooking process of induction heating is started, if any of the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L is operated, the target value of the preheating temperature described above is obtained. Can be changed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 75 (B), each time the input key 43L2 on the left side is pressed once, the preheating temperature can be lowered by one step. On the contrary, each time the input key 43L3 on the right side is pressed once, the preheating temperature can be raised by one step. As shown in FIG. 75 (C), the process of changing the preheating temperature is displayed on the left side display unit 31L each time, so that the user can easily confirm the display content.

Next, FIG. 76 will be described.
FIG. 76 is a plan view showing a control operation of the left operation unit 40L and the left side display unit 31L when the cooperative cooking mode is selected.

When the object to be heated N placed on the left heating unit 17L reaches the set preheating temperature, the thermal power display unit 67L stops blinking as shown in FIG. 76.
When heated to the preheating temperature in this way, the integrated display unit 30 displays "preheating has been completed" by the additional information 331 as shown in FIG. 76.

Further, the display content of the cooking process display unit (cooking process information unit) 332 changes. Specifically, from the display of IH preheating, the stage of "IH heating" in the next cooking step 1 is displayed in white characters.
From this information, the user can easily understand that the stage of full-scale induction heating has been reached. That is, it can be seen that the object to be heated, such as a frying pan, placed on the left heating unit 17HL has reached a temperature suitable for heating the object to be cooked.

The pair of input keys 43L2 and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L has a function of designating the thermal power (power consumption) in the left heating unit 17HL. Therefore, in the transition from the preheating process to the full-scale heating process (cooking process 1), each time the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 are touched once, the heat value is increased by one step in the specified thermal power value data table. You can select the firepower you have, or you can select a specific firepower that has been lowered by one level. As a result, the user can freely raise or lower the temperature of the object to be heated during induction heating.

Next, FIG. 77 will be described.
FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram showing a change in the display content of the integrated display unit 30 (first specific screen 30SP) when the cooperative cooking mode is selected.
As shown in FIG. 77 (A), when the preheating step is completed, the integrated display unit 30 indicates to the user that the cooking step 1 (full-scale induction heating) can be started. Further, the cooking step 1 can be stopped at any time by pressing the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L.

The display switching between (A) and (B) in FIG. 77 is automatically repeated at intervals of, for example, 5 seconds. Then, after the cooking step 1 of full-scale induction heating is started, only (C) of FIG. 77 is displayed. The firepower at this point has been shown to be "slightly weak". It has also been shown that this thermal power level can be adjusted by the user (information 30V indicating microwave output level).

Next, FIG. 78 is a plan view showing the display contents of the integrated display unit 30 when the cooperative cooking mode is selected. The display content of FIG. 77 is slightly changed, and the preheating temperature value (for example, 180 ° C.) is included in the additional information 331. The display content shown in FIG. 77 (B) may be changed as shown in FIG. 78.

FIG. 78 shows a stage in which the cooking step 1 of induction heating has not yet been started when the cooperative cooking mode is selected.
Therefore, in order to encourage the operation of the input key 43MS, the individual light emitting unit 27M6 is in a blinking state as shown by the broken line circle.

Even if the input key 43M1 is operated in the states of FIGS. 77 and 78, the integrated display unit 30 cannot display the control menu of the combined cooking mode including "range manual" and "range automatic". To cancel the cooperative cooking mode at this stage, it is necessary to press the input key 43MT. In other words, pressing the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L can only end the cooking step 1 of the left side heating unit 17HL to be used first, and does not cancel (cancel) all the settings of the cooperative cooking mode.

Next, FIG. 79 will be described.
FIG. 79 shows a scene in which the user finishes the cooking step 1 of the induction heating with the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L. Since the heating operation has already been completed, the thermal power display unit 67L does not emit any light.

On the other hand, in the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30, the cooking process information (cooking process information unit) 332 has advanced to the cooking process 2, that is, the stage of "range grill cooking" (RG cooking). indicate. Specifically, it is indicated by the white letters that the progress from the white display of IH heating to the stage of RG cooking which is the final cooking step 2 is performed.
From this information, it is easily understood that the user has reached the stage of carrying out the cooking step 2 in which the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are combined.

The command to start the cooking step 2 in the cooperative cooking mode also needs to be given by the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 79, the individual light emitting unit 27M6 corresponding to the input key 43MS becomes a blinking state as shown by the broken line circle, prompting the user to operate the input key 43MS. ..

On the other hand, since the step of FIG. 79 is after the user himself / herself finishes the cooking step 1 of the induction heating with the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L, the occupancy state of the left heating unit 17HL is released. Therefore, by operating the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L, the left heating unit 17HL can be started to be used for cooking in a cooking mode different from the cooperative cooking mode.

At this stage, another cooking menu can be started at the induction heating source 189 by inputting with the left operation unit 17HL. However, since the cooperative cooking mode has not been canceled yet, another cooking using the heating chamber 113 cannot be performed. The occupancy of the left heating unit 17HL has only been released.

Next, FIG. 80 will be described.
FIG. 80 shows that when the cooperative cooking mode is selected, the output level of microwave heating can be adjusted while proceeding to the stage of “range grill cooking” (RG cooking).

Specifically, the output level of microwave heating is displayed in the second area 30M of the integrated display unit 30 in five stages such as "slightly weak" and "weak". This display information is the same as the "information 30V indicating the microwave output level" described with reference to FIG. 77. Therefore, by operating the pair of input keys 43M2, the user can select the output level of microwave heating.

Next, FIG. 81 will be described.
FIG. 81 shows that, as in FIG. 80, when the cooperative cooking mode is selected, the output level of microwave heating can be adjusted when the stage of the cooking step 2 is advanced.

As shown in FIG. 81 (B), the output level of microwave heating is displayed in the second area 30M in a total of five stages from “strong” to “weak”. Such a microwave output level can be selected by the user by operating the input key 43M2.
Therefore, in the final step (cooking step 2), the user can adjust the heating intensity by microwaves according to the finished state of the object to be cooked.

In the final cooking step 2 described with reference to FIG. 81, the user's operation and line of sight are concentrated in the range of the integrated display unit 30 and the central operation unit 40M. Therefore, the user can stay in the center of the front surface of the cooking device 1 and concentrate on the end of the cooking process 2.

In the middle of the cooking step 2, when the object to be cooked inside the heating chamber 113 is taken out from the heating chamber 113 and wants to be checked directly, the user may open the door 114 at an arbitrary timing. When the door 114 is opened, the transmission of microwaves is instantly stopped by the action of the door open / close detection mechanism 131, and the energization of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is also stopped.

If the door 114 is closed again and the input key 43MS is pressed again, microwave heating is instantly started again. When the door 114 is opened in the middle of the cooking step 2 as described above, the operations of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are still continued.

Next, FIG. 82 will be described.
FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation in the final stage after the cooking step 2 of FIG. 81 and the display contents of the integrated display unit 30 (first specific screen 30SP).

When the user arbitrarily ends the final step of cooking (cooking step 2), the input key 43MT is operated. Pressing this cancels the sequence of control sequences in the co-cooking mode. Therefore, in order to perform microwave heating or oven heating again after stopping once in this way, it is necessary to select a heating source with the central operation unit 40M and then press the input key 43MS again. ..

Therefore, in the first embodiment, when the RG cooking is finished, if the input key 43MS is pressed again within a certain time, the microwave heating is instantly performed again so that the additional heating can be easily performed. Made it start.

As shown in FIG. 82 (B), the first specific screen 30SP is a display screen so that the user can know the timing of ending the RG cooking process which is the final process of cooking (cooking process 2). After 10A, the display screen 10B changes to the displayed content. Then, it is configured to display that the cooking step 2 is about to be completed.

On the display screen 10B, the temperature detection circuit 93 detects the transition of the temperature rise inside the heating chamber 113, determines the load of the food or the like to be cooked, and the integrated control device MC determines the arrival time until the end. Performs predictive processing and is displayed as a result.

Instead of detecting the temperature rise of the object to be cooked or the heating chamber 113 to predict the cooking finish time, the user may set a timer in advance and finish the cooking process 2 by time control. In this case, the load determination as described above is not necessary.

As described above, when the user sets a timer in advance and finishes the cooking process 2 by time control, the reference information 2 can be notified (FA2) as described with reference to FIG. That is, as shown in FIG. 82 (B), the first specific screen 30SP changes to the content displayed on the display screen 10B after the display screen 10A, and matches the reference information 2 as a part of the notification (FA2). Is displayed.

The display screen 10C of FIG. 82 (B) shows that heating can be started again within a certain time (for example, 30 seconds. However, when the door 114 is opened, 15 seconds) immediately after the cooking step 2 is completed. This is the example shown.
The "time button" on the display screen 10C is the input key 43M3. Since the heating chamber 113 has become hot due to the cooking up to this point, additional information 331 such as "Caution for high temperature grill" is displayed to enhance the safety of the user.

(Transition of the first specific screen)
Next, the content in which the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30 changes during the period until the start of the transition of the cooperative cooking mode described with reference to FIG. 58 will be described in detail.

83 to 85 show the correspondence between the contents of the displays E1 to E5 described in the “center display unit” of the item E and the input operation unit in the explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the various processes described in FIG. 58 and the operation. Is shown.

The state of FIG. 83 shows the stage of “E1: Initial screen of cooperative cooking”, and the initial screen and the central operation unit 40M when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30. Shows the relationship.
FIG. 84A shows the relationship between the screen at the stage of “E2: menu change” and the central operation unit 40M. This is a stage in which the input key 43M1 is operated to select one target object to be cooked from the cooperative cooking modes, and the corresponding cooperative cooking mode is selected.

FIG. 84 (B) shows the stage of "E3: Selective heating source change (select right IH)". The stage where the user selects the right heating unit 17HR while looking at the first specific screen 30SP is shown. This selection is made with the input key 43M2.

Next, FIG. 85 (A) shows the stage of "E4: Right IH input button pressing guidance display". On the first specific screen 30SP, it is a stage in which it is displayed that the operation of the input key 43R1 arranged in the right operation unit 40R is necessary in order to start the cooperative cooking. That is, the user is recommended to press the input key 43R1 in order to start the cooking process 1 of the cooperative cooking.

FIG. 85 (B) is the stage of “E5: IH preheating display”. At this stage, on the first specific screen 30SP, it is shown that the preheating operation is started in the right heating unit 17HR. As described above, the right display unit 31R displays, for example, information on the actual temperature rise until the preheating (target) temperature reaches 180 ° C. On the other hand, in the first specific screen 30SP, information (additional information 331) such as "IH preheating", "preheating completed", and "notify that the set temperature is reached" is displayed.

Next, FIGS. 86 to 92 show the relationship between various processes and operations of the “hamburger” cooking (cooperative cooking mode) described with reference to FIG. 59. It shows the correspondence between the contents of E17 and the input operation unit.

FIG. 86 (A) shows the stage of “E11: IH preheating display” described in item E (center display unit) of FIG. 59. On the first specific screen 30SP, it is displayed that the right heating unit 17HR has started preheating, so that it is notified that the set temperature is reached (additional information 331).

FIG. 86 (B) is the stage of “E12: IH heating display” also described with reference to FIG. 59. At this stage, since the preheating is completed, the additional information 331 indicates that the right heating unit 17HR is ready to heat. That is, it indicates that it is a stage to proceed to the step of induction heating (IH heating).

The stage of FIG. 87 (B) shows the display content to be performed after a certain time (for example, 1 minute) from the time when the display of FIG. 86 (B) is displayed. The display of FIG. 87 (B) is not described in item E of FIG. 59.

At the stage of FIG. 87 (B), it is shown that the user needs to press the input key 43L1 on the left operation unit 40L in order to finish the cooking step 1 by the induction heating source 9.

The next FIG. 88 is the stage of “E13: Grill door opening / closing operation guidance display” described with reference to FIG. 59. Since this stage has completed the induction heating (cooking step 1), the additional information 331 is urging the object to be cooked to be moved to the heating chamber 113 (to perform the cooking step 2).

The following FIGS. 89 (A) to 89 (C) are the stages of "E14: Alternate display of thermal power change display and start guidance display" described with reference to FIG. 59. At this stage, it is displayed that the heating power in the range grill cooking (composite cooking) in the heating chamber 113 can be changed, and further, it is displayed that the grill cooking in such a heating chamber can be started by the start button (input key 43MS). doing.

In FIG. 89C, the input key 43MS is in a blinking state as shown by the broken line circle, indicating that it is waiting for the user's operation. The displays of FIGS. 89 (A) and 89 (B) are alternately displayed, for example, every 5 seconds.

The following FIGS. 90 (A) to 90 (C) are the stages of "E15: Grill heating display" described with reference to FIG. 59. Here, it is shown that the object to be cooked is heated by the microwave heating source 189 and / or the oven heating source 188 in the heating chamber 113 (cooking step 2).

FIG. 90 (A) shows that the heating power can be adjusted, and FIG. 90 (B) shows that the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are simultaneously driven to perform combined heating. FIG. 90 (C) shows that this RG cooking step (cooking step 2) is completed in 2 minutes and 30 seconds.

The following FIGS. 91 (A) and 91 (B) are the stages of "E16: Alternate display of extension operation guidance display and end operation display" described with reference to FIG. 59. Here, since the RG heating process is completed, it is displayed that the time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M2) and the grill can be heated again.

If the user does not want the extended heating, he / she can press the cancel button (input key 43MT) to end the cooperative cooking mode without the extended heating. The first specific screen 30SP, which has the contents of FIGS. 91 (A) and 91 (B), is displayed alternately at intervals of, for example, several seconds.

The next figure 92 is the stage of “E17: time setting display”. Here, when the cooking time is extended by the input key 43M2 and the cooking is performed again inside the heating chamber 113, the result of setting the extension time is displayed. After this time setting display, the above-mentioned "E15: Grill heating display" and "E16: Alternate display of extension operation guidance display and end operation display" are performed.

Next, FIGS. 93 to 97 will be described.
93 to 97 are described by the “center display unit” of item E in explanatory FIG. 3 showing the relationship between various processes and operations of “karaage” cooking (cooperative cooking mode) by the cooperative cooking mode described with reference to FIG. 60. The contents of the displayed displays E21 to E26 and the state of the input operation unit are shown.

FIG. 93 (A) shows the stage of “E21: IH preheating display”. Here, it can be seen that the left heating unit 17HL performs the preheating operation. That is, the object N to be heated placed on the left heating unit 17HL has already started induction heating.
FIG. 93 (B) is the stage of “E22: Grill door opening / closing operation guidance display”. Here, the door 114 is opened to encourage the cooked food (food) to be put into the heating chamber 113 in order to perform the grill heating step B23 (see FIG. 60).

FIGS. 94 (A) to 94 (C) are the stages of "E23: Alternate display of thermal power change display and start guidance display". Here, it is displayed that the heating power can be adjusted when the fried chicken is cooked by driving the "range grill driving unit", and that the cooking can be started by pressing the input key 43MS.

The displays of FIGS. 94 (A) and 94 (B) are alternately displayed, for example, every 5 seconds.
Further, when the door 114 is left open, the display shown in FIG. 94 (C) is performed.

Next, FIGS. 95 (A) and 95 (B) are the stages of "E24: Range heating display".
FIG. 95A shows that the cooking power can be changed when the “range grill driving unit” is driven.
FIG. 95 (B) shows the content displayed after the cooking starts, and is an example of displaying the remaining time until the cooking is finished. This stage is the stage at which the cooking step 1 is started.

FIGS. 96A and 96B are stages of "E25: Alternate display of extension operation guidance display and IH preheating completion display". Here, after the cooking step B24 (see FIG. 60) that drives the "range grill drive unit" is completed, the time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M2) to extend the cooking time. ,it's shown.
The display screen of FIG. 96 (A) and the display screen of FIG. 96 (B) are alternately displayed as the first specific screen 30SP, for example, at intervals of several seconds.

FIG. 97 is the stage of “E26: time setting display”. Here, it is indicated that the cooking step B24 is executed for a further extension of, for example, 2 minutes and 30 seconds. If the "range grill (RG)" heating is completed at the stage of FIG. 97, the next step is to proceed to the cooking step 2 in the left heating unit 17HL where the preheating has already been completed.

(Operation management system for home appliances)
Next, FIGS. 98 to 107 will be described. 98 to 107 relate to the cooking cooker 1 and the operation management system of home electric appliances, which are the objects of the present disclosure.

FIG. 98 is an explanatory diagram showing in chronological order the exchange of information between the refrigerator 401 and the cooker 1 during cooking in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 98 shows the control operation on the cooking cooker 1 side. FIG. 99 is a system configuration diagram 1 showing the exchange of information between the refrigerator 401, the home gateway, and the cooking cooker 1 in the example shown in FIG. 98.

FIG. 100 is a system configuration diagram 2 showing the exchange of information between the refrigerator 401, the home gateway, and the cooking cooker 1 in the example shown in FIG. 98.
FIG. 101 is a plan view showing the display contents of the integrated display unit 30 in the cooking device 1. FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing a display operation of the integrated display unit 30 immediately after the start-up of the cooking cooker 1. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit immediately after the start-up of the cooking cooker 1.

FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 immediately after the start-up of the cooking cooker 1. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 immediately after the start-up. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the operation of the home gateway shown in FIG. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing information exchange with the refrigerator 401 when the cooperative cooking mode is carried out in the cooking cooker 1.

FIG. 98 will be described.
The operation steps shown in FIG. 98 are defined in the control program that executes the "coordinated cooking mode" of the integrated control device MC.
The inventory inquiry signal RQ1 is transmitted before the first step SD1. That is, the inventory inquiry signal RQ1 is transmitted at the stage of step ST2 in FIG. 37.

The operation step shown in FIG. 98 shows the operation after the user operation (A23) shown in FIG. 63. In step SD1, when the cooking step 1 is started by selecting, for example, “karaage” as the cooperative cooking mode, the heating of the food material is started by the microwave.

This step SD1 corresponds to step SB1 in FIG. At this stage, as shown in the notification F24 of FIG. 60, a voice notification is made that "range and finish standard are started".

Next, the measurement of the elapsed time TN3 from the time point of the step SD1 is started (SD2). This step SD2 corresponds to step SB2 in FIG.

In the next step SD3, the contents of the started cooperative cooking mode are collated. In this case, the identification information 330 is displayed on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30, and the integrated control device MC can verify that the cooking of “karaage” is being executed.
It is also known at this point that the cooking step 1 uses the heating chamber 113 for the cooking of fried chicken. In other words, when the cooking step 1 is completed, it can be seen that the heating chamber 113 is not used.

Note that step SD3 may be omitted, and dedicated programs may be prepared for each of the individual cooperative cooking modes (for example, karaage, hamburger, and gratin).

In the next step SD4, it is determined whether or not the mode is a specific cooperative cooking mode. The "specific cooperative cooking mode" is, for example, as follows.
From (1), hamburger steak, dumplings, and other foods that can generally be classified as side dishes.
(2) Individual cooperative cooking modes (eg, hamburger steak) and those that are usually eaten at the same time (eg, soup, french fries).

If "No" in step SD4, the operation of FIG. 98 ends at this point.
In the next step SD5, it is determined whether or not the cooking step 1 is being executed in the heating chamber 113. If "No" in step SD5, the operation of FIG. 98 ends at this point.

If step SD5 is "Yes", the process proceeds to the next step SD6. In step SD6, an inquiry signal RQ3 (see FIG. 99) is issued to the home gateway 411 in order to inquire about the inventory information of the ingredients stored in the refrigerator 401.

When the main power switch 97 of the cooking cooker 1 is turned on, the inventory inquiry signal RQ1 has already been transmitted from the cooking cooker 1 as described with reference to FIG. 37.
In the first embodiment, the inventory inquiry signal RQ3 is transmitted at the stage where the conditions are further narrowed down and it is found that the inventory information is likely to be required (step SD6 in FIG. 99).

In the next step SD7, inventory information of ingredients is acquired from the home gateway 411. Then, the integrated control device MC temporarily stores the storage device MM.

In the next step SD8, the inventory information of the received foodstuff is analyzed.
In this step SD8, the presence or absence of ingredients that are highly related to the cooking (in this case, karaage) being executed in the cooperative cooking mode is searched. The "relevance" referred to here is typically rice as a staple food or an ingredient (for example, frozen vegetables) that is often eaten with a side dish called karaage. Therefore, in this step SD8, it is assumed that "frozen rice" is extracted, and the following description will be given.

If the determination in step SD7 is "No", the process of FIG. 98 ends as it is, and nothing is notified to the user.

In the next step SD9, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time TN1 has elapsed. Then, in the next step SD10, a notification that the cooking step 1 is about to be completed is performed. This notification is not shown in FIG. 59. Moreover, this notification may be omitted.

In the next step SD11, after the end of the cooking step 1, another cooking menu for effectively utilizing the heating chamber 113, which is not used in the fried chicken cooking, is notified.
As described above, "frozen rice" is notified as a recommended control menu.

In the next step SD12, it is determined whether or not the user has performed an operation to stop the cooking step 1. If there is a stop operation by the user in this step SD12, the process proceeds to step SD13, and the microwave heating operation of the cooking step 1 in the heating chamber 113 is stopped.

In the next step SD14, notification of the end of the cooking step 1 (F25: see FIG. 60) is performed.
Then, when the user takes out the object to be cooked (fried chicken) from the heating chamber 113 and puts it in the object to be heated N which has already been preheated and has a high temperature, the cooking step 2 starts. At this stage, the cooking oil contained in the object to be heated N is already at a high temperature.

As can be seen from the above description, in step SD8 of the stage before the cooking step 1 is completed, the user can know the recommended cooking menu.
Moreover, since the recommended control menu is based on the inventory information from the refrigerator 401, the user can effectively use the heating chamber 113 to perform another cooking in the stage before the cooking step 2. can.

As mentioned above, in contrast to the karaage cooperative cooking mode, the staple food, rice, can be thawed and warmed in parallel, so the actual total from the start to the end of the cooperative cooking. The time can be shortened. As a result, the convenience of the user can be improved.

As described above, when the heating chamber 113 that has completed the cooking step 1 in the cooperative cooking mode is used within a short time from the end of the cooking step 1, it is assumed that the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is high.
As described above, in the "warm" (automatic range) control menu that uses microwaves, the non-contact (infrared) temperature measuring unit 158 detects the temperature of the object to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 and the wall temperature of the heating chamber 113. Then, when the target temperature is reached, the microwave oscillation is automatically stopped. Therefore, when the high heat of the heating chamber 113 remains and the temperature is high from the beginning, automatic microwave heating is prohibited by the integrated control device MC.

Therefore, when the heating chamber 113 that has completed the cooking step 1 in the cooperative cooking mode is to be used after that, the control menu (single cooking) of "microwave oven manual" may be selected. That is, the heating time of the microwave may be set by the user.

As described with reference to FIG. 55, when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 in order to perform cooperative cooking, the left heating unit 17HL cannot be used, but the cooking step 1 is completed. From the stage onward, the process of continuing the occupied state of the heating chamber 113 (by the integrated control device MC) is not performed. Therefore, there is no problem in executing the recommended control menu.

Further, even if the cooking step 1 of the cooperative cooking is completed in the heating chamber 113, if the control method of continuing the occupied state of the heating chamber 113 until after that (after the cooking step 2) is adopted, the control method is adopted. Only when there is a "recommended control menu" as described in step SD8, a control program may be used to exceptionally release the occupied state of the heating chamber 113.

Next, FIGS. 99 and 100 will be described.
99 and 100 are diagrams illustrating information exchange between the home gateway 411 and the refrigerator 401 after the main power of the cooking cooker 1 is turned on, in chronological order.
The following will be described on the assumption that the cooperative cooking mode is executed with reference to FIG. 99.

The home gateway 411 and the refrigerator 401 are always connected to the commercial (alternating current) power supply 99 from the time of installation in the kitchen KT.
The home gateway 411 issues a command signal to the alarm device 445 to monitor in the “home mode” (step SE1 in FIG. 99). The "home mode" refers to a driving pattern when there is at least one resident in the house HA. When all the residents are away, the mode is switched to "answering mode".

The user presses the operation button 98 (see FIG. 19) of the main power switch 97 of the cooking cooker 1 to turn on the power (step SE2 in FIG. 99). Then, cooking is started according to the input operation of the user.

In the cooking device 1, as described with reference to FIG. 98, when the cooking step 1 is performed in the heating chamber 113, an inventory inquiry signal is sent to the home gateway 411 at a predetermined timing (step SD6 in FIG. 98). RQ1 is transmitted. The inventory inquiry signal RQ1 is transmitted from the wireless communication unit 49 to the communication unit 446 of the home gateway 411. Other signals are also exchanged by wireless communication between the wireless communication unit 49 and the communication unit 446.

Since the central control unit 447 of the home gateway 411 receives the detection information of the person detection unit 413H that detects the presence or movement of a person in the kitchen KT, it determines that it is a cooking scene and cooperates with the cooking cooker 1. Switch to operation (step SE3).

The central control unit 447 of the home gateway 411 further transmits an inventory data search command signal RQ2 to the refrigerator 401.
This inventory inquiry signal RQ2 is transmitted from the communication unit 446 of the home gateway 411 to the wireless communication unit (not shown) of the refrigerator 401. Other signals are also exchanged by wireless communication between the communication unit 446 and the communication unit (not shown) of the refrigerator 401.

The refrigerator 401 searches the inventory of foods stored in the refrigerating chamber 401B and the plurality of freezing chambers 401A, updates the inventory information, and stores the inventory information in its own storage unit (step: SE4). There are various forms of food stored in the refrigerator, such as food processed halfway at home and food in a bag purchased externally. Many proposals have already been made for identification and search methods of such inventory information, and it is known to use images taken by a camera, RF tags, two-dimensional codes, and the like.

Further, when putting food in the refrigerator 401, a method of manually inputting data such as the name of the food and its attributes, a method of automatically reading information of the food etc. optically or magnetically and accumulating inventory information, etc. Various methods have been proposed.
In the first embodiment, any method may be used because there is no restriction on the identification of the food when the food is put in the refrigerator 401 or after the food is stored.

The refrigerator 401 collectively transmits the collected inventory information data as a reply signal RS1 to the communication unit 446 of the home gateway 411.
The home gateway 411 temporarily stores the inventory data transmitted by the reply signal RS1 in the storage device 450 (SE5). Here, "temporary" is a period from when the inventory information data is transmitted again from the refrigerator 401 to when it is received, and does not mean that the storage is continued for a long period of time. The inventory data of the storage device 450 is always overwritten with the latest data and stored.

In the cooking device 1, as described with reference to FIG. 98, when the cooking step 1 is performed in the heating chamber 113, an inventory inquiry signal is sent to the home gateway 411 at a predetermined timing (step SD6 in FIG. 98). RQ3 is transmitted (SE6).

In the home gateway 411, the latest inventory data stored in the storage device 450 is transmitted from the communication unit 446 to the wireless communication unit 49 of the cooking cooker 1 as the inventory data signal RS2.

In the cooking device 1, the inventory data received by the wireless communication unit 49 is stored in the storage device MM (SE7). Then, as described in step SD8 of FIG. 98, the integrated control device MC has another cooking menu (of ingredients and dishes) directly related to one cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode being executed from the inventory data. (Name, etc.) is notified (SE8).
In the example of FIG. 98, only "karaage" was described as a cooperative cooking mode in which the cooking step 1 is performed in the heating chamber 113, but as shown in FIG. 73, "fried vegetables", "pork cutlet", "tempura", etc. But it's okay.

Next, FIG. 100 will be described.
FIG. 100 is a diagram illustrating the operation after step SE8 of FIG. 99.
When all the cooking processes in the cooperative cooking mode are completed (SE9), the cooker 1 provides the home gateway 411 with main data indicating the contents of the cooperative cooking (hereinafter referred to as “cooking execution data”). Is transmitted as signal BS1.

Here, "cooking execution data" means at least one of the following information.
(1) Information indicating the name of the food to be cooked (for example, "karaage" or "fried vegetables")
(2) Information on the weight or volume of the object to be cooked (3) Information indicating the control conditions of the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2 (for example, microwave output 500 W, thermal power 1500 W at the time of induced heating or "medium heat"). (4) Information indicating the time required from the cooking process 1 to the end of the cooking process 2 (5) Information indicating the end time of the cooking process 2 (or the final cooking process) (6) All from the start of the preheating process Information indicating the time required to complete cooking process 2

(7) Information for identifying the heating source (for example, the left heating unit 17HL) that has operated the cooking operation (8) Information regarding the restrictions that the user receives during the next cooking (example: the heating chamber is hot, so the range (Automatic) heating cannot be performed)
(9) Information related to user safety such as the current temperature of the heating chamber

The "(2) information on the weight or volume of the food to be cooked" is, for example, information such as "fried chicken: 300 g". This can be inferred from the temperature rise rate of the object to be cooked (fried chicken) in the cooking step 1 by the integrated control device MC.

The "cooking execution data" can be useful information for the home gateway 411 and the refrigerator 401.
In addition, the "cooking execution data" can be useful information for the alarm device 445.

For example, in the "cooking execution data", "(4) information indicating the time required to complete the cooking process 2", "(5) information indicating the end time", "(6) completion of all cooking processes 2". "Information indicating the time required until" can be utilized by the schedule management unit 451 of the home gateway 411. By accumulating these data, it is possible to estimate the concentration time zone of cooking in the kitchen KT.

Further, among the "cooking execution data", "(9) information related to user safety such as the current temperature of the heating chamber" can be useful information for the temperature monitoring device 440. This is because the current temperature on the heating cooker 1 side and the estimated temperature "difference" can be known by optically measuring the temperature on the temperature monitoring device 440 side.

The "cooking execution data" can be useful information for the refrigerator 401. For example, since the “cooking execution data” can be utilized by the schedule management unit 451 to estimate the concentrated cooking time zone, it is possible to assume the timing when the food is stored in the refrigerator 401 after that.

A refrigerator that acquires environmental information indicating the state of the external environment from an external electric device (for example, an air conditioner or a cooking device) and controls the operating state of each part such as a cooling device is, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019. It is proposed in the publication No. -21153. However, in the conventional proposal, the environmental information provided from the cooking device 1 side is often ambiguous, and is not necessarily useful from the refrigerator side. On the other hand, the "cooking execution data" of the first embodiment is in line with a specific control menu and has high utility value.

In the home gateway 411, the "cooking execution data" transmitted by the transmission signal BS1 is transmitted to the refrigerator 401 as a signal BS2 including the "cooking execution data". The contents of the "cooking execution data" sent by the transmission signal BS1 and the "cooking execution data" sent by the transmission signal BS2 may be basically the same, but may be different. In the "cooking execution data" sent by the transmission signal BS1, useful information was also included in the temperature monitoring device 440 and the alarm device 445, but since they are not necessary for the refrigerator 401, the home gateway 411 is used. After deleting it, it may be sent to the refrigerator 401.

The refrigerator 401 analyzes the contents of the "cooking execution data" and collects and analyzes what is useful for the operation of the refrigerator 401 (SE10).
Next, in the refrigerator 401, the operating conditions of the refrigerator 401 are changed from the analysis result of the “cooking execution data” (SE12).

The central control unit 447 of the home gateway 411 stores "cooking execution data" in the storage device 450. In addition, the "cooking history data" of the schedule management unit 451 is updated. As a result, the execution date and time, time zone, control menu (for example, cooking name "karaage"), and other related information (for example, karaage estimation "300 g") of this one cooking (coordinated cooking) are recorded.

Further, the schedule management unit 451 recommends specific ingredients such as "frozen rice" and a control menu from the inventory data specifically notified in step SE8 in the recorded "cooking history data". If (see step SD8 in FIG. 98), the recommended facts may be included. When such daily cooking conditions are accumulated as data, the schedule management unit 451 using artificial intelligence will improve the ability of "learning and prediction", so the value of providing information to users will gradually increase. improves.

After all the cooking steps in the cooperative cooking mode are completed, the heating cooker 1 transmits an operation end notice signal BS3 to the home gateway 411 (SE9).
After that, the main power switch 96 is opened (OFF) (SE13).

When the main control unit 447 of the home gateway 411 receives the operation end warning signal BS3, it ends the "mutual cooperation operation mode". Further, the alarm device 445 is switched to the "monitoring mode" (SE14). As a result, the temperature change in the kitchen KT internal space is monitored regardless of whether the user is in the kitchen KT.

(Inventory information display example 1)
FIG. 101 is an enlarged plan view showing a central operation unit 40M of the cooking cooker 1 and a peripheral portion of the integrated display unit 30.
FIG. 101 shows the scene of step SD11 of FIG. 98.

The example shown in FIG. 101 is a stage in which the “karaage” of the cooperative cooking mode is being executed.
While the cooking step 1 is being performed in the heating chamber 113, the integrated display unit 30 displays that there is "frozen rice" as inventory information. The voice synthesizer 95 is also notified by voice in the same manner.

If the input key 43MT is pressed in the state of FIG. 101, the microwave cooking in the cooking step 1 is stopped. The setting of the cooperative cooking mode is not canceled.
Therefore, if the door 114 is opened, the object to be cooked is taken out from the heating chamber 113, and the object to be cooked is placed on the object to be heated N placed on the left heating unit 17HL, the induction cooking (of cooking step 2) is started from that point. can do. As shown by the integrated display unit 30, the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L is pressed at the first preheating start stage as described with reference to FIG. 60 (see operation A21 of FIG. 60). Therefore, it is not necessary to newly operate the left operation unit 40L.

(Inventory information display example 2)
FIG. 102 is an enlarged plan view showing the integrated display unit 30 of the cooking device 1.
FIG. 102 is an example in which the display content of the integrated display unit 30 of FIG. 101 is changed.

In the example shown in FIG. 102 (A), the time saving information 333 meaning that the time can be shortened and the cooking recommended information 338 "warming" are displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30.

The second area 30M and the third area 30R of the integrated display unit 30 are combined, and using the widened display surface, it is displayed that "it can be warmed and thawed in a heating chamber". That is, it shows that "warming" and "thawing" can be performed using the heating chamber 113.

In FIG. 102 (A), the symbols 335U and 335D are symbols indicating that there is other information, and if any of the input keys 43M2 (a pair of left and right) corresponding to this symbol is pressed, the following Information is displayed.

In another example shown in FIG. 102 (B), the refrigerator information 334 in characters is displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30.
In addition, the second area 30M and the third area 30R of the integrated display unit 30 are combined, and the widened display surface is used to display two types of individual food information 339, "frozen rice" and "oden". ing. That is, the refrigerator 401 informs the user that there are "frozen rice" and "oden" as foodstuffs.

The individual food material information is information that identifies one food product. The "food material information" of the refrigerator 401 means an aggregate of the individual food material information 339.

The display of FIGS. 102 (A) and 102 (B) may be alternately performed, for example, every few seconds, or only one of them may be displayed. In any case, the user can understand that another cooking can be performed in the heating chamber 113 by using the food material information stored in the refrigerator 401 in the middle of the cooking process 1.

FIG. 103 is an enlarged plan view showing the transition of the display screen of the integrated display unit 30.
FIG. 103 is an example of improving the display contents of FIG. 45.

In FIG. 103, the display screen 1, the display screen 2A, and the display screen 2B are the same as those described in FIG. 45, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.
The display screen 2C is a screen displayed after the display screen 2A or the display screen 2B. On this display screen 2C, the user is urged to perform an input operation to select a heating source.

FIG. 104 is an enlarged plan view showing the transition of the display screen of the integrated display unit 30.
FIG. 104 is still another example in which the display content of FIG. 45 is improved.
In FIG. 104, the display screen 2D is a screen displayed after the display screen 2A or the display screen 2B.

On the display screen 2C of FIG. 104, the user is informed that the cooking cooker 1 automatically confirms the food information of the refrigerator 401. That is, it notifies that the inventory information acquisition operation is being executed.

In step ST2 shown in FIG. 37, it was explained that the inventory inquiry signal RQ1 was transmitted. The operation in that step is displayed on the display screen 2D of FIG. 104.

FIG. 105 is an enlarged plan view showing the transition of the display screen of the integrated display unit 30.
After the display screen 2D shown in FIG. 104, the display screen 2E informs the user that the food material information has been acquired. Immediately after that, the display screen 2E informs that there are "frozen hamburger steak" and refrigerated "dumplings" as specific ingredients. The heating source can be freely selected before the display screens 2D to 2E are displayed. If the heating source is selected (see step STC in FIG. 37) immediately after the display screen 2C appears, the display screens 2D to 2E are not displayed.

(Example of home gateway operation)
FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the operation of the home gateway.
As described in FIG. 99, the home gateway determines whether or not the schedule management unit 451 has entered the “cooking time zone” during the period in which the alarm device 445 is being operated in the “home mode”.

The resident may manually input the "cooking time zone" by the input unit 449. For example, it may be set that the cooking time zone is from 6:30 am to 7:30 am on weekdays.
In addition, the data processing unit built into the schedule management unit 451 analyzes the operating time zone of the cooker 1 for 30 days in the past, and the average time zone is changed from 6:20 am to 7:30 am. It is judged that there is.

In the above situation, in step SF1, it is determined whether or not the current time has entered the cooking time zone.
In step SF1, if the current time is 6:25, it means that the average time zone (6:20 to 7:30 am) has been entered as described above, so "Yes" is displayed. The determination is made, and the process proceeds to step SF2.

In step SF2, it is determined whether or not the human detection sensors 452 and 453 of the human detection unit 413H have detected a person.
For example, when a resident moves in the space in front of the refrigerator 401 and the cooking cooker 1 or stops in front of the refrigerator 401 and the cooking cooker 1, such movement of a person is detected.

If a person is detected in step SF2, the process proceeds to the next step SF3.
In step SF3, it is determined whether or not the door (not shown) of the refrigerator 401 has been opened based on the operation information from the refrigerator 401 side. When it is detected that the door is opened and then closed (SF4), the next step SF5 is to check the latest status of the food contained in the refrigerator 401.

The confirmation of the inventory information in step SF5 is the “inventory data search command signal RQ2” as described with reference to FIG. 99.

The refrigerator 401 collectively transmits the collected inventory information data as a reply signal RS1 to the communication unit 446 of the home gateway 411, as described with reference to FIG. 99.
Therefore, the main control unit 447 of the home gateway 411 compares the latest inventory information data collected with the inventory information data sent from the refrigerator 401 last time, and if there is no change, processes in step SF6. To finish.

In step SF6, when there is a change from the previous inventory information data, the inventory information data stored in the storage device 450 is rewritten (overwritten) with a new one (SF7).

Then, the inventory inquiry signal RQ1 from the cooking device 1 is prepared.
As described above, the home gateway 411 acquires the inventory information of the refrigerator 401 even before the main power switch 97 of the cooking cooker 1 is turned on, and promptly receives an inquiry from the cooking cooker 1. It operates so that it can provide inventory information.

It seems that it will take a certain amount of time to investigate the inventory of food contained in the refrigerator 401 in detail, and when the door of the refrigerator 401 is left open, the light from the outside will be ambient light. There is also a concern that it will interfere with optical detection, image analysis, etc. Under such circumstances, inventory information is promptly acquired immediately after the door of the refrigerator 401 is closed.

With the above configuration, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the inventory data collection reply signal RS1 described with reference to FIG. 99 is delayed from the inventory inquiry signal RQ3 of the cooking device 1. That is, the system is such that the heating cooker 1 can acquire the latest inventory information.

(Display of individual food information during the heating suspension period)
FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing another operation program for acquiring individual food material information 339 of the refrigerator 401 in the cooperative cooking mode of the cooking cooker 1.

In the operation program of FIG. 98, inventory information was automatically acquired in the middle of the cooking step 1 in the heating chamber 113, and the recommended cooking menu was notified.
On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 107 notifies that another cooking can be executed in the "heating pause period" between the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 in the cooperative cooking mode, and responds to the user's command. It is designed to be notified.
Therefore, the operation by the operation program of FIG. 98 and the notification method by the operation program shown in FIG. 107 do not contradict each other. Therefore, both notification programs may be adopted (combined).

The cooking cooker 1 described up to FIG. 98 is
(1) IH independent cooking mode in which the induction heating source 9 is operated (2) Range independent cooking mode in which the microwave heating source 189 is operated (3) Oven independent cooking mode in which the oven heating source 188 is operated (4) Coordination in which the microwave heating source 189 and / or one of the oven heating source 188 and the induction heating source are sequentially operated after a transition period TR in which the start and end timings are determined depending on the input operation of the user. It has a function to execute the cooking mode according to the input operation of the user.
Further, the cooperative cooking mode includes a cooking step 1 performed in the heating chamber 113 and a cooking step 2 performed outside the heating chamber after the transition period TR.
In the middle of the cooking step 1, the integrated control device MC has at least a cooking menu that can be executed in the heating chamber 113 after the end of the first cooking step and information on individual ingredients of the refrigerator related to the cooking menu. The configuration is characterized in that any one of them is notified by the notification unit AN.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 107, after the cooking step 1 is completed, another cooking is performed in the heating chamber 113 even in the transition period TR (“heating rest period P” in FIG. 55) (the above). It notifies that it can be executed (in parallel with the cooking process 2), and can notify according to a user's command.

In FIG. 107, step SG1 is a stage in which the cooperative cooking mode is selected and the cooking menu desired by the user (for example, “karaage” of chicken) is selected from the identification information 330 displayed on the first specific screen 30SP.

In the next step SG2, similarly to step SD5 in FIG. 98, it is determined whether or not the cooking step 1 of the selected cooperative cooking mode is executed in the heating chamber 113.
If this step SG2 is "Yes", the process proceeds to the next step SG3.

In the next step SG3, inventory information is inquired to the home gateway 411. In this step SG3, among the inventory information, information on frozen foods and reheated foods is acquired. Although the description of the inventory information reception and temporary storage steps as in step SD7 of FIG. 98 is omitted in FIG. 107, the same processing is performed in the operation program of FIG. 107.

In the next step SG4, it is determined whether or not the cooking step 1 executed in the heating chamber 113 has been completed.

If the cooking step 1 is completed at the stage of step SG4, the transition period TR (“heating rest period P” in FIG. 55) starts from that point. That is, the heating operation of the cooperative cooking is suspended, and the user is waiting for the start command of the cooking process 2.

In such a transition period TR, in step SG5, it is determined whether or not another cooking can be performed. This is a process corresponding to step SD8 in FIG. 98.

When the step SG5 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SG6, and the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 notify that there is a proposal for another cooking menu that can be performed in the heating chamber 113. If the determination result in step SG5 is "No", the process ends.

In the subsequent step SG6, when a specific input key of the central operation unit 30M or the input key 47 is operated, it is determined as "Yes".

In step SG7, one or a plurality of different cooking menus (for example, “warming dumplings”) that can be executed in the heating chamber 113 are displayed. The place to display may be the integrated display unit 30 displaying the cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode. Then, the process proceeds to step SG8 waiting for the start command of the cooking process 2.

(Inventory information display example 3)
FIG. 108 is an enlarged plan view showing a central operation unit 40M of the cooking cooker 1 and a peripheral portion of the integrated display unit 30. FIG. 109 is an enlarged plan view showing the peripheral portions of the central operation unit 40M and the integrated display unit 30. FIG. 110 is an enlarged plan view showing the peripheral portions of the central operation unit 40M and the integrated display unit 30.

FIG. 108 shows a display example of the integrated display unit 30 in the scene of step SG6 of FIG. 107. As is clear from FIG. 108, the first area 30L to the third area 30R (see FIG. 21) of the integrated display unit 30 are combined into one to form a horizontally long display area.

In FIG. 108, 338 is recommended information indicating that there is another cooking menu that can be performed in the heating chamber 113, and 337 is an operation of the input key 43M2 for displaying the proposed content of the cooking menu of the recommended information. It is a display guide section that explains.

In the state of FIG. 108, the individual light emitting unit 27M4 corresponding to the input key 43M2 is blinking as shown by the dotted circle in order to encourage the user to input the input operation. By pressing any one of the (two) input keys 43M2 in this state, individual foodstuff information 339 such as specific recommended cooking (for example, "frozen rice") can be displayed on the first specific screen 30SP. can.

In FIG. 108, when the input key 43M2 is pressed, the screen is switched to the display screen of FIG. 109. The recommended information 338 shown in FIG. 108 changes to the content of FIG. 109.
In FIG. 109, 339 is individual food information indicating another cooking menu (recommended cooking) that can be performed in the heating chamber 113 in characters. In the example shown in FIG. 109, the weight and freezing temperature of the refrigerated "dumplings" and the frozen "rice" are displayed. That is, the individual food material information also includes information on the name and weight of one food material, and the state of refrigeration or freezing (temperature, etc.). In addition, related information such as expiration date information and storage start time (date) in the refrigerator 401 may be included.

FIG. 110 shows the display content that is automatically switched after a few seconds while keeping the display content shown in FIG. 108. That is, after a few seconds have passed without pressing the input key 43M2 after the state shown in FIG. 108, the screen is switched to the display screen shown in FIG. 110. Further, after a few seconds have passed in the state of FIG. 110, the display automatically returns to the display of FIG. 108.

As is clear from FIGS. 108 to 110, the integrated control device MC has a cooking menu that can be executed in the heating chamber 113 in the middle of the cooking step 1 and after the completion of the first cooking step, and the cooking. The configuration is characterized in that at least one of the inventory information of the refrigerator related to the menu is notified by the notification unit AN.

As described above, in the examples shown in FIGS. 107 to 110, another cooking is performed in the heating chamber 113 during the transition period TR (“heating pause period P” in FIG. 55) after the cooking step 1 is completed. It notifies that it can be executed (in parallel with the cooking step 2), and can notify the information of the ingredients used for "another cooking" according to the user's command.
Therefore, for example, one cooking A (example: karaage) in the cooperative cooking mode enters the stage of the cooking step 2 in the left heating unit 17HL and is in the final finishing stage, and the cooking is performed in the heating chamber 113. Cooking B (thawing to warming frozen rice), which is different from that of cooking B, can be performed at the same time. That is, when cooking A and cooking B are eaten in one meal, cooking can be performed in parallel instead of the method of starting cooking B after finishing cooking A. As a result, the overall cooking time can be shortened, and the convenience of the user is improved.

Summary of Embodiment 1.
As is clear from the above description, in the first embodiment, the cooking cooker according to the first disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
A heating chamber 113 whose opening is closed by a door 114 so as to be openable and closable.
A microwave heating source 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113,
An oven heating source 188 that heats the heating chamber 113,
An induction heating source 9 that heats the object to be heated N placed on the top plate,
Notification unit AN (integrated display unit 30, voice synthesizer 95, etc.) that notifies information about the cooking process, and
It has an integrated control device MC that controls the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, the induction heating source 9, and the notification unit AN.
The integrated control device MC has a cooperative cooking mode in which the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source 9 are linked.
The cooperative cooking mode includes a cooking step 1 by the induction heating source 9 and a cooking step 2 using at least one of the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188.
The integrated control device automatically advances the cooking process 1, ends the cooking process 1 by a command from the user, and after the end, starts the cooking process 2 in response to the user's start command. The cooking process 2 is automatically advanced,
The integrated control device has a function of detecting the progress of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2, and in the middle of the cooking process 1, the first reference information FA1 or the second cooking process 2 is related. Reference information Disclosed is a cooking cooker 1 characterized in that at least one of FA2 is automatically notified by the notification unit.

Because of this configuration, three types of heating sources such as an induction heating source 9 and a microwave heating source 189 can be used, and a wide range of cooking can be supported by the cooperative cooking mode, which is highly convenient cooking. Can provide vessels.

Further, it has a function of detecting the progress of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2 by detecting, for example, the elapsed time or the rising temperature (TN1, TN2, etc.), and is in the middle of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2. Since the reference information is automatically notified to the user at the stage, even if the types of heating sources are increasing, the user is notified of the progress of cooking to dispel the anxiety, and the heating operation is temporarily performed for confirmation on the way. By stopping, it is possible to avoid failures such as impairing the execution of efficient cooperative cooking. This can be expected to further improve the user's sense of security and usability.

As is clear from the above description, in the first embodiment, the cooking cooker according to the second disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
A heating chamber 113 whose opening is closed by a door 114 so as to be openable and closable.
A microwave heating source 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113,
An oven heating source 188 that heats the heating chamber 113,
An induction heating source 9 that heats the object to be heated N placed on the top plate,
Notification unit AN (integrated display unit 30, voice synthesizer 95, etc.) that notifies information about the cooking process, and
It has an integrated control device MC that controls the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, the induction heating source 9, and the notification unit AN, respectively.
The integrated control device MC has a cooperative cooking mode in which the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source 9 are linked.
The cooperative cooking mode includes a cooking step 1 using at least one of the microwave heating source and the oven heating source, and a cooking step 2 using the induction heating source.
The integrated control device MC automatically advances the cooking process 1, ends the cooking process 1 by a command from the user, and after the end, starts the cooking process 2 in response to a user's start command. The cooking process 2 is automatically advanced.
The integrated control device MC has a function of detecting the progress of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2, and is a first reference of the cooking step 1 in the middle of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2. Disclosed is a cooking cooker 1 characterized in that at least one of the information FA1 and the second reference information FA2 regarding the cooking process 2 is automatically notified by the notification unit AN.

Because of this configuration, three types of heating sources such as an induction heating source 9 and a microwave heating source 189 can be used, and a wide range of cooking can be supported by the cooperative cooking mode, which is highly convenient cooking. Can provide vessels.

Further, it has a function of detecting the progress of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2 by detecting, for example, the elapsed time or the rising temperature (TN1, TN2, etc.), and is in the middle of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2. Since the reference information is automatically notified to the user at the stage, even if the types of heating sources are increasing, the user is notified of the progress of cooking to dispel the anxiety, and the heating operation is temporarily performed for confirmation on the way. By stopping, it is possible to avoid failures such as impairing the execution of efficient cooperative cooking. This can be expected to further improve the user's sense of security and usability.

As is clear from the above description, in the first embodiment, the cooking cooker according to the third disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
Heating chamber 113 and
Induction heating source 9 that requires a preheating process and
A microwave heating source 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113,
It has a notification unit AN that notifies information about the cooking process, and
It has a cooperative cooking mode in which the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 are switched and operated by a user's operation.
When the cooperative cooking mode is set, the cooking step 1 for heating the cooked object housed in the heating chamber 113 and the cooked object N placed on the top plate 15 after the cooking step 1 is completed. The cooking step 2 in which the object to be cooked is induced and heated by the induction heating source can be reserved.
When a reservation for cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is made,
(1) The induction heating source 9 can be driven from before the cooking step 1 to start the preheating step.
(2) During the preheating step, the cooking step 1 by the microwave heating source 189 can be started in the heating chamber 113.
(3) After stopping the driving of the microwave heating source 9 and ending the cooking step 1, the cooking step 2 can be started on the object to be heated N preheated by the induction heating source 9.
(4) In the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2, the cooking device is disclosed, characterized in that information indicating the progress of the cooking step is notified by the notification unit AN.

Because of this configuration, the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used in combination. Therefore, it is possible to provide a highly convenient cooking cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Further, the cooking step 1 can be started while the preheating step by the induction heating source 9 is started before the cooking step 1, and then the cooked object is moved toward the preheated object N to be cooked. Step 2 can be performed.

Furthermore, since the reference information is automatically notified to the user in the middle of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2, even if the types of heating sources are increasing, the user is notified of the progress of cooking and the feeling of anxiety is dispelled. By temporarily stopping the heating operation for confirmation on the way, it is possible to avoid failures such as impairing the execution of efficient cooperative cooking. This can be expected to further improve the user's sense of security and usability.

In the first embodiment, the cooking device according to the fourth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
Heating chamber 113 and
A microwave heating source 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113,
An oven heating source 188 that heats the heating chamber 113,
An induction heating source 9 that heats the object N to be heated,
Notification unit AN that notifies information about the cooking process,
It has an integrated control device MC that controls the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source 9, respectively.
The integrated control device MC is
(1) IH independent cooking mode in which the induction heating source 9 is operated independently (2) Range independent cooking mode in which the microwave heating source 189 is operated independently (3) Oven alone in which the oven heating source 188 is operated independently Cooking mode (4) Transition period TR in which the start and end timings of the microwave heating source 189 and / or one of the oven heating source 188 and the induction heating source 9 are determined depending on the input operation of the user. After that, the cooperative cooking mode that operates sequentially,
Has an operating program of
The cooperative cooking mode includes a cooking step 1 performed using the heating chamber 113 before the transition period, and a cooking step 2 performed after the transition period in a place other than the heating chamber 113. ,
In the transition period TR, the integrated control device MC provides reference information regarding the cooking step 2 or information indicating that cooking different from cooking in the cooperative cooking mode can be performed in the heating chamber 113 by the notification unit AN. The cooker was disclosed, which was characterized in that it was notified.

Because of this configuration, three types of heating sources such as an induction heating source 9 and a microwave heating source 189 can be used, and moreover, a wide range of cooking can be supported by the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode. Can provide a high-quality cooker.

Further, when cooking is performed in the cooperative cooking mode, the heating chamber 113 that has completed the cooking step 1 is separated during the transition period TR in which the heating operation is stopped (the preheating operation may be continued). It is possible to notify that cooking is possible.
Therefore, it is expected that the time spent by the user for cooking can be shortened, cooking can be performed faster than before, the burden on the user can be reduced, and the usability can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the cooking device according to the fifth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
Inside the main body 110, a heating chamber 113, an induction heating source 9 for heating the object to be heated N, a microwave heating source 189 for heating the object to be cooked housed in the heating chamber 113, and the microwave heating. The oven heating source 188 that heats the heating chamber 113 by a principle different from the source 189, the notification unit AN, the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, and the notification unit AN are provided. , Equipped with an integrated control device MC that controls each
The integrated control device MC includes a cooperative cooking mode in which a group composed of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 and the induction heating source 9 are started to be driven with a time lag, and the micro. It has a function of performing a combined cooking mode in which the wave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are driven at the same time or at a time lag, or are automatically switched and driven.
The integrated control device MC includes a cooking step 1 that occupies the heating chamber 113 in the cooperative cooking mode, and the microwave heating source in the heating chamber 113 before the cooking step 1 is completed. The heating unit AN notifies that cooking different from the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode can be performed by using either one or both of 189 and the oven heating source 188. The cooker was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, three types of heating sources such as an induction heating source 9 and a microwave heating source 189 can be used, and moreover, a wide range of cooking can be supported by the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode. Can provide a high-quality cooker.

Further, in the case of cooking in the cooperative cooking mode, when the cooking step 1 that occupies the heating chamber 113 is completed, it is possible to notify in advance that another cooking using the heating chamber 113 can be performed, so that the user heats the cooking chamber 113. It is expected that the time spent on cooking can be shortened, cooking can be performed faster than before, the burden on the user can be reduced, and usability can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the cooking device according to the sixth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
Heating chamber 113 and
A microwave heating source 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113,
An oven heating source 188 that heats the heating chamber 113,
An induction heating source 9 that heats the object N to be heated,
A transmission / reception unit (wireless communication unit) 49 that exchanges information with the information processing device (home gateway) 411 by wire or wirelessly, and
Notification unit AN and
It has an integrated control device MC that controls the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, the induction heating source 9, the transmission / reception unit 49, and the notification unit AN, respectively.
The integrated control device MC has a cooperative cooking mode in which cooking is executed in cooperation with the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source 9.
In the cooperative cooking mode, the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2 started in response to a command from the user after the completion of the cooking step 1 are executed.
The integrated control device MC discloses a cooking cooker characterized in that reference information related to cooking to which the cooperative cooking mode is applied is acquired from the information processing device 411 via the transmission / reception unit 49. Was there.

Because of this configuration, three types of heating sources such as an induction heating source 9 and a microwave heating source 189 can be used, and a wide range of cooking can be supported by the cooperative cooking mode, which is highly convenient cooking. Can provide vessels.

Further, when cooking in the cooperative cooking mode, the food material information in the refrigerator 401 can be acquired as reference information related to cooking to which the cooperative cooking mode is applied, so that the burden of cooking on the user side can be reduced. It can be expected to improve usability.

In the first embodiment, the cooking cooker according to the seventh disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
Heating chamber 113 and
A microwave heating source 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113,
An oven heating source 188 that heats the heating chamber 113,
An induction heating source 9 that heats the object N to be heated,
A transmission / reception unit (wireless communication unit) 49 that exchanges information with the information processing device (home gateway) 411 by wire or wirelessly, and
Notification unit AN and
It has an integrated control device MC that controls the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, the induction heating source 9, the transmission / reception unit 49, and the notification unit AN, respectively.
The integrated control device MC has a cooperative cooking mode in which the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source 9 are linked by a cooperative cooking program to execute cooking.
The cooperative cooking program defines a cooking process 1 and a cooking process 2 that is started in response to a user's command after a transition period TR in which no heating operation is performed.
The integrated control device MC discloses a cooking device characterized in that cooking execution data relating to cooking executed by applying the cooperative cooking mode is transmitted to the information processing device 411 via the transmission / reception unit 49. Was.

Because of this configuration, three types of heating sources such as an induction heating source 9 and a microwave heating source 189 can be used, and a wide range of cooking can be supported by the cooperative cooking mode, which is highly convenient cooking. Can provide vessels.

Further, when cooking is performed in the cooperative cooking mode, the execution data of the cooking is provided to the external information processing device (home gateway) 411, which can be useful information for the home gateway 4110 and the refrigerator 401. Finally, the utilization of such information can contribute to the improvement of user convenience, safety, maintenance and improvement of comfortable space, and the like.

In the first embodiment, the cooking device according to the eighth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
Induction heating source 9 that requires a preheating process and
A microwave heating source 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113,
Input operation unit 40 and
Notification unit AN and
It has an integrated control device MC that controls the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, and the notification unit AN.
The operation program of the integrated control device MC has a cooperative cooking mode in which the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 are operated according to the user's operation in the input operation unit 40.
The input operation unit 40 has a first operation unit (central operation unit) 40M and a second operation unit (left operation unit 40L, right operation unit 40R).
The first operation unit (central operation unit) 40M sets the cooperative cooking mode.
The second operation unit (left operation unit 40L, right operation unit 40R) determines the start and end of the preheating step and the cooking step by the induction heating source 9.
When the cooperative cooking mode is set, the cooking step 1 in which the cooked object is heated by the microwave heating source 189 and the cooked object N placed on the top plate after the cooking step 1 is completed. The cooking step 2 in which the object to be cooked is heated by the induction heating source 9 can be reserved above.
When the cooperative cooking mode is set, the cooking step 1 in which the cooked object is heated by the microwave heating source and the cooked object placed on the top plate after the cooking step 1 is completed are placed on the cooked object. The cooking step 2 in which the object to be cooked is heated by the induction heating source can be reserved.
When a reservation for cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is made,
(1) The induction heating source can be driven from before the cooking step 1 to start the preheating step.
(2) During the preheating step, the cooking step 1 can be started and ended in the heating chamber by the first operating unit.
(3) After the cooking step 1 is completed, the cooking step 2 can be started on the object to be heated preheated in the preheating step.
(4) In the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, information indicating the progress of the cooking process is notified from the notification unit.
, A cooking cooker characterized by the above was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used in combination. Therefore, it is possible to provide a highly convenient cooking cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Further, the cooking step 1 can be started while the preheating step by the induction heating source 9 is started before the cooking step 1, and then the cooked object is moved toward the preheated object N to be cooked. Step 2 can be performed.

Further, in the middle of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2, information on the progress of the cooking process is notified, so that even if the types of heating sources are increasing, the user is notified of the progress of cooking to dispel the feeling of anxiety. By temporarily stopping the heating operation for confirmation on the way, it is possible to avoid failures such as impairing the execution of efficient cooperative cooking. This can be expected to further improve the user's sense of security and usability.

In the first embodiment, the kitchen furniture 2 relating to the ninth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
Disclosed is kitchen furniture 2 having an installation port 2A on the upper surface and installing the composite cooking cooker according to any one of the first disclosure to the eighth disclosure in the installation port 2A. Was there.

With this configuration, it is possible to provide kitchen furniture in which a highly convenient cooking cooker that can be used in combination with the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 is installed.

In the first embodiment, the cooking device control program according to the tenth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
It is executed by a control computer that controls a first heating source (induction heating source) 9 and a second heating source (microwave heating source) 189 of the cooking cooker 1.
Step 1 to activate the integrated display unit 30 which is a display means when the power is turned on,
Step 2 of displaying the standby common information on the integrated display unit 30 and
Step 3 of determining one cooking mode selected by the user among the single cooking mode, the combined cooking mode, and the cooperative cooking mode, and
In step 3, when it is determined that the cooperative cooking mode is selected, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed, and when it is determined that the combined cooking mode is selected, the second specific screen 30 is displayed. When it is determined that the single cooking mode has been selected, step 4 for displaying the third specific screen 30ST and step 4
(1) When the first specific screen 30SP is displayed and a cooking start command signal is received, the heating operation in the cooperative cooking mode is started.
(2) When the second specific screen 30SC is displayed and a cooking start command signal is received, the heating operation in the combined cooking mode is started.
(3) When the cooking start command signal is received when the third specific screen 30ST is displayed, the heating operation of the independent control menu is started.
In the cooperative cooking mode, a cooking cooker characterized in that reference information FA1 to FA5 regarding the cooking process is notified according to the progress of the cooking process has been disclosed.

Because of this configuration, the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used in combination. Moreover, the combined cooking mode and the cooperative cooking mode can provide a highly convenient control program for a cooking cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Further, it has a function of detecting and determining the progress of the cooking process, for example, by detecting the elapsed time, the rising temperature (TN1, TN2, etc.), etc., and automatically provides the user with reference information FA1 to FA5 in the middle of the cooking process. Even if the number of types of heating sources is increasing, the user is notified of the progress of cooking to dispel anxiety, and the heating operation is temporarily stopped for confirmation on the way for efficient cooperation. It is possible to avoid mistakes such as impairing the execution of cooking. This can be expected to further improve the user's sense of security and usability.

In the first embodiment, the operation management system of the home electric appliance according to the eleventh disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
A first cooking cooker 1 having a communication function (wireless communication unit 49) having three heating sources 9, 188 and 189 having different heating principles.
A refrigerator 401 equipped with storage chambers 401A and 401B capable of refrigerating or freezing foodstuffs and also having a communication function.
An information processing device 411 capable of communicating with each other between the first cooking cooker 1 and the refrigerator 401 is provided.
When the information processing device receives the activation information of the first cooking cooker 1, it performs the following mutual cooperative operation.
An operation management system for home appliances 400, which is characterized by this.
(Processing 1) Among the foodstuffs stored in the refrigerator 401, at least the foodstuff information stored frozen is collected and stored in the storage device.
(Processing 2) A request is made from the first cooking cooker 1 to request the provision of food material information (see inventory inquiry RQ3 in FIG. 99).
(Process 3) In response to the request for the provision of the food material information, the food material information stored in the storage device is transmitted to the first cooking cooker 1 (see inventory data transmission RS2 in FIG. 99).
The operation management system for home appliances, which is characterized by this, was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, cooking can be performed using three types of heating sources having different heating principles, and a wide range of cooking can be supported. In addition, it is possible to provide an operation management system that provides the cooker with information on ingredients from the refrigerator in a timely manner.

Other features of Embodiment 1.
(1) Part 1:
Inside the main body 110, a heating chamber 113, an induction heating source (first heating means) 9 for heating the object to be heated, and a microwave heating source (first heating means) 9 for heating the object to be cooked housed in the heating chamber 113. The second heating means) 189, the oven heating source (third heating means) 188 that heats the heating chamber 113 by a heating principle different from that of the microwave heating source 189, and the first, second, and third heating means. Equipped with an integrated control device (control unit) MC that controls the heating means,
The integrated control device MC includes a cooperative cooking mode in which a group composed of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 and the induction heating source 9 are started to be driven with a time lag, and the micro. It has a function of performing a combined cooking mode in which the wave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are driven at the same time or at a time lag, or are automatically switched and driven.
When the integrated control device MC receives the input for selecting the combined cooking mode or the linked cooking mode, the display operation corresponding to the combined cooking mode or the linked cooking mode, that is, as an example, the first specific screen 30SP. By displaying either one of the above and the second specific screen 30SC, the user can easily identify the cooking mode.

With this configuration, two heating sources such as an induction heating source 9 and a microwave heating source 189 can be used, and a heating cooker capable of easily using a cooperative cooking mode and a combined cooking mode can be provided. can.

Further, in addition to the above configuration, the display operation corresponding to the cooperative cooking mode or the combined cooking mode includes the first specific screen 30SP for displaying the cooperative cooking mode and the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode, and the combined cooking of the combined cooking mode. The second specific screen 30SC for displaying the mode and the control conditions was displayed.
Therefore, the cooperative cooking mode and the cooking process, and the combined cooking mode and the control conditions can be confirmed on the display screen. This makes it easy for the user to use.

Further, an integrated display that selectively displays the input operation unit 40 for inputting to select one of the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode, the first specific screen 30SP, and the second specific screen 30SC. It was a configuration including a part 30.
Therefore, one of the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode can be selected while checking the integrated display unit 30, which is convenient.

Further, the input operation unit 40 is common to the first, second, and third heating means, and is linked with the operation unit 98 of the main power switch 97 that supplies electric power to the integrated control device MC. It had a cooking mode and an input key 43MS (cooking start input means) for instructing the start of individual cooking in the combined cooking mode.
Therefore, the input operation unit 40 can perform from the input of the main power to the command to start heating, and the operability is good.

Further, the input operation unit 40 has an input key 43MC as a first selection means for selecting the cooperative cooking mode and an input key 43M1 as a second selection means for selecting the combined cooking mode. It was a configuration.
Therefore, the two cooking modes can be easily selected by operating the input key 43MC and the input key 43M1, and the operability is good.

Further, the input operation unit 40 has an input key 43MT as a cooking mode canceling means for determining the end of each cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode.
Therefore, both the operation of the cooperative cooking mode and the operation of the combined cooking mode can be canceled by the input key 43MT, and the operability is good.

Further, the integrated control device MC receives an input of any one of the combined cooking mode, the cooperative cooking mode, and the single cooking mode in the input operation unit 40, and a specific screen (first specific) according to the cooking mode. The screen 30SP, the second specific screen 30SC, and the third specific screen 30ST) are displayed by the integrated display unit 30.

Moreover, for each cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode, such as "hamburger" and "karaage", the heating sources of cooking step 1 and cooking step 2 are displayed on the first specific screen 30SP, and further, the above-mentioned first reference. Since useful information such as information FA1 and second reference information FA2 is displayed to the user, it is possible to reduce the user's cooking failure and provide a cooking device with improved convenience.
Further, the integrated control device MC displays the standby initial screen (common screen 30Z) on the integrated display unit 30 after the main power is turned on by the input operation unit 40, and then the input operation unit 40. The specific screen is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 in response to the input from.
Therefore, the cooperative cooking mode, the combined cooking mode, and the single cooking mode can be effectively used.

The specific screen is a first specific screen 30SP for the cooperative cooking mode and a second specific screen 30SC for the combined cooking mode, and the first specific screen and the second specific screen are displayed on the integrated display unit 30. It was a configuration that was displayed selectively.
Therefore, there is no risk of misunderstanding between the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode, and the user's convenience is good.
..

(2) Part 2:
Further, when executing a cooking mode other than the cooperative cooking mode, the integrated control device MC controls each heating means at a stage before the cooking of the induction heating source 9 or the microwave heating source 189 is started. The control conditions applicable to the menu were displayed in the first area 30L to the third area 30R of the integrated display unit, respectively.
Therefore, the user can set the control conditions applicable to the control menu of each heating means on the second specific screen of the integrated display unit 30 before the cooking of the induction heating source 9 or the microwave heating source 189 is started. It can be confirmed by 30SC, and it can be expected to improve the operability of the user.

(3) Part 3:
The integrated display unit 30 displays a second specific screen 30SC common to the two modes for the single heating mode of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 and the combined cooking mode.
The second specific screen 30SC (display screen 30D) has a menu for the single cooking mode, a name for specifying the control menu for the combined cooking mode (for example, "range automatic", "warming", etc.), and the control mode. The individual control conditions (for example, "cooking time", "heat value", etc.) that can be applied to the above are displayed side by side.
Therefore, the user can easily compare and confirm the control menu and the individual control conditions by looking at the display screen 30D.

(4) Part 4:
Further, when the integrated control device MC determines that the input key 43M1 has been pressed, it determines that the cooking process information 332 of one cooperative cooking menu (for example, "hamburger") and one or more "controls" applied to the menu. The "condition" information (including one or more combinations of thermal power, heating intensity information, target temperature information 30T, etc.) is displayed on the display screen 30D (first area 30L, second area 30M).
Then, the integrated control device MC displays additional information 331 such as a guide prompting the user's operation, and when the start input 43MS key is pressed in this state, the execution of the cooperative cooking mode is started. There is (see FIG. 53).

According to the first embodiment, in the integrated display unit 30 shared by the three types of heating sources, the display screen 30D is used to cook with the heating source by one control menu selected from the cooperative cooking mode group. Since at least three pieces of information such as the process and the user's input operation can be displayed at once, even a composite type cooking cooker equipped with three heating sources can be a convenient cooking cooker.

(5) Part 5:
The integrated control device MC measures the elapsed time or the temperature rise from the start time of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2 in order to detect the progress of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2, and the first reference information FA1 or The configuration was such that the second reference information FA2 was notified.
Therefore, the notification operation of the reference information can be ensured.

(6) Part 6:
The input operation unit 40
(1) IH independent cooking mode selection means 43L, 43R for operating the induction heating source independently, and
(2) A range independent cooking mode selection means 43M1 for operating the microwave heating source independently, and
(3) The oven independent cooking mode selection means 43M1 for operating the oven heating source independently, and
(4) A combined cooking mode selection means 43M1 for automatically switching and operating both the microwave heating source and the oven heating source at the same time or with a time lag.
(5) The configuration includes the cooperative cooking mode selection means 43MC.
Therefore, there is an advantage that each heating source can be easily selected without increasing the installation space of the three heating source selection means (input keys and the like).

(7) Part 7:
The operation program of the integrated control device MC includes a combined cooking menu in which the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are operated at the same time or automatically switched to operate.
Therefore, there is an advantage that a heating cooker 1 capable of handling a wide variety of cooking can be obtained by combining two types of heating sources having different heating principles.

(8) Part 8:
The input operation unit 40 is a shared operation of the right operation unit 40R and the left operation unit 40L, which are dedicated operation units of the induction heating source 9, and the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, and the oven heating source 188. It has a unit (central operation unit) of 40M and
The shared operation unit 40M includes a first selection means (input key 43MC) for selecting the cooperative cooking mode and a second selection means (input key 43M1) for selecting the combined cooking mode.
When the input operation of the first selection means (input key 43MC) is started before the second selection means (input key 43M1), the first specific screen (30SP) for input regarding cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is started. ) Is displayed,
When the input operation of the second selection means (input key 43M1) is started before the first selection means (input key 43MC), the second specific screen 30SC for input regarding cooking in the combined cooking mode is displayed. It was the configuration to be displayed.
Therefore, it is more effective to operate the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode first. Moreover, since different specific screens are displayed, there is no concern that an erroneous operation may be caused in selecting between the two types of cooking modes.

(9) Part 9:
In the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2, at least one of the heating conditions of the microwave heating source 9, the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source 9 is automatically determined by the integrated control device MC. Met. For example, in "range manual" (see FIG. 34), the user can select the microwave output during microwave heating from 100W, 200W, and 500W, but the default value is 500W. That is, unless otherwise specified, it is determined to be 500 W.
Therefore, it is possible to reduce the input operation of the user and improve the usability.

(10) Part 10:
The end of the cooking step 1 using the induction heating source 9 and the end of the cooking step 2 were determined by an input operation to the dedicated operation unit (right operation unit 40R and left operation unit 40L). Specifically, the input keys 43L1 and 43R1 determine the start and stop timings of the induction heating operation.
Therefore, after selecting to execute the cooperative cooking mode, the user can stand in front of either the right operation unit 40R or the left operation unit 40L and concentrate on the start and end of the induction heating. In other words, it is not necessary to use both the central operation unit 40M and the left and right operation units 40L and 40R properly to start and end the cooking process 1, so that the user's operation is not confused.

(11) Part 11:
In the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2, the heating condition of at least one of the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source 9 is the input operation unit 40 (40M, 40L, 40R). ) Was determined by the user's operation.
Therefore, the heating conditions (heating power, heating time, etc.) according to the object to be cooked, the heating form, and the heating source can be set, and the cooking finish can be improved.

(12) Part 12:
The notification unit AN includes a first display unit (31L, 31R) that performs a display operation during the execution period of the IH single cooking mode, an integrated display unit 30 that performs a display operation during the execution period of the cooperative cooking mode, and the integrated display unit 30. Had.
Therefore, especially when cooking in the cooperative cooking mode using a plurality of heating sources, one integrated display unit 30 intensively displays the cooking process, heating conditions, and the like, so focus attention on the integrated display unit 30. Can be done.

(13) Part 13:
When the integrated display unit 30 receives the input for selecting the combined cooking mode or the cooperative cooking mode, the integrated display unit 30 is configured to perform a display operation corresponding to the combined cooking mode or the cooperative cooking mode.
That is, the integrated display unit 30 displays the first specific screen (30SP) for the cooperative cooking mode when the input operation is performed with the input key 43MC, and the second specific screen (30SP) for the combined cooking mode when the input operation is performed with the input key 43M1. The specific screen 30SC was displayed.
Therefore, there is no mistake in selecting the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode, and the operability of the user can be improved.

(14) Part 14:
In the cooperative cooking mode, the identification information 330 that identifies a plurality of dishes is displayed in a certain order on the first specific screen 30SP, and the identification information 330 can be sequentially selected each time the input operation unit 40 is operated. It was a state configuration.
Therefore, when the desired cooking (for example, hamburger steak) is performed, the identification information can be sequentially displayed and selected, so that the selection method is simple and the operability of the user can be improved.

(15) Part 15:
The combined cooking mode is divided by a control menu for driving the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188.
The second specific screen 30SC is configured to display information for specifying the control menu (for example, specific sentences 30J of "warming" and "range manual" in FIG. 40).
Therefore, the user can easily select the control menu.

(16) Part 16:
It also has a main body case HC that constitutes the outer shell of the cooking cooker 1.
The inside of the main body case HC is divided into an upper space 300A accommodating the induction heating source 9 and a lower space 300B accommodating the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188.
The upper space 300A has upper cooling fans 60 and 61 that introduce cooling outside air from a ventilation hole 64 communicating with the outside of the lower space 300B.
The lower space 300B accommodates lower cooling fans 128 and 129 that introduce outside air for cooling from the outside without passing through the coil installation space CK of the upper space 300A.
According to this configuration, three types of heating, microwave heating, induction heating, and oven heating can be selected in one cooking device, and the cooking device is highly convenient and can be used for a wide range of cooking.
Moreover, the introduction of outside air into the inside of the upper space 300A and the lower space 300B is prevented from being adversely affected or interfering with each other. Therefore, the internal space of the main body case HC can be efficiently cooled.

(17) Part 17:
The main body case HC is composed of a metal upper case 16 whose inside is an upper space of 300 A, and a metal lower case 101 in which the upper case 16 is fitted into an upper surface opening.
The integrated control device MC and the notification unit AN were housed in the upper case 16.
Therefore, since the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 can be made into one strong box-shaped structure, the support structure of the door 114 can be firmly realized, which is useful for preventing microwave leakage in the door 114 portion. ..

In particular, since the top plate 15 of the upper unit 100 is supported by the upper surface of the kitchen furniture 2 and receives the full load of the lower unit 200, the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 as a whole should not be distorted or deformed. Is important. In this respect, the structure of the first embodiment is highly effective in preventing such deformation.

(18) Part 18:
The first vent (vent hole) 64 into which the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 introduce the outside air and the second vents 152F and 152B into which the lower cooling fan introduces the outside air sandwich the heating chamber 113. The configuration was arranged on opposite sides of each other.
According to this configuration, the position where the outside air is introduced into the lower case 101 and the position where the outside air is introduced into the upper case 16 are separated from each other. Therefore, it is possible to prevent each other's introduction of outside air from being adversely affected or interfered with each other. Further, even if the rotation speeds of the blower fans are the same, it is possible to avoid the generation of roaring noise, and it is possible to provide a cooking cooker with a quiet operating noise.

(19) Part 19:
In the upper space 300A, a power supply circuit board 55 that supplies electric power to each of the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, and the oven heating source 188, and a filter circuit that receives electric power from a commercial power source. The configuration in which the substrate 54 and the substrate 54 are housed has been disclosed.
Due to this configuration, the power supply circuit board 55, which is an important power supply means, can be effectively cooled by the two cooling fans 60 and 61, and failures and malfunctions due to overheating can be prevented.

Further, in the upper space 300A, a filter circuit board 54 that receives power from a commercial power source and a filter circuit board 54 that receives power from the filter circuit board 54 are required for the first inverter circuit board 80 and the second inverter board 80M. A power supply circuit board 55 for generating power is provided.
The power supply circuit board 55 is arranged on the side opposite to the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 with the cover 70 interposed therebetween.
The filter circuit board 54 is arranged at a position adjacent to the power supply circuit board 55.
The electrical components mounted on the power supply circuit board 55 and the electrical components mounted on the filter circuit board 54 were respectively located on the first horizontal plane HP1.

Due to this configuration, the filter circuit board 54 and the power supply circuit board 55, which are important power supply means, can be effectively cooled by the cooling air blown horizontally from the two cooling fans 60 and 61. It is possible to prevent malfunctions and malfunctions due to overheating.

(20) Part 20:
The reference information acquired from the home gateway 411 by the integrated control device MC via the transmission / reception unit (wireless communication unit) 49 discloses a configuration in which the information is information on foodstuffs that can be cooked.
Therefore, in order to obtain information on the ingredients, it is not necessary to move to the refrigerator 401 in the middle of cooking and check it, so that the labor of the user can be reduced.

(21) Part 21:
The integrated control device MC has a configuration in which the reference information (foodstuff information) is stored in the storage device MM until the cooking of one of the cooperative cooking modes is completed.
For this reason, it is not necessary for the user to operate the reference information for special recording each time, or to write and record the reference information on paper.

(22) Part 22:
The food material information was information held by the refrigerator 401. Further, the food material information included information on the refrigerating temperature or freezing temperature of the food material.
Therefore, it can be used as a reference when determining control conditions (including one or more combinations of thermal power, heating intensity, target temperature, etc.) when cooking in the cooperative cooking mode with the cooking cooker 1. You can expect better-finished cooking.

(23) Part 23:
Before the start of the cooking process 1, the integrated control device MC sends a signal (see RQ1 and RQ3 in FIG. 99) requesting the provision of the above-mentioned food material information from the transmission / reception unit (wireless communication unit) 49 to the information processing device (see RQ1 and RQ3 in FIG. 99). It was configured to transmit to the home gateway) 411.
..
Therefore, in order to obtain information on the ingredients, it is not necessary to move to the refrigerator 401 in the middle of cooking and check it, so that the labor of the user can be reduced.

(24) Part 24:
Before the start of the cooking step 1, the integrated control device MC transmits a signal requesting the provision of the reference information from the transmission / reception unit (wireless communication unit) 49 to the information processing device (home gateway) 411, and further. , The notification unit AN notifies that the provision of reference information is requested (see FIG. 105).
Therefore, the action of the user moving to the refrigerator 401 in the middle of cooking and checking it can be postponed in advance, so that the user's labor can be reduced.

(25) Part 25:
The integrated control device MC has a configuration in which the cooking execution data is stored in the storage device MM after the completion of the cooking step 2.
Therefore, in order for the user to record the cooking execution data, no special operation or work of writing and recording on paper is required.

(26) Part 26:
The cooking execution data was transmitted after the end of the cooking step 2, and the cooking execution data was configured to include at least one or more of the following information.
(1) Information indicating the name of the object to be cooked (2) Information regarding the weight or volume of the object to be cooked (3) Information indicating the control conditions of the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2 (4) The cooking steps 1 to the above Information indicating the time required until the end of the cooking process 2 (5) Information indicating the end time of the cooking process 2 (6) Information indicating the heating source in which the cooking operation was performed (7) The user at the time of the next cooking Information on restrictions received (8) Information related to user safety such as the current temperature of the heating chamber Therefore, in order for the user to record cooking execution data accurately and in detail, special operations or on paper The work of writing and recording can also be eliminated.

(27) Part 27:
The integrated control device MC has a configuration in which the storage device MM stores information on the time required until the cooking is completed after the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is completed.
Therefore, in order to record the information on the time required for cooking by the user each time, it is possible to eliminate the need for a special operation or the work of writing and recording on paper.

(28) Part 28:
In the operation management system of the home electric appliance of the first embodiment, the information processing device (home gateway) 411 detects that there is a person in the space where the cooker 1 and the refrigerator 401 are installed. In addition, when the start-up information from the cooking device 1 is received, it is determined that the cooking time zone is set, and a command for collecting inventory data to the refrigerator 401 is transmitted (step SD6 in FIG. 98). reference).
Therefore, when the user (resident) is in the vicinity of the refrigerator 401 or the cooking cooker 1 and there is a high possibility of cooking, the inventory data can be automatically collected, and moreover, during cooking. In addition, the user does not need to perform a special input operation for collecting the data, and can acquire useful information without any effort, so that a highly convenient operation management system can be realized as a whole.

Embodiment 2.
11 to 121 show the cooking utensil according to the second embodiment.
FIG. 111 is a perspective view showing a state in which the door is closed in the (built-in type composite type) cooking apparatus 1 according to the second embodiment. FIG. 112 is a perspective view showing a state in which the door is opened in the cooking cooker 1. FIG. 113 is a perspective view of the upper unit of the cooking cooker 1 with the top plate removed. FIG. 114 is a perspective view of the upper unit of the cooking cooker 1 with the top plate and the IH coil removed. FIG. 115 is a perspective view of the upper unit of the cooking cooker 1 with the top plate, the IH coil, and the cover removed. FIG. 116 is a reference perspective view showing the flow of cooling air in the cooking device 1. FIG. 117 is a bottom view (bottom surface) view of the upper unit of the cooking cooker 1. FIG. 118 is a block diagram illustrating the overall control function of the cooking device 1. FIG. 119 is an enlarged plan view showing an input operation unit and an integrated display unit of the cooking cooker 1. FIG. 120 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode and the independent control menu. FIG. 121 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the display content of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit in the case of the cooperative cooking mode. The same or corresponding parts as those of the first embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 110 are designated by the same reference numerals.

The second embodiment is significantly different from the first embodiment in that the intake port for the outside air of the cooking cooker 1 is added (changed) and the control-related configuration is also changed.

Further, the configuration of the input operation unit 40 is also significantly different from that of the first embodiment. Further, when the cooperative cooking mode is carried out, the content of limiting the operation of the heating source to be used is different.

Further, the operation patterns of the four cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 are also significantly different from those of the first embodiment.

The points particularly different from those of the first embodiment will be described with reference to the respective drawings. First, FIG. 111 will be described.
In FIG. 111, 118 is a connecting member for integrating the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200, and may also be referred to as a “reinforcing member” because it also has a purpose of reinforcement.

The connecting member 118 has a shape that covers the lower unit 200 from the right side surface to the lower surface and further to the left side surface in a series.
Although not shown, the connecting member 118 is formed in a series of a left vertical portion 118L that overlaps and is fixed to the left side surface of the front portion of the lower unit 200, and the right vertical portion 118R and the left vertical portion 118L. It further has a central flat portion 118M which is formed. The central flat portion 118M is fixed so as to overlap the lower surface of the bottom plate 101U at the front portion of the lower case 101 in a close contact state.

Next, FIG. 112 will be described.
The mounting portion of the hinge portion 176, which will be described later, has a robust structure that does not cause deformation such as bending even when a load or the like is applied when the door 114 is opened or closed. As a result, the door 114 can be reliably supported when it is opened and closed.
Therefore, even if the cooking chamber 114 is used for a long period of time, the door 114 is in close contact with the front peripheral portion of the opening 114A of the heating chamber 114, the opening 114A can be reliably closed, and a highly safe cooking cooker without radio wave leakage can be provided. It has been realized.

The connecting member 118 is formed by pressing a thin metal plate (for example, a plate thickness of 1 mm) to form the right vertical portion 118R (not shown), the central flat portion 118M (not shown), and the right vertical portion 118L. Is formed integrally.

In FIGS. 111 and 112, 101RP is a convex portion integrally formed with the side vertical wall 101R of the lower case 101. This convex portion is formed by pressing the side vertical wall 101R from the inside to the outside of the lower case 101, and is intended to increase the mechanical strength of the side vertical wall 101R. Similarly, the lateral vertical wall 101L on the left side of the lower case 101 also has a convex portion 101LP (not shown) formed by projecting a certain area outward.

Reference numeral 116 denotes a metal arm that supports the door 114 in a horizontal state and pulls the door 114 in the door closing direction when the door 114 is closed. The arm 116 is guided by a through hole (guide hole) 117 formed in the front plate 101F of the lower case 101, and moves through the through hole 117 in the front-rear direction. The door structure of the high-frequency heating device using the arm 116 is introduced in, for example, JP-A-2002-39541, JP-A-2010-181106, JP-A-2007-218544, and the like. Is omitted.

In FIG. 112, 176 is a pair of hinges provided on the left and right, and is fixed to both the door 114 and the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. As a result, the door 114 is rotatably supported by the lower case 101. The hinge 176 is sandwiched between the connecting member (reinforcing member) 118 and the bottom plate 101U, and is fixed at a plurality of locations by a fixture (combination of bolts and nuts, screws, etc.).

With the above structure, the door 114 opens and closes with the hinge 176 as a fulcrum. The pair of left and right arms 116 are supported from below by a roller (not shown) or a sliding member (not shown) rotatably provided below the back side of the through hole 117 to open and close the door 114. Occasionally, the arm 116 moves back and forth while in contact with the upper surface of the roller or sliding member.

Reference numeral 112 denotes front covers provided on both left and right sides of the front surface of the lower unit 200, which are made of plastic or metal.
The front cover 112 has a symmetrical shape, and each of the front covers 112 projects laterally to the left and right of the width of the lower case 101 and is fixed to the lower case 101. When the cooker 1 is installed in the kitchen furniture 2, the front cover 112 covers the entire front of the gap (the right gap 301R and the left gap 301L) with the kitchen furniture 2 as much as possible from the front. When visually observed, the gaps 301R and 301L serve to make them inconspicuous.

Reference numeral 198 is a metal support metal fitting having a length extending over the entire width of the lower case 101. The support metal fitting 198 is fixed to the front horizontal wall 101T of the lower case 101 with screws 186.

Reference numeral 146 is a box-shaped front operating portion fixed to the front surface (front surface) side of the front cover 112 on the right side. The front operation unit 146 is used for microwave heating and oven heating using the heating chamber 113.
The input operation unit 40 includes the front operation unit 146, a central operation unit 40M, a right operation unit 40R, and a left operation unit 40L.

Reference numeral 147 is a display unit provided with a liquid crystal screen, which is arranged on the ceiling surface of the front operation unit 146 so that the user can visually confirm the displayed contents from above when cooking is performed. The front operation unit 146 is not rotated and stored inside the cooking cooker 1 like the operation unit of the conventionally known "kangaroo pocket mechanism", and is always in front of the front cover 112. It is exposed.

On the upper surface of the front operation unit 146, a plurality of touch-type or push-button type input keys (not shown) are arranged in the vicinity of the display unit 147. By operating these input keys, it is possible to input control conditions during microwave heating and oven heating, and to command the start and stop of heating operation.

In FIG. 112, reference numeral 145 is a dedicated saucer used inside the heating chamber 113, which is made of highly heat-resistant plastic, porcelain, glass, or the like. The saucer 145 has an external dimension that allows it to be freely taken in and out from the opening 113A of the heating chamber 113.

Tableware, which is usually made of porcelain or a material having high heat resistance, is placed on the saucer 145, and the ingredients placed in the tableware are cooked by microwaves. However, if microwave heating is not used, the tableware may be made of metal. For example, a cooking utensil (heated object) N made of magnetic metal such as a frying pan (not shown) is placed on the top plate 15, and food (for example, hamburger) is induced and heated to some extent on the cooking utensil. After that, the cooking utensil may be moved into the heating chamber 113 and further heated by the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B to complete the cooking (this cooking method is one of the cooperative cooking modes). be).

In FIGS. 111 and 112, 152S1 and 152S2 are auxiliary intake ports composed of a large number of small holes, and are provided at the lower end of the lateral vertical wall 101R constituting the right side surface of the lower case 101. ..

The auxiliary intake port 152S1 is an auxiliary intake port of the intake port (second intake port) 152F for cooling the inverter circuit board 121 with the outside air.
Similarly, the auxiliary intake port 152S2 is an auxiliary intake port of the intake port (second intake port) 152B for cooling the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 with the outside air. The maximum diameter of these auxiliary intake ports 152S1 and 152S2 is about 3 mm in consideration of the effect of preventing microwave leakage.

The suction port of the third cooling fan (cooling fan A) 128 for cooling the inverter circuit board 121 of the microwave heating source 189 with the outside air is located in the vicinity of the auxiliary intake port 152S1 although not shown. Similarly, the suction port of the fourth cooling fan (cooling fan B) 129 for cooling the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 with the outside air is also arranged in the vicinity of the auxiliary intake port 152S2.

Next, FIG. 113 will be described. FIG. 113 shows a state in which the top plate 15 is removed. In FIG. 113, 30W is a display window, and is formed in the holder 50 in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the integrated display unit 30.

31LW and 31RW are display windows, respectively. The display window is formed at a position corresponding to the left side display unit 31L and the right side display unit 31R in the holder 50.

Reference numeral 56 denotes a choke coil, which is one of the important electrical components in the filter circuit board 54. Reference numeral 17C is a coil base (coil support frame), and two IH coils 17L and 17R are placed on the upper surface.

The IH coil 17L on the left side has a maximum external dimension (diameter) of 236 mm. This makes it possible to handle objects to be heated such as large pots and frying pans. Therefore, when the cooperative cooking mode is carried out, when a large metal container or cooking utensil (both without a lid) used in the heating chamber 113 is moved to the left heating unit 17HL as it is and heated, the left It can be efficiently heated by the heating unit 17HL.

Alternatively, when the cooperative cooking mode is implemented, after heating a large area or a large number of objects to be cooked in the heating chamber 113, the object to be cooked is transferred to a large metal container or cooking utensil, and the left heating unit 17HL Even when heating on the top, it can be efficiently heated by the left heating unit 17HL. For this reason, in the second embodiment, there is a reason for wanting to occupy the left heating unit 17HL for the cooperative cooking mode. The IH coil 17R on the right side is the same as in the first embodiment and has a diameter of 168 mm.

The coil base 17C is integrally formed of a highly heat-resistant plastic material. Further, the coil base 17C is entirely circular in accordance with the shapes of the IH coils 17L and 17R, but is provided with a plurality of arms 17CH extending radially from the central portion. In the second embodiment, the number of arms 17CH is eight. A gap that serves as a large ventilation space is formed between each arm 17CH.

Reference numeral 17F is a ferrite plate installed one by one between two adjacent arms 17CH. In the IH coil 17L on the left side, the TS3 is a contact-type temperature sensor such as a thermistor.
One temperature sensor TS3 is installed in the center of the IH coil 17L. The other two temperature sensors TS3 are installed at positions outside the center of the IH coil 17L, slightly apart from the center of the IH coil 17L.

The TS5 is a non-contact temperature sensor such as an infrared sensor. In the IH coil 17R on the right side, the TS4 is a contact type temperature sensor like a thermistor. One temperature sensor TS4 is installed in the center of the IH coil 17R. The other two temperature sensors TS4 are installed at positions outside the center of the IH coil 17R, slightly apart from the center of the IH coil 17R.

The TS6 is a non-contact temperature sensor such as an infrared sensor. The measurement data from each of these temperature sensors TS3 to TS6 is input to the temperature detection circuit (temperature detection processing unit) 93. These temperature sensors TS3 to TS6 may be referred to as "first temperature sensors".

In FIG. 113, reference numeral 66 denotes a magnetic shield ring made of metal such as aluminum, which is fixed to the coil base 17C so as to surround the coil base (coil support frame) 17C.
The 41R is a right-hand touch key board corresponding to the operation board 41 of the first embodiment. 41L is a left touch key board that also corresponds to the operation board 41. These two touch key substrates 41L and 41R are also supported on the upper surface of the holder 50.

Next, FIG. 114 will be described.
Reference numeral 57 denotes a transformer, which is one of the important electrical components in the power supply circuit board 55. In FIG. 114, the left end portion of the cover 70 is notched within the range of the width dimension W11. A temperature sensor TS5 supported by a coil base 17C on the IH coil 17L side is arranged in this notched portion. That is, the temperature sensor TS5 and the cover 70 are notched so as not to come into contact with each other.

Next, FIG. 115 will be described. Reference numeral 58 denotes a capacitor, which is one of the important electrical components in the inverter circuit board 80.
As is clear from FIG. 115, there are two aluminum heat sinks 82 on the left and right (two rows) and two on the front and back, so there are a total of four heat sinks 82. Two of the four heat sinks 82 are installed so as to face each other in close proximity to each other in the front and rear. Reference numeral 59 denotes a diode bridge circuit (diode module) attached to one heat sink 82. In the diode bridge circuit (diode module) 59, the heat generated during operation is dissipated by the heat sink 82, and the heat sink 82 does not become overheated.

As is clear from FIG. 115, the outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and the heat sink 82 are separated by a distance LD of about 50 to 100 mm.
FIG. 116 shows the flow of cooling air in the configuration shown in FIG. 115. The cooling air is indicated by a thick arrow.

Next, FIG. 117 is a bottom view (bottom surface) view of the upper unit 100. D5 is the maximum width dimension of the upper unit 100 in the front-rear direction, which is 432 mm. W4 is the maximum width dimension of the upper unit 100 in the left-right direction, which is 544 mm.

The vertical and horizontal dimensions (maximum vertical and horizontal dimensions inside) of the upper opening of the lower case 101 are such that the upper case 16 is inward in consideration of the maximum width dimension D5 in the front-rear direction and the maximum width dimension W4 in the left-right direction of the upper case 16 described above. It is set to fit.

Structurally, since it is configured as described above, when induction heating is performed in the upper unit 100, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling are performed as shown by the thick arrows in FIG. 116. The inverter circuit board 80, the input operation unit 40, the power supply circuit board 55, and the filter circuit board 54 are each cooled by the cooling air RF1, RF2, RF3, and RF4 blown out from the fan 61.

Next, FIG. 118 will be described.
FIG. 118 is a block diagram illustrating the overall control function of the cooking device 1. In FIG. 118, the arrow indicated by the broken line indicates a command signal for control.
In the cooking device 1 shown in the second embodiment, there are a total of six control devices mainly composed of a microcomputer. This point is significantly different from the first embodiment.

Among the above-mentioned six control devices, the integrated control device MC controls the entire heating cooker 1. It is the IH control unit 90 that controls the induction cooking in response to the command from the integrated control device MC. The control device 105 controls both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. This control device 105 is an assembly of the heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130 described in the first embodiment.

The two control devices 90 and 105 described above perform prescribed control in accordance with a command from the integrated control device MC, and return the processing result to the integrated control device MC, so that they may be called a slave (SLAVE) microcomputer. In this case, the integrated control device MC is called a master microcomputer.

The remaining three of the above-mentioned six control devices will be described below.
The first is a right-hand input control device 23 that processes the input of the right-hand touch key group arranged in the right-hand operation unit 40R and the display of the display unit 31R in the input operation unit 40. The right-hand input control device 23 further processes the input of the touch key group of the central operation unit 40M.

The second is a left-side input control device 24, which is arranged in the left operation unit 40L and processes the input of the left-side touch key group and the display of the display unit 31L.
The third is the power switch control device 28.
The power switch control device 28 detects the operation of the operation button (operation unit) 98 of the main power switch 97 arranged in the input operation unit 40, and determines ON / OFF of the power supply.

In FIG. 118, 106A is a plug connected to a commercial (alternating current) power supply 99. The electric power having a voltage of 200 V and a frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz is guided to the filter circuit board 54 via the power cord 106. The filter circuit board 54 is built in the upper unit 100.

The filter circuit board 54 has a main relay 107 for turning on and off the main power supply of the cooking cooker 1 and a sub-relay (not shown). In FIG. 118, only the main relay is schematically shown.

The main relay 107 receives a predetermined relay control signal from the integrated control device MC that controls the entire cooking cooker 1 and executes an opening / closing operation. As will be described later, the sub-relay receives a relay control signal from the power switch control device 28 and executes an opening / closing operation. The power switch control device 28 has a function of detecting the operation of the operation button 98 of the main power switch 97 and determining ON / OFF of the power supply. The main power switch 97 is composed of the main relay 107 and the sub relay.

The integrated control device MC constantly acquires operation information from the IH control unit 90, the control device 105, the right side input control device 23, the left side input control device 24, and the power switch control device 28, and integrates and processes them. To determine and control.

The integrated control device MC controls the display operation of the central operation unit 40M and the integrated display unit 30, the voice synthesizer 95, and the wireless communication unit 49. The integrated control device MC, the right side input control device 23, and the power switch control device 28 are attached to the central operation board 32 constituting the input operation unit 40.

The right operation board 32R (not shown) and the left operation board 32L (not shown) are mounted on the lower surface side of the holder 50. Therefore, it does not appear in FIGS. 113 to 116.
The central operation board 32 is composed of a right side operation board 32R and a left side operation board 32L, and an integrated control device MC, a right side input control device 23, and a right side display unit 31R are mounted on the right side operation board 32R. The two operation boards 32L and 32L are made of a plastic material having excellent electrical insulation. The left side input control device 24 and the left side display unit 31L are mounted on the left side operation board 32L (see FIG. 118).

Above the central operation board 32 and in front of the holder 50, a pair of left and right touch key boards (operation boards) 41L and 41R on which various touch-type input keys are mounted are installed.

Reference numeral 55 denotes a power supply circuit board to which electric power of a commercial power source is supplied from the filter circuit 54. As shown in FIG. 118, the power supply circuit A34 and the rectifying circuit 35 to which electric power is applied via the rectifying circuit 33 It includes a power supply circuit B36, to which electric power is applied via the power supply circuit B36. The two power supply circuits A34 and the power supply circuit B36 convert the electric power having a voltage of 200V into a plurality of low voltage direct currents such as 24V, 18V, 6V, 5V and the like. That is, a plurality of DC power supplies having different voltages are generated.

The 5V electric power is supplied as a power source for the integrated control device MC, the IH control unit 90, the control device 105, the right side input control device 23, the left side input control device 24, and the power switch control device 28.
Further, the 6V electric power is used as a power source (including a backlight power source) for the integrated display unit 30, the right display unit 31R, and the left display unit 31R.

The power supply circuit board 55 is installed in the upper unit 100, and as described above, the electric power generated by the power supply circuit A34 and the power supply circuit B36 can be used as a power source for control in the upper unit 100 and various display units. in use.

Reference numeral 80 denotes an inverter circuit board of the induction heating source 9 installed inside the upper unit 100.
The inverter circuit board 80 includes an inverter circuit 81R on the right side having a DC power supply unit 75R and an inverter circuit 81L on the left side having another DC power supply unit 75L.

From the filter circuit 54, AC power having a voltage of 200 V is applied to the inverter circuit board 80. Reference numeral 90 denotes an IH control unit that controls overall induction heating, and is mainly composed of a microcomputer.

The IH control unit 90 transmits a drive signal to the drive circuits 37L and 37R that drive the IGBTs 79a and 79b in the inverter circuits 81L and 81R. The two drive circuits 37L and 37R operate with the power of 18V supplied from the power supply circuit A34 and the power supply circuit B36 to control the IGBTs 79a and 79. As a result, the drive frequencies of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R are controlled.

For example, the drive circuit A37R detects the conduction time of the power switching element 83 (semiconductor switching element) (IGBT79a, 79b) and switches the conduction time to lower the drive frequency of the inverter circuit 81R and reduce the thermal power. Or, conversely, control is performed to increase the driving frequency and increase the thermal power. These drive frequency commands are issued by the IH control unit 90.

77a is an input current detection unit installed on the commercial power supply side of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R, and 77b is an output current detection unit that detects the power on the output side of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R.
The detected values of the input current detection unit 77a and the output current detector 77b are input to the IH control unit 90.

In the initial stage of induction cooking, the IH control unit 90 determines the material of the object to be heated.
For example, when the drive frequency is changed from one drive frequency to another, the change in the input current value is observed to determine whether the material of the object to be heated such as a pot is a magnetic metal, non-magnetic stainless steel, aluminum, or the like. Then, the drive frequencies of the switching elements (IGBT) 79a and 79b are automatically adjusted to appropriate values. When it is determined that the material of the object to be heated is non-magnetic stainless steel, it is driven at a drive frequency (for example, 31 kHz) higher than the drive frequency (for example, 23 kHz) when it is determined to be iron.

TS5 and TS6 are non-contact temperature sensors installed in the gaps of the IH coils 17L and 17R, and TS3 and TS4 are contact temperature sensors installed in the center of the IH coils 17L and 17R. Further, TS8 and TS9 are contact type temperature sensors installed on the heat sink 82 of the inverter circuit board 80. The temperature detection data of each of these temperature sensors is input to the integrated control device MC.

In the first embodiment, the temperature detection circuit 93 is provided, but in the second embodiment, the temperature detection circuit 93 in such a hardware form is not provided. Processing such as temperature detection, temperature comparison, and presence / absence of abnormality is executed by software (temperature detection processing unit) in the integrated control device MC.

131 is a door open / close detection mechanism. The door open / close detection mechanism 131 includes one switch that is opened / closed according to the opening / closing operation of the door 114, and a monitor switch that detects that the switch is correctly opened / closed. This point is the same as that described in the first embodiment.

The 120P is a power supply circuit unit of the microwave heating device 120, and generates AC power as a low voltage (for example, 24V and 5V) power source from the power of the commercial voltage (200V) supplied from the filter circuit 54.

The electric power having a voltage of 5 V is supplied as a power source for the control device 105, and the electric power of 24 V is supplied to the drive circuits 177 of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129, respectively. Although not shown in FIG. 118, 200 V of electric power is supplied to the drive power source of the antenna drive motor 126.

The upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B that heat the heating chamber 113 are controlled to be energized by opening and closing the relays 178A and 178B by the control device 105. The relays 178A and 178B may use semiconductor switching elements capable of finely controlling the energization rate, but in the second embodiment, the relays are adopted because they are only ON-OFF controlled. The upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B are operated by applying a voltage of 200 V, which is the same as that of a commercial power source.

The 132M is a door opening detection switch that constitutes a part of the door opening / closing detection mechanism 131. The switch itself is installed inside the door open / close detection mechanism 131, but in FIG. 118, it is drawn at a different position to indicate that an open / close signal is input to the control device 105.

160 is an infrared sensor (third temperature sensor) that measures the temperature of the object to be cooked in the heating chamber 113, and TS1 is a contact sensor that measures the temperature of the magnetron 122 of the microwave heating device 120. .. All the temperature detection data of these sensors 160 and TS1 are input to the control device 105.

Reference numeral 121 denotes an inverter circuit that supplies high-frequency power to the magnetron 122, and oscillation is controlled by a relay 182 inserted in the power supply side circuit. The relay 182 is opened and closed by the control device 105.

60P and 61P are drive circuits for driving the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61, respectively. The drive circuits 60P and 61P operate in response to a command from the IH control unit 90.

Although FIG. 118 does not show a temperature sensor that monitors the temperature of the integrated display unit 30 and the input operation unit 40, in reality, such a temperature sensor is installed and is always (at regular time intervals) during cooking. The integrated control device MC acquires the temperature measurement data and monitors it so that it does not become an abnormal temperature.

Since the cooking device 1 of the second embodiment is configured as described above, when starting cooking, the operation key 98 of the input operation unit 40 is pressed in order to first turn on the main power switch 97. For example, if it is held down for several seconds, the power switch control device 28 detects this operation and closes the main relay 107 in the filter circuit board 54.

Therefore, the power of the commercial power supply is supplied from the filter circuit board 54 to the power supply circuit board 55. Then, a power supply having a predetermined voltage is generated by the power supply circuit A34 and the power supply circuit B36 of the power supply circuit board 55, and is applied to the integrated control device MC.

When the integrated control device MC is started, it first performs an initial self-diagnosis before the start of the heating operation to confirm that no abnormality has occurred. In addition, the integrated display unit 30 is activated to display the initial information.

In this state, when the user opens the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 in order to use the microwave heating device 120, the door open / close detection mechanism 131 transmits a signal indicating the opening of the door 114 to the control device 105. Therefore, the control device 105 transmits a signal indicating the opening of the door 114 to the integrated control device MC. The integrated control device MC presumes that the user performs microwave heating cooking, displays necessary information for starting microwave heating on the integrated display unit 30, and prompts an input for starting heating.

When the user puts the food to be cooked into the heating chamber 113 and closes the door 114, the door open / close detection mechanism 131 again transmits a detection signal indicating that the door 114 is closed to the integrated control device MC via the control device 105. do. Therefore, when a command to start heating is issued from the input operation unit 40 in this state, the right input control device 23 detects the presence or absence of touch input of the input key for microwave heating. Therefore, a signal indicating a heating start command is transmitted from the right input control device 23 to the integrated control device MC.

Also in the second embodiment, in the combined cooking mode, the microwave heating is performed first, the food is heated to some extent, and then the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B are used to heat the food, and vice versa. , And there are three types of patterns in which microwave heating and heater heating are performed at the same time.

In addition, it is possible to execute independent heating menus for microwave heating and oven heating for heating with the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B.
Further, a cooperative cooking mode can be executed as described later.

Generally, it is common practice to put the food to be cooked in a heat-resistant plastic container or tableware and perform microwave heating. However, when the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B are then heated in this state, the above There is a risk that the container, tableware, etc. will be burnt out due to high heat.

In the combined cooking mode, the integrated display unit 30 displays a caution message warning that a plastic container is placed inside the heating chamber 113 and not heated. That is, when executing the control menu called "range grill", this caution display statement is a kind of "standby common information" 30N described in the first embodiment.

In the "warm" (automatic range) control menu, the non-contact (infrared) temperature measuring unit 158 detects the temperature of the object to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 and the wall temperature of the heating chamber 113, and when the target temperature is reached. Automatically stops the oscillation of microwaves. Therefore, when the heat from the previous cooking remains and the temperature is high from the beginning, the integrated control device MC prohibits the automatic microwave heating.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, the user is notified to select the control menu (single cooking) of "microwave oven manual". Since the "microwave oven manual" is performed by setting the microwave heating time, cooking can be performed without any problem even if the temperature of the object to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 or the wall surface temperature of the heating chamber 113 is high. The display text displayed on the integrated display unit 30 is also one of the “standby common information” 30N described in the first embodiment.

When a heating start command is issued from the user through the input operation unit 40, the integrated control device MC sends a drive command to the control device 105 that controls the microwave heating operation, closes the relay 182, and drives the inverter circuit 121A. Start microwave heating. At the same time, an operation command signal is issued to the drive circuits 177A and 177B of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 to start the operation of the two cooling fans 128 and 129. Further, although not shown in FIG. 92, the antenna driving motor 126 is driven to rotate the antenna 125. As a result, microwaves are introduced into the heating chamber 113 to cook the food.

As is clear from the above description, during the period of microwave cooking, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 of the upper unit 100 are not operated at all unless they are "non-normal". .. Therefore, the power consumption of the entire cooking device 1 can be suppressed to a low level.

As is clear from the above description, in the cooking device 1 of the second embodiment, the upper unit 100 includes an IH control unit 90 for controlling the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, and an oven. A control device 105 that controls both of the heating sources 188 and an integrated control device MC (master microcomputer) MC that integrally controls these two control devices (slave microcomputers) 90 and 105 are provided.
The upper unit 100 includes a filter circuit board 54 that receives power from the commercial power supply 99, and power supply circuits (34, 36) that convert the power from the filter circuit board 54 into a specified power supply voltage.
The control device 105, the control device 90, and the integrated control device MC are supplied with low voltage power generated by the power supply circuits 34 and 36 as a power source.
The inverter circuit 81 of the induction heating source 17, the microwave generation source 122 of the microwave heating device 120, the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B of the oven heating device 140 are the filter circuit 54 and the power supply circuit 34. The configuration is such that the electric power (200V power supply) distributed from the 36 is applied.

With this configuration, the overall power supply configuration of the cooking cooker 1 is simplified, and unnecessary noise propagation and the like can be suppressed, and reliable operation can be expected.

Further, according to this configuration, one heating cooker can perform three types of heating, induction heating, microwave heating and oven heating, and is a highly convenient cooking cooker capable of supporting a wide range of cooking.

FIG. 119 is an enlarged plan view showing the input operation unit 40 and the integrated display unit 30 of the cooking cooker 1. In the second embodiment, the central operation unit 40M includes various input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43M2, 43MS and 43MT in the cooperative cooking mode, respectively. Each of these input keys is a type of input key that can be input by utilizing the change in capacitance when the user lightly touches it with a finger or the like. The input key corresponding to the input key 43M3 described in the first embodiment is not provided.

In the second embodiment, the input operation unit 40 includes four, a right operation unit 40R, a central operation unit 40M, a left operation unit 40L, and the front operation unit 146. Although not shown, the operation key (touch input type) 98 of the main power switch 97 is located on the upper surface of the main body 110 as in the central operation unit 40M, as in the first embodiment, and the top plate 15 It is located on the front side of the top plate 15 and near the right end of the top plate 15.

The right operation unit 40R is an individual operation unit because it performs an input operation only for the induction heating source. Similarly, the left operation unit 40 is also an individual operation unit.
On the other hand, since a part of the central operation unit 40M is commonly used when the "cooperative cooking mode" using either the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188 is performed, the cooperative operation is performed. Part 40MC.

In the first embodiment, the central operation unit 40M performed the input operation of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, but in the second embodiment, the front operation unit 146 possesses the function. doing.

In FIG. 119, the 43MS is a touch-type input key that can command the start of the heating operation in the cooperative cooking mode in the cooperative cooking mode using the heating chamber 113. This input type key 43MS is slightly different from the function of the input type key 43MS of the first embodiment, and has two functions of starting and stopping cooking.

When the user presses the input key 43MS once, a command signal for starting the heating operation is transmitted to the integrated control device MC, and when the user presses the key 43MS once more, a command signal for stopping the heating operation is transmitted. Different signals are transmitted according to the number of operations in this order. This point is different from the input key 43MS of the first embodiment.

The screen configuration of the integrated display unit 30 is also slightly different from that of the first embodiment, and is composed of two areas, a first area (left side area) 30L and a second area (center area) 30M.

The reason for limiting to the two areas 30L and 30M in this way is that the integrated display unit 30 displays the identification information 330 of the cooperative cooking mode in the first area 30L, and the additional information 331 is displayed in the second area 30M. This is because the cooking process information (cooking process information unit) 332 is displayed.

The 43MC is not an input key that selects to use the combined cooking mode using the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189. The input key 43MC is an input key for selecting only the cooperative cooking mode. Since the input key 43MC itself illuminates, the individual light emitting unit 27M2 provided in the first embodiment is omitted in the second embodiment.

Subsequently, FIG. 119 will be described.
FIG. 119 is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 52 of the first embodiment.
An input key 43M1 is arranged at the left end of the cooperative operation unit 40MC dedicated to the cooperative cooking mode provided in the central operation unit 40M.
The input key 43M1 is touched when selecting the cooperative cooking mode. A push button type switch may be used instead of the touch type key.

The input key 43M1 appears to be illuminated and lit by a light source (not shown) such as a light emitting diode installed below during the transition to the cooperative cooking mode.

When the cooperative cooking mode is performed, the pair of input keys 43M1 selects the target identification information 330, in other words, the object to be cooked, from among the plurality of identification information 330 displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30. The input key to select. The touch key part is a pair on the left and right.
Each time the input key 43M1 on the left side is pressed, the display contents can be switched in a fixed order. Further, each time the input key 43M1 on the right side is pressed, the display screen can be switched in the reverse order.

Next, FIG. 120 will be described.
FIG. 120 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the cooperative cooking mode and the single cooking mode using an induction heating source. It is a figure which shows that the operation of the heating source used is limited in the case of cooperative cooking.
The cooperative cooking mode shown in FIG. 120 is the “second cooperative cooking mode” described in FIG. 54 of the first embodiment.

In the "second cooperative cooking mode" of this example, the microwave heating source 189 (second heating means 189) is operated first, and after the heating operation is completed, the induction heating source 9 is operated as the first heating means. Let me. The oven heating source 188 may be operated as the third heating means at the same time as the second heating means.

As shown in FIG. 120, the second cooperative cooking mode is composed of four stages.
P1 is the first stage (preparation period), which is a period from the operation of the input key 43MC to the start of cooking by the input key 43MS in order to execute the cooperative cooking mode.

P2 is a cooking period (cooking step 1) by the second heating means (microwave heating source 189).
Since P3 switches from cooking by the second heating means to cooking by the first heating means (in this case, the induction heating source 9), the operation of the microwave heating means 189 is temporarily stopped, and the cooking of the induction heating means 9 is performed. Is the rest period until is started.
P4 is a cooking period (cooking step 2) by the induction heating source 9.

As is clear from FIG. 120, cooking is performed by the input key 43MS, not at the stage of selecting the cooperative cooking mode, that is, at the time when the identification information 330 indicating the name of the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is displayed on the integrated display unit 30. From the time when the start is decided, the left operation unit 40L of the left heating source 17HL becomes unusable. Further, the input operation of the front operation unit 146 is also restricted.

Specifically, the integrated control device MC performs the following function restriction processing.
(1) Among the input signals from the front operation unit 147, the signal for selecting the control menu such as "warm" is invalidated. As a result, even in the cooking period (cooking step 1), the front operation unit 146 can be used, but only two inputs, "stop" and "start heating", can be made. Then, using the heating chamber 113, cooking that is substantially unrelated to the cooperative cooking mode cannot be performed by the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. The heating power (power consumption) during heating in the oven may be increased or decreased so that it can be performed by using an input key (not shown) on the front operation unit 146.
(2) Performs processing that does not recognize the input signal from the left operation unit 40L as a valid signal. As a result, when the cooking period (cooking step 1) is entered, the left operation unit 40L cannot be used. Then, induction cooking cannot be performed in the left heating unit 17HL. It should be noted that it can be used in the right heating unit 17HR.

In this way, when the cooking period (cooking step 1) is entered, the integrated control device MC disables the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 freely.

Therefore, the left heating unit 17HL is in a state of being "occupied" by selecting the cooperative cooking mode. Further, when viewed from the whole of the induction heating source 9, the use of only a part (left side) of the two heating portions is "restricted".

Further, the function of the front operation unit 147 is "restricted" by selecting the cooperative cooking mode. Therefore, when the "cooking step 1" of the cooperative cooking mode is started, the front operation unit 146 cannot be used to execute either the single cooking mode or the combined cooking mode by the individual heating sources. Become.

As shown in FIG. 120, when the cooking period (cooking step 1) is completed, the restricted state is released, so that the front operation unit 147 can be operated to execute the independent cooking mode. However, after the cooking period (cooking step 1) is over, it is restricted to operate the front operation unit 146 as it is to start the independent cooking mode. The reason is that the object to be cooked heated by the cooperative cooking mode exists in the heating chamber 113.

Therefore, only when the integrated control device MC detects that the door 114 has been opened after the cooking period (cooking step 1) is completed, the integrated control device MC can perform microwave heating from the front operation unit 147. In response to the command to start cooking in the oven, cooking is started.

Even when the integrated control device MC detects that the door 114 has been opened after the cooking period (cooking step 1) is completed, the temperature inside the heating chamber 113 is higher than the reference value. There is a concern that the integrated control device MC and the non-contact (infrared) temperature measuring unit 158 mistakenly recognize an abnormally high temperature as cooking completed even before the single cooking mode is executed.
For this reason, even after the cooking period (cooking step 1) is over, the control menu of "microwave oven automatic" cannot be immediately implemented in the microwave heating. Range manual control menus can be implemented. Therefore, another cooking (for example, thawing and warming of "frozen rice") can be performed in the heating chamber 113 in parallel with the execution of the cooking step 2.

Next, FIG. 121 will be described.
FIG. 121 shows the display contents of the cooperative operation unit 40MC dedicated to the cooperative cooking provided in the central operation unit 40M and the integrated display unit 30.
The integrated display unit 30 shows three types of display screens 11A to 11C.

The cooperative cooking mode implemented in FIG. 121 corresponds to both the “first cooperative cooking mode” and the “second cooperative cooking mode” described in FIG. 54 of the first embodiment.
Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the case of the "first cooperative cooking mode" will be described. That is, it is a case where the first cooking step is performed by the induction heating source 9.

When the input key 43M1 of the cooperative operation unit 40MC is pressed, the right side input control device 23 that processes the input of the touch key group of the central operation unit 40M transmits the input result to the integrated control unit MC.
The integrated control device MC grasps the usage state of the left heating unit 17HL and the right heating unit 17HR from the information of the IH control unit 90, and sets “permission condition 1” and “permission condition” 2 as described in the first embodiment. First determine if it meets.

When neither the left heating unit 17HL nor the right heating unit 17HR is used, it is confirmed by the integrated control device MC that the above-mentioned "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" are satisfied.
Then, the integrated control device MC displays the first specific screen 30SP on the integrated display unit 30SP.

The display screen 11C of FIG. 121 is the screen that is first displayed through the above process.
That is, the name "hamburger" is displayed in the first area 30L as the identification information 330.
At the time when the identification information 330 of the cooperative cooking mode is displayed on the first specific screen 30SP integrated display unit 30, that is, at the first stage when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed, the right heating unit selection mark 334R and the left heating unit are displayed. Both selection marks 334L are displayed. This is because both the left heating unit 17HL and the right heating unit 17HR can be used as described above.

As shown in FIG. 121, in the default setting, the left heating unit 17HL is prioritized. This is because the left heating portion 17HL uses the IH coil 17 having a larger diameter than the right heating portion 17HL. That is, it is possible to deal with the object N to be heated at the bottom of the pot, which is larger than the right heating portion 17HR.

For this reason, the left heating unit selection mark 334L displayed in white letters as "left" is selected.
If it is okay to shift to the cooperative cooking mode in the state of the left heating unit 17HL, the input key 43MS surrounded by a dotted circle may be pressed so as to prompt the input operation. The dotted circle indicates that the individual light emitting unit 27M6 is blinking.

As shown in FIG. 121, the first specific screen 30SP provides the user with additional information 331 regarding starting the cooperative cooking of the object to be cooked (for example, hamburger steak). In the example of FIG. 121, it is recommended to select either the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL.

When the user wants to determine the cooperative cooking mode by using the right heating unit 17HR instead of the left heating unit 17HL, he / she may touch the input key 43M2 corresponding to the second area 30M. Specifically, when the input key 43M2 on the right side of the two left and right key operation units is touched, the first specific screen 30SP is switched from the display screen 11C to 11B.

On the display screen 11B, the left heating unit selection mark 334L disappears, and only the right heating unit selection mark 334R is displayed, for example, in white characters such as "right". Even at this point, since the input key 43MS is waiting for input from the user, the individual light emitting unit 27M6 is blinking.

As the additional information 331, for example, "determine with the start button" is displayed. This means that the cooperative cooking mode is determined by the input key 43MS. That is, the heating source to be used first can be determined in the right heating unit 17HR.

When the user wants to determine the cooperative cooking mode using the left heating unit 17HL instead of the right heating unit 17HR, he / she may touch the input key 43M2 corresponding to the second area 30M. Specifically, when the right input key 43M2 is touched among the two left and right input keys 43M2, the first specific screen 30SP is switched from the display screen 11B to 11A.

On the display screen 11A, the right heating unit selection mark 334R disappears, and only the left heating unit selection mark 334L is displayed, for example, in white characters such as "left". Even at this point, since the input key 43MS is waiting for input from the user, the individual light emitting unit 27M6 is blinking. As the additional information 331, for example, "determine with the start button" is displayed.

Summary of Embodiment 2.
As is clear from the above description, in the first embodiment, the cooking cooker according to the first disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
A heating chamber 113 whose opening is closed by a door 114 so as to be openable and closable.
A microwave heating source 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113,
An oven heating source 188 that heats the heating chamber 113,
An induction heating source 9 that heats the object to be heated N placed on the top plate,
Notification unit AN (integrated display unit 30, voice synthesizer 95, etc.) that notifies information about the cooking process, and
Input operation unit 40 and
It has an integrated control device MC that controls the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, the induction heating source 9, and the notification unit AN.
The input operation unit 40 includes a central operation unit 40M, a right operation unit 40R and a left operation unit 40L arranged on the upper surface of the main body 110, and a front operation unit 146 arranged on the front side of the main body.
The integrated control device MC has a cooperative cooking mode in which the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source 9 are linked.
The cooperative cooking mode includes a cooking step 1 by the induction heating source 9 and a cooking step 2 using at least one of the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188.
The integrated control device automatically advances the cooking process 1, ends the cooking process 1 by a command from the user, and after the end, starts the cooking process 2 in response to the user's start command. The cooking process 2 is automatically advanced,
The integrated control device has a function of detecting the progress of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2, and in the middle of the cooking step 1, the first reference information FA1 of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step The second reference information FA2 regarding No. 2 has disclosed a cooking cooker 1 characterized in that at least one of the FA2s is automatically notified by the notification unit.

Because of this configuration, three types of heating sources such as an induction heating source 9 and a microwave heating source 189 can be used, and a wide range of cooking can be supported by the cooperative cooking mode, which is highly convenient cooking. Can provide vessels.

Further, it has a function of detecting the progress of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2 by detecting, for example, the elapsed time or the rising temperature (TN1, TN2, etc.), and is in the middle of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2. Since the reference information is automatically notified to the user at the stage, even if the types of heating sources are increasing, the user is notified of the progress of cooking to dispel the anxiety, and the heating operation is temporarily performed for confirmation on the way. By stopping, it is possible to avoid failures such as impairing the execution of efficient cooperative cooking. This can be expected to further improve the user's sense of security and usability.

Further, in the second embodiment, the same effect as that described in the first embodiment can be obtained with respect to the same configuration as that of the first embodiment.

Further, in the second embodiment, the following cooking cooker 1 is disclosed.
That is,
An induction heating source 9 that requires a preheating step for the object to be heated N that houses the object to be cooked,
A microwave heating source 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber,
Has a notification unit and
It has a cooperative cooking mode in which the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 are switched and operated by a user's operation.
When the cooperative cooking mode is set, the cooking step 1 in which the microwave from the microwave heating source 189 heats the object to be cooked housed in the heating chamber 113, and
After the cooking step 1 is completed, the cooking step 2 in which the object to be cooked is induced and heated by the induction heating source 9 on the object to be heated N placed on the top plate 15 can be reserved. And
When the cooking is set by the cooperative cooking mode, the notification unit notifies the procedure for starting the preheating step by the induction heating source 9 before the start of the cooking step 1. ,
The cooker was disclosed.

With this configuration, it is possible to provide a highly convenient cooking cooker capable of supporting a wide range of cooking by the cooperative cooking mode in which the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used and the preheating operation can be performed. ..

Further, since the information that the preheating process can be started is automatically notified to the user at the stage before the start of the cooking process 1, even if the types of heating sources are increasing, the user's anxiety can be dispelled or the user can use it. It is possible to avoid getting lost or making a mistake in the operation. This can be expected to further improve the user's sense of security and usability.

Embodiment 3.
FIG. 122 is a list showing the correspondence between the cooling fan of the cooking device 1 and the type of cooking for disclosing the third embodiment. FIG. 123 is a time chart 1 showing the timing of starting and ending the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the cooking cooker of FIG. 122. FIG. 124 is a time chart 2 showing the timing of starting and ending the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the cooking cooker of FIG. 122. FIG. 125 is a time chart 3 showing the timing of starting and ending the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the cooking cooker of FIG. 122. FIG. 126 is a time chart 4 showing the timing of starting and ending the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the cooking cooker of FIG. 122. FIG. 127 is a time chart 5 showing the timing of starting and ending the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans in the cooking cooker of FIG. 122. The same or corresponding parts as those described in the first and second embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals.

In the cooking cooker 1 shown in FIG. 122, the start of operation of the first to fourth cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 is basically the same timing as the start of cooking.

As shown in FIG. 122, the four cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 are operated in the following pattern.
Induction heating:
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated.
The third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are not operated.
Microwave cooking:
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated.
The third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are operated.
Oven cooking:
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated.
The third cooling fan 128 is operated.
The fourth cooling fan 129 is not operated.

As described above, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated in any of the three cooking modes of induction cooking, microwave cooking, and oven cooking.

In the case of microwave cooking, both the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated, which is different from the first embodiment.
Even in the case of microwave cooking, the purpose of operating the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 is to prevent overheating of the upper unit 100.

The upper unit 100 includes a filter circuit board 54 and a power supply circuit board 55, and electronic components (for example, a transformer 57) mounted on these circuit boards are subjected to either microwave heating or oven heating. Even in the case, power is supplied and the temperature rises.
Therefore, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated.

In the case of oven cooking, the third cooling fan 128 is operated. This is the same as the first embodiment.
However, the fourth cooling fan 129 does not operate. This point is different from the first embodiment. In the case of oven cooking, the magnetron 122, which is the cooling target of the fourth cooling fan 129, is not driven, so that the heat radiating portion 122H does not become hot.

The operation of the four cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 is started when each heating source starts the heating operation. If the induction heating source 9 starts the preheating operation, the operation is started in synchronization with the start of the preheating operation.

The timing of the end of operation of the four cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 is different in some parts as described below because the cooling target and the cooling air passage of each cooling fan are different.

Next, FIGS. 123 to 127 will be described.
The solid arrows in FIGS. 123 to 127 indicate the period from the start to the end of the operation of each of the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129.
The dashed arrow following the solid line indicates the "additional operating time for heat dissipation" described below. The cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 are not actually stopped at the end of the solid line arrow, and the operation is continued for the additional operation time as it is.

In the third embodiment, the time from the start to the end of the operation of each of the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 is defined as follows.
First cooling fan 60: The operation is started at the timing when the heating operation by each heating source is started.
At the end of the operation, in the case of induction cooking, the heat dissipation operation is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on the time when the heating operation is completed. In this case, the "heat dissipation time Th1" is determined in consideration of the time during which the high heat portion such as the top plate 15 can be cooled during the induction cooking.
During induction cooking, the "heat dissipation operation time Th1" depends on the length of the heating operation time and the size of the numerical value determined by the "product" of the maximum thermal power (power consumption of the inverter circuit) used. Any one of three stages of 3, 5, 5 and 10 minutes is selected. This is done by the IH control unit 90.
On the other hand, during microwave cooking and oven cooking, heat dissipation operation is performed from the time when the heating operations are completed.

Second cooling fan 61: “Time of heat dissipation operation Th2” is determined in synchronization with the operation of the first cooling fan 60. This is performed by an operation start command and an operation end command from the IH control unit 90. The operation starts at the same timing as the first cooling fan 60.

Fourth cooling fan 129:
(1) In the case of microwave heating cooking: “Heat dissipation operation” is performed for 3 minutes based on the time when the microwave heating operation is completed. That is, this "time of heat dissipation operation Tm2" is fixed at 3 minutes. This operation control is performed by the microwave heating control unit 130.
(2) In the case of oven cooking: Since the microwave oscillating unit 122 is not driven, the heat radiating unit 122H does not become hot either. Therefore, it is not driven at all.

Third cooling fan 128:
(1) In the case of microwave cooking: The "heat dissipation operation time Tm1" is the same as that of the fourth cooling fan 129. Further, the start and end of the operation are controlled by the microwave heating control unit 130 as in the case of the fourth cooling fan 129.
(2) In the case of oven heating: The temperature of the heating chamber 113 is measured repeatedly by at least one of the temperature sensor TS2 and the temperature sensor 160 at regular intervals, but the outside temperature of the wall surface of the heating chamber 113. May be added, such as a thermistor type temperature sensor that measures by contact.
All temperature measurement data is transmitted to the heating chamber control unit 159. Finally, the temperature measurement data is transmitted to the microwave heating control unit 130, and the fourth cooling fan 129 continues to operate until an operation end command is issued to the fourth cooling fan 129. That is, the "time of heat dissipation operation Tm2" changes from time to time.

Next, each cooking mode will be described.
FIG. 123 shows a case where the cooking step 1 is performed by the induction heating source 9 and the cooking step 2 is performed by the microwave heating source 189 in the cooperative cooking.
The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are started to operate at the same time, finish the microwave heating operation, and are operated until after the time when the notification 6 is performed by the notification unit AN. The "heat dissipation operation time Th1" and "Th2" are counted at least when the microwave heating is completed.

As can be seen from FIG. 123, in the case of microwave cooking, the “heat dissipation operation time Tm2” of the fourth cooling fan 129 may be longer than the “radiation operation time Tm1” of the third cooling fan 128. This is because the fourth cooling fan 129 is a fan that directly supplies cooling air to the inside of the heating chamber 113 as described in the first embodiment (FIG. 32). That is, when microwave cooking is performed once, hot air remains in the heating chamber 113, and it takes time to cool it to a normal temperature.

In FIG. 123, the notification 1 notifies that the induction cooking has been started. Alternatively, it notifies that the preheating operation has started.
The notification FA1 is notification of the first reference information (reference information 1) described in the first embodiment (FIG. 59). For example, the timing of notification is determined from the measurement results of the "elapsed time TN1" that 5 minutes have passed since the start of heating and the "rise temperature TN1" that measures the magnitude of the temperature rise. The content of the notification FA1 also includes urging the user to turn over the food to be cooked. Since the IH control unit 90 does not determine that the food to be cooked is abnormal when the food to be cooked is turned inside out in the food to be heated N (for example, a metal pan), the induction heating operation continues.

The notification 3 notifies that the induction heating has been completed (or that the cooking step 1 has been completed).
The “transition period” (heating rest period) TR shown in FIG. 123 is the same as that described in the first embodiment.
After performing the induction cooking on the top plate 15, it is necessary to move the object to be cooked into the heating chamber 113 in order to shift to microwave heating.

The "transition period" TR provides time for such movements. The maximum time of this transition period is predetermined by the integrated controller MC.

The notification 4 notifies that the microwave heating cooking has been started because the user has commanded by the central operation unit 40M.
Almost at the same time as this notification 4, the operation of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 is started.

The notification FA2 is notification of the second reference information (reference information 2) described in the first embodiment (FIG. 59). For example, the timing of notification is determined from the measurement results of the "elapsed time TN2" that 3 minutes have passed since the start of microwave heating and the "rise temperature TN2" that measures the magnitude of the temperature rise.

The notification 6 notifies that the microwave heating has been completed (or that the cooking step 2 has been completed).

Next, FIG. 124 will be described.
FIG. 124 shows a case where the cooking step 1 is performed by the microwave heating source 189 and the cooking step 2 is performed by the induction heating source 9 in the cooperative cooking.
The operation of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 is started at the same time as the operation of the microwave heating source 189 is started.

The operation of the fourth cooling fan 129 is started at the same time as the operation of the microwave heating source 189 is started.
The operation of the fourth cooling fan 129 ends after the elapse of the "heat dissipation operation time Tm2" from the end of the operation of the microwave heating source 189 (cooking step 1).

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 do not temporarily stop when the microwave heating operation (cooking step 1) is completed. While continuing the operation, the operation is performed until after the time when the heating operation (cooking step 2) by the induction heating source 9 is stopped.

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 automatically stop the operation after the "heat dissipation operation time Th1" and "Th2" have elapsed from the time when the induction heating operation (cooking step 2) is completed.

In FIG. 124, the notification FA3 is the same as the notification of the third reference information (reference information 3) described in the first embodiment (FIGS. 59 and 62). For example, the timing of notification is determined from the measurement results of the "elapsed time TN3" that 5 minutes have passed since the start of heating and the "rise temperature TN3" that measures the magnitude of the temperature rise.

In FIG. 124, the notification FA5 is the same as the notification of the fourth reference information (reference information 4) described in the first embodiment (FIGS. 59 and 62). For example, the timing of notification is determined from the measurement results of the "elapsed time TN4" that 5 minutes have passed since the start of heating and the "rise temperature TN4" that measures the magnitude of the temperature rise. The content of the notification FA4 also includes urging the user to turn over the object to be cooked (during the induction heating in the cooking step 2).

Next, FIG. 125 will be described.
FIG. 125 shows a case where the cooking step 1 is performed by the oven heating source 188 and the cooking step 2 is performed by the induction heating source 9 in the cooperative cooking.
The operation of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 is started at the same time as the operation of the oven heating source 188 is started.

The operation of the third cooling fan 128 is started at the same time as the operation of the oven heating source 188 is started.
The operation of the third cooling fan 128 ends after the elapse of the "heat dissipation operation time Tm1" from the end of the operation of the oven heating source 188 (cooking step 1).

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 do not temporarily stop when the oven heating operation (cooking step 1) is completed. While continuing the operation, the cooking process 2 is operated until after the time when the cooking process 2 is stopped.

The fourth cooling fan 129 is not operated at all during the operation of the oven heating source 188 (cooking step 1). It is not operated even in cooking process 2.

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 automatically stop the operation after the "heat dissipation operation time Th1" and "Th2" have elapsed from the time when the induction heating operation (cooking step 2) is completed. In FIG. 125, the period from the notification 1 to the notification 3 is indicated by a broken line arrow for the fourth cooling fan 129. This indicates that it has not been operated during this period.

In FIG. 125, the notification FA6 is the same notification as the third reference information (reference information 3) described in the first embodiment (FIGS. 59 and 62). For example, the timing of notification is determined from the measurement results of the "elapsed time TN6" that 5 minutes have passed since the heating chamber 113 started heating and the "rise temperature TN6" that measures the magnitude of the temperature rise.

In FIG. 125, the notification FA7 is the same notification as the fourth reference information (reference information 4) described in the first embodiment (FIGS. 59 and 62). For example, the timing of notification is determined from the measurement results of the "elapsed time TN7" that 5 minutes have passed since the start of heating and the "rise temperature TN7" that measures the magnitude of the temperature rise. The content of the notification FA7 includes urging the user to turn over the food to be cooked, and further, the cooking step 2 will be completed soon (notice).

Next, FIG. 126 will be described.
FIG. 126 shows a case where the cooking step 1 is performed by the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 and the cooking step 2 is performed by the induction heating source 9 in the cooperative cooking. The case where the heating operation times of the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 are exactly the same will be described, but one of them may be operated first and the other may be operated later. Further, the operation of the two heating sources does not have to end at the same timing.

The operation of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 is started at the same time as the start of the cooking process 1.
The operation of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 is started at the same time as the start of the cooking step 1.
The operations of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are completed after the lapses of the "heat dissipation operation time Tm1" and the "radiation operation time Tm2" from the end of the cooking process 1, respectively.

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 do not temporarily stop when the cooking step 1 is completed. While continuing the operation, the cooking process 2 is operated until after the time when the cooking process 2 is stopped.

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 automatically stop the operation after the "heat dissipation operation time Th1" and the "heat dissipation operation time Th2" have elapsed from the time when the cooking step 2 is completed.

In FIGS. 126 and 127, the notification FA8 is the same notification as the third reference information (reference information 3) described in the first embodiment (FIGS. 60 and 62). For example, the timing of notification is determined from the measurement results of the "elapsed time TN8" that 5 minutes have passed since the heating chamber 113 started heating and the "rise temperature TN8" that measures the magnitude of the temperature rise.

In FIGS. 126 and 127, the notification FA9 is the same notification as the fourth reference information (reference information 4) described in the first embodiment (FIGS. 60 and 62). For example, the timing of notification is determined from the measurement results of the "elapsed time TN9" that 5 minutes have passed since the start of heating and the "rise temperature TN9" that measures the magnitude of the temperature rise. The content of the notification FA9 includes not only notification of temperature and elapsed time, but also that the cooking process 2 will be completed soon (notice).

As shown in FIGS. 125 and 125, the fourth cooling fan 129 may be operated slower than the third cooling fan 128.
This is because the fourth cooling fan 129 is a fan that directly supplies cooling air to the inside of the heating chamber 113 as described in the first embodiment (FIG. 32). That is, when the oven is cooked once, the heating chamber 113 is continuously heated for a maximum of 60 minutes.
Therefore, the entire heating chamber 113 becomes hot (for example, 200 ° C.). Therefore, it takes time to cool such a heating chamber 113.

If the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is not lowered, it is assumed that the heating chamber 113 is high from the beginning when microwave cooking is performed immediately next time.
If the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is too high, the microwave heating source 189 cannot be used for "warming (automatic range)" cooking as described in the first embodiment. This is because the "warm" control menu employs a control in which microwave irradiation is automatically stopped when the food is heated and reaches, for example, 80 ° C. (default value). Therefore, in order not to cause confusion for the user, for example, when the heating chamber 113 has a temperature of 80 ° C. or higher from the beginning, it is necessary to perform error processing so as not to accept cooking. Alternatively, the notification unit AN may notify that the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is being lowered by operating the cooling fan 129.

In the above explanation, it is assumed that the air blowing amount (air blowing capacity) of the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 during cooking is constant, but during cooking, the air blowing amount is increased and the heat dissipation operation is performed. In that case, changes such as reducing the amount of air blown may be made. Further, when the temperature inside the lower unit 200 or the upper unit 100 is lower than when the temperature is high, the capacity variable operation may be performed so as to reduce the amount of air blown.

The "control program" that realizes the operating time (operation start, operation stop) of the first cooling fan 60 to the fourth cooling fan 129 and the operating conditions for determining the amount of air blown is the IH control unit 90 and the microwave heating control. It is not limited to the form stored in the unit 130 or the like (see FIG. 30 of the first embodiment). Others, for example, may be collectively stored in the integrated control device MC as a blower control program.

As is clear from the above description, even in this embodiment 3, the same effect as that of the first embodiment can be expected for the same configuration as that of the first embodiment.

Further, in the third embodiment, four cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 were operated as follows.
(1) During all the cooking operations (cooking steps) by the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, the four cooling fans 60, 61, 128 and 129 were operated.
(2) In the case of only the heating operation by the microwave generation source 122, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 in the upper unit 100 are operated, and further, the fourth cooling fan 129 is operated. rice field.
(3) In the case of the independent heating operation of only the oven heating source 188, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 in the upper unit 100 are operated, and further, the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth The cooling fan 129 was in operation.
(4) One control menu (RG continuous cooking) is executed by designating an operation in which only the heating operation by the microwave heating source 189 and the heating operation by the oven heating source 188 are automatically executed in sequence. During this period, the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 were in operation.
(3) The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated by the input operation unit 40 while designating only the heating operation by the IH coil 17 and executing one control menu. Moreover, the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 do not operate.

According to such a configuration, when the user starts cooking by selecting one control menu, the various cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 are once operated at the time when the induction heating and the microwave heating are completed. The mode smoothly shifts from the end of the heating cooking (cooking process) to the heat dissipation operation mode without causing a situation in which the operation is stopped and the operation is restarted.

(Modified Example of Embodiment 3)
FIG. 127 discloses a modified example of the third embodiment. FIG. 127 is a time chart showing the timing of starting and ending the operation of the cooling fan of the cooking cooker 1 shown in FIGS. 122 to 126.

FIG. 127 shows a case where the cooking step 1 is performed by the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 and the cooking step 2 is performed by the induction heating source 9 in the cooperative cooking. The case where the heating operation times of the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 are exactly the same will be described, but one of them may be operated first and the other may be operated later. Further, the heating operations of the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 do not have to end at the same timing.

As shown in FIG. 127, this example is characterized in that the transition period TR is notified of the "tenth reference information" FA10 by the notification unit AN.

The tenth reference information FA10 can acquire the recommended information 338 described in the first embodiment (FIGS. 107 to 109). In particular, it is the broadcast information corresponding to step SG7 in FIG. Therefore, the integrated display unit 30 can know the individual food ingredient information 339 that can be executed in the heating chamber 113 that has completed the cooking step 1.

The timing for acquiring the tenth reference information FA10 is during the transition period FR, as shown in FIG. 127. That is, since neither the cooking step 1 nor the cooking step 2 is executed, during this transition period, when the input key 47 arranged in the input operation unit 40 is pressed, the reference information FA10 is heated by the cooker 1 May be set to get.

Alternatively, the voice synthesizer 95 may guide the user to press a specific input key in the central operation unit 40M, and when the input key is pressed, the tenth reference information FA10 may be acquired. .. Further, even if the user does not give any command, the reference information FA10 may be automatically notified after the integrated control device MC enters the transition period TR to further reduce the burden on the user.

Summary of Embodiment 3.
As is clear from the above description, even in this embodiment 3, the same effect as that of the first embodiment can be expected for the same configuration as that of the first embodiment.

Further, in the third embodiment, after the cooking step 1 is completed, during the transition period TR, another cooking can be performed in the heating chamber 113 (in parallel with the cooking step 2). Information on ingredients used for "another cooking" can be notified according to a user's command or automatically (see FA10 in FIG. 127).
Therefore, for example, in a state where one cooking A in the cooperative control mode has entered the stage of the cooking step 2 in the left heating unit 17HL and is in the final finishing stage, in the heating chamber 113, cooking different from the cooking is performed. B can be executed at the same time. That is, when cooking A is a side dish in one meal and cooking B is a staple food (for example, rice), it is not a method of starting cooking B after finishing cooking A, but cooking A in parallel. And cooking B can be completed. As a result, the overall cooking time can be shortened, and the convenience of the user is improved.

In the third embodiment (FIGS. 122 to 127), the following cooking cooker 1 was disclosed.
That is,
Inside the main body case HC, a heating chamber 113, a first heating means (induction heating source 9) for heating the object to be heated N, and microwave heating for heating the object to be cooked housed in the heating chamber 113. Means 189, a third heating means (oven heating source) 188 that heats the heating chamber 113 by a heating principle different from that of the microwave heating source 189, a notification unit AN, the induction heating source 9, and the microwave heating. An integrated control device MC that controls the source 189, the oven heating source 188, and the notification unit AN, respectively, is provided.
The integrated control device MC includes a cooperative cooking mode in which a group composed of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 and the induction heating source 9 are started to be driven with a time lag, and the micro. It has a function of performing a combined cooking mode in which the wave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are driven at the same time or at a time lag, or are automatically switched and driven.
The integrated control device MC includes a cooking step that occupies the heating chamber 113 in the cooperative cooking mode, and when the cooking process that occupies the heating chamber 113 is terminated, a time point prior to the termination or termination thereof. At a subsequent time point, the notification unit notifies (acquisition of reference information FA10) that cooking different from the cooperative cooking mode can be performed using the heating chamber 113 and the microwave heating source 189.
The cooker was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, three types of heating sources such as an induction heating source 9 and a microwave heating source 189 can be used, and moreover, a wide range of cooking can be supported by the combined cooking mode and the cooperative cooking mode. It is possible to provide a highly efficient cooking device.

Further, when the cooking process that occupies the heating chamber 113 is completed, it is notified that the cooking chamber 113 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used to perform cooking different from the cooperative cooking mode. For this reason, it can be expected that cooking can be performed efficiently by notifying the user of the time-saving cooking that the user does not notice, and the convenience of the user is improved.

Further, in the third embodiment (FIGS. 122 to 127), the following cooking cooker 1 is disclosed.
That is,
An induction heating source 9 that requires a preheating step for the object to be heated N that houses the object to be cooked,
It has a microwave heating source 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber.
It has a cooperative control mode in which the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 are switched and operated by a user's operation.
When the cooperative control mode is set, the cooking step 1 in which the microwave from the microwave heating source 189 heats the object to be cooked housed in the heating chamber 113 and the top plate after the cooking step 1 is completed. It is possible to reserve a cooking step 2 in which the object to be cooked is induced and heated by the induction heating source 9 on the object to be heated N placed on the above.
When a reservation for cooking in the cooperative control mode is made,
(1) The induction heating source 9 can be driven from before the cooking step 1 to start the preheating step.
(2) During the preheating step, the cooking step 1 can be started in the heating chamber 113.
(3) After stopping the driving of the microwave heating source to finish the cooking step 1,
The cooking step 2 can be started on the object to be heated N preheated by the induction heating source 9.
(4) In the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, information indicating the progress of the cooking process is automatically notified.
The cooker was disclosed.

Because of this configuration, three types of heating sources such as an induction heating source 9 and a microwave heating source 189 can be used, and a wide range of cooking can be supported by a cooperative cooking mode that can also perform preheating operation. Can provide a high-quality cooker.

Further, since the information indicating the progress of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2 is automatically notified to the user, even if the types of heating sources are increasing, the user's anxiety can be dispelled or confirmed in the middle. Therefore, by temporarily stopping the heating operation, it is possible to avoid failures such as impairing the execution of efficient cooperative cooking. This can be expected to further improve the user's sense of security and usability.

Further, in the third embodiment (FIGS. 122 to 127), the following cooking cooker 1 is disclosed.
That is,
A first heating means (induction heating source) 9 that requires a preheating step of the object to be heated N for accommodating the object to be cooked, and
The second heating means (microwave heating source) 189, which does not require the preheating step, and
It has an input operation unit 40 and
It has a cooperative control mode in which the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 are switched and operated by a user's operation in the input operation unit.
The input operation unit has a first operation unit (central operation unit 40M) and a second operation unit (left and right operation units 40L, 40M).
The first operation unit (central operation unit 40M) sets the cooperation control mode.
The second operation unit (left and right operation units 40L, 40M) determines the start and end of the preheating step and the cooking step by the induction heating source 9.
When the cooperative control mode is set, the cooking step 1 in which the microwave from the microwave heating source 189 heats the object to be cooked housed in the heating chamber 113, and the top after the cooking step 1 is completed. The cooking step 2 in which the object to be cooked is induced and heated by the induction heating source 9 on the object to be heated N placed on the plate can be reserved.
When a reservation for cooking in the cooperative control mode is made,
(1) The induction heating source 9 can be driven from before the cooking step 1 to start the preheating step.
(2) During the preheating step, the cooking step 1 can be started and ended in the heating chamber 113 by the first operating unit (central operating unit 40M).
(3) After the cooking step 1 is completed, the first operation unit (central operation unit 40M) and the second operation unit (left and right operation units 40L, 40M) are preheated without being operated by the user. The cooking step 2 can be started by placing the cooking object on the heated object N.
(4) In the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, information indicating the progress of the cooking process is automatically notified.
The cooker was disclosed.

With this configuration, it is possible to provide a highly convenient cooking cooker capable of supporting a wide range of cooking by the cooperative cooking mode in which the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used and the preheating operation can be performed. ..

Further, since the information indicating the progress of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2 is automatically notified to the user, even if the types of heating sources are increasing, the user's anxiety can be dispelled or confirmed in the middle. Therefore, by temporarily stopping the heating operation, it is possible to avoid failures such as impairing the execution of efficient cooperative cooking. This can be expected to further improve the user's sense of security and usability.

Further, the preheating step of the induction heating source is started before the cooking step 1, and during this preheating step, the cooking step 1 can be started and ended by the first operation unit (central operation unit 40M), and the cooking step 1 The preheating step is completed by inductive heating without operating the first operation unit (central operation unit 40M) and the second operation unit (left and right operation units 40L, 40M). The cooking step 2 can be started by using the heated product N. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the input operation of the user and provide an easy-to-use cooking cooker.

Further, in the third embodiment (FIGS. 122 to 127), the following cooking cooker 1 is disclosed.
That is,
An induction heating source 9 that requires a preheating step for the object to be heated N that houses the object to be cooked,
A microwave heating source 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber,
Has a notification unit and
It has a cooperative control mode in which the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 are switched and operated by a user's operation.
When the cooperative control mode is set, the cooking step 1 in which the microwave from the microwave heating source 189 heats the object to be cooked housed in the heating chamber 113, and
After the cooking step 1 is completed, the cooking step 2 in which the object to be cooked is induced and heated by the induction heating source 9 on the object to be heated N placed on the top plate 15 can be reserved. And
When the cooking is set by the cooperative cooking mode, the notification unit notifies the procedure for starting the preheating step by the induction heating source 9 before the start of the cooking step 1. ,
The cooker was disclosed.

With this configuration, it is possible to provide a highly convenient cooking cooker capable of supporting a wide range of cooking by the cooperative cooking mode in which the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used and the preheating operation can be performed. ..

Further, since the information that the preheating process can be started is automatically notified to the user at the stage before the start of the cooking process 1, even if the types of heating sources are increasing, the user's anxiety can be dispelled or the user can use it. It is possible to avoid getting lost or making a mistake in the operation. This can be expected to further improve the user's sense of security and usability.

The notification unit AN displays a dedicated input screen (first specific screen) 30SP for setting cooking by the cooperative cooking mode.
On the input screen 30SP, the preheating step, the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2 are displayed in the order in which they are executed.
The cooker was disclosed.

With this configuration, the input screen 30SP allows the user to easily understand the process of cooperative cooking, and prevents the user from getting lost or making a mistake in the operation. This can be expected to further improve the user's sense of security and usability.

Embodiment 4.
128 to 131 show a built-in type composite cooking cooker according to the fourth embodiment of the present disclosure.
FIG. 128 is a front plan view of the upper surface of the main body of the cooking cooker. FIG. 129 is an explanatory diagram showing information exchange between the cooking cooker 1 shown in FIG. 128 and an external information management device or the like in chronological order. FIG. 130 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the input operation of the cooperative operation unit 40MC and the display information of the integrated display unit 30 and the left side display unit 30L in the cooking cooker of FIG. 128. FIG. 131 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the input operation of the cooperative operation unit 40MC and the display information of the integrated display unit 30 and the left side display unit 30L in the cooking cooker 1 shown in FIG. 128. The same or corresponding parts as those of the first embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 110 are designated by the same reference numerals.

In the cooking cooker 1 shown in the fourth embodiment, there are three display units arranged on the upper surface of the main body 10, but there is no difference in the display function, the effective area of the display screen, and the planar shape.
In other words, the function of the integrated display unit 30 shown in the first embodiment is also possessed by the left side display unit 31L and the right side display unit 31R. However, the initial standby screen at startup immediately after the main power is applied to the cooking cooker 1 is displayed only on the central integrated display unit 30.

The first specific screen 30SP, the second specific screen 30SC, and the third specific screen 30ST are displayed at appropriate timings on the integrated display unit 30, the left side display unit 31L, and the right side display unit 31R arranged in the center. However, as described below, the integrated display unit 30 in the central portion has priority at the display timing.

The integrated display unit 30 displays a range / grill-related “composite cooking / single cooking mode”. That is, the display is performed in the case of the single control mode and the combined control mode.
The left display unit 31L displays the left heating unit 17HL and the left operation unit 40L.
The right display unit 31R displays the right heating unit 17HR and the right operation unit 40R. Note that FIG. 128 omits the illustration of the input key 47 that commands the wireless communication with the outside.

The integrated display unit 30, the left side display unit 31L, and the right side display unit 31R display various information in the cooperative cooking mode. That is, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed, and related information when operating in the cooperative control mode is displayed.

In the cooking cooker 1 shown in FIGS. 128 to 131, the cooking course is roughly divided into a course for selecting a "composite cooking mode / single cooking mode" related to a microwave oven and a grill, and a "cooperative cooking mode". There are two courses to do.

As shown in FIG. 128, a cooperative operation unit 40MC is arranged in the central operation unit 40M. Similar to the first embodiment, the cooperative operation unit 40MC has four cooking methods: single cooking of microwave heating source 189, single cooking of oven heating source 188, combined (heating) cooking, and cooperative (heating) cooking. It is a collection of various input keys shared in a form. In FIG. 128, the range of the cooperative operation unit 40MC is shown by the broken line frame.

FIG. 129 will be described.
In the fourth embodiment, the information management device 411 does not exist inside the house HA. A router (not shown) is installed inside the house HA, and the cooker 1 is connected to the Internet (wide area communication network) 416 via the router. An information management device 411 having the function of the home gateway of the first embodiment is installed on the Internet 416. The information management device 411 may be composed of one or a plurality of server devices. Servers may be distributed according to major parts such as memory, search, and information processing.

In FIG. 129, steps SK1 to SK11 show the main operations of the integrated control device MC of the cooking cooker 1.
FIG. 129 shows an operation step for executing the cooperative adjustment mode, and shows a period from the determination of execution of the cooperative control mode to the end of the cooking step 2.

When the execution of the cooperative control mode is determined, the execution content (for example, the information that the food to be cooked is a hamburger steak) is notified by the notification unit AN, and is transmitted from the wireless communication unit 49 to the outside (step SK1). In the following description, since the information processing device 411 and the information processing terminal 418 can communicate with each other on the Internet (wide area communication circuit network) 416, the destination of the information transmitted from the cooking device 1 is not specified. ..

Next, it is notified that the cooking operation in the cooperative control mode has started, and is transmitted from the wireless communication unit 49 to the outside (step SK2).
When the cooking requires a preheating step, it notifies that the preheating step has started and transmits it to the outside from the wireless communication unit 49 (step SK3).

Next, it is notified that the cooking step 1 in the cooperative control mode has actually started, and is transmitted from the wireless communication unit 49 to the outside (step SK4).

Next, in the cooking step 1, the reference information 1 (FA1) is notified when a predetermined time (first time TN1) has elapsed from the time when the induction heating is started. Further, this notification content is transmitted to the outside from the wireless communication unit 49 (step SK5). Alternatively, it is detected that the temperature of the object to be heated N has risen to a predetermined temperature, and reference information 1 is notified (step SK5).

Next, the notification information from the outside for the step SK5 is received (step SK6). This received information may include, for example, a remote control signal such as lowering the thermal power. Depending on the content of the received notification information, the notification unit AN notifies the user. Especially in the case of remote signals, notification is necessary so that the user does not cause unnecessary confusion.

Next, when the cooking step 1 is automatically completed, the content is notified by the notification unit AN. Alternatively, when the user manually stops the cooking step 1 at an arbitrary timing, the same notification is given. Then, the notification information is transmitted to the outside (step SK7).

At the stage of step SK7, the heating operation is stopped and the transition period is entered.
Then, when the user prepares for the cooking process 2 and orders the start of the cooking process 2, the notification unit AN notifies that the transition period is completed and the cooking process 2 is started. Further, the wireless communication unit 49 transmits to the outside (step SK8). In this case, the notification content includes information on the heating source of the cooking step 2. When the timer is set and cooking is started, the timer setting time information is also included.

Next, in the cooking step 2, for example, when a predetermined time (second time TN1) has elapsed from the time when the microwave heating is started, the reference information 2 (FA2) is notified. Further, this notification content is transmitted to the outside from the wireless communication unit 49 (step SK9). Alternatively, it is detected that the temperature of the object to be heated N has risen to a predetermined temperature, and the reference information 2 is notified (step SK9).

Next, the notification information from the outside for the step SK9 is received (step SK10). This received information may include, for example, a remote control signal such as lowering the thermal power.
Depending on the content of the notification information, the notification unit AN notifies the user.

Next, when the cooking step 2 is automatically completed, the content is notified by the notification unit AN. Alternatively, when the user manually stops the cooking process 2 at an arbitrary timing, the same notification is given. Then, the notification information is transmitted to the outside (step SK11).

As is clear from the above explanation, since the contents of the collaborative survey of the cooking device 1 are transmitted to the outside in real time, the information processing device 411 and the information processing terminal 418 that received the transmitted contents are separated from the kitchen KT. You can grasp the progress of cooking at the same place. Therefore, especially in the cooperative cooking mode, cooking may be performed for a relatively long time of one hour or more, but since the operation information is input to the information processing terminal 418, information processing is performed in another room in the house. It is also possible to monitor with the terminal 418.

If the remote control signal from the outside to the cooking cooker 1 is limited to lowering the heating power and stopping the cooking operation, the cooking cooker 1 may be erroneously operated from the outside. There is no concern that it will behave incorrectly.

Next, FIG. 130 will be described.
The cooperative operation unit 40MC and the integrated display unit 30 operate in the order of steps SX1 to SX6. As described in the first embodiment, the cooperative operation unit 40MC is arranged at the left and right central portions of the input operation unit 40 provided horizontally long on the upper surface of the main body 10.
The arrangement of the various input keys of the input operation unit 40 is the same as that of the first embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21.

To select the "composite heating / single heating mode" related to the microwave oven, select the left heating unit 17HL or the right heating unit 17HR. The course using the induction heating source 9 and the central operation unit 40M (cooperative operation unit 40MC) ) Is used to use one or both of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188.

The case of selecting and cooking a course in the cooperative cooking mode will be described below.
In FIG. 128, first, the input key 43MC of the cooperative operation unit 40MC is pressed to transmit a command signal for selecting a course of the cooperative cooking mode (SC1). Next, the signal receiving and integrated control device MC displays the cooperative cooking mode on the integrated display unit 30 (SC2).

In step SC2, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30. On the first specific screen 30SP, at least the following three pieces of information are displayed at the same time. It may be displayed in the form of a list.
(1) Identification information 330 for each object to be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode
(2) Cooking process (cooking process 1, cooking process 2) and preheating process (3) Heating source and heating part used (in the case of induction heating source 9)

The user operates the input key 43M1 of the cooperative operation unit 40M to select "identification information" 330 that specifies only one menu (type) of the object to be cooked in one cooperative cooking mode (SC2). On the first specific screen 30SP, as described in the first embodiment, it is desirable that a plurality of identification information 300 and identification information 330A, 330B, etc. of the next candidate to be cooked are displayed at the same time.

Next, in a state where the identification information 330 corresponding to the desired object to be cooked is displayed at a predetermined position (such as the central portion of the first area 30L) of the first specific screen 30SP, the second area 30M, the third Control conditions such as heating temperature and thermal power displayed in the area 30R are selected by the input keys 43M2 and 43M3 (SC3).

After that, if the input key 43MS of the cooperative operation unit 40MC is pressed, the transition to the cooperative cooking mode is confirmed (SC4).
Then, the integrated display unit 30 displays that cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is started (SC5), and further, the integrated display unit 30 sets the control conditions such as the heating temperature and the heating power selected up to this stage. , Display information indicating the presence or absence of a cooking process and a preheating process (SC6).

In the fourth embodiment, in the operation program of the cooperative cooking mode, the following two types of sequences are defined according to the object to be cooked, as in the first embodiment.
(1) A pattern in which the induction heating source 9 is used first, and the subsequent heating is performed by the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating means 188.
(2) A pattern in which at least one or both of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating means 188 are used first, and the subsequent heating is performed by the induction heating source 9.
The pattern in which at least one or both of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating means 188 is used first in the above (2) also includes a pattern in which the preheating operation of the induction heating source 9 is started first. (Cooking of "karaage" described in the first embodiment. See FIG. 63).

The example of FIG. 130 is a pattern in which the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating means 188 is used first in the cooking step 1. The display operation is started by the integrated display unit 30 before the other two display units (31L, 31R). However, since the induction heating source 9 is used in the cooking step 2, the induction heating source 9 is the first pattern to start the preheating step at the same time as the cooking step 1.

After starting the preheating step, the left display unit 31L dedicated to the left heating unit 17HL of the induction heating source 9 for performing the cooking step 2 is activated, and it is displayed that the preheating process has been started (SY1). After that, the preheating temperature is displayed as, for example, "200 ° C.", and it is also displayed that preheating is in progress (SY2).
After that, the cooking process 1, the transition period TR, and the cooking process 2 proceed, but they are not shown in FIG. 130.

The operation input procedure and display order shown in FIG. 131 are basically the same as those in the first embodiment.
In the fourth embodiment, when the induction heating source 9 is used in the cooking step 1, the operation input procedure is as follows, which is different from the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 131, in the fourth embodiment, the input key 43M1 of the cooperative operation unit 40MC is operated to perform the cooperative operation up to the stage (step SC2) of selecting the "identification information" 330 of one cooperative cooking mode. I am in charge of the department 40MC. That is, the integrated display unit 30 displays the identification information 330 indicating the cooperative cooking menu (for example, “karaage”) (first specific screen 30SP), and the cooperative operation unit 40MC performs up to the stage of selecting it with the input key 43M1.

If the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL is in the cooperative cooking mode specified in the cooking step 1 at the stage of step SC2, subsequent input commands cannot be performed by the cooperative operation unit 40MC.

That is, when the left heating unit 17HL is used in the cooking step 1 from the menu of the object to be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode selected in step SC2 (for example, “karaage”), the subsequent input operation is the left operation unit 40L. Is done by.

As shown in FIG. 131, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the left display unit 31L. Then, on the first specific screen 30SP, it is displayed in characters that one cooking menu is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode (step SX1).

Next, control conditions such as heating intensity (heat power) and heating time displayed on the first specific screen 30SP are selected by various input keys 43L2 and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L (step SX2).

Further, the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L is operated. As a result, the start of the cooking process of one cooperative cooking menu is ordered (SX3).
After that, it is displayed that the cooking operation is started and the cooking step 1 is started (SX4), and further, information such as that the cooperative cooking is in progress and the cooking process is displayed (SX5).
On the other hand, the integrated display unit 30 displays information indicating that the cooperative cooking has started, information indicating the heating source of the cooking process, and the like (SC12).

Due to the above configuration, when the object to be heated N is placed on the left heating unit 17HL before starting the cooking step 1, the user's body is slightly to the left of the center of the left and right sides of the cooking device 1. That is, it should be in front of the left operation unit 40L.
Therefore, the cooperative cooking mode can be started as it is by operating the left operation unit 40L, and there is an advantage that the user can operate the cooking process 1 at a position facing the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 31L from the start time. ..

If the left heating unit 17HL has already been used for another cooking, the reason why the user cannot perform cooperative cooking through the integrated display unit 30 in the selection stage (SC2) of the identification information 330 is explained. Notify (the voice synthesizer 95 also gives the same notification).

The user knows that the first cooking step 1 is performed in the left heating unit 17HL at the stage of step SX1. The user is guided by the first specific screen 30SP displayed on the left display unit 31L so as to put the food to be cooked on or inside the food to be heated N such as a dedicated frying pan or pan (speech synthesizer 95). But the same notification is given).
Therefore, the user can command the start of cooking in one cooperative cooking mode by operating the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 30L after placing the object to be cooked on the left heating unit 17HL (SX3). ).

The integrated display unit 30 displays that one cooking step 1 (first cooking step) in the cooperative cooking mode has been started. Since the user concentrates his / her attention on the left side display unit 31L and the left side operation unit 40L during the cooking process 1, all the basic information is displayed on the left side display unit 31L. At the stage of the cooking process 2 using the heating chamber 113, the display is changed to the display centered on the integrated display unit 30 and the operation by the central cooperative operation unit 40MC.

The unique function of the fourth embodiment will be described.
When the input key 43KP for changing the function of the integrated control device MC shown in FIG. 128 is pressed, the function setting menu is displayed on the integrated display unit 30. Up to this point, the first embodiment has been described.
In the fourth embodiment, the following function settings can be further made for the integrated control device MC.

(1) Only specific information is transmitted to the outside (steps SK1 to SK11) shown in FIG. 129. For example, in the case of cooking in which cooking oil is added to the object to be heated during cooking, such as "tempura" and "karaage", in order to maintain the watching function, a specific cooking menu (for example, for example) is used in the cooperative cooking mode. , "Tempura" and "Karaage"), the transmission steps SK3 and SK5 shown in FIG. 129 are performed each time at a constant temperature step. For example, when the preheating temperature is set to 180 ° C. and the preheating is started, the temperature rise process is notified in detail, such as 160 ° C. and 170 ° C.

(2) Inventory information acquired from the refrigerator 401 is narrowed down to a specific range (for example, frozen food). In this case, further, "freezing temperature information" and "meat" may be specified in the condition setting, and as a result, only "meat whose freezing temperature is lower than the specified value" may be collected.
For example, as a method of aging meat in a refrigerator, an independent cooling space (room) is provided in the refrigerator, meat composed of beef, pork, chicken, etc. is put into the freezer, and the temperature of the air in the freezer is set to 2. A method is known in which the temperature is maintained at ° C. or higher and 5 ° C. or lower (hereinafter, “aging temperature”), the humidity is maintained at 87% or higher and 98% or lower, and the temperature is exposed to cold air within a certain range (air volume of circulating cold air). Therefore, if information on ingredients stored in a specific aging temperature range is collected in this way, the convenience of the user is further improved.

(3) Setting of expert mode and beginner mode. When the beginner mode is set, all the external notifications (steps SK1 to SK11) shown in FIG. 129 are performed.
When the expert mode is set, the information transmission to the outside (steps SK1 to SK11) shown in FIG. 129 is limited to SK7. However, the display content on the first specific screen 30SP should be the same between the expert mode and the beginner mode.
(4) The inventory information acquired from the refrigerator 401 should include information on the storage period and freshness.

For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-124053, foods to be stored in a refrigerator are photographed, and a plurality of food images are stored in association with the photographed images and the photographed date and time. A refrigerator has been proposed in which the difference is extracted and if there is a place where there is no difference for a certain period of time, it is determined that the food has been stored for a certain period of time or more and the storage period is estimated.

Further, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-89913, a food image of a food stored in the storage room is extracted from an image of the storage room of the refrigerator, and the food image is converted into the food image based on the temporal change of the food image. A refrigerator has been proposed that generates information on the deterioration of the corresponding food and transmits the food image and the information on the deterioration to an external portable information terminal device via a communication device.
Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, if the information on the refrigerator side as described above is acquired, the convenience of the user is further improved.

Although the reference information 1 (FA1) and the reference information 2 (FA2) of the fourth embodiment have not been described in detail, the elapsed time from the time when the cooking step 1 is started as described in the first to third embodiments ( In addition to the first time TN1) and the elapsed temperature, as shown in FIG. 102 (A) of the first embodiment, the time saving information 333, which means that the user can shorten the cooking time, and the cooking recommended information 338. May be added to the reference information FA1 and FA2. Alternatively, notification (display or voice guidance) may be used instead. The refrigerator according to the present invention is described from the storage chamber for storing food, an imaging device for acquiring an image of the storage chamber by photographing the storage chamber, and an image of the storage chamber acquired by the imaging device. A control device for extracting a food image of food stored in a storage chamber and a communication device for communicating with a mobile terminal having a display unit are provided, and the control device is said to be said from a temporal change of the food image. It is characterized in that information on the deterioration of food corresponding to the food image is generated, and the food image and the information on the deterioration are transmitted to the mobile terminal via the communication device. The refrigerator according to the present invention is described from the storage chamber for storing food, an imaging device for acquiring an image of the storage chamber by photographing the storage chamber, and an image of the storage chamber acquired by the imaging device. A control device for extracting a food image of food stored in a storage chamber and a communication device for communicating with a mobile terminal having a display unit are provided, and the control device is said to be said from a temporal change of the food image. It is characterized in that information on the deterioration of food corresponding to the food image is generated, and the food image and the information on the deterioration are transmitted to the mobile terminal via the communication device.

As is clear from the above description, the cooking utensil 1 of the fourth embodiment discloses the following configuration.
That is,
A main body 110 containing a top plate 15 and a heating chamber 113,
An induction heating source 9 for heating an object to be heated placed on the top plate 15 and
A microwave heating source 189 that heats the object to be cooked placed inside the heating chamber 113, and
Integrated display unit 30 and
The left side display 31L of the induction heating source 9 and
An integrated control device MC that controls the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, the integrated display unit 30, and the left side display unit 31L.
It includes a central operation unit 40M that gives commands from the user to the integrated control device MC, and a left operation unit 40L and a right operation unit 40R.
The left operation unit 40L is an operation unit dedicated to the left heating unit 17HL of the induction heating source 9.
The central operation unit 40M has a cooperative operation unit 40MC for the cooperative cooking mode.
The linked operation unit 40MC has a function of displaying the linked cooking mode on the integrated display unit 30 (step SC2) and a function of causing the integrated control device MC to select one of the displayed linked cooking modes (step SC2). It has a step SC3) and a function of starting the cooperative cooking mode (step SC4).
Further, in the integrated control device MC, regarding the cooperative cooking mode to be executed, when the heating unit used in the cooking step 1 is the left heating unit 17HL of the induction heating source 9.
(1) Display information related to the cooperative cooking mode is displayed on the dedicated display unit 31L of the (left heating unit 17HL).
(2) The cooking process is displayed on the left side display unit 31L (step SX1).
(3) Control conditions such as thermal power and temperature are displayed on the display unit 31L, and are selected on the left side display unit 31L (step SX2).
(4) An input command for starting the cooperative cooking mode is transmitted from the left operation unit 40L (step SX3).
It was a configuration with the function.

As a result, in the cooperative cooking mode in which the induction heating source 9 is used in the cooking process 1, the role of the cooperative operation unit 40MC is clarified up to the display stage of the cooperative cooking mode, and the command from the left operation unit 40L is once set. When the cooking step 1 was started, the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 30L were made to execute all the subsequent changes in the control menu, the end of the cooking process 1, and related displays.
Therefore, the effect that the easy-to-use cooking cooker 1 can be provided can be obtained.

The contents and display form (including the display form of the identification information 330) of the cooperative cooking mode to be displayed between the integrated display unit 30 and the display unit 31L dedicated to the left heating unit 17HL, and the configuration of the first specific screen 30SP. If they are the same, there is no concern that they may be misleading to the user, but they do not necessarily have to be the same.
This is because there may be cases where the display area of the integrated display unit 30 and the display unit 31L are different, the physical display principle is different, and the like.

Also in the fourth embodiment, the same effect as described in the first embodiment can be obtained for the portion having the same configuration as that of the first embodiment.

Embodiment 5.

Embodiment 5.
132 to 144 relate to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 132 is a flowchart for explaining the entire control operation of the cooking device before the start of cooking. FIG. 133 is a flowchart for explaining the entire control operation after the start of cooking in the cooking cooker of FIG. 132. FIG. 134 is a block diagram showing the main internal functions of the personal digital assistant. FIG. 135 is FIG. 1 for explaining the display operation of the mobile information terminal. FIG. 136 is FIG. 2 for explaining the display operation of the mobile information terminal. FIG. 137 is a display operation explanatory view 3 of the mobile information terminal. FIG. 138 is a display operation explanatory view 4 of the mobile information terminal. FIG. 139 is an explanatory view of display operation of the mobile information terminal. FIG. 140 is FIG. 6 for explaining the display operation of the mobile information terminal. FIG. 141 is a display operation explanatory view 7 of a mobile information terminal. FIG. 142 is an explanatory view of display operation of the mobile information terminal. FIG. 143 is a display operation explanatory view 9 of the mobile information terminal. FIG. 144 is a display operation explanatory view 10 of the mobile information terminal. FIG. 145 shows a modified example of the fifth embodiment, and shows an operation management system of the cooking cooker 1 and the home electric appliance 400. FIG. 146 shows a modified example of the fifth embodiment, and is FIG. 1 for explaining the display operation of the portable information terminal. FIG. 147 shows a modified example of the fifth embodiment, and is FIG. 2 for explaining the display operation of the portable information terminal. The same or corresponding parts as those of the first embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 110 are designated by the same reference numerals.

The cooking device 1 shown in the fifth embodiment is characterized in that the cooking mode, control conditions, and the like can be set by using a remote control signal from the portable information terminal 418.

One of the features of the cooking device 1 of the fifth embodiment is that it has an "external notification mode".
The "external notification mode" automatically notifies the portable information terminal 418 in which the device identification code is registered up to the middle stage of the cooking process in detail.

FIG. 132 will be described.
FIG. 132 is a flowchart for explaining the entire control operation of the cooking device 1 before the start of cooking. The basic operation program from the power-on to the start of cooking preparation is stored in the storage device MM inside the integrated control device MC.

Since steps SW1 to SW3 are the same as those shown in FIG. 37 of the first embodiment, steps SW3 will be briefly described.
When the main power switch 97 is closed (step SW1), the integrated control device MC is activated. The integrated control device MC itself starts diagnosing the presence or absence of an abnormality by its own control program (SW2).

In step SW2, the wireless communication unit 49 notifies the information processing device 411 of the home gateway or the like in the living space such as the kitchen KT of the start of operation of the cooking cooker 1. This warning signal corresponds to the signal L2 described with reference to FIG. 41 of the first embodiment.
Further, the cooking device 1 transmits the inventory inquiry signal RQ1 of the refrigerator 401 to the information processing device 411.

When the information processing device 411 is not inside the house HA, the cooker 1 corresponds to the inventory inquiry signal RQ1 to the external server 417 via a router (not shown) and a wide area communication network 416. Send information to be done. A personal digital assistant 418 owned by a user, a resident, or the like is connected to the wide area communication network 416.

If no abnormality is found in the integrated control device MC, the integrated display unit 30 is activated, and the voice synthesizer 95 provides voice guidance to the effect that the operation is started (SW3).
Further, in order to prompt the selection of the heating source to be used, the integrated display unit 30 is used for display, and the sound or voice synthesizer 95 also provides voice guidance for prompting the selection of the heating source (SW4). At this stage, instead of selecting the heating source, a cooking mode such as a cooperative cooking mode or a combined cooking mode may be selected.

Although not shown in FIG. 132, when the "external notification mode" is not set, the input notification unit 40 sets the external notification mode at this stage.
Specifically, the input key 43KP is pressed to switch to the "function setting mode" described later, and the setting operation is performed according to the display of the integrated display unit 30.
In the function setting mode, the specific mobile information terminal 418 owned by the user is registered as one notification destination. Then, the function setting mode is canceled.

In the next step SW5, the input operation unit 40 determines whether or not the input is completed. When the input keys 43M1 and 43M2 are operated as described in the first embodiment and the desired cooking menu (for example, "karaage") and control menu (for example, "range manual") have been selected, This step SX5 becomes "Yes".

In the next step SW6, when the input key 43MS is pressed by the input operation unit 40, the result is “Yes” and the heating source is actually started to be driven (SW7). In the case of the left heating unit 17HL, it is necessary to press either one of the input keys 43L1 and 44L. Further, in the case of the right heating unit 17HR, it is necessary to press either one of the input keys 43R1 and 44R (the key input procedure may be changed so as to be omitted).

On the other hand, if the input from the input operation unit 40 is not completed in step SW5, the input is waited for 30 minutes. During this 30 minutes, the measurement is started at the stage of step SW4.

In step SW8, it is determined whether or not the time exceeds 30 minutes, and if it exceeds 30 minutes, the integrated control device MC automatically turns off the main power switch 97 (SW14).

Unless the wireless communication unit 49 receives a "remote control signal" (external input) described later from the outside during the 30-minute input grace period, the input of the input operation unit 40 is completed and the presence or absence of external input (existence of external input). Step SW9) is repeatedly checked.

When the wireless communication unit 49 receives the remote control signal (external input) from the outside, in step SW10, it is determined whether it is a command to specify the cooperative cooking mode or other than that.

If it is a command to specify the cooperative cooking mode, the process proceeds to step SW11. In this step SW11, it is determined whether or not the permission conditions such as "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" described in the first embodiment (particularly, FIGS. 64 to 66) are satisfied.

If it is determined in step SW11 that the permission condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step SW12, and the process of the external notification mode (external input priority mode) is performed.

On the other hand, if the mode is not the cooperative cooking mode, step SW10 is determined to be "No", and the process proceeds to step SW12.

In step SW12, the determination and processing of the external notification mode (external input priority mode) are performed.
First, when the cooking mode designated from the outside is the cooperative cooking mode, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30.
Next, when the cooking mode designated from the outside is the combined cooking mode, the second specific screen 30SC is displayed on the integrated display unit 30. On the other hand, in the case of the independent cooking mode of the induction heating source 9, the third specific screen 30ST is displayed on the integrated display unit 30.

In the next step SW13, the information indicating that the remote control information has been received is returned to the information processing device 411 or the external server 417 that has transmitted the remote control information.

If it is determined in the step SW4 that the permission information is not satisfied, the information processing device 411 or the external server 417 that has transmitted the remote control information cannot be permitted to control the remote control information. Reply the information of.

At the stage of step SW11 or SW12, the user manually changes the control conditions (heat power, microwave output, heating time, control temperature, etc.) set in the remote control information by the input operation unit 40. You may. At the stage of step SW12, the first to third specific screens 30SP, 30SC, and 30ST are displayed, respectively. Therefore, the control conditions are set so that the user directly inputs using the normal input operation unit 40. Is also good.

FIG. 132 describes the operation of the cooking cooker 1 when the external notification mode (external input priority mode) is set.

FIG. 133 will be described.
As described with reference to FIG. 132, the cooking cooker 1 of the fifth embodiment operates the input operation unit 40 to switch to the "function setting" mode during standby before starting the cooking operation, and "external notification". Set to "Mode". Therefore, as will be described below, it is convenient when the user cannot always be in front of the cooking cooker 1 and face cooking.

For example, the user may move in the kitchen KT immediately after starting cooking, or may use other cookers and home appliances in the kitchen KT. However, when cooking a cooking menu that uses cooking oil such as fried food, the alarm device 446 (Fig.) 4) gives an alarm.

Further, since the heating cooker 1 itself is also equipped with a human detection sensor in which the detection range is set from the vicinity of the door 114 toward the front, no person is detected in a specific cooking menu such as "fried food". When the time exceeds a certain time (for example, 15 seconds), a warning message is output from the voice synthesizer 95.

FIG. 133 is a flowchart for explaining the control operation of the integrated control device MC after the start of the cooking operation.
FIG. 133 shows an operation program when the "external notification mode" is set among the basic operation programs from the start of the cooking process 1 to the start of the cooking process 2. This program is also stored in the storage device MM inside the integrated control device MC.

The following description will be made on the premise that in the selected cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode, the cooking step 1 is performed in the heating chamber 113 and the cooking step 2 is performed in the left heating unit 17HL.

FIG. 133 shows an operation step following step SW7 of FIG. 132.
When the cooking step 1 is started and the microwave heating is started, the integrated control device MC confirms that the "external notification mode" is set (step SW20).

Next, the integrated display unit 30 displays the start of the cooking step 1, and the voice synthesizer 95 also notifies the start of cooking (step SW21).

In addition, the wireless communication unit 49 transmits information indicating that the cooperative cooking has started to the outside.
Since the portable information terminal 418 is registered in advance as an external notification destination of the cooking cooker 1, information on the start of operation of the cooking cooker 1 arrives via the external server 417.

The measurement of the elapsed time TN1 is started from the time of the step SW21.
In the fifth embodiment, the inventory inquiry information RQ3 is transmitted to the outside in the next step SW22. If the information processing device 411 is inside the house HA as in the first embodiment, it is transmitted to the information processing device 411.

On the other hand, if the device corresponding to the information processing device 411 is an external server 417, inventory inquiry information RQ3 is transmitted from the cooking cooker 1 via the wide area communication network 416.

After that, the presence or absence of abnormal operation is checked in the process of cooking step 1 (SW23), the presence or absence of a stop command for cooking step 1 by the user is checked (SW24), and the presence or absence of excess of the elapsed time TN1 is checked (SW25).

These steps SW23 to SW25 are repeated at short-term intervals, but if an abnormality is detected, the integrated notification unit 30 or the voice synthesizer 95 performs abnormality detection notification (SW34). Further, as one of the processes of this "external notification mode", the external server 417 is also notified, and the mobile information terminal 418 is also notified of the occurrence of an abnormality.

When it is determined that the elapsed time TN1 has been exceeded (“Yes” in SW25), the reference information 1 is notified on the first specific screen 30S of the integrated display unit 30. At the same time, reference information is transmitted to the outside. This reference information also finally reaches the portable information terminal 418 via the information processing device 411 and the external server 417.

In the next step SW27, it is determined whether or not inventory data is received from the outside in response to the inventory information inquiry RQ1 of the refrigerator 401 (see step SW2 in FIG. 132).

If the inventory data has been received, it is stored in the storage device MM at that time, but the stored information is also confirmed in the next step SW28.

Next, when the inventory data has arrived in the integrated display unit 30, the integrated control device MC evaluates and analyzes the actually related cooking menu from the acquired inventory data. When a recommended cooking menu is extracted, at this point, the integrated display unit 30 does not notify that there is a recommended cooking menu (SW29). And it does not send to the external server 417.

Exceptionally, when the user performs the above-mentioned "function setting" and sets to transmit before the transition period TR, the display is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 even at this point. In addition, the notification data is also transmitted to the personal digital assistant 418. On the personal digital assistant 418, the same purpose is displayed as shown in FIG. 143.

After that, it is repeatedly checked whether or not there is a command to end the cooking process 1 from the user (SW30). If the cooking process 1 is performed by setting the timer in advance, the cooking process 1 is automatically completed when the time set by the user elapses.

When the cooking process 1 is completed, in the next step SW31, the integrated display unit 30 notifies that the cooking process 1 is completed, waits for a user's command, and then shifts to the cooking process 2.

Further, in step SW31, as one of the processes of the "external notification mode", the external server 417 is also notified that the cooking step 1 has been completed.
Further, although it is similar to the notification performed in step SW29, if there is a cooking menu that can be recommended in the cooking cooker 1, it is notified on the first specific screen 30S of the integrated display unit 30 and also notified to the external server 417. Will be done. Therefore, even in the portable information terminal 418, the existence of the recommended cooking menu can be known from the display screen 480 as shown in FIG. 143.

As can be seen from FIG. 133, the step SW31 is a transition period TR in which the heating operation is suspended, and the user takes the food to be cooked out of the heating chamber 113 and prepares the food to be heated on the left heating unit 17HL. It is necessary to perform the work of transferring to N (pot, etc.).

The length of the transition period TR can be freely determined by the user until the user gives a command to start cooking (cooking process 2) (however, a long pause such as 30 minutes or more causes an error and cooperates. Cooking mode is automatically canceled).

Therefore, the user can examine the value of the recommended cooking menu by using this rest period TR. If necessary, you can check the ingredients in the refrigerator 411 at this point and listen to the opinions of the residents.

When the user presses the input key 43MS, the rest period TR ends immediately, and induction heating (cooking step 2) in the left heating unit 17HL is started (SW32).

Next, the integrated display unit 30 displays the start of the cooking process 2, and the voice synthesizer 95 also notifies the start of cooking. In addition, information indicating that the cooking process 2 of the cooperative cooking has been started is transmitted from the wireless communication unit 49 to the outside (SW33).

Next, the portable information terminal 418 shown in FIG. 134 will be described.
The personal digital assistant 418 has a transmission unit and a reception unit 460, a communication control unit 461, a central processing unit (CPU) 462, a ROM and a RAM 463, a speaker 464, a touch-type operation unit 465, and a display screen. It has a display unit 466, a heating cooker database (storage unit) 468, an attitude detection unit 469, a remote control information generation unit 470, and a storage unit 467. The transmitting unit and the receiving unit 460 have an NFC input / output unit 472 for short-range wireless communication.

Reference numeral 475 is a voice input unit that converts voice into an input signal.
The touch-type operation unit 466, the display unit 467, and the voice input unit 475 are integrated on the hardware to form the display operation unit 471. A search unit that analyzes the voice signal from the voice input unit 475 and performs term search, information search, and the like is not shown. The search unit may be provided inside the mobile information terminal 418, or may be provided in the external server 417 and have a search function outside the mobile information terminal 418.

The posture detection unit 469 is equipped with various sensors such as a gyro sensor, an acceleration sensor, and a gravity sensor, and can detect the inclination and orientation of the personal digital assistant 418. As a result, the signal detected in the vertical direction of the portable information terminal 418 is output to the central processing unit 462.

The central processing unit 462 receives a detection signal from the posture detection unit 469 and controls the display direction of the display unit 467.
The central processing unit 462 inputs a signal received from the wireless communication unit 49 of the cooking cooker 1 to the remote control information generation unit 470.

In order to generate notification information (including image information) for the integrated display unit 30 of the cooking device 1 and the voice synthesizer 95, the cooking device database 468 uses the "notifying data" 472 of the cooking device 1 to be generated. I have it.
The cooker database 468 also holds "remote control data" 473 for the integrated control device MC of the cooker 1.

The notification data 472 and the remote control data 473 may be stored in the personal digital assistant 418 from the beginning, but are connected to the external server 417, which is an information providing means, via the wide area communication network 416. However, it may be obtained by downloading from the external server. That is, the cooking cooker database 468 does not need to be fixedly stored and constructed, and may be in the form of acquiring information as needed and temporarily storing it in the volatile memory.

The remote control information generation unit 470 processes the signal acquired from the cooker 1 via the central processing unit 462 and the input signal from the display operation unit 471, respectively, and remotely controls the cooker 1. Generate information.

The "remote operation information" here means the information on the input operation of the cooking cooker 1 corresponding to all cooking modes including the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode, and the integration in the cooperative cooking mode, the combined cooking mode, and the like. The display information of the display unit 30, and further, the display information regarding the right side display unit 31R and the left side display unit 31L are included. However, in all cooking modes including the cooperative cooking mode, the information that commands the start of the heating operation is not included. Therefore, the remote control information does not receive a command for the cooking cooker 1 to start the heating operation.

The central processing unit 462 executes the processing of the entire portable information terminal 418 according to the control program stored in the ROM / RAM, and reads the data required in the process of executing the processing from the ROM / RAM. , The data generated in the process of executing the process is stored in the ROM / RAM. The storage unit 471 is a non-volatile memory made of a semiconductor, and can store the information of the cooking cooker 1 read from the transmission unit and the reception unit 460.

When the user touches a specific portion of the display unit 467 of the portable information terminal 418, the remote control information generation unit 470 generates remote control information based on the touch signal.
The remote control information is transmitted from the transmitting unit and the receiving unit 460 to the cooking cooker 1.

The integrated control device MC of the cooking device 1 that has received the remote control information handles the remote control information as input operation information of the cooking mode. For example, when a remote control signal relating to the cooperative cooking mode is received, the first display screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30 shifts to the selection screen of one cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode as shown in FIG. 142 below. And transition. However, the cooking cooker 1 does not unconditionally operate with the remote control information of the personal digital assistant 418. This is as described in FIG. 132.

On the other hand, on the mobile information terminal 418 side that has transmitted the remote control information, the display of the display unit 467 changes based on the remote control information. That is, the content of the display screen by the touch operation on the display operation unit 471 of the personal digital assistant 418 and the display content of the integrated display unit 30 of the cooking cooker 1 change according to an approximate operation procedure, but the state of the change changes. It is not transmitted to the cooking device 1 one by one in real time.

Even if the remote control information is generated in the portable information terminal 418, it is recognized as a regular remote control signal in the cooking cooker 1 after the confirmation signal of the cooking mode is transmitted. That is, the remote control information from the mobile information terminal 418 is collectively transmitted when a predetermined confirmation key is pressed on the mobile information terminal 418 in order to confirm the cooking mode.

The remote operation information transmitted from the personal digital assistant 418, for example, regarding the cooperative cooking mode, is information necessary for cooking a specific cooking menu (for example, "karaage") in the cooperative cooking mode, and is heated. Source, cooking process content, control conditions (parameters) such as heating power and heating time. That is, detailed control conditions that can be set by the user on the first specific screen 30SP are also included.

There are already many proposals for a method of controlling a microwave oven or an induction heating cooker by a wireless signal from a personal digital assistant 418.
For example, a portable information terminal (home network terminal) placed near the cooking cooker transfers cooking procedure information to the cooking cooker by short-range wireless communication (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-113787), or mobile information. Techniques for transferring heating control information from a terminal device to a cooking cooker by wireless communication (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-37068 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-14063) have been proposed.

We also propose a technology to generate a remote control signal including graphic information corresponding to the operation content of a cooking cooker (gas stove) and transmit it by wireless communication from a personal digital assistant (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-163539). Has been done.

In the fifth embodiment, the display contents of the display screen (also used as the input operation screen) 480 of the personal digital assistant 418 will be described below.

FIGS. 135 (A) and 135 (B) are display screens of the personal digital assistant 418.
The display screen 480 is formed by covering the surface of a liquid crystal display screen or an organic EL display screen with a glass plate.
Although it does not appear as a physical structure on the upper surface (surface) of the glass plate, various icons (input keys) 491L, 491M, 491R, 492-496, etc., which will be described later, are visually recognized by the display of the display screen 480. Can be recognized above. Although a specific part of the glass plate itself does not emit light or generate an image, in the following explanation, it is the user's point of view that characters, figures, and other information are displayed in this way. Stand up and use the expression "display on display screen".

The "icon" can be input as desired. That is, a capacitance detection type key is arranged in each icon portion. By touching the icon, the touch operation unit 466 (see FIG. 134) generates a command signal to the central processing unit 462.

To display the presence and function of the icon, certain functions are displayed in text or graphics (at least in a state where input can be accepted). For example, as in the example of FIG. 135 (A), it is displayed in characters such as "left IH operation unit".

481 is a menu display unit on the initial screen shown in FIG. 135 (A). In FIG. 135 (B), the menu display unit 481 is changed to the menu selection display unit 482 of the left heating unit. Further, in FIG. 136 (A), the heat source selection display unit 483 is changed to “heat source selection”.

Further, the menu display unit 481 is changed to the control menu selection display unit 484 of the range grill called “RG control menu selection” in FIG. 136 (B).
Further, the menu display unit 481 is changed to the cooperative cooking menu display unit 485 called "cooperative cooking menu selection" in FIG. 142 (A).

In FIG. 142 (B), the menu display unit 481 is changed to the preparation information display unit 486 called the “next preparation guide”. In FIGS. 143 (A) and 143 (B), the menu display unit 481 is changed to the name display unit 487 of the cooperative cooking menu showing "karaage" which is one of the cooperative cooking menus.

In FIG. 135 (A), 490 is a caution information display unit as an initial screen. At the time before the start of operation, the heating chamber 113 may have already become hot due to the heat of the previous cooking, and FIG. 135 (A) is an example of calling attention to this.
It also shows that the power is already on.

491M is a selection unit (icon) of the central operation unit 40M. By operating the central operation unit 40M, cooking can be performed with a heating source other than the induction heating source 9 as described in the first embodiment.

491L is a selection unit (icon) of the left operation unit 40L. 491R is a selection unit (icon) of the right operation unit 40R.
Reference numeral 492 is an advice display selection unit (icon). When this is touched, the voice synthesizer 95 or the integrated display unit 30 notifies the reference information of the operation according to the touched scene.

The FG indicates the fingertip of the user.
In FIGS. 135 (A) and 135 (B) and other figures, the triangular marks (icons) 501 and 502 are screen switching marks. Further, there is a screen switching mark 503 in FIG. 136 (B). When these marks are touched, the display screen 480 can be switched in a fixed order each time the marks are touched. Incidentally, when the screen switching mark 502 is touched in FIG. 135 (B), the display screen 480 moves to the right, and the next display screen 480 is switched by an image appearing from the left side.

The screen switching marks 501 to 503 may be omitted by having the scroll function of moving the fingertip FG while touching the display screen 480 and accompanyingly moving the display screen to switch the screen. ..

In FIG. 135 (A), when the left operation unit selection unit (icon) 491L is touched, the screen is switched to the display screen 480 shown in FIG. 135 (B) without touching the screen switching marks 501 to 504.

In FIG. 135 (B), 493 is a control menu display unit (icon) of the IH single cooking mode.
There are a total of eight control menus for the IH single cooking mode. Five of them are displayed on the right half of the display screen 480 of FIG. 135 (B). The control menu display unit (icon) 493 is "boiled water", "boiled", "rice cooked", "boiled water + heat retention", and "cooperative cooking".

Further, the remaining three control menus are displayed on the left half of the display screen 480. There are three types: a control menu display unit (icon) 488 for "heat retention", a control menu display unit (icon) 494 for "fried food", and a control menu display unit (icon) 489 for "preheating".

In FIG. 135 (B), 495 is a menu screen display unit (icon) that selects to return to the first menu display screen.
Reference numeral 496 is an input confirmation display unit (icon) for confirming that one control menu (for example, “boiler”) in FIG. 135 (B) has been selected. When this is pressed, for example, in the case of the above-mentioned "boiler", the screen automatically switches to the control condition setting screen for boiler.

Next, FIG. 136 (A) will be described.
Reference numeral 497 is an induction heating source selection unit (icon) for selecting a heating source such as the left heating unit 17HL, the right heating unit 17HR, and the induction heating source 189.

In FIG. 136 (A), 498 is a range grill heating source selection unit (icon), and 499 is a cooperative cooking selection unit (icon).
In FIG. 136 (A), when the range grill heating source selection unit (icon) 498 is touched, the display screen changes to the display screen 480 in FIG. 136 (B).

Next, FIG. 136 (B) will be described.
Reference numeral 500 denotes an RG control menu selection unit (icon) indicating a range grill (RG) control menu. There are a total of 10 range grill (RG) control menus such as "warm", "range manual", and "meat thawing".

In FIG. 136 (B), 497A is an induction heating source selection unit (icon) that selects the left heating unit 17HL. Reference numeral 497B is a selection unit (icon) of the right heating unit 17HR.

Reference numeral 497C is a selection unit (icon) for selecting the microwave induction heating source 189.
When the screen switching mark (icon) 503 is touched in FIG. 136 (B), the display screen 480 in FIG. 136 (B) changes to FIG. 137 (B).

Next, FIGS. 137 (A) and 137 (B) will be described.
FIGS. 137 (A) and 137 (B) show a state in which all (10 pieces) of the range grill (RG) control menu are displayed. FIG. 137 (A) shows five control menus 500, and FIG. 137 (B) shows the remaining five control menus 500.
The large arrows shown in FIGS. 137 (A) and 137 (B) indicate the rear and the front when the display screen 480 is horizontal. The display screen 480 does not hinder the operation whether it is in a horizontal state, a vertical state, or an oblique state.

Next, FIGS. 138 (A) and 138 (B) will be described.
FIG. 138 (A) shows a state in which the “warm” control menu 500 is selected from the range grill (RG) control menu in the state of FIG. 136 (A). When the fingertip touches the RG control menu selection unit (icon) 500, the selection unit 500 senses the touch and changes the display color, for example, inverts to white characters. When the input confirmation key display unit (icon) 496 is touched in the state of FIG. 138 (A), the display screen changes to the display screen 480 of FIG. 138 (B).

FIG. 138 (B) is the default screen of the range grill (RG) control menu.
Reference numeral 504 is a name display unit (icon) of the RG control menu.
The control menu display form and design of FIG. 138 (B) are similar to those shown in FIG. 48 and the like of the first embodiment. This display is possible because of the cooker database 468 and the remote control information generator 470 (see FIG. 134).

In FIG. 138 (B), 505 is a temperature display unit (icon) of the RG control menu. In the example of FIG. 138 (B), the default value is 80 ° C., but since there are 75 ° C. and 85 ° C. as the next candidates that can be selected, they are also displayed at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 138 (B), the next display candidates "oven" and "boiled leaf vegetables" are displayed slightly smaller on the name display unit (icon) 504 of the RG control menu. Will be done.

When the user wants to change the set temperature of the range to 75 ° C. in the state shown in FIG. 138 (B), the user may place the fingertip FG on the display portion of 75 ° C. This will be described with reference to FIG. 139. Also, when changing "warm" in the control menu to "oven" or "boiled leafy vegetables", the candidate switching mark (icon) 519 near "oven" or "boiled leafy vegetables" is also used. Just touch 520.

In FIG. 138 (B), reference numeral 506 is a reference image display unit. The reference image may be other than a photograph, and may be an illustration showing an image of "warming" in the control menu.

Next, FIGS. 139 (A) and 139 (B) will be described.
When the orientation of the personal digital assistant 418 is changed to the vertical direction, the display screen 480 changes vertically as shown in FIGS. 139 (A) and 139 (B). The display screen 480 may be set to be fixed to a vertically long display as shown in FIGS. 139 (A) and 139 (B).

Switching between FIG. 139 (A) and FIG. 139 (B) can be performed only by touching the screen switching mark (icon) 503.
Next, FIGS. 140 (A) and 140 (B) will be described. In order to select the "warm" control menu 500 shown in FIG. 139 (A), when the fingertip touches the control menu selection unit 500, the display color changes, for example, as shown in FIG. 140 (A). Invert to white text. When the input confirmation key display unit (icon) 496 is touched in the state of FIG. 140 (A), the display screen changes to the display screen 480 of FIG. 140 (B).

Next, in the state shown in FIG. 140 (B), when it is desired to change the (heating upper limit) set temperature of the "warming" range (microwave heating) to 75 ° C., the display portion (RG control) of 75 ° C. The fingertip FG may be placed on the temperature display unit 505) of the menu. Then, the display screen 480 changes to the state shown in FIG. 141 (A).

In FIG. 140 (B), reference numeral 507A is an auxiliary information display unit, which is displayed in the vicinity of the reference image display unit 506. In FIG. 139 (B), the user is advised to choose a set temperature.

Next, FIG. 141 (A) will be described.
As shown in FIG. 141 (A), the set temperature is changed to 75 ° C. Since it is still in the stage before the control conditions are determined, another set temperature of "85 ° C." is still displayed.

In the state of FIG. 141 (A), the transmission key display unit (icon) 521 of the remote control signal is displayed for the first time.
In FIG. 141 (A), when the transmission key display unit 521 is selected, the setting information displayed in FIG. 141 (A) is collectively transmitted to the cooking cooker 1 as remote control information. That is, since the state of FIG. 141 (B) is the stage where all the conditions for executing "warm" in the RG control menu have been selected, the condition of the heating temperature "75 ° C." displayed on the temperature display unit 505. Is transmitted to the cooker 1.

In FIG. 141 (A), 507B is an auxiliary information display unit, and is displayed in the vicinity of the reference image display unit 506. FIG. 141 (A) shows that the input operation is completed by pressing the transmission key display unit 521.

At the stage of FIG. 141 (B) when the remote control signal is finished, the stop key display unit (icon) 522 for stopping the heating operation by remote control is displayed for the first time. By pressing this, the heating operation at the stage shown in FIG. 141 (B) can be stopped. Once the stop key display unit 522 is pressed, all the remote control conditions are input again in order to return to the first stage.

The personal digital assistant 418 is provided with a stop key display unit (icon) 522 capable of immediately transmitting a command to lower the heating stop, and has a function for ensuring the safety of the cooking cooker 1.

Next, FIG. 142 (A) will be described. FIG. 142 (A) is a screen displayed when the cooperative cooking selection unit 499 shown in FIG. 136 (A) is touched. The display screen 480 of FIG. 142 (A) may be displayed by touching the central operation unit selection unit 491M of FIG. 135 (A). However, when the central operation unit selection unit 491M is touched, the touch operation until the cooperative cooking mode is selected is slightly increased because it is shared with the selection screen of the range grill cooking mode (composite cooking mode).

FIG. 142 (A) is an example of selecting “karaage” in one cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode.
Since I want to cook "karaage", when I touch the cooperative cooking menu display unit (selection unit) 500C, the display color changes, for example, it is inverted to white characters, as shown in FIG. 142 (A).

When the input confirmation key display unit (icon) 496 is touched in the state of FIG. 142 (A), the screen changes to the display screen (not shown) for cooking “karaage”. The display screen 480 of FIG. 143 (A) is a display screen showing the stage of the cooking step 1 of “karaage”.

Note that, in FIG. 142 (A), only the cooperative cooking menu is shown, and the subsequent diagram in which the heating unit and control conditions are selected is omitted. However, in the display screen 480 of FIG. 142 (A), the cooperative cooking menu is selected. If the part (icon) 500C is selected (touched), the screen advances to the display screen 480 for setting the selected cooking menu (for example, "karaage"). On the "karaage" setting display screen 480, icons for selecting the left and right heating units 17HL and 17HR as shown in FIG. 83 of the first embodiment are displayed, and the transmission key display unit (icon) 521 is displayed. Display it.

FIG. 143 (B) is an example of notification corresponding to "Reference information 1" FA1 notified by the cooking cooker 1 in the middle of the cooking process 1 when "Karaage" is cooked in the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode. be.

In the fifth embodiment, in the "first reference information" FA1 notified by the cooking device 1, the door of the heating chamber 113 is opened, and then the heating is performed, as shown in FIG. 142 (B). Two things are notified: taking out the heated food from the room 113.

Also on the display screen 480 of the personal digital assistant 418, as the contents corresponding to the reference information FA1 as described above, as shown in FIG. 142 (B), the preparatory work reference image 509 showing that the door is opened and the preparatory work reference image 509 are shown. A preparatory work reference image 510 showing that the food to be cooked is taken out together with the saucer is displayed.
Note that 511 is alert information. Further, 512 is auxiliary information explaining the work of the user.

Next, FIG. 143 (A) will be described. The display screen 480 of FIG. 143 (A) displays the stage of the cooking step 1 of “karaage”.
Reference numeral 513 is a process information display unit. In FIG. 143 (A), it is shown that the microwave oven heating is still continuing. Reference numeral 514 is a display unit for the next cooking process information. In the example of this figure, it is shown that induction heating is performed in the right heating unit 17HR next.

Reference numeral 515 is a display unit of the recommended menu. The display unit 515 may include a recommended cooking menu (another cooking) searched from the inventory information acquired in advance from the refrigerator 401. The example of FIG. 143 (A) suggests that there is another recommended cooking menu that can be cooked in the heating chamber 113 that is currently in use in "karaage" after it is no longer used.

Specifically, at the stage of FIG. 143 (A), the recommended menu is not automatically displayed. When the user touches the detailed display instruction unit (icon) 523 that is displayed for the first time at this stage, the details are displayed as shown in FIG. 143 (B).
The selection unit corresponding to the detailed display instruction unit (icon) 523 as shown in FIG. 143 (A) is not displayed on the integrated display unit 30 of the cooking cooker 1. Then, after a certain period of time, the screen automatically returns to the screen shown in FIG. 143 (A).

Even at the stage of FIG. 143 (B) when the remote control signal is finished, the stop key display unit (icon) 522 for stopping the heating operation by remote control is displayed.

In FIG. 143 (B), 487 is a name display unit of the cooperative cooking menu, and in this case, 516, in which “karaage” of the name of the object to be cooked is displayed, is a display unit of the recommended menu. The specific contents of the recommended menu are displayed on the display unit 515 of the recommended menu. We recommend thawing and warming the food.

In FIG. 143 (B), 517 is auxiliary information of the recommended menu, and it is displayed that cooking can be performed with the “warm” control menu using microwave heating.
518 is a cooking reference image of the recommended menu. Illustrations (images) may be used instead of photographs.
Even at the stage of FIG. 143 (B), the stop key display unit (icon) 522 for stopping the heating operation by remote control is displayed.

Next, FIG. 144 (A) will be described. The display screen 480 of FIG. 144 (A) is in a state where the cooking step 1 of “karaage” has been completed and the transition stage TR has been entered.
Reference numeral 513 is a process information display unit. In FIG. 143 (A), it is indicated that the microwave oven heating is completed. Reference numeral 514 is a display unit for the next cooking process information. In the example of this figure, it is shown that induction heating is performed in the right heating unit 17HR next.

Reference numeral 515 is a display unit of the recommended menu. In the display unit 515, when there is a recommended cooking menu (another cooking) searched from the inventory information acquired in advance from the refrigerator 401, the recommended cooking menu is displayed as shown in FIG. 144 (A). It shows that there is.

When the detailed display instruction unit (icon) 523 displayed on the display screen 480 of FIG. 144 (A) is touched, it is executed in parallel with the cooking step 2 in the heating chamber 113 as shown in FIG. 144 (B). Display the details of possible cooking menu candidates.
The selection unit corresponding to the detailed display instruction unit (icon) 523 as shown in FIG. 144 (A) may also be displayed on the integrated display unit 30 of the cooking cooker 1. However, when the display screen of the integrated display unit 30 is not a touch type input method, it is necessary to display that an appropriate input key is pressed.

When the input confirmation key display unit (icon) 496 of FIG. 144 (B) is pressed, information on the recommended cooking menu (another cooking) using the heating chamber 113 is transmitted to the cooking cooker 1. .. That is, the intention of "agreeing with the recommended menu" is transmitted to the user who is cooking in front of the cooking device 1. In this case, the owner of the personal digital assistant 418 may not be in the kitchen KT and may be notified of the recommended cooking menu (another cooking). That is, at that moment, another user may be in front of the cooking device 1. In any case, the user can know that cooking can be performed in parallel by effectively using the heating chamber 113.

In the above description, the signal from the mobile information terminal 418 reaches the cooking cooker 1 via the wide area communication network 416, but it has an NFC input / output unit 472 for short-range wireless communication. Therefore, it may be directly approached or brought into contact with the NFC input / output unit (not shown) on the side of the cooking cooker 1 for input.

Summary of Embodiment 5.
As is clear from the above description, in the fifth embodiment, the following cooking cooker 1 is disclosed.
That is,
A heating chamber 113 whose opening is closed by a door 114 so as to be openable and closable.
A microwave heating source 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113,
An oven heating source 188 that heats the heating chamber 113,
An induction heating source 9 that heats the object to be heated placed on the top plate 15 and
Notification unit AN30 that notifies information about the cooking process,
A wireless communication unit 49 that wirelessly transmits cooking control information to the outside and receives information from the outside.
It has an integrated control device MC that controls the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, the induction heating source 9, and the notification unit AN.
The integrated control device MC has a cooperative cooking mode in which one or both of the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source are driven in cooperation with each other.
The cooperative cooking mode includes a cooking step 1 using at least one of the microwave heating source and the oven heating source, and a cooking step 2 using the induction heating source 9.
The integrated control device automatically advances the cooking process 1, and after the completion of the first cooking process, starts the cooking process 2 in response to a user's start command, and automatically performs the second cooking process. It ’s something that goes on,
The integrated control device MC is used in the middle of the cooking step 1.
(1) Reference information FA1 regarding the cooking process 1 and
(2) Using the heating chamber 113 occupied in the cooking step 1, reference information FA1 regarding another cooking that can be executed in parallel with the cooking step 2 is provided.
The notification unit was configured to automatically notify the stage of the cooking process 1 or the transition period TR.

Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, it can be expected that the convenience of the user is further improved as compared with the first embodiment.

Further, in the cooking device 1, the input operation for starting the cooking is started after the main power is turned on, and the input is not completed yet from the external portable information terminal 418. The remote control signal is enabled (Fig. 132, see step SX5).

Therefore, there is a situation in which the remote control signal from the outside is interrupted while the user is inputting with the input operation unit 40 on the cooking cooker 1 side, and the input halfway is wasted. No. In addition, it does not cause confusion for users who are actually cooking in front of the cooker 1.

Further, also on the display screen 480 of the personal digital assistant 418, as the content corresponding to the reference information FA1 as described above, as shown in FIG. 142 (B), the preparatory work reference image 509 showing that the door is opened. And the preparatory work reference image 510 showing that the food to be cooked is taken out together with the saucer is displayed.

Therefore, even if there is no user or resident who possesses the portable information terminal 418 in the vicinity of the cooking cooker 1, the user can obtain useful information that can effectively use the cooking cooker 1 in a timely manner. be able to. That is, it is possible to prepare in advance the work required when the current cooking process is completed, to re-recognize the procedure for shifting to the next cooking process, and to further improve the convenience of the user.

In the fifth embodiment, the portable information terminal 418 has a function of transmitting a "remote control signal" to the cooking device 1.
Correspondingly, the cooking cooker 1 had a function of receiving the "remote control signal".

When the wireless communication unit 49 receives a remote control signal (external input) from the outside, the cooking cooker 1 determines whether or not the predetermined "permission condition" is satisfied, and determines that the permission condition is satisfied. Only in the case, I tried to proceed to the step of the cooperative cooking mode according to the remote control signal (external input).
Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which cooking is interrupted due to insufficient power or cooking fails due to insufficient heating power (heating) in the middle of the cooking process of cooperative cooking without satisfying the permission conditions.

Furthermore, whether or not to start the heating operation even if the remote control signal is received is left to the judgment and input of the user who is finally facing the cooking cooker 1, and the wrong remote control signal from the outside is used. There is no danger that heating will be inadvertently (unconditionally) started against the will of the user or resident.

It is difficult to imagine a scene in which a user holding a personal digital assistant 418 transmits remote control information from a remote location far away from the cooker 1, but in the same kitchen KT, the personal digital assistant 418 Can be placed on a table or the like and operated by the user.

By the way, as described in the fifth embodiment, the display screen (display design) of the integrated display unit 30 and the display screen 480 of the personal digital assistant 418 in the combined cooking mode and the cooperative cooking mode of the cooking cooker 1 are There are many similarities in terms of cooking menu display, default value display of control conditions, and changes. Therefore, in the work performed by the user while checking the display screen 480 of the personal digital assistant 418, there is no great sense of discomfort and the burden of remote control input by the user is small.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 140 (B) and 141 (A) (B), cooking is performed at the stage of determining the cooking menu and control conditions (temperature, thermal power, etc.) on the display screen 480 of the portable information terminal 418. The display design corresponds to the display screen of the second specific screen 30SC of the integrated display unit 30 of the device 1.

Therefore, the display screen 480 of the personal digital assistant 418 and the display screens of the second specific screen 30SC and the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30 of the cooking cooker 1 correspond to each other at the stage of important input items. Since the design is (approximate), even a user who is accustomed to using the input operation unit 40 of the cooking cooker 1 does not feel uncomfortable with the operation of the personal digital assistant 418, and there is no concern that the operability of the user will be impaired. Conversely, a user who is accustomed to the operation of the portable information terminal 418 does not impair the operability of the input operation unit 40 of the actual cooking device 1.

In the fifth embodiment, the portable information terminal 418 has a function of manually inputting a "remote operation signal" to the cooking device 1 in the portable information terminal 418 and transmitting the input result. The recipe information held in the external server 417 may be acquired and used as a remote operation signal.

As shown in FIG. 45 of the first embodiment, the standby display screen 2A at startup displays two-dimensional information (two-dimensional code) that guides the user to a dedicated recipe site (one of the external servers).
By reading the two-dimensional information with the personal digital assistant 418, you can connect to the recipe site, so you can browse various cooking recipes (procedure manuals for cooking methods, data, etc.) and easily download the data. You can do it.

Therefore, by step SX5 of FIG. 132, the recipe data is acquired by the personal digital assistant 418, and the control data such as the heating power (heating intensity) and the heating time included in the data are transmitted to the cooking device 1. Just do it. In that case, the recipe data is in a format in which the contents can be analyzed in steps SX10 and SX11 of FIG. 132.

(Modified Example of Embodiment 5)
FIG. 145 shows a modified example of the fifth embodiment, and shows an operation management system of the cooking cooker 1 and the home electric appliance 400. FIG. 146 is a display operation explanatory diagram 1 in the portable information terminal of FIG. 145. FIG. 147 is a display operation explanatory view 2 in the portable information terminal of FIG. 145.

The external server 417 is a plurality of aggregates that perform different information processing. The operation manager of the external server 417 may be the same or different. For example, one external server may provide useful information to the alarm device 441 or the temperature monitoring device 440.

In this modification, the portable information terminal 418 can be directly wirelessly communicated with the cooker 1. Further, the cooking cooker 1 and the portable information terminal 418 are significantly different from the fifth embodiment in that they can be automatically connected to each other when they are within a communicable range.

In FIG. 145, the communication method between the personal digital assistant 418 and the cooker 1 uses Bluetooth (registered trademark), which is one of the short-range wireless communication standards, and is also portable. A wireless LAN communication method such as WiFi (registered trademark) is used between the information terminal 418 and the router 530.

First, the personal digital assistant 418 performs mutual authentication with the cooking device 1. The cooking cooker 1 has a function setting input key 43KP, which is operated at the first startup to display a mutual authentication setting screen from the function setting menu to perform mutual authentication.

Further, the application software for the cooker 1 is stored in advance in the cooker database 468 or the storage unit 467 of the personal digital assistant 418.

When a signal for automatic connection is transmitted from the mobile information terminal 418 when the cooker 1 is activated, mutual communication for automatic connection is performed between the cooker 1 and the personal digital assistant 418. ..

Even if a connection command means (not shown) for commanding wireless communication at an arbitrary timing is provided as in the input key 47 (see FIG. 19) described in the first embodiment and operated when the cooking cooker 1 is started. good. For example, the connection command means (not shown) may be operated at the stage of steps SX2 to SX4 shown in FIG. 132.

When the connection between the cooking cooker 1 and the portable information terminal 418 is established as described above, the state in which the heating cooker 1 and the portable information terminal 418 can directly and wirelessly communicate with each other continues. If the mobile information terminal 418 moves and the distance from the cooking device 1 increases, communication may be temporarily disabled, but when the communication range (distance) is restored, the connection status is automatically changed. Recover.

Further, after the cooking step 1 or the preheating step is started in the state where the connection between the cooking device 1 and the portable information terminal 418 is established, the cooking step 1 or the portable information terminal 418 If the mutual wireless communication state between them is interrupted for a certain period of time or longer, an alarm is issued on both the cooking cooker 1 side and the portable information terminal 418 side.
After this alarm, the cooking cooker 1 is automatically held in a state where the heating power value at that time is lowered by one step or two steps.
To release this holding state, a specific partial input key of the input operation unit 40 of the cooking cooker 1 may be touched (the input key 47 described with reference to FIG. 19 may be touched). As a result, the integrated control device MC of the cooking device 1 has confirmed the existence of the user.

Further, the cooking device 1 is in a connected state established with the portable information terminal 418 even when the user stops the heating operation in the middle of each of the preheating process, the cooking process 1, and the cooking process 2. Does not shut off automatically.

Further, even during the transition period TR, the cooking cooker 1 does not automatically cut off the connection state established with the personal digital assistant 418.

When the cooking cooker 1 shuts off the main power switch 97, it automatically shuts off the connection state established with the personal digital assistant 418. After that, when the main power switch 97 is closed again and the cooking cooker 1 is started, if it is desired to connect to the portable information terminal 418 again, it is necessary to perform the specified operation again. For example, as described above, the input key 47 may be pressed during standby (before the start of the heating start operation).

According to this modification, the operating state of the cooker 1 is transmitted to the personal digital assistant 418 at any time (in real time), so that the user temporarily moves away from the cooker 1 and moves in the kitchen KT. Even if you move to another living space temporarily, if you have a personal digital assistant 418, you can know the latest cooking status.

If the personal digital assistant 418 has a function that can transmit the minimum remote control signal for ensuring safety, such as a command to stop heating or reduce the heating power, it will heat even if the user is in a remote position. It is possible to stop the operation of the cooker 1 or reduce it to the minimum heating power without going through the external wide area communication network 416.

In the wide area communication network 416, it is assumed that a communication failure may occur temporarily for some reason. On the other hand, in this modified example, since the wide area communication network 416 is not interposed between the cooking cooker 1 and the portable information terminal 418, reliable information transfer can be expected.

Next, FIG. 146 (A) will be described. This is an improvement of the display screen 480 of the cooperative cooking menu described with reference to FIG. 142 (A).
For example, when the cooperative cooking menu display unit (selection unit) 500C for selecting "karaage" is touched, the display color changes as shown in FIG. 146 (A), and the characters are inverted to white characters, for example.

On the display screen 480 of FIG. 146 (A), a key display unit (icon) 524 for a search request for acquiring inventory information of the refrigerator 401 is displayed. When the key display unit 524 is touched, the screen changes to the display screen shown in FIG. 146 (B). On the display screen 480 of FIG. 146 (B), whether or not there are ingredients for the cooking menu to be eaten together with "karaage" is easily displayed by the display unit 525. Reference numeral 526 is a key display unit (icon) for returning to the display screen 480 of FIG. 146 (A).

Next, FIG. 147 (A) will be described. This is an improvement of the display screen 480 of the RG control menu described with reference to FIG. 140 (A).
For example, when the RG control menu selection unit (icon) 500 for selecting "warm" is touched, the display color changes as shown in FIG. 146 (A), and the characters are highlighted, for example, in white characters.

On the display screen 480 of FIG. 147 (A), the key display unit (icon) 527 for the search request is displayed. When the key display unit 527 is touched, the screen changes to the display screen shown in FIG. 147 (B). On the display screen 480 of FIG. 147 (B), whether or not there is an ingredient in the cooking menu suitable for "warming" is easily displayed by the display unit 528. Reference numeral 529 is a key display unit (icon) for returning to the display screen 480 of FIG. 147 (A).

In addition, after the use (occupancy) of the heating chamber 113 is completed in the cooking step 1, the food material information in the cooperative cooking mode in which the inventory information is obtained in order to effectively utilize the heating chamber 113 and the food material information as shown in FIG. 147. The purpose of use is different in the ingredient information when the RG control menu is selected. In the search when the RG control menu is selected, the condition "Are there ingredients for the cooking menu to be eaten with the hamburger steak?", Which was one of the search conditions for cooperative cooking, is not necessary, so it is extracted from the search results. Ingredient information will increase.

Therefore, the features of the RG control menu, for example, foodstuffs that are effective by simultaneously utilizing the microwave heating and the radiant heat of the oven heating source 188, for example, frozen meat (compared to microwave heating alone), are further added. It is also possible to set conditions in advance for ingredients that can be thawed deliciously in a short time, and to check the inventory of the refrigerator 401 under such conditions.

As shown in FIG. 145, the electric energy control unit (HEMS) 448, the temperature monitoring device 440, and the alarm device 441 are connected to the router by a wireless LAN such as WiFi (registered trademark) as described above. Connected by communication method.

The refrigerator 401 and the portable information terminal 418 may also be changed to a form capable of mutual communication, such as between the cooking device 1 and the cooking device 1. In this way, the personal digital assistant 418 can acquire inventory information from the refrigerator 401, and the personal digital assistant 418 can extract and provide a useful cooking menu to the cooking cooker 1. Even in this case, the inventory information of the refrigerator 401 may be transmitted to the external server 417, and the inventory information may be analyzed by using the specialized information processing capability of the external server 417. Then, the portable information terminal 418 may be a system that acquires and provides useful cooking menu information to the cooking cooker 1 from the external server 417.

In this modification, when the user holding the personal digital assistant 418 is far away from the cooking cooker 1, mutual communication with the cooking cooker 1 becomes impossible. If you want to exchange information with the cooker 1 at a remote location, connect to the access point of the wide area communication network 416.

(Other related disclosure)
In addition to the above embodiments, the characteristic configurations will be disclosed as follows.

(1) Part 1:
The first heating means (induction heating source) 9 and
A second heating means (microwave heating source) 189 for cooking in the heating chamber 113 provided inside the main body 110, and
A control unit (integrated control device) MC that controls the first heating means 9 and the second heating means, and
Display means (integrated display unit 30, left side display unit 31L, right side display unit 31R)
It is equipped with an input operation unit 40 that accepts input from the user.
The control unit MC has a cooperative cooking program that executes a cooperative control mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are driven with a time lag to perform one cooking.
The control unit MC is a composite cooking cooker characterized in that it determines whether or not a permission condition for shifting to the cooperative cooking mode is satisfied before starting the heating operation in the cooperative control mode.

Further, the cooperative cooking program is a cooking step 1 in which one of the first heating means and the second heating means is used, and a cooking step in which the other is used and is performed after the cooking step 1. Combined cooking cooker having 2 and.

Further, the control unit MC is a composite cooking cooker having a configuration in which the display means displays a display for requesting an input necessary for shifting to the cooperative cooking mode when the permission condition is satisfied.
Further, the control unit MC is a composite cooking cooker having a configuration in which the first specific screen 30SP for the cooperative cooking mode is displayed by the display means when the permission condition is satisfied.

According to the cooking cooker having the above configuration, a highly convenient cooking cooker capable of supporting a wide variety of cooking using three heating means can be obtained.
Further, since the cooperative cooking mode can be executed only when the permission condition is satisfied, it is possible to prevent the cooperative cooking from being inadvertently stopped or restricted at a stage not intended by the user.

(2) Part 2:
A main body 110 having a top plate 15 and a built-in heating chamber 113,
A first heating means (induction heating source) 9 for heating an object to be heated placed on the top plate 15 and
A second heating means (microwave heating source) 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113, and
An integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means and the second heating means, and
An input operation unit 40 that gives a command to the integrated control device MC, and
Display means ((integrated display unit 30, left side display unit 31L, right side display unit 31R) and
A door 114 that opens and closes the opening of the heating chamber 113 so as to be openable and closable.
A door closing detection unit 139 for detecting the opening of the door 114 is provided.
The integrated control device MC has a function of executing a cooperative cooking mode in which a cooking step 1 using the first heating means and a cooking step 2 using the second heating means are sequentially performed.
The integrated control device MC determines whether or not the permission condition is satisfied before starting the heating operation in the cooperation cooking mode, and if the permission condition is satisfied, permits the transition to the cooperation cooking mode. death,
When the integrated control device MC receives a command to start the cooperative cooking mode, the integrated control device MC starts the cooking step 1 regardless of the door opening / closing signal from the door closing detection unit 139.
The integrated control device MC starts the cooking step 2 when the cooking step 1 is completed, when the door 114 is closed, and when a command to start the cooking step 2 is received. A complex type cooking cooker characterized by

Further, the integrated control device MC determines whether or not the permission condition is satisfied before starting the heating operation in the cooperation cooking mode, and if the permission condition is satisfied, the transition to the cooperation cooking mode is performed. Allow
When the integrated control device MC receives a command to shift to the cooperative cooking mode, the integrated control device MC can start the cooking step 1 regardless of the door opening / closing signal from the door closing detection unit.
The control unit MC starts the cooking step 2 when the cooking step 1 is completed, when the door 114 is closed, and when a command to start the cooking step 2 is received. ,
When the integrated control device C detects a state in which the door 114 is once opened and then closed by a signal from the door closing detection unit, and then receives a command to execute the combined cooking mode, the integrated control device C receives a command. A composite cooking cooker configured to execute the combined cooking mode.

Further, when the door 114 is closed at the end of the cooking step 1, the integrated control device MC subsequently detects that the door 114 is once opened, and then closes the door 114. A combined cooking cooker characterized in that when a command to start the cooking step 2 is received in the cooked state, the cooking step 2 is started.

According to the cooking cooker having these configurations, a highly convenient cooking cooker capable of supporting a wide variety of cooking by using the microwave heating source 189 in combination can be obtained.
Further, when the command to shift to the cooperative cooking mode is received, the cooking step 1 of the cooperative cooking mode can be started regardless of the opening and closing of the door. However, it is possible to avoid cooking efficiently.

(3) Part 3:
A first heating means (induction heating source) 9 for heating the object to be heated from below in the upper part of the main body 110,
A second heating means (microwave heating source) 189 for heating the heating chamber 113 arranged inside the main body 110, and
A third heating means (oven heating source) 188 for heating the heating chamber 113,
Input operation unit 40 and
An integrated control device MC for controlling the first, second, and third heating means, respectively, is provided.
The first heating means 9 has a right heating portion 17HR on the upper right side portion of the main body 110 and a left heating portion 17HL on the left side portion.
The input operation unit 40 includes the right heating unit 17HR, the dedicated operation units 40L and 40R of the left heating unit 17HL, and the common operation unit 40M of the first, second, and third heating means.
The control unit MC has a function of performing a cooperative cooking mode in which the group of the second heating means 189, the third heating means 188, and the first heating means 9 are driven with a time lag. death,
The integrated control device MC further has a function of performing a combined cooking mode in which the second heating means 189 and the third heating means 188 are driven simultaneously or automatically with a time lag.
The shared operation unit 40M is a composite cooking cooker including a selection means (43MC, 43M1) for selecting either the cooperative cooking mode or the combined cooking mode.

According to this configuration, the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking can be easily started by using the shared operation unit 40M. That is, it is possible to realize a highly convenient composite cooking cooker equipped with three heating sources and capable of supporting a wide range of control menus without impairing the operability of the user.

Further, the input operation unit 40 includes the first operation units 40L and 40R dedicated to the first heating means 9, and the second operation unit 40M2 shared by the second heating means 189 and the third heating means 188. Have,
The two groups of the first heating means 9, the second heating means 189, and the third heating means 188 are started to be driven, and the time difference is the first operation units 40L, 40R and the said. Disclosed is a composite type cooking cooker characterized in that the second operation unit 40M2 can be adjusted according to the timing of operation by the user.

According to this configuration, the user can freely set a cooking pause period between the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 in the cooperative cooking mode, and confirm the finished state of cooking in the cooking process 1 and for the cooking process 2. Preparatory work can be performed.

(4) Part 4:
The first heating means 9 that heats the object to be heated from below in the upper part of the main body 110,
A second heating means 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113 arranged inside the main body, and
A third heating means 188 for heating the heating chamber 113, and
Input operation unit 40 and
Multiple display means 30, 31L, 31R,
An integrated control device MC for controlling the first, second, and third heating means, respectively, is provided.
The first heating means 9 has a right heating portion 17HR on the upper right side portion of the main body 110 and a left heating portion 17HL on the left side portion.
The display means 30 includes the right heating unit 17HR, the dedicated display units 31L and 31R of the left heating unit 17HL, and the integrated display unit 30 shared by the first, second, and third heating means. ,
The integrated control device MC has a function of performing a cooperative cooking mode in which the group of the second heating means 189, the third heating means 188, and the first heating means 9 are driven with a time lag. Have and
The integrated control device MC further has a function of performing a combined cooking mode in which the second heating means 189 and the third heating means 188 are driven simultaneously or automatically with a time lag.
The integrated display unit 30 or the dedicated display units 31L and 31R display the first specific screen 30SP of the cooperative cooking mode and the second specific of the combined cooking mode according to the selection of the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode. A composite cooking cooker, characterized in that the screen 30SC and the screen 30SC are displayed alternately, has been disclosed.

According to this configuration, the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking can be confirmed on the first specific screen and the second specific screen, respectively. That is, it is possible to realize a highly convenient composite cooking cooker that can use the three heating sources individually or in combination without impairing the operability of the user and can support a wide range of control menus.

(5) Part 5:
The first heating means 9 that heats the object to be heated from below in the upper part of the main body 110,
A second heating means 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113 inside the main body 110, and
A third heating means 188 for heating the heating chamber 113, and
Cooking mode selection means 43MC, 43M1, 43L5, 43R5,
Multiple display means 30, 31L, 31R,
An integrated control device MC for controlling the first, second, and third heating means 9, 189, and 188, respectively, is provided.
The first heating means 9 has a right heating portion 17HR on the upper right side portion of the main body 110 and a left heating portion 17hL on the left side portion.
The display means includes the right heating unit, the dedicated display units 31L and 31R of the left heating unit, and the integrated display unit 30 shared by the first, second, and third heating means.
The integrated control device MC is
(1) A single cooking mode in which the first, second, and third heating means 9, 189, and 188 are individually driven.
(2) A cooperative cooking mode in which the group of the second heating means 189, the third heating means 188, and the first heating means 9 are driven with a time lag.
(3) A combined cooking mode in which the second heating means 189 and the third heating means 188 are driven simultaneously or automatically with a time lag.
Has the function of
In order to input or confirm control conditions to the display means 30, 31L, 31R according to one cooking mode selected by the selection means from the single cooking mode, the cooperative cooking mode, and the combined cooking mode. A composite cooking cooker characterized in displaying 30SP, 30SPL, and 30SPR on a specific screen of 30SP.

According to this configuration, the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking can confirm the contents of the control conditions displayed on the first and second specific screens 30SP and 30SC. That is, three heating sources can be used individually or in combination without impairing the operability of the user, and a highly convenient composite cooking cooker capable of supporting a wide range of control menus can be realized.

(6) Part 6:
A first heating means (induction heating source) 9 that heats the object to be heated from below in the upper part of the main body,
A second heating means (microwave heating source) 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113 arranged inside the main body 110, and
A third heating means (oven heating source) 188 for heating the heating chamber, and
Input operation unit 40 and
An integrated control device MC for controlling the first, second, and third heating means, respectively, is provided.
The input operation unit 40 includes dedicated operation units 40L and 40R for the first heating means and shared operation units 40M (40M2) for the first, second and third heating means.
The control unit MC has a function of performing a cooperative cooking mode in which the group of the second heating means 189, the third heating means 188, and the first heating means 9 are driven with a time lag. death,
The integrated control device MC further has a function of performing a combined cooking mode in which the second heating means 189 and the third heating means 188 are used in combination or automatically switched.
The shared operation unit 40M (40M2) includes a first selection means (43MC) for selecting the cooperative cooking mode and a second selection means (43M1) for selecting the combined cooking mode.
When the input operation of the first selection means 9 is performed before the second selection means (43M1) after the main power is supplied to the integrated control device MC (the first specific screen 30SP is displayed). (Displayed) The input process of the cooperative cooking mode is started,
When the input operation of the second selection means 189 is performed before the first selection means (43MC) after the main power is supplied, the composite (the second specific screen 30SC is displayed). Disclosed is a composite cooker, characterized in that a cooking mode input process is initiated.

According to this configuration, the contents of the control conditions can be confirmed through the first and second specific screens 30SP and 30SC in the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking centering on the shared operation unit 40M (40M2). That is, by operating the various selection means of the shared operation unit 40M (40M2), the user can use the three heating sources individually or in combination, and is highly convenient combined heating that can support a wide range of control menus. A cooker can be realized.

Further, on the upper surface of the main body 110, a display means 30 is further provided adjacent to the shared operation unit 40M (40M2).
The shared operation unit 40M (40M2) arranges the second selection means (43M1) next to the first selection means (43MC).
A third selection means (43M2) is provided on the side opposite to the first selection means (43MC) with the second selection means in between.
In the cooperative cooking mode, the first selection means (43MC) causes the display means 30 to display a plurality of cooperative cooking modes, and the second selection means (43M1) selects one cooperative cooking mode. The third selection means (43M2) has an input step of selecting the control conditions of the cooperative cooking mode or the heating unit of the first heating means.
In the combined cooking mode, the second selection means (43M1) causes the display means 30 to display the combined cooking mode, and the third selection means (43M2) selects the control conditions for the combined cooking mode. It was a structure having a process.

With these configurations, while using one shared operation unit 40M (40M2), the first selection means (43MC) and the second selection means (43M1) are operated according to the order in which they are operated first. You can select between the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode. Therefore, even in a situation where a large space for the operation unit cannot be secured, it is possible to realize a highly convenient composite cooking cooker that can support a wide range of control menus by sharing the operation unit.

(7) Part 7:
A first heating means (induction heating source) 9 for heating the object to be heated from below in the upper part of the main body 110,
A second heating means (microwave heating source) 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113 arranged inside the main body, and
A third heating means (oven heating source) 188 for heating the heating chamber, and
Input operation unit 40 and
Display means (integrated display unit 30, left side display unit 31L, right side display unit 31R)
An integrated control device MC for controlling the first, second, and third heating means 9, 189, and 188, respectively, is provided.
The integrated control device MC has a function of performing a cooperative cooking mode in which the group of the second heating means 189, the third heating means 188, and the first heating means 9 are driven with a time lag. Have and
The integrated control device MC further has a function of performing a combined cooking mode in which the second heating means 189 and the third heating means 188 are simultaneously driven, driven with a time lag, or automatically switched.
The operation unit 40 selects the combined cooking mode with the third selection means 43L1 and 43R1 for selecting the first heating means 9, the first selection means 43MC for selecting the cooperative cooking mode, and the second. With a selection means 43M1
After the main power is supplied, the integrated control device MC displays the initial screen (see FIG. 45) at a stage where none of the first, second, and third selection means 9, 189, and 188 can be selected. Displayed on the means (integrated display unit 30, left side display unit 31L, right side display unit 31R),
When the input operation of the first selection means 43MC is started before the third selection means 43L1 and 43R1 and the second selection means 43M1 after the initial screen is displayed, the cooperative cooking mode The first specific screen 30SP for input is displayed,
After the main power is supplied, the integrated control device MC starts the input operation of the third selection means 43L1 and 43R1 and the second selection means 43M1 before the first selection means 43MC. When the cooking mode is used, the second specific screen 30SC for inputting the combined cooking mode is displayed.

According to this configuration, the first to third selection means 43L1, 43R1, 43MC, 43M1 displayed on the display means (integrated display unit 30, left side display unit 31L, right side display unit 31R) are mainly used independently ( The cooking mode (heating), the cooperative cooking mode, and the combined cooking mode can be executed respectively. Therefore, the three heating sources can be used alone or in combination, and a highly convenient composite cooking cooker capable of supporting a wide range of cooking menus can be realized.

Other embodiments.
In the first embodiment, with respect to the induction heating source 9 first used in the (first) cooperative control mode (see FIG. 54), the operation other than the cooperative control mode is prohibited or restricted from the input operation unit 40. The left heating unit 17HL and the right heating unit 17HR were used, but another induction heating unit may be added to the target.

Further, in the second cooperative control mode (see FIG. 54), the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, or both of them are driven at the same time to start the cooking process. In this case, the microwave heating source is used. The operation of the 189, the oven heating source 188, or both in a cooking mode other than the cooperative cooking mode may be prohibited or restricted. In both the first cooperative cooking mode and the second cooperative cooking mode, by preferentially securing the heating source required in the cooking process, a wide range of cooking using a plurality of heating means can be performed in the cooperative cooking mode. ..

In the description of the first to fifth embodiments, when the integrated control device MC receives the input for selecting the combined cooking mode or the linked cooking mode, the display operation corresponding to the combined cooking mode or the linked cooking mode is performed. The first display screen 30SP dedicated to the cooperative cooking mode is displayed, or the second display screen 30SC dedicated to the combined cooking mode is displayed on the integrated display unit 30, the left side display unit 31L, or the like.
Instead of such an aspect of switching the entire screen, the basic configuration of the first display screen 30SP and the second display screen 30SC may be unified, and the design may clearly distinguish between the combined cooking mode and the cooperative cooking mode. good.

For example, on the first display screen 30SP, it is clearly displayed in characters that the cooperative cooking mode is displayed, while on the second display screen 30SC, it is clearly displayed in characters that the combined cooking mode is displayed. Just do it. This makes it even easier to distinguish between the two display screens.

Further, a light emitting display unit such as the light emitting display unit 27L described in the first embodiment is provided in each of the display units of the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode, and when one of them emits light, the light emitting display unit is provided. It suffices to know that the cooking mode is on the light emitting side.

As described above, when the integrated control device MC receives the input for selecting the combined cooking mode or the linked cooking mode, and performs the display operation corresponding to the combined cooking mode or the linked cooking mode, such a case is performed. A cooking mode display unit (light emitting unit) may be provided.

The cooperative cooking mode is not limited to being composed of the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2. For example, the purpose is to make up for the lack of heating by finally returning the food to be cooked in which the cooking step 1 is performed in the left heating portion 17HL of the induction heating source 9 and the cooking step 2 is performed in the microwave heating source 189 onto the top plate 15. , A cooking step 3 is provided for the purpose of adjusting, adding seasonings and other cooking liquids, and the like.

As one example, the final cooking is finished while directly visually checking on the right heating unit 17HR. In other words, it is a case where the food to be cooked, which is substantially completed in the cooking step 2, is transferred onto the right heating unit 17HR and weakly heated for a long time to increase the maturity of ingredients such as meat and vegetables and broth.

In the above description, in the cooperative cooking mode, when one cooking menu (for example, hamburger steak) is specified, the heating source to be used and the order thereof are automatically determined, but the user's intention is prioritized. May be changed to.

For example, "Cooking object X" and "Cooking object Y", which are one of the cooperative cooking modes, are relatively frequently used by the user, and both of them are used in the cooking process 1 in the right heating unit 17HR. Since it is performed in, it is assumed that the user is accustomed to cooking in the right heating unit 17HR.

After that, when the user selects "Cooking object Z" which is one of the cooperative cooking modes, if the left heating unit 17HL is specified, the user is not accustomed to using it normally, so it is assumed that the operation may be confused. NS.

Therefore, if there is no problem with either the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL from the judgment result of the permission condition by the integrated control device MC, when the linked cooking mode is first selected, the user can see on the first specific screen 30SP. The right heating unit 17HR that you are accustomed to may be displayed preferentially. That is, for example, when selecting the heating unit, the "right heating unit" may always be displayed, and then the user may input to specify the left heating unit 17HR.

On the other hand, if the heating unit desired by the user cannot be heated properly due to restrictions such as the heating power value for cooking the object to be cooked and the energization control pattern of induction heating, the operation of the integrated control device MC side is performed. If only the heating part specified in the program (default setting) can be cooked, it will not cause misuse or misunderstanding by the user. For example, when a heating unit having a relatively weak heating power such as the central heating unit 17HM is provided in addition to the left and right heating units 17HL and 17HR, if the user selects, the cooking cooker 1 side notifies the user. , It is good to give guidance to correct (move the object to be heated such as a pot to another heating part).

In the first embodiment, two are an internal path that passes through the inside of the heating chamber 113 after cooling the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 and an external path that passes through the outside of the heating chamber 113 after cooling the inverter circuit board 121. There was one, but this route may be replaced and changed as follows.
(1) Internal path: A path in which the inverter circuit board 121 is cooled by the outside air sucked from the second intake port 152F by the third cooling fan 128, the cooling air is introduced into the heating chamber 113, and the exhaust duct 102 is reached.
(2) External path: The heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 is cooled by the outside air sucked from the second intake port 152B by the fourth cooling fan 129, and the cooling air is guided to the outside of the heating chamber 113, and finally. The route leading to the exhaust duct 102.

Generally, the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 has a structure in which a plurality of heat radiating plates (heat radiating fins) are laminated and cooling air passes through a narrow space between the heat radiating plates to exchange heat (heat radiating). Therefore, the pressure loss of the cooling air is large. In other words, the air passage resistance is large.
Therefore, the cooling air passing through the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 is exhausted without entering the heating chamber 113 (the length of the air passage is also shortened), so that the internal path and the external path are balanced. Is. This is effective when the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 have the same performance. That is, as described in the first embodiment, in order to arrange the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 with exactly the same structure, the same shape, and the same rated specifications, and to realize the procurement cost at the time of manufacturing at a low cost. This is a promising plan.

Further, after cooling the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122, the internal path for the cooling air RF6 passing through the inside of the heating chamber 113 is abolished, and the entire amount of the cooling air RF7 after cooling the inverter circuit board 121 is used as it is. It may be discharged to the outside of the cooker 1 through the duct 307 to simplify the cooling air passage inside the lower unit 200. By reducing the air passage resistance, the rated ventilation capacity of the fourth cooling fan 129 can be changed to a lower level. This has advantages such as cost advantage.

In the case of a user who does not need both the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 at the same time as shown in the first to fifth embodiments, the sales of the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 and the installation work on the kitchen furniture 2 are separately performed. Become. Then, the lower unit 200 is set as an optional item, for example. In such a case, for example, if the packing form for selling the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 as a set and the packing form for selling only the upper unit 100 are set separately, the convenience at the time of sale is impaired. Never.

In the cooking cooker 1 of the present disclosure, as shown in the first to fifth embodiments, it is not essential that the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 are configured in separate housings. Therefore, the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 may be configured by one housing (main body case HC) from the beginning.

In the first to fifth embodiments, the upper case 16 and the lower case (lower housing) 101 are formed of a thin metal plate. However, either one or both of the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 may be formed of a plastic material. For example, it may be formed of a thermoplastic material. One material example is PET or PA, PP or ABS. "PET" refers to polyethylene terephthalate. Further, "PA" means polyamide and "PP" means polypropylene. It may be decided in consideration of the heat resistant temperature and the durability as a structure. Further, only a part of the upper case 16 and the lower case (lower housing) 101 may be made of plastic, and the remaining part may be made of a metal plate material.

As the induction heating circuit, various drive methods such as a half-bridge circuit and a full-bridge circuit may be adopted depending on the form and number of the IH coils 17L and 17R. For example, a full bridge circuit is proposed in Japanese Patent No. 6130411 and Japanese Patent No. 617h23.

Further, the IH coil is arranged not only in a donut-shaped form but also in an annular main heating coil and close to both sides of the main heating coil, as shown in, for example, Japanese Patent No. 5538546. An induction heating unit including a flat first sub-heating coil and a second sub-heating coil having a width dimension smaller than the radius of the main heating coil may be used.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the induction heating is started, the induction heating operation is started under the default conditions (thermal power value and thermal power level) without setting the thermal power, and then the heating start in which the user decides the desired thermal power. The operation method was adopted. However, other methods may be used. For example, after turning on the main power, be sure to determine the target induction heating source, the thermal power value (watt) and the thermal power level (one of the stages such as thermal power "large" to "small"), and then input the predetermined values. An operation method in which a start command is given by a key or the like may be adopted, and such a method does not affect the effect of the present disclosure and the essential effect.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32, the lower air passage during microwave heating cools the air passage (internal path) of the cooling air that cooled the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 and the inverter circuit board 121. There are two air passages (external paths) for the cooling air, and these two air passages are finally assembled in one exhaust duct 102 and then heated via the common exhaust port 20. It was released to the outside of the cooker 1.

However, it is not always necessary to pass through one (common) exhaust duct as such, and it is not necessary to collect the exhaust flow in one exhaust port 20. For example, an exhaust port 20 and a second exhaust port different from the exhaust port 20 are provided at different positions (positions directly below the exhaust cover 19), and cooling air from either the internal path or the external path is blown from the second exhaust port. It may be exhausted. In particular, in the form in which the rear portion of the upper unit 100 is partitioned back and forth by the partition plate 52 (Embodiment 1), it is preferable that the exhaust port faces the gap GP1 formed on the back side of the partition plate 52.

In the first to fifth embodiments, the operation key 98 of the main power switch 97 is arranged on the input operation unit 40 (including the operation key 98) exposed on the upper surface of the main body case HC, and is directed upward from the main body case HC. It was a form of operation from. The operation key 98 may be called an operation button, but it has basically the same structure.

However, the cooking device 1 of the present disclosure is not limited to the form of the input operation unit 40. For example, the input operation unit 40 does not need to be constantly exposed when viewed from above the main body case HC, and may be stored inside the main body case HC when not in use. As a storage form, a method of moving in the horizontal direction like a drawer and a method of rotating around one fulcrum have been conventionally known.

The method of rotating and storing is called an operation unit of the kangaroo pocket mechanism, and is proposed in, for example, JP-A-2004-28569, JP-A-2004-3845, JP-A-3-2h26 and the like. Has been done. Further, as the main power switch 97, a seesaw type switch as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-3845 may be used.

Even the input operation unit 40 that is rotated and stored can be operated from above (direction) of the main body case HC at the time of use. That is, since the user can power the main power source of the cooking cooker 1 while standing in the vicinity of the front of the cooking cooker 1, there is no problem in realizing the cooking cooker 1 of the present disclosure. In addition, the operability is good without forcing the user to take an unreasonable posture.
The input operation unit 40 that is rotated and stored in this way may be provided, for example, on the right front cover 112 described in the first embodiment.

In addition, a kangaroo pocket mechanism that includes a heating unit (gas burner, etc.) exposed (faced) on the top plate and a heating unit in the heating chamber (grill storage), and rotates and stores each operation unit. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-172941 also proposes a cooking device that employs the operation unit of the above.

In the first to fifth embodiments, the example in which the magnetron is used as the microwave generation source 122 has been described, but microwaves may be generated by other means. For example, as a cooking device using a semiconductor oscillator, it has been proposed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-509587, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 51-9562, and the like.

In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-509587, the microwave generator is composed of a small signal generator (s) configured to generate a high frequency signal at the first power level and the small signal generator. It includes a solid-state high-frequency signal amplifier (solid-state amplifier, one or more) that amplifies the high-frequency signal of the above. Then, the solid-state amplifier amplifies the first high-frequency signal having the first low power level into the second high-frequency signal having the second high power level, and supplies the first high-frequency signal to the heating chamber containing the food to be cooked (food). Was there.
In realizing the cooking cooker 1 of the present disclosure, a microwave generation source composed of such a semiconductor element may be used.

In the first embodiment, it has been explained that the operation of the lower (third and fourth) cooling fans 128 and 129 is performed independently of the heating operation by the induction heating source 9 of the upper unit 100. That is, it has been explained that when the induction heating source 9 is used, the lower (third and fourth) cooling fans 128 and 129 are not operated when the upper (first) cooling fan 60 for cooling is operated. However, this does not mean that the (first) cooling fan 60 and the lower (third and fourth) cooling fans 128 and 129 are not operated at the same time.

For example, as described in FIG. 37 of the first embodiment, all the cooling fans are set for a short time at the stage of checking for abnormalities at startup (see step ST2 of FIG. 37) before selecting the heating source to be used. It is also possible to adopt a method in which the integrated control device MC checks whether an abnormal current, voltage, etc. is generated on the circuit by performing a trial run only. In that case, each cooling fan 60, for a certain short time period, may be adopted. 61, 128, and 129 may be started all at once, or they may be started one by one for a short time. In this way, the intrinsic effect of the present disclosure is not impaired at all.

In the first embodiment, it was necessary for the user to select either the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL (FIG. 65, step STR5). That is, first, either the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL was selected by the input key 43M2.
However, the heating cooker 1 of the present disclosure does not necessarily require such a step of selecting the heating unit.

For example, Japanese Patent No. 6230712 and Japanese Patent Publication No. 2014-44852
A plurality of heating coils regularly arranged adjacent to each other below the top plate on which the object to be heated is placed, an inverter circuit that supplies a high-frequency current to the heating coils, and a heated coil directly above the heating coils. It is provided with an object to be heated determination unit for determining whether or not an object is placed, an input operation unit provided on the upper surface of the main body, and a control device.
Based on the result of the control device determining that the object to be heated is placed on the heating coil, the object to be heated is placed in the display area of the display screen. Display the number of icons corresponding to
The control device operates so that the cooking conditions for the first object to be heated can be input by detecting that the user touches the first icon corresponding to the first object to be heated. The induction heating cooker is disclosed.

Further, in Japanese Patent No. 522064,
A top plate on which an object to be heated such as a pot is placed, a plurality of induction heating coils dispersedly arranged below the top plate, a sensor for detecting the object to be heated, and a predetermined area near the top plate. It is provided with a band-shaped operation display means and a control means arranged continuously.
The control means identifies an occupied area on the top plate of the object to be heated based on the output of the sensor, and further drives the induction heating coil corresponding to the specified occupied area and the surrounding area. The region of the object to be heated is specified, the center position and size of the identified occupied region are estimated, and the operating means is displayed in the specific region of the operating display means based on the estimation result to enable the operating means. An induction heating cooker that can be accessed by an external operation is disclosed.

That is, instead of placing a heated object such as a pot at a specific position on the top plate for cooking, the heated object is placed relatively freely over a wide area on the top plate and the position of the heated portion is controlled. A technique has been proposed in which the device can detect and start cooking.

The above technique can also be applied to the cooking utensil 1 of the present disclosure. That is, as described in the first embodiment, it is not necessary to display the right heating unit selection mark 334R and the left heating unit selection mark 334L indicating that driving is permitted on the integrated control device MC side on the first specific screen 30SP. ..

Further, it is not necessary to first select either the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL by the input key 43M2, and the usability can be further improved.

Further, in the cooking utensils 1 of the first to fourth embodiments, a large number of input keys 43MC, 43M1 to 43M3, 43R1 to 43R4, 43L1 to 43L4, and the like are provided in the input operation unit 40 for multi-functionalization. Therefore, there is a concern that the intended operation cannot be easily performed by a user who is not accustomed to the operation.
Therefore, for users who do not want to use all the functions from the beginning, when a specific switch is operated, the display of the input key itself is turned off and the input function of the input key is invalidated, so that the number of input operation units 40 is reduced. It may be in a form that expects such a visual effect. It should be noted that a heating cooker that limits the functions that can be used according to the wishes of such a user has already been proposed by Japanese Patent Publication No. 2009-243771.

Further, either one of the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode may be set so as not to be used by the user's operation. In that case, the setting by the input key 43KP described in the first embodiment may be used, or it is preferable to provide an input key or a push button switch whose functions can be limited and expanded only by the user touching them.

Of each of the processes described in the embodiments, all or part of the processes described as being automatically performed can also be performed manually. It is also possible to automatically perform all or part of the processing described as being performed manually by a known method.

In the first to fifth embodiments, there are two induction heating units 17H, a left heating unit 17HL and a right heating unit 17HR, and the inverter circuits 81L and 81R are also arranged one by one corresponding to these two heating units. However, this may be changed to the following form.
(1) A method of coordinating and driving the IH coils of two adjacent heating parts when heating a large object to be heated that straddles two adjacent heating parts (as a typical example, Japanese patent). See No. 5188215).

(2) Four IH coils having substantially the same shape and size and wound in the same direction under the top plate 15 and arranged close to substantially the same plane under the top plate, and the above four. It includes two inverter circuits that supply electric power to the IH coils, divides the four IH coils into two coil groups (groups), and from the two inverter circuits to each of the two IH coil groups. Each method of supplying electric power (see Japanese Patent No. 5299590 as a typical example).

(3) A circular IH coil (central IH coil) arranged below the top plate 15 and (plural) auxiliary IH coils arranged so as to surround the circular IH coil. A method including a first inverter circuit that supplies power to the central IH coil and a second inverter circuit that supplies power to the auxiliary coil group (see, as a representative, Japanese Patent No. 5257542). ..

(4) A main IH coil for heating an object to be heated placed on a top plate, a group of sub-IH coils composed of a plurality of sub-IH coils installed adjacent to each other on the outside of the main IH coil, and a group of sub-IH coils. A main inverter circuit that supplies a high-frequency current to the main IH coil, a sub-inverter circuit group that independently supplies a high-frequency current to each of the sub-IH coils for each of the sub-IH coils, and the main IH coil and the plurality. Controls the output of the main inverter circuit and the sub-inverter circuit group, as well as the object to be heated determination unit that determines whether or not the same object to be heated is mounted on at least one of the sub IH coils of the above. A plurality of the sub IH coils are provided with an energization control circuit and a predetermined insulating space is provided around the main IH coil at a predetermined distance from each other. The side edge portion adjacent to the outer peripheral edge of the main IH coil has a curved shape along the outer peripheral edge of the main IH coil, and the energization control circuit has the main inverter so as to have a thermal power value set by the user. The output of the circuit and the output of the sub-inverter circuit group are controlled to a predetermined distribution to perform the cooperative heating operation, and then the number of the secondary IH coils that perform the cooperative heating operation is increased, decreased, or switched to another sub IH coil. In this case, a method for maintaining the output distribution before the change (as a representative, refer to Japanese Patent No. 5642168).

Further, each component of each circuit, component, and device shown in the figure is a functional concept, and does not necessarily have to be physically configured as shown in the figure. Further, in particular, the integrated control device MC, the microwave heating control unit 130, the heating chamber control unit 159, the display unit drive circuit 63, and the control device 105 described with reference to FIGS. The specific form is not limited to the one shown in the figure, and all or part of it may be functionally or physically distributed / integrated in any unit according to the function and operating conditions. Can be done.

Each function of the integrated control device MC and the IH control unit 90 is realized by a processing circuit. The processing circuit that realizes each function may be dedicated hardware or a processor that executes a program stored in the memory.

When the processing circuit is a processor, each function of the integrated control device MC and the IH control unit 90 is realized by software, firmware, or a combination of software and firmware. The software and firmware are described as programs and stored in the storage device MM which is a memory. The processor realizes each function of the integrated control device MC and the IH control unit 90 by reading and executing the program stored in the storage device MM.

These programs cause the microcomputer to execute the control procedure of the integrated control device MC and the IH control unit 90. The storage device MM is typically a non-volatile or volatile semiconductor memory such as a RAM, a ROM, a flash memory, an EPROM, or an EEPROM.

Further, a part of the data and the program of the storage device MM and the storage device 90R shown in FIG. 30 may be held in an external recording medium (storage server or the like) without being held by the cooking cooker 1. In this case, the cooking cooker 1 acquires necessary data and program information by accessing an external recording medium (storage server).

Further, in particular, the operation programs of the integrated control device MC, the microwave heating control unit 130, the heating chamber control unit 159, and the display unit drive circuit 63 described with reference to FIG. If desired, it may be possible to update it with an improved one as appropriate. In this case, for example, the patch may be obtained through the wireless communication unit 49.

One heating unit 17HL, 17HR of the induction heating source (first heating means) 9 for cooking on the top plate 15 may be changed to a gas combustion burner. In this case, the gas flow valve is controlled by the control unit.

In the first to fourth embodiments, the input operation unit 40, the left operation unit 40L, the cooperative operation unit 40MC, and the right operation unit 40R are all "contact type input" operation units in which the user touches an input key to give an input command. As explained in the above, a non-contact method may be used in which the movement of the user's finger or hand is detected and input in a non-contact manner. Further, the voice input method may be changed to recognize and input the user's voice. In the case of the voice input method, a microphone or a voice receiving unit for receiving a user's voice and converting it into a voice recognition signal corresponds to an input operation unit.

In the first to fifth embodiments, the input operation unit 40 is a means for selecting various control menus, control conditions, etc. displayed on the first specific screen 30SC, the second specific screen 30SP, and the third specific screen 30ST. , It may be provided in the display screen of the integrated display unit 30 which is a display means or the left and right display units 30L and 30R.

For example, in Japanese Patent No. 583369, which proposes compound cooking, a display screen for compound cooking is displayed, the name of the menu for compound cooking is displayed in the display screen, and the user selects the menu selection unit. A technique has been proposed in which a menu is selected by directly touching it with a finger.

Therefore, the menu of cooking and the name of the object to be cooked (a kind of identification information) that can be used in the combined cooking or the cooperative cooking mode are displayed on the first specific screen 30SC and the second specific screen 30SP, and the display portion (the display portion). The user may directly touch the "icon" part) with his / her finger to select the menu of the cooperative cooking mode or the like.

In the embodiment, the wireless communication unit 49 receives a command signal transmitted from the outside of the cooking cooker 1, and the cooking cooker 1 transmits each operation signal and command signals L1 to L10 to the outside. However, information indicating the progress such as the start and end of the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 may be further transmitted. The user can know the progress information on a portable terminal device or the like, and the convenience is improved (see the fourth embodiment).

Further, in the embodiment, the wireless communication unit 49 exchanges command signals, driving operation signals, etc. with the home gateway 411 inside the house HA, but it is also referred to as power line transfer technology (also referred to as “PLC technology”). ) May be used.

Further, in the first to third embodiments, the home gateway 411 having a function of receiving the search result data of the inventory information of the refrigerator 401 is used as the information management device, but as described in the fourth and fifth embodiments. In addition, a router may be installed inside the house HA, and the heating cooker 1 and the refrigerator 401 may be connected to the Internet (wide area communication circuit network) 416 via the router, respectively. In this case, the router connects to the server device via the Internet 416. Then, the server device may be in a form of storing and holding the inventory information of the refrigerator 401.

Further, the server device is made to hold recipe information of various cookings that can be used in the cooking device 1. Then, in response to a request from the cooking cooker 1 or the information / communication terminal device 418, the recipe information is searched and the extracted recipe information is provided to the cooking cooker 1 or the information / communication terminal device 418. You may.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The substantive scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of claims, not the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The cooking cooker and kitchen furniture according to the present invention can be widely used not only in the kitchen of a general house but also in a kitchen such as a public facility or a store.

1 Heat cooker 2 Kitchen furniture 2A Installation port 2B Front opening 2G Step 2P Top surface of mouth edge 2S Right side 3 Surface material 4 Surface material 5 Surface material 6 Surface material 7 Frame line 8 Wall 9 Induction heating source 10 Main body of upper unit 11 Partition member (partition wall)
12 Section board 13 Section board 14 Partition wall 15 Top plate 16 Upper case (upper housing)
16A Flange 16B Rear vertical wall 16BL Auxiliary exhaust hole 16BR Auxiliary exhaust hole 16BX Horizontal bend 16F Front vertical wall 16L Side vertical wall 16R Side vertical wall 16S Bottom wall (bottom wall surface)
17C coil base (coil support frame)
17CH arm 17CL coil wire 17H induction heating part 17HL left heating part 17HM center heating part 17HR right heating part 17L IH coil (induction heating coil)
17M IH coil (induction heating coil)
17R IH coil (induction heating coil)
18 Opening 19 Exhaust cover 20 Exhaust port 21 Decorative frame 22 Reinforcing plate 23 Right input control device 24 Left input control device 25 Decorative frame 26 Cushion material 27 Light emitting display 27L Light emitting display 27M Light emitting display 27R Light emitting display 27L1 to 27L4 Individual Light emitting unit 27M1 to 27M6 Individual light emitting unit 27R1 to 27R5 Individual light emitting unit 28 Power switch control device 29 Support plate 30 Integrated display unit (center display unit)
30A display text 30AD additional screen 30B display text 30C two-dimensional information 30D display screen 30E caution display 30F description text 30G caution text 30H recommended text 30J specific text 30K heating source display 30L 1st area 30M 2nd area 30MY microwave heating time information 30N Standby common information 30GY Grill cooking heating time information 30P Guidance information 30Q Text information (additional information)
30R 3rd area 30S Heating time information 30T Target temperature information 30V Output level information 30W Display window 30X Output value (watt value) information 30Y Candidate display unit
31L Left side display 31LW Display window 31R Right side display 31RW Display window 32 Central operation board 33 Rectifier circuit 34 Power supply circuit A
35 Rectifier circuit 36 Power supply circuit B
37L Drive circuit 37R Drive circuit 38 Exhaust window 39A Signal line 39B Signal line 40 Input operation unit 40L Left operation unit 40M Central operation unit 40R Right operation unit 41 Operation board
41L Left touch key board 41R Right touch key board 42 Input key 43L1 to 43L4 Input key 43M1 Input key 43M2 Input key 43M3 Input key 43KP Input key 43L1 to 43L4 Input key 43M1 to 43R3 Input key 43MC Input key 43MS Input key 43MT Input key 43R1 ~ 43R4 Input key 44L Input key 44R Input key 45L Input key 45M Input key 45R Input key 46L Window 46R Window 47 Input key 48 Infrared transmitter 49 Wireless communication unit (wireless communication module)
50 Holder 51 Screw 51F Screw 52 Partition plate 52A Exhaust window 52B Exhaust window 53L Exhaust port plate 53R Exhaust port plate 54 Filter circuit board 55 Power supply circuit board 56 Choke coil 57 Transformer 58 Condenser 59 Diode bridge circuit (diode module)
60 1st cooling fan (upper cooling fan)
60A outlet 60C fan case 60F rotary blade 60FL cooling air 60H suction port 60M motor 60P drive circuit 60T rotary shaft 61 second cooling fan 61A outlet 61C fan case 61F rotary blade 61M motor 61P drive circuit 62 cooling fan drive circuit 63 Drive circuit 64 Vent
64S Auxiliary ventilation hole 65 Right exhaust port 66 Magnetic shield ring 67L Thermal power display 67H Thermal insulation display 67R Thermal power display 68 Heat source display 68L Display 68M Display 68R Display 69 High temperature notification unit 70 Cover 70A Front notch 70B Wall 70E Extension 71 Support plate 72 Power control unit (demand control unit)
73 Signal transmission unit 74 Drive circuit 75 DC power supply circuit 75M DC power supply circuit 76 Resonant condenser 76m Resonant condenser 77a Input current detection unit 77am Input current detection unit 77b Output current detection unit 77bm Output current detection unit 78a Diode bridge 78am Diode bridge 78b Reactor 78bm Reactor 78c Smoothing Condenser 78cm Smoothing Condenser 79a IGBT
79am IGBT
79b IGBT
79bm IGBT
79c diode 79cm diode 79d diode 79dm diode 80 inverter circuit board 80F first inverter circuit board 80M second inverter circuit board 81 inverter circuit 81L inverter circuit (first inverter circuit)
81M inverter circuit (third inverter circuit)
81R Inverter circuit (second inverter circuit)
82 heat sink 82B heat sink (second heat sink)
82B1 heat sink (first heat sink at the rear)
82B2 heat sink (second heat sink at the rear)
82F heat sink (first heat sink)
82F1 heat sink (first heat sink in front)
82F2 heat sink (second heat sink in front)
82FN Heat sink 82M Heat sink 82MF Heat sink 82MF1 Heat sink 82MF2 Heat dissipation fin 83 Power control switching element 84 Vibration sensitive device 85 Electrical parts 86 Water receiving member 87 Outer case 87A Vent hole 87B Drain hole 88 Inner case 88A Vent hole 88B Hole 90 IH control unit 90M1 Microcomputer 90M2 Microcomputer 90R Storage device 91 Power supply circuit 92 DC power supply conversion unit 93 Temperature detection circuit 94L Inductive heating circuit 94R Inductive heating circuit 95 Voice synthesizer 95S Speaker 96 Clock circuit 97 Main power switch 98 Main power supply Switch operation buttons or operation keys 99 Commercial power supply (commercial AC power supply)
100 Upper unit 101 Lower case (lower housing)
101A Flange 101B Rear wall surface (rear vertical wall)
101C Inclined part 101F Front plate 101H Body 101U Bottom plate 101L Side vertical wall 101R Side vertical wall 101T Front horizontal wall 102 Exhaust duct 102A Internal passage 102B Internal passage 102E Termination part 104 Cavity 105 Control device 106 Power cord 106A Plug 108A Connection port (Connecting terminal)
108B connection port (connection terminal)
109A Output terminal part 109B Output terminal part 109C Output terminal part 110 Main body 111 Inclined part 112 Front cover 112P Mounting leg 113 Heating chamber 113A Opening 113B Back wall (rear wall surface)
113T Recess 114 Door 115 Handle 117 Through hole (guide hole)
118 Connecting member (reinforcing member)
119A Electric wire 119B Electric wire 120 Microwave heating device 120P Power supply circuit section 121 Inverter circuit board 121A Inverter circuit (drive circuit)
122 Magnetron (microwave source)
122A Oscillator 122H Heat dissipation 123 Waveguide 124 Antenna case 125 Antenna 126 Antenna drive motor 126A Rotating shaft 127 Power supply circuit board 128 Third cooling fan (lower cooling fan) (cooling fan A)
129 4th cooling fan (lower cooling fan) (cooling fan B)
130 Microwave heating control unit 131 Door open / close detection mechanism 132A Latch switch 132B Door switch 133 Monitor switch 134 pin 135 pin 136A Interlocking rod 136B Interlocking rod 137 Support plate 138A Communication port 138B Communication port 139 Closed detection unit 140 Oven heating device 141 Ceiling space)
142 space (side space)
145 saucer 150 case A
151 Case B
152B intake port (second intake port)
152F intake port (second intake port)
152S1 Auxiliary air intake 152S2 Auxiliary air intake 153 Duct 154 Case C
154A lid body 154B main body 158 non-contact temperature measurement unit (infrared temperature measurement unit)
159 Heating chamber control unit 160 Temperature sensor 161 Detection window 162 Cooking dish 163 Heater 163A Upper heater 163B Lower heater 164 Ventilation hole (first intake port)
165 recess (intake duct)
166L Left partition plate 166R Right partition plate 167 Upper heat shield plate 168 Lower heat shield plate 169 Upper case 170 Lower case 171 Partition plate 172 Passage 173 Communication port 174 Communication port 176 Hinge 178A Relay 178B Relay 180 Power supply port 18 Material 185 Radio sealing chamber 186 Screw 188 Oven heating source (heating chamber heating source)
189 Microwave heating source 190 frame 191 cover 192 inner frame 192W viewing window (opening)
193 Inner seal frame 194 Chalk chamber 195 Seal plate 196 Seal plate 197 Upper shield plate 199 Wind direction plate 200 Lower unit 201 Introductory port 226 Leg 264 Vent hole 300A Upper space 300B Lower space 301R Right side gap (third gap)
301L left gap (third gap)
302 Front gap (third gap)
303 Air gap 304 Support bracket 304V Vertical part 304H Horizontal part (flange part)
305 Ventilation hole 306 Communication window 307 Exhaust duct 308 Vertical part 309 Communication window 310 Spacer (cushion material)
311 Lower void (third void)
320 Exhaust port 326 Cushion material 330 Identification information 331 Additional information 332 Cooking process information (cooking process display)
333 Time saving information 334 Refrigerator display 335D symbol 335U symbol 337 Display guide 338 Recommended information (recommended cooking)
339 Individual food information 360 Icon 361 Menu display 362 Linked cooking mode display information 400 Home appliances 401 Refrigerator 402 Television receiver 403 Air conditioner 404 Air purifier 405 Ventilation device 406 Electric rice cooker (electric jar rice cooker)
408 Microwave oven 409 Lighting fixture 410 Kitchen 411 Home gateway 412 Main body case 413 Environmental detection unit 413A Sensor unit 413H Human detection unit 414 Electric energy meter 415 Power line (main trunk line)
416 Wide area communication network 417 External server 418 Information communication terminal equipment 420 Ceiling wall surface 422 Range hood 423 Exhaust port 424 Duct 425 Hood 425A Suction port 426 Electric fan 492 Blower fan 430 Filter 431 Air guide plate 432 Suction port 433 435 Communication unit 436 Vertical wall surface 440 Temperature monitoring device 441 Temperature detection unit 442 Communication unit 443 Temperature judgment circuit 444 Light receiving unit 445 Alarm device 446 Communication unit (transmitting unit / receiving unit)
447 Central control unit 448 Electric energy control unit 449 Input unit 450 Storage device 451 Schedule management unit 452 Human detection sensor 453 Environmental sensor 460 Transmitter and receiver 461 Communication control unit 462 Central processing unit (CPU)
463 ROM and RAM
464 Speaker 465 Operation unit
466 Display unit 467 Storage unit 468 Cooker database (storage unit)
469 Attitude detection unit 470 Remote operation information generation unit 471 Display operation unit 472 NFC input / output unit 473 Remote operation data 475 Voice input unit 480 Display screen 481 Display menu display unit 482 Menu selection display unit of left heating unit 483 Heating source selection display Section 484 Range grill control menu selection display section 485 Linked cooking menu display section 486 Preparation information display section 487 Linked cooking menu name display section 488 Left heating section control menu display section (icon)
489 Control menu display section (icon) of the left heating section
490 Attention information display unit 491M Central operation unit selection unit (icon)
491L Left operation unit selection unit (icon)
491R Right operation unit selection unit (icon)
492 Advice display selection section (icon)
493 Control menu display section (icon) of the left heating section
494 Range grill control menu display (icon)
495 Menu screen display (icon)
496 Input confirmation key display (icon)
497 Induction heating source selection section (icon)
498 Range grill heating source selection section (icon)
499 Linked cooking selection section (icon)
500 RG control menu selection (icon)
500C linked cooking menu selection section (icon)
501 screen switching mark (icon)
502 Screen switching mark (icon)
503 Screen switching mark (icon)
504 RG control menu name display (icon)
505 RG control menu temperature display (icon)
506 Reference image display unit 507A to 507C Auxiliary information display unit 509 Preparatory work reference image 510 Preparatory work reference image 511 Attention information 512 Auxiliary information 513 Process information display unit 514 Next process information display unit 515 Recommended menu display unit 516 Recommended Menu display 517 Auxiliary information on recommended menu 518 Cooking reference image on recommended menu 519 Candidate switching mark (icon)
520 Candidate switching mark (icon)
521 Transmission key display (icon)
522 Stop key display (icon)
523 Detailed display indicator (icon)
524 key display (icon)
525 Display section 526 Key display section (icon)
527 key display unit 528 display unit 259 key display unit (icon)
530 Router AH Upper air passage AL Top plate exposure range AN notification unit BL straight line (reference line)
BH depth dimension BT1 dedicated power supply (built-in battery)
CK IH coil installation space D5 Maximum front-rear dimension of upper case D6 Maximum width front-rear direction D7 Opposite spacing DP1 Depth (dimensions)
F1 1st air passage F2 2nd air passage FA1 ~ FA10 Reference information FG User's fingertip FI entrance FL1 outlet line FL2 outlet line FO exit GD1 step GP1 void GP2 void (first void)
GP5L gap GP5R gap GP6 gap GP7 gap GP8 gap GP9 gap GP10 gap GP11 gap GP12 gap (second gap)
GP13 Space between top plate and cover GP14 Space between first cooling fan GP16 Space GP17 Void GP18 Void HC Body case H1 Maximum height dimension H2 Height dimension H3 Height dimension H4 Height dimension H5 Height dimension H6 Height Dimension H7 Height Dimension H8 Height Dimension HA House HB Reference Bottom HP1 First Horizontal Plane HP2 Second Horizontal Plane HV Effective Height Dimension HX Maximum Height Dimension IP1 Touch Information (Input Operation Information)
IP2 input information IP3 selection value signal IP4 selection value signal IP5 image signal LA protruding dimension LD1 distance LD2 distance LF exhaust port size MC integrated control device MM storage device N heated object RF1 cooling air RF2 cooling air RF3 cooling air RF4 cooling air RF4L Wind RF4R Cooling air RF5 Cooling air RF6 Cooling air TR Transition period UH Lower air passage W1 Width dimension of installation port W2 Maximum width dimension of installation space W3 Maximum width dimension of cooker W4 Maximum width dimension in left and right direction W5 Maximum width dimension in left and right direction of upper case Significant dimensions W6 Length of inverter circuit board 80 W7 Width of inverter circuit board 80 W8 Maximum (width) dimensions in the left-right direction inside the upper case W9 Opposing distance between hanging walls 70B (dimensions of space in the front-rear direction)
W10 Distance W11 Caliber W12 Distance W13 Distance W14 Installation Interval WB Depth Dimension WH Inside Width Dimension (Frontage Dimension)
XB intersection XF intersection XG intersection.

Claims (39)

With a heating room
A microwave heating source that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber,
An oven heating source that heats the heating chamber and
An induction heating source that heats the object to be heated placed on the top plate,
A notification unit that notifies information about the cooking process,
It has an integrated control device that controls the microwave heating source, the oven heating source, the induction heating source, and the notification unit.
The integrated control device has a cooperative cooking mode in which the microwave heating source, the oven heating source, and the induction heating source are linked.
The cooperative cooking mode includes a cooking step 1 using the induction heating source and a cooking step 2 using at least one of the microwave heating source and the oven heating source.
The integrated control device automatically advances the cooking process 1, ends the cooking process 1 by a command from the user, and after the end, starts the cooking process 2 in response to the user's start command. The cooking process 2 is automatically advanced,
The integrated control device detects the degree of progress of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2, and in the middle of the cooking process 1, the first reference information regarding the cooking process 1 or the second reference information regarding the cooking process 2 At least one of the reference information is notified by the notification unit.
A complex type cooking cooker characterized by that. With a heating room
A microwave heating source that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber,
An oven heating source that heats the heating chamber and
An induction heating source that heats the object to be heated placed on the top plate,
A notification unit that notifies information about the cooking process,
It has an integrated control device that controls the microwave heating source, the oven heating source, the induction heating source, and the notification unit, respectively.
The integrated control device has a cooperative cooking mode in which the microwave heating source, the oven heating source, and the induction heating source are linked.
The cooperative cooking mode includes a cooking step 1 using at least one of the microwave heating source and the oven heating source, and a cooking step 2 using the induction heating source.
The integrated control device automatically advances the cooking process 1, ends the cooking process 1 by a command from the user, and after the end, starts the cooking process 2 in response to the user's start command. The cooking process 2 is automatically advanced,
The integrated control device detects the degree of progress of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2, and in the middle of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2, the first reference information regarding the cooking step 1 or the cooking step. At least one of the second reference information regarding No. 2 is notified by the notification unit.
A complex type cooking cooker characterized in that it is characterized in that. With a heating room
Induction heating sources that require a preheating process and
A microwave heating source that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber,
It has a notification unit that notifies information about the cooking process.
It has a cooperative cooking mode in which the induction heating source and the microwave heating source are switched and operated by the user's operation.
When the cooperative cooking mode is set, the cooking step 1 for heating the cooked object housed in the heating chamber and the cooked object placed on the top plate after the cooking step 1 is completed are placed on the cooked object. The cooking step 2 in which the object to be cooked is induced and heated by the induction heating source can be reserved.
When a reservation for cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is made,
(1) The induction heating source can be driven from before the cooking step 1 to start the preheating step.
(2) During the preheating step, the cooking step 1 using the microwave heating source can be started in the heating chamber.
(3) After stopping the driving of the microwave heating source and ending the cooking step 1, the cooking step 2 can be started on the object to be heated preheated by the induction heating source.
(4) In the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, the information indicating the progress of the cooking process is notified by the notification unit.
A complex type cooking cooker characterized by that. With a heating room
A microwave heating source that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber,
An oven heating source that heats the heating chamber and
An induction heating source that heats the object to be heated,
A notification unit that notifies information about the cooking process,
It has an integrated control device that controls the microwave heating source, the oven heating source, and the induction heating source, respectively.
The integrated control device is
(1) IH independent mode in which the induction heating source is operated independently (2) Range independent cooking mode in which the microwave heating source is operated independently (3) Oven independent cooking mode in which the oven heating source is operated independently (4) ) A cooperative cooking mode in which the microwave heating source and / or one of the oven heating source and the induction heating source are sequentially operated after a transition period in which the length is determined by a command from the user.
Has an operating program of
The cooperative cooking mode includes a first cooking step performed using the heating chamber before the transition period, and a second cooking step performed after the transition period in a place other than the heating chamber. Including
The integrated control device causes the notification unit to notify reference information regarding the second cooking process or information indicating that cooking different from cooking in the cooperative cooking mode can be performed in the heating chamber during the transition period. ,
A complex type cooking cooker characterized in that it is characterized in that. With a heating room
An induction heating source that heats the object to be heated,
A microwave heating source that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber,
An oven heating source that heats the heating chamber by a principle different from that of the microwave heating source,
Notification unit and
An integrated control device for controlling the induction heating source, the microwave heating source, the oven heating source, and the notification unit is provided.
The integrated control device includes cooking in a cooperative cooking mode in which a group composed of the microwave heating source and the oven heating source and the induction heating source are started to be driven with a time lag, and the microwave heating. It has a function to perform cooking in a combined cooking mode in which the source and the oven heating source are driven at the same time or at a time lag, or are automatically switched and driven.
The integrated control device includes a cooking step 1 that occupies the heating chamber and a cooking step 2 that is performed after the cooking step 1 in the cooperative cooking mode, and the heating is performed before the cooking step 1 is completed. The notification unit notifies that cooking different from the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode can be performed by using either one or both of the microwave heating source and the oven heating source in the room.
A complex type cooking cooker characterized by that. With a heating room
A microwave heating source that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber,
An oven heating source that heats the heating chamber and
An induction heating source that heats the object to be heated,
A transmitter / receiver that sends / receives information to / from an information processing device by wire or wirelessly,
Notification unit and
It has an integrated control device that controls the microwave heating source, the oven heating source, the induction heating source, the transmission / reception unit, and the notification unit, respectively.
The integrated control device has a cooperative cooking mode in which cooking is executed in cooperation with the microwave heating source, the oven heating source, and the induction heating source.
In the cooperative cooking mode, the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2 started in response to a command from the user after the completion of the cooking step 1 are executed.
The integrated control device acquires reference information related to cooking to which the cooperative cooking mode is applied from the information processing device via the transmission / reception unit.
A complex type cooking cooker characterized by that. With a heating room
A microwave heating source that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber,
An oven heating source that heats the heating chamber and
An induction heating source that heats the object to be heated,
A transmitter / receiver that sends / receives information to / from an information processing device by wire or wirelessly,
Notification unit and
It has an integrated control device that controls the microwave heating source, the oven heating source, the induction heating source, the transmission / reception unit, and the notification unit, respectively.
The integrated control device has a cooperative cooking mode in which the microwave heating source, the oven heating source, and the induction heating source are linked by a cooperative cooking program to execute cooking.
The cooperative cooking program defines a cooking step 1 and a cooking step 2 that is started in response to a user's command after a transition period in which cooking is not performed.
The integrated control device transmits cooking execution data related to cooking executed by applying the cooperative cooking mode to the information processing device via the transmission / reception unit.
A complex type cooking cooker characterized by that. The integrated control device measures the elapsed time or temperature rise from the start time of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2 in order to detect the progress of the cooking step 1 or the cooking step 2.
The composite cooking cooker according to any one of claims 1 to 3. The composite type cooking cooker according to claim 3, further comprising an oven heating source for heating the heating chamber. It also has an input operation unit that accepts user input commands.
The input operation unit has
(1) Means for selecting an IH independent cooking mode in which the induction heating source is operated alone (2) Means for selecting a range independent cooking mode in which the microwave heating source is operated independently (3) The oven heating source is operated independently. Means for selecting an oven-single cooking mode (4) Means for selecting a combined cooking mode in which both the microwave heating source and the oven heating source are automatically switched to operate at the same time or with a time lag (5) Selection of the cooperative cooking mode The composite cooking cooker according to any one of claims 1, 2, 4, 6, 7 and 9, wherein the means is provided. The integrated control device further includes a combined cooking mode in which the microwave heating source and the oven heating source are operated at the same time or automatically switched to operate.
The composite cooking cooker according to any one of claims 1, 2, 4, 6, 7 and 9. The input operation unit includes a dedicated operation unit for the induction heating source, and a common operation unit for the induction heating source, the microwave heating source, and the oven heating source.
The shared operation unit includes a first selection means for selecting the cooperative cooking mode and a second selection means for selecting the combined cooking mode.
When the input operation of the first selection means is started before the second selection means, the first specific screen for input regarding cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is displayed.
10. The second specific screen for input regarding cooking in the combined cooking mode is displayed when the input operation of the second selection means is started before the first selection means. The composite type cooker described in. In the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2, at least one of the microwave heating source, the oven heating source, and the induction heating source is automatically determined by the integrated control device.
The composite cooking cooker according to claim 10. The end of the cooking step 1 using the induction heating source and the end of the cooking step 2 are determined by an input operation to the dedicated operation unit.
The composite cooking cooker according to claim 12. In the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2, at least one of the microwave heating source, the oven heating source, and the induction heating source is determined by the user operating the input operation unit.
The composite cooking cooker according to claim 10. The notification unit has an integrated display unit that performs a display operation during the execution period of the cooperative cooking mode.
The composite cooking cooker according to claim 10. The integrated control device receives a command from the selection means of the cooperative cooking mode, and causes the integrated display unit to perform a display operation corresponding to the cooperative cooking mode.
The composite cooking cooker according to claim 16. The integrated display unit displays a first specific screen displayed when the cooperative cooking mode is selected and a second specific screen displayed when the combined cooking mode is selected.
The composite cooking cooker according to claim 17. The cooperative cooking mode is executed by displaying identification information that identifies one of a plurality of dishes in a certain order on the first specific screen and selecting the identification information by the input operation unit. The composite cooker according to claim 18, wherein the cooker to be cooked is selected. The combined cooking mode is divided by a method of driving the microwave heating source and the oven heating source.
The composite cooking cooker according to claim 18, wherein information for specifying the method is displayed on the second specific screen. It also has a main body case that constitutes the outer shell of the cooking cooker.
The inside of the main body case is divided into an upper space accommodating the induction heating source and a lower space accommodating the microwave heating source and the oven heating source.
The upper space has an upper cooling fan that introduces outside air for cooling from a ventilation hole communicating with the outside of the lower space.
The lower space houses a lower cooling fan that introduces outside air for cooling from the outside without passing through the upper space.
The composite cooking cooker according to any one of claims 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 9. The main body case is composed of a metal upper case whose inside is the upper space, and a metal lower case in which the upper case is fitted to the upper surface opening.
The combined heating cooker according to claim 21, wherein the integrated control device and the notification unit are housed in the upper case. The ventilation holes into which the upper cooling fan introduces outside air and the ventilation holes into which the lower cooling fan introduces outside air are arranged on opposite sides of the heating chamber.
21. The composite cooking cooker according to claim 21. In the upper space, a power supply circuit board that supplies electric power to each of the induction heating source, the microwave heating source, and the oven heating source, and a filter circuit board that receives electric power from a commercial power source, respectively. Containing,
21. The composite cooking cooker according to claim 21. The reference information acquired by the integrated control device via the transmission / reception unit is information on ingredients that can be cooked.
The composite cooking cooker according to claim 6. The integrated control device stores the reference information in the storage unit until the cooking of one of the cooperative cooking modes is completed.
The composite cooking cooker according to claim 6. The information on the ingredients is information held by the refrigerator or freezer.
25. The composite cooking cooker according to claim 25. The information on the foodstuff includes information on the refrigerating temperature or the freezing temperature of the foodstuff.
The composite cooking cooker according to claim 27. Before the start of the cooking step 1, the integrated control device transmits a signal requesting the provision of the reference information from the transmission / reception unit to the information processing device.
The composite cooking cooker according to claim 6. Before the start of the cooking step 1, the integrated control device transmits a signal requesting the provision of the reference information from the transmission / reception unit to the information processing device, and requests the provision of the reference information. Notify by the notification unit,
The composite cooking cooker according to claim 6. The integrated control device stores the cooking execution data storage device in the cooking execution data storage device after the completion of the cooking step 2.
The composite cooking cooker according to claim 7. The cooking execution data is transmitted after the completion of the cooking step 2, and the cooking execution data includes at least one or more of the following information.
The composite cooking cooker according to claim 7.
(1) Information indicating the name of the object to be cooked (2) Information regarding the weight or volume of the object to be cooked (3) Information indicating the control conditions of the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2 (4) The cooking steps 1 to the above Information indicating the time required to complete the cooking process 2 (5) Information indicating the end time of the cooking process 2 (6) Information indicating the heating source in which the cooking operation was performed (7) The user at the time of the next cooking Information on restrictions received (8) Temperature information on hot parts related to user safety The integrated control device stores information on the time required until the cooking is completed in the storage device after the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is completed.
The composite cooking cooker according to claim 7. Induction heating sources that require a preheating process and
A microwave heating source that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber,
Input operation unit and
Notification unit and
It has an integrated control device that controls the induction heating source, the microwave heating source, and the notification unit.
The operation program of the integrated control device has a cooperative cooking mode in which the induction heating source and the microwave heating source are operated in response to a command from a user in the input operation unit.
The input operation unit has a first operation unit and a second operation unit.
The first operation unit sets the cooperative cooking mode.
The second operation unit determines the start and end of the preheating step by the induction heating source and the cooking step.
When the cooperative cooking mode is set, the cooking step 1 in which the cooked object is heated by the microwave heating source and the cooked object placed on the top plate after the cooking step 1 is completed are placed on the cooked object. The cooking step 2 in which the object to be cooked is heated by the induction heating source can be reserved.
When a reservation for cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is made,
(1) The induction heating source can be driven from before the cooking step 1 to start the preheating step.
(2) During the preheating step, the cooking step 1 can be started and ended in the heating chamber by the first operating unit.
(3) After the cooking step 1 is completed, the cooking step 2 can be started on the object to be heated preheated in the preheating step.
(4) In the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, information indicating the progress of the cooking process is notified from the notification unit.
A complex type cooking cooker characterized by that. An oven heating source for heating the heating chamber is further provided.
The input operation unit has
(1) IH independent cooking mode selection means for operating the induction heating source independently (2) Range independent cooking mode selection means for operating the microwave heating source independently (3) Operating the oven heating source independently Means for selecting an oven-single cooking mode to be operated (4) Means for selecting a combined cooking mode in which both the microwave heating source and the oven heating source are automatically switched to operate at the same time or with a time lag (5) The composite cooking cooker according to claim 34, which is provided with a selection means. The composite type cooking cooker according to any one of claims 1 to 7 and 34 is installed in the installation port having an installation port on the upper surface.
Kitchen furniture that is characterized by that. It is executed by a control computer that controls a first heating source and a second heating source of the cooking cooker.
Step 1 to activate the display means when the power is turned on,
Step 2 of displaying the standby common information on the display means,
Step 3 of determining one cooking mode selected by the user among the single cooking mode, the combined cooking mode, and the cooperative cooking mode, and
In step 3, when it is determined that the cooperative cooking mode is selected, the first specific screen is displayed, and when it is determined that the combined cooking mode is selected, the second specific screen is displayed and the single unit is displayed. If it is determined that the cooking mode has been selected, step 4 to display the third specific screen and
(1) When the first specific screen is displayed and a cooking start command signal is received, the heating operation of the cooperative cooking mode is started.
(2) When the second specific screen is displayed and a cooking start command signal is received, the heating operation in the combined cooking mode is started.
(3) When the cooking start command signal is received when the third specific screen is displayed, the heating operation in the independent cooking mode is started.
In the cooperative cooking mode, reference information regarding the cooking process is notified according to the progress of the cooking process.
A program for controlling a combined cooking cooker. Three heating sources with different heating principles, a first cooking device with a communication function, and
A refrigerator that has a storage room that can refrigerate or freeze ingredients and has a communication function.
An information processing device capable of communicating with each other between the first cooking device and the refrigerator is provided.
The information processing device sequentially performs the following processes 1 and 2.
An operation management system for home appliances.
(Processing 1) Among the foodstuffs stored in the refrigerator, at least information on the foodstuffs stored frozen is collected from the refrigerator and stored in the storage device.
(Process 2) When a request for providing the food material information is received from the first cooking device, the food material information stored in the storage device is transmitted to the first cooking device. The information processing device detects that there is a person in the space where the first cooking device and the refrigerator are installed, and obtains activation information of the first cooking device. When received, a command to provide inventory data to the refrigerator is sent.
38. The operation management system for home appliances according to claim 38.

Images